Patran 2008 r2 Interface To MSC Nastran Preference Guide Volume 1: Structural Analysis

Corporate Europe Asia Pacific MSC.Software CorporationMSC.Software GmbH MSC.Software Japan Ltd. 2 MacArthur Place Am Moosfeld 13 Shinjuku First West 8FSanta Ana, CA 92707 USA 8 1829 Munich, Germany23-7 Nishi ShinjukuTelephone: (800) 345-2078Telephone: (49) (89) 43 19 87 01-Chome, Shinjuku-Ku Fax: (714) 784-4056 Fax: (49) (89) 43 61 71 6 Tokyo 160-0023, JAPAN Telephone: (81) (3)-6911-1200 Fax: (81) (3)-6911-1201 Worldwide Web www.mscsoftware.com Disclaimer This documentation, as well as the software described in it, is furnished under license and may be used only in accordance with the terms of such license. MSC.Software Corporation reserves the right to make changes in specifications an d other information contained in this document without prior notice. The concepts, methods, and examples presented in this text are for illustrative and educational purposes only, and are not intended to be exhaustive or to apply to any particular engineering problem or d esign. MSC.Software Corporation assumes no liability or responsibility to any person or company for direct or indirect dama ges resulting from the use of any information contained herein. User Documentation: Copyright .2009 MSC.Software Corporation. Printed in U.S.A. All Rights Reserved. This notice shall be marked on any reproduction of this documentation, in whole or in part. Any reproduction or distribution of this document, in whole or in part, without the prior written consent of MSC.Software Corporation is prohibited. The software described herein may contain certain third-party software that is p rotected by copyright and licensed from MSC.Software suppliers. Contains IBM XL Fortran for AIX V8.1, Runtime Modules, ( c) Copyright IBM Corporation 1990-2002, All Rights Reserved. MSC, MSC/, MSC Nastran, MD Nastran, MSC Fatigue, Marc, Patran, Dytran, and Lamin ate Modeler are trademarks or registered trademarks of MSC.Software Corporation in the United States and/or other countri es.

NASTRAN is a registered trademark of NASA. PAM-CRASH is a trademark or registere d trademark of ESI Group. SAMCEF is a trademark or registered trademark of Samtech SA. LS-DYNA is a trademark or reg istered trademark of Livermore Software Technology Corporation. ANSYS is a registered trademark of SAS IP, Inc., a wholl y owned subsidiary of ANSYS Inc. ACIS is a registered trademark of Spatial Technology, Inc. ABAQUS, and CATIA are registere d trademark of Dassault Systemes, SA. EUCLID is a registered trademark of Matra Datavision Corporation. FLEXlm is a re gistered trademark of Macrovision Corporation. HPGL is a trademark of Hewlett Packard. PostScript is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems, Inc. PTC, CADDS and Pro/ENGINEER are trademarks or registered trademarks of Parametric Technolog y Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and/or other countries. Unigraphics, Parasolid and I-DEAS are regi stered trademarks of UGS Corp. a Siemens Group Company. All other brand names, product names or trademarks belong to thei r respective owners. P3*2008R2*Z*INT-NA*Z* DC-USR

Contents Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide 1 Overview Purpose 2 Using Patran with SOL 700 2 MD Nastran Product Information 3 2 Building A Model Introduction to Building a Model 6 Currently Supported MD Nastran Input Options 8 MD Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600) 14 MD Nastran Explicit Nonlinear (SOL 700) 15 Materials 15 Loads and Boundary Conditions 17 Elements and Properties 17 Solution Controls 17 Adaptive (p-Element) Analysis with the Patran MD Nastran Preference 18 Element Creation 18 Element and p-Formulation Properties 19 Loads and Boundary Conditions 19 Analysis Definition 20 Results Import and Postprocessing 20 Potential Pitfalls 21 Adaptive Analysis of Existing Models 21 Coordinate Frames 22 Finite Elements 23 Nodes 23 Elements 24 Multi-point Constraints 27 MPC Types 28 Degrees of Freedom 31 Superelements 56

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Select Boundary Nodes 58 Material Library 59 Materials Application Form 59 Material Input Properties Form 61 Material Constitutive Models 62 Linear Elastic 73 Nonlinear Elastic 74 Hyperelastic 75 Elastoplastic 78 Failure 81 Failure 1, Failure 2, Failure 3 82 Creep 84 Viscoelastic 85 Composite 85 Element Properties 87 Element Properties Form 87 Coupled Point Mass (CONM1) 91 Grounded Scalar Mass (CMASS1) 93 Lumped Point Mass (CONM2) 94 Grounded Scalar Spring (CELAS1/CELAS1D) 96 Grounded Scalar Damper (CDAMP1/CDAMP1D) 98 Bush 99 General Section Beam (CBAR) 102 P-Formulation General Beam (CBEAM) 107 Curved General Section Beam (CBEND) 110 Curved Pipe Section Beam (CBEND) 113 Lumped Area Beam (CBEAM/PBCOMP) 115 Tapered Beam (CBEAM) 119 General Section Beam (CBEAM) 124 General Section Rod (CROD) 131 General Section Rod (CONROD) 134 Pipe Section Rod (CTUBE) 136 Scalar Spring (CELAS1/CELAS1D) 137 Scalar Damper (CDAMP1/CDAMP1D) 139 Viscous Damper (CVISC) 141 Gap (CGAP) 142 Scalar Mass (CMASS1) 144 PLOTEL 146 (Scalar) Bush 146 Spot Weld Connector (CWELD) 150 Fastener Connector (CFAST) 152 Standard Homogeneous Plate (CQUAD4) 155 Revised Homogeneous Plate (CQUADR) 158

CONTENTS P-Formulation Homogeneous Plate (CQUAD4) 161 Standard Laminate Plate (CQUAD4/PCOMP) 163 Revised Laminate Plate (CQUADR/PCOMP) 166 Standard Equivalent Section Plate (CQUAD4) 168 Revised Equivalent Section Plate (CQUADR) 171 P-Formulation Equivalent Section Plate (CQUAD4) 174 Field Point Mesh (CQUAD4/TRIA3)(Exterior Acoustics) 177 Standard Bending Panel (CQUAD4) 179 Revised Bending Panel (CQUADR) 181 P-Formulation Bending Panel (CQUAD4) 183 Standard Axisymmetric Solid (CTRIAX6) 186 PLPLANE Axisymmetric Solid (CTRIAX, CQUADX) 187 2D Axi-Symmetric Laminated Solid Composite 188 Standard Plane Strain Solid (CQUAD4) 190 Revised Plane Strain Solid (CQUADR) 191 P-Formulation Plane Strain Solid (CQUAD4) 193 Infinite (Exterior Acoustic Element)(CACINF3/CACINF4) 195 2D Plane Strain Laminated Solid Composite 196 Standard Membrane (CQUAD4) 197 Revised Membrane (CQUADR) 199 P-Formulation Membrane (CQUAD4) 201 Shear Panel (CSHEAR) 204 Solid (CHEXA) 206 P-Formulation Solid (CHEXA) 209 Hyperelastic Plane Strain Solid (CQUAD4) 211 Hyperelastic Axisym Solid (CTRIAX6) 212 Hyperelastic Solid (CHEXA) 214 3D Laminate Solid (CHEXA) 215 Beam Modeling 217 Cross Section Definition 217 Create Action 217 Supplied Functions 219 Cross Section Orientation 220 Cross Section End Offsets 222 Stiffened Cylinder Example 222 Loads and Boundary Conditions 224 Loads & Boundary Conditions Form 224 Object Tables 231 Preview Rigid Body Motion 239 Slideline (SOL 400 and SOL 600) 240 Deformable Body (SOL 400, SOL 600, and SOL 700 ) 241 Select Discontinuities Subform 241

iv Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Edge Contact Subform 242 Select Contact Area 242 Select Exclusion Region 242 Select Deactivation Region 242 Rigid Body (SOL 600 and SOL 700 only) 243 Load Cases 246 Defining Contact Regions 247 Contact 249 Rotor Dynamics 250 Rotor Dynamics Form 251 Spin Profile Form 252 Spin History Form 252 Unbalance Form 253 Unbalance Properties Form 255 3 Running an Analysis Review of the Analysis Form 260 Analysis Form 261 Overview of Analysis Job Definition and Submittal 263 Translation Parameters 265 External Superelement Specifications 268 Numbering Options 268 Select File 270 Solution Types 271 Direct Text Input 276 Solution Parameters 277 Linear Static 277 Nonlinear Static 279 Normal Modes 282 Buckling 287 Complex Eigenvalue 291 Frequency Response 296 Transient Response 299

Nonlinear Transient 302 Implicit Nonlinear 304 Solver Options Subform (SOL 600) 306 Contact Parameters Subform 307

CONTENTS Restart Parameters Subform 315 Advanced Job Control Subform (SOL 600) 317 Domain Decomposition 318 DDAM 321 DDAM in Patran 322 Explicit Nonlinear 326 Sol700 Parameters Subform 327 Hourglass Setting Subform 329 Merge Rigid Material Subform 331 Dynamic Relaxation for Restart Subform 333 Damping Per Property Subform 335 Rigid Body Switch and Merge Subform 337 Define Set of Parts to be Switched Subform 340 Define Inertial Properties of Rigid Body Subform 342 Eulerian Parameters Subform 343 SPH Control Parameters Subform 346 Results Output Format 348 ADAMS Preparation 350 Select Superelements 352 Subcases 354 Deleting Subcases 355 Editing Subcases 356 Subcase Parameters 357 Linear Static Subcase Parameters 358 Nonlinear Static Subcase Parameters 359 Arc-Length Method Parameters 361 Nonlinear Transient Subcase Parameters 362 Normal Modes Subcase Parameters 364 Complex Eigenvalue Subcase Parameters 366 Transient Response Subcase Parameters 367 Frequency Response Subcase Parameters 370 Implicit Nonlinear Subcase Parameters 375 Static Subcase Parameters for Implicit Nonlinear Solution Type 376 Implicit Nonlinear Normal Modes Subcase Parameters 377 Implicit Nonlinear Buckling Subcase Parameters 377 Implicit Nonlinear Transient Dynamic Subcase Parameters 378 Implicit Nonlinear Creep Subcase Parameters 380 Implicit Nonlinear Body Approach Subcase Parameters 381 Implicit Nonlinear Complex Eigenvalue Subcase Parameters 382 Load Increment Parameters 383 Iteration Parameters 391 Contact Table 396

vi Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Breaking Glue Parameters Subform 400 Edge Contact Subform 401 402 Active/Deactive Elements 402 Break Squeal Parameters 403 Solvers/Options 404 DDAM Subcase Parameters 407 Explicit Nonlinear Subcase Parameters 409 Contact Table 411 Additional Contact Data 412 Adaptive Mesh Post-Processing 413 Additional Information 413 Output Requests 415 Basic Output Requests 416 Advanced Output Requests 417 Edit Output Requests Form 426 Default Output Request Information 428 Subcases Direct Text Input 432 SOL 600 Output Requests 433 DDAM Output Requests 439 Mode by Mode Output 440 Select Explicit MPCs... 444 Non-Structural Mass Properties 445 Select NSM Properties... 450 Subcase Select 452 Restart Parameters 455 Optimize 463 Optimization Parameters 467 Subcases 471 Subcase Parameters 474 Subcase Select Optimize 475 Customized Solutions (Topology Optimization) 476 Design Domain 479 Objectives & Constraints 479 Optimization Control 479 Postprocessing 479 Interactive Analysis 480 Assumptions 480

CONTENTS Scenario 1 480 Scenario 2 480 The Process 481 Miscellaneous 481 Analysis Form 482 Select Modal Results .DBALL 484 Loading Form 484 Create a Field Form 488 Output Selection Form 489 Define Frequencies Form 490 Read Results Accessing Results 492 Results File Formats 493 Output2 Formats 493 XDB Formats 493 MASTER Formats 494 T16/T19 Formats 495 3dplot Formats 495 Translation Parameters 496 OUTPUT2 496 Defining Translation Parameters for DDAM (SOL 187) 497 XDB 498 MASTER 499 T16/T19 501 Supported OUTPUT2 Result and Model Quantities 502 Results 502 Global Variables 508 Coordinate Systems 509 Projected Global System 509 XY Plots 509 Model Data 510 Supported T16/T19 Results Quantities 511 Supported MSC.Access Result Quantities 516 Nodal Results 516 Elemental Results 523 Supported 3dplot Results Quantities 543

viii Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide 5 Read Input File Review of Read Input File Form 546 Read Input File Form 547 Entity Selection Form 548 Define Offsets Form 550 Selection of Input File 551 Summary Data Form 551 Reject Card Form 553 Data Translated from the NASTRAN Input File 554 Partial Decks 554 Coordinate Systems 554 Referential Integrity 554 Chaining 555 Grids and SPOINTs 555 SPOINTs 555 Referential Integrity 555 Elements and Element Properties 555 PSHELL Properties 559 BAROR and BEAMOR Definitions 559 Fields 559 Referential Integrity 559 Set Name Extensions 559 Materials 560 MPCs 561 Load Sets 562 Fields 563 TABLES 564 Conflict Resolution 565 Conflict Resolution for Entities Identified by IDs 565 Conflict Resolution for Entities Identified by Names 565 6 Delete Review of Delete Form 568 Deleting an MD Nastran Job 569 7 Files Files 572

CONTENTS Errors/Warnings Errors/Warnings 576 A Preference Configuration and Implementation Software Components in Patran MD Nastran 578 Patran MD Nastran Preference Components 579 Configuring the Patran MD Nastran Execute File 582 Index 583

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Overview 1 Purpose 2 MD Nastran Product Information

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Purpose 1.1 Purpose Patran is an analysis software system developed and maintained by MSC.Software C orporation. The core of the system is a finite element analysis pre and postprocessor. Several option al products are available including; advanced postprocessing programs, tightly coupled solvers, and interf aces to third party solvers. This document describes one of these interfaces. The Patran MD Nastran interface provides a communication link between Patran and MD Nastran. It also provides for the customization of certain features in Patran. The interface is a fully integrated part of the Patran system. Selecting MD Nastran as the analysis code preference in Patran, activates the cu stomization process. These customizations ensure that sufficient and appropriate data is generated fo r the Patran MD Nastran interface. Specifically, the Patran forms in these main areas are modified: Materials Element Properties Finite Elements/MPCs and Meshing Loads and Boundary Conditions Analysis Forms More information on these topics is contained in Preference Configuration and Im plementation (App. A). Using Patran with SOL 700 The amount of information that needs to be conveyed in the MD Nastran Input file for a SOL 700 analysis is extensive for even a modest size model. The amount of information and the com plexity of most models makes it virtually impossible to generate the MD Nastran Input file with a text editor alone. Patran provides a graphical user interface, an extensive line of model building tools t hat you can use to construct and view your SOL 700 model, and generate a MD Nastran Input file for SOL 700. When using Patran as a preprocessor for SOL 700, you are required to specify an analysis code. Selecting MD Nastran Explicit Nonlinear (SOL 700) as the analysis code under the Analysis Preference menu, customizes Patran in five main areas: Material Library Element Library Loads and Boundary Conditions MPCs Analysis forms The analysis preference also specifies that the model information be output in t he MD Nastran Input File format.

Chapter 1: Overview MD Nastran Product Information 1.2 MD Nastran Product Information MD Nastran is a general-purpose finite element computer program for engineering analyses. It is developed, supported, and maintained by MSC.Software Corporation, 2 MacArthur Pl ace, Santa Ana, California 92707, (714) 540-8900. See the MD Nastran Reference Manual, Volume 1, for a general description of MD Nastran s capabilities.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide MD Nastran Product Information

Building A Model 2 Introduction to Building a Model 6 Currently Supported MD Nastran Input Options 8 Adaptive (p-Element) Analysis with the Patran MD Nastran Preference 18 Coordinate Frames 22 Finite Elements 23 Material Library 59 Element Properties 87 Beam Modeling 217 Loads and Boundary Conditions 224 Load Cases 246 Defining Contact Regions 247 Rotor Dynamics 250

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Introduction to Building a Model 2.1 Introduction to Building a Model There are many aspects to building a finite element analysis model. In several c ases, the forms used to create the finite element data are dependent on the selected analysis code and a nalysis type. Other parts of the model are created using standard forms. The Analysis option on the Preferences menu brings up a form where the user can select the analysis code (e.g., MD Nastran) and analysis type (e.g., Structural). The analysis code may be changed at any time during model creation.This is espec ially useful if the model is to be used for different analyses in different analysis codes. As much data as possible will be converted if the analysis code is changed after the modeling process has begun. The analysis option defines what will be presented to the user in several areas during the subsequen t modeling steps. These areas include the material and element libraries, including multi-point co nstraints, the applicable loads and boundary conditions, and the analysis forms. The selected Analysis Typ e may also affect the

Chapter 2: Building A Model Introduction to Building a Model allowable selections in these same areas. For more details, see The Analysis For m (Ch. 2) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual. To use the Patran MD Nastran Applicationshould be set to MD Nastran. The currently supported Analysis Type foNastran are Structural, Thermal and Expl Indicates the file suffixes used in creatingMD Nastran input and output files.

8 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Currently Supported MD Nastran Input Options 2.2 Currently Supported MD Nastran Input Options The following tables summarize all the various MD Nastran commands supported by the Patran MD Nastran Application Preference. The tables indicate where to find more informati on in this manual on how the commands are supported.

Chapter 2: Building A Model Currently Supported MD Nastran Input Options Supported MD Nastran File Management Commands Table 2-1. Description ASSIGN An ASSIGN command is used to assign a particular name (job name + user sp ecified MD Nastran results suffix) to the MD Nastran OUTPUT2 file to be created during the analysis. Supported MD Nastran Executive Control Commands Table 2-2. Pages ECHO 230, 233, 235, 241, 245, 250, 253, 256 SOL 225 TIME 230, 233, 235, 241, 245, 250, 253, 256 Supported MD Nastran Case Control Commands Table 2-3. ACCELERATION 250, 253 ACFPMRESULTS 369 ACPOWER 369 ADACT 17, 314 ADAPT 16, 170 DATAREC 17 DISPLACEMENT 230, 241, 250, 253 ELSDCON 230 ESE 230 FORCE 230, 235, 241, 248, 250, 253 FREQUENCY 250 GPSTRESS 369 INTENSITY 369 MAXLINES 230, 233, 235, 241, 245, 250, 253, 256 MPCFORCES 369 OLOAD 230, 241, 250, 253 SPCFORCES 230, 235, 241, 248, 250, 253 STRAIN 230, 235, 241, 248, 250, 253 Supported MD Nastran Bulk Data Entries

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Currently Supported MD Nastran Input Options Command Pages ADAPT 16, 170, 225, 233 BEGIN AFPM 147 BEGIN SUPER 219 BCONP 212 BFRIC 212 BFRIC 212 CACINF3 160 CACINF4 160 CBARAO 86 CBAR 86 CBEAM 97, 100 CBEND 93, 95 CDAMP1 82 CDAMP2 219, 438 CELAS1 81 CELAS2 219, 438 CGAP 116 CHEXA 168 CMASS1 119 CMASS2 219, 438 CONM1 76 CONM2 79 CONROD 111 CPENTA 168 CQUAD4 124, 140, 148, 156, 162 CQUAD8 124, 140, 148, 156, 162 CQUADR 131, 142, 150, 157, 163 CROD 110 CSHEAR 166 CTETRA 168 CTRIAX6 153

Chapter 2: Building A Model Currently Supported MD Nastran Input Options CTUBE 112 CVISC 115 DCONST 416 DOPTPRM 411, 416 DPHASE 188, 190 DRESP1/2 416 DTI, SETREE 309 DYNRED 240 EIGB 243, 238 EIGC 248 EIGR 238 EIGRL 238 EXTSEOUT 222 FEFACE 15 FEEDGE 15 FORCE 190 FREQ1 250 GMBC 188 GRAV 196 MOMENT 190 MAT1 424 MAT2 424 MAT3 424 MAT8 424 MAT9 424 MPC 28 NLPARM 315 OUTPUT 17, 369 PACINF 160 PARAM, AUTOSPC 230, 233, 235, 241, 245, 250, 253, 256 PARAM, INREL 230 PARAM, ALTRED 230

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Currently Supported MD Nastran Input Options PARAM, COUPMASS 230, 233, 235, 241, 245, 250, 253, 256 PARAM, K6ROT 230, 233, 235, 241, 245, 250, 253, 256 PARAM, WTMASS 230, 233, 235, 241, 245, 250, 253, 256 PARAM, GRDPNT 230, 233, 235, 241, 245, 250, 253, 256 PARAM, LGDISP 233, 256 PARAM,G 245, 250, 253, 256 PARAM,W3 253, 256 PARAM,W4 253, 256 PARAM, POST 219 PBAR 86 PBCOMP 97 PBEAM 100 PBEAM71 PBEAMD PBELTD PBEND 93, 95 PCOMP 136, 139 PDAMP 82 PELAS 81 PELAS1 PGAP 116 PLOAD1 199 PLOAD2 191 PLOAD4 191 PLOADX1 191, 149 PLOTEL 120 PLPLANE PLSOLID PMASS 119 POINT 15, 170

Chapter 2: Building A Model Currently Supported MD Nastran Input Options PROD 110 PSHEAR 166 PSHELL 124, 131, 140, 142, 148, 150, 156, 157, 162, 163 PSHELL1 PSHELLD PSOLID 168 PSPRMA PTUBE 112 PBEAM 100 PVAL 15, 170 PVISC 115 RBAR 29 RBE1 31 RBE2 32 RBE3 33 RFORCE 196 RROD 34 RSPLINE 35 RTRPLT 36 SESET 42, 219 SETREE 309 SPC1 188 SPCD 188 TEMP 193 TEMPF 146 TEMPRB 193 TEMPP1 193 TIC 197, 198 TSTEP 253 TSTEPNL 256, 318

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Currently Supported MD Nastran Input Options MD Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600) The following Bulk Data entries are supported for SOL 600 analyses. 3D Contact Region BCBODY Defines a flexible rigid contact body in 2D or 3D. BCBOX* Defines a 3D contact region. BCHANGE Changes definitions of contact bodies. BCMATL* Defines a 3D contact region by element material. BCMOVE Defines movement of bodies in contact. BCPARA Defines contact parameters. BCPROP* Defines a 3d contact region by element properties. BCTABLE Defines a contact table. BSURF Defines a contact body or surface by element IDs. GMNURB 3D contact region made up of NURBS. Initial Conditions IPSTRAIN* Defines initial plastic strain values. ISTRESS* Defines initial stress values. MARCIN Insert a text string in MSC.Marc. MARCOUT Selects data recovery output. Materials MATEP Elasto-plastic material properties. MATF Specifies material failure model. MATG* Gasket material properties. MATHE Hyperelastic material properties. MATHP Hyperelastic material properties. MATHED Damage model properties for hyperelastic materials. MATORT Elastic 3D orthotropic material properties. MATTEP Thermoelastic-Plastic material properties. MATTG* Temperature variation of interlaminar materials. MATTHE Thermo hyperelastic material. MATTORT* Thermoelastic orthotropic material MATTVE* Thermo-visco-elastic material properties

Chapter 2: Building A Model Currently Supported MD Nastran Input Options MATVE* Viscoelastic material properties MATVP Viscoplastic or creep material properties Note: * Not supported in initial release of Patran (2004). Note: Solution Control NLAUTO Parameters for automatic load/time stepping. NLDAMP Defines damping constants. NLSTRAT Strategy Parameters for nonlinear structural analysis. PARAMARC Parallel domain decomposition. RESTART Restart data. Element Properties Note: Note:Note: NTHICK Defines nodal thickness values for beams, plates, and/or shells. MD Nastran Explicit Nonlinear (SOL 700) The following Bulk Data entries are supported for SOL 700 analyses. Materials MATD001 Isotropic Elastic material for beam, shell and solid. MATD003 Isotropic and kinematic hardening plasticity. MATD005 Isotropic materials to model soil and foam. MATD006 Isotropic viscoelastic material. MATD007 Isotropic material to model nearly incompressible continuum rubber. MATD012 Isotropic plasticity for 3D solids. MATD014 Isotropic materials to model soil and foam with failure. MATD015 Isotropic Johnson/Cook strain and temperature sensitive plasticity. MATD019 Isotropic strain rate dependent material. MATD020 Isotropic rigid material. MATD022 Orthotropic material with optional brittle failure for composites. MATD024 Isotropic elasto-plastic material with stress x strain curve and strain rate dependency. MATD026 Anisotropic honeycomb and foam material. MATD027 Isotropic material to model rubber using two variables. MATD028 Isotropic elasto-plastic material for beam and shell.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Currently Supported MD Nastran Input Options MATD030 MATD031 MATD032 MATD057 MATD058 MATD062 MATD063 MATD064 MATD067 MATD068 MATD069 MATD070 MATD071 MATD073 MATD074 MATD076 MATD083 MATD087 MATD093 MATD094 MATD095 MATD097 MATD100 MATD103 MATD119 MATD121 MATD126 MATD20M MATDB01 MATDS01 MATDS02 MATDS03 MATDS04 MATDS05 Isotropic superelastic material. Isotropic material to model rubber using the Frazer-Nash formulation. Orthotropic laminated glass material. Isotropic material to model highly compressible low density foams. *MAT_LAMINATED_COMPOSITE_FABRIC Isotropic material to model viscous foams. Isotropic material to model crushable foams. Isotropic elasto-plastic material with a power law hardening. *MAT_NONLINEAR_ELASTIC_DISCRETE_BEAM *MAT_NONLINEAR_PLASTIC_DISCRETE_BEAM *MAT_SID_DAMPER_DISCRETE_BEAM *MAT_HYDRAULIC_GAS_DAMPER_DISCRETE_BEAM *MAT_CABLE_DISCRETE_BEAM *MAT_LOW_DENSITY_VISCOUS_FOAM *MAT_ELASTIC_SPRING_DISCRETE_BEAM *MAT_GENERAL_VISCOELASTIC *MAT_FU_CHANG_FOAM *MAT_CELLULAR_RUBBER *MAT_ELASTIC_6DOF_SPRING_DISCRETE_BEAM *MAT_INELASTIC_SPRING_DISCRETE_BEAM *MAT_INELASTIC_6DOF_SPRING_DISCRETE_BEAM *MAT_GENERAL_JOINT_DISCRETE_BEAM Isotropic spotweld material. Anisotropic viscoplastic material. *MAT_GENERAL_NONLINEAR_6DOF_DISCRETE_BEAM *MAT_GURSON_RCDC *MAT_MODIFIED_HONEYCOMB *MAT_RIGID *MAT_SEATBELT *MAT_SPRING_ELASTIC *MAT_DAMPER_VISCOUS *MAT_SPRING_ELASTOPLASTIC *MAT_SPRING_NONLINEAR_ELASTIC *MAT_DAMPER_NONLINEAR_VISCOUS

Chapter 2: Building A Model Currently Supported MD Nastran Input Options MATDS06 MATDS07 MATDS08 MATDS13 MATDS14 MATDS15 *MAT_SPRING_GENERAL_NONLINEAR *MAT_SPRING_MAXWELL *MAT_SPRING_INELASTIC *MAT_SPRING_TRILINEAR_DEGRADING *MAT_SPRING_SQUAT_SHEARWALL *MAT_SPRING_MUSCLE

Loads and Boundary Conditions TIC3 Defines initial rotational field. WALL Defines planar rigid wall. Elements and Properties CDAMP1D Scalar damper connection for SOL 700 CELAS1D Scalar spring connection for SOL 700. Solution Controls Form Parameters Execution Control Parameters DYSTATIC, DYBLDTIM, DYINISTEP, DYTSTEPERODE, DYMINSTEP, DYMAXSTEP, DYSTEPFCTL, DYTERMNENDMAS, DYTSTEPDT2MS General Parameters DYLDKND, DYCOWPRD, DYCOWPRP, DYBULKL, DYHRGIHQ, DYRGQH, DYENERGYHGEN, DYSHELLFORM, DYSHTHICK, DYSHNIP Contact Parameters DYCONSLSFAC, DYCONRWPNAL, DYCONPENOPT, DYCONTHKCHG, DYCONENMASS, DYCONECDT, DYCONIGNORE, DYCONSKIPTWG Binary OutputDatabase File Parameters DYBEAMIP, DYMAXINT, DYNEIPS, DYNINTSL, DYNEIPH, DYSTRFLG, DYSIGFLG, DYEPSFLG, DYRLTFLG, DYENGFLG, DYCMPFLG, DYIEVERP, DYDCOMP, DYSHGE, DYSTSSZ, DYN3THDT DAMPGBL Dynamic relaxation control.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Adaptive (p-Element) Analysis with the Patran MD Nastran Preference 2.3 Adaptive (p-Element) Analysis with the Patran MD Nastran Preference In Version 68 of MSC.Nastran, MSC introduced p-adaptive analysis using solid ele ments. The Patran MD Nastran Preference provides support for this new capability. There are some f undamental differences in approach to model building and results import for p-element analyses; this se ction will serve as a guide to these. MSC.Nastran Version 69 extends the Version 68 capabilities for p-adaptive analys is in two areas. Shell and beam elements have been added and p-shells and p-beams can be used for linea r dynamic solution sequences. Patran Version 6.0 supports both of these capabilities. Element Creation MD Nastran supports adaptive, p-element analyses with the 3D-solid CTETRA, CPENT A, and CHEXA elements; 2D-solid TRIA, and QUAD elements; shells TRIA, and QUAD elements; beam s BAR elements. Patran and MD Nastran allow TET4, TET10, TET16, TET40, WEDGE6, WEDGE15 , WEDGE52, HEX8, HEX20, and HEX64 for p-adaptive analysis for 3D-solids; TRIA3, TR IA6, TRIA7, TRIA9, TRIA13, QUAD4, QUAD8, QUAD9, QUAD12, and QUAD16 for p-adaptive analysis f or 2Dsolids and membranes; TRIA3, TRIA6, TRIA7, TRIA9, TRIA13, QUAD4, QUAD8, QUAD9, QUAD12, and QUAD16 for p-adaptive analysis for shells; BAR2, BAR3, and BAR4 for p-adaptive analysis for beams. The preferred approach, when beginning a new model, is to us e the higher-order elements--HEX64, WEDGE52, TET40, and TET16, or TRIA13 and QUAD16, or BAR4. The s upport for lower-order elements is provided primarily to support existing models. The h igher-order cubic elements allow more accurate definition of the geometry and more accurate postpr ocessing of results from the MD Nastran analysis.The translator generates the appropriate MD Nastran FEEDGE and POINT entities for all curved edges on the p-elements. Models with HEX64 and WED GE52 elements are easily created with the Patran Iso Mesher; models with TET16 elements can be created with the Tet Mesher. Models with QUAD16 and TRIA13 elements can be created using the Iso Mesh er or the Paver. For p-elements, Patran generates cubic edges to fit the underlying geometry. The cubic edge consists of two vertex grid points and two points in between. Adjacent cubic edges are not n ecessarily C1 continuous. If the original geometry is smooth, the cubic edges may introduce ki nks which cause false

stress concentrations. Then, the p-element produces unrealistic results especial ly for thin curved shells. In Version 7 of Patran, for cubic elements, the two midside nodes on each edge a re adjusted so that the edges of adjacent elements are C1 continuous. The adjustment is done in the Pat3 Nas translator. After the Pat3Nas translator is executed, the location of the two midside nodes in the Patran database has changed. The user is informed with a warning message. The user can turn the adju stment of midside nodes ON and OFF with the environment variable PEDGE_MOVE. By default, the midsi de nodes are adjusted to make the adjacent elements C1 continuous. For PEDGE_MOVE set to OFF, the points on a cubic edge are not adjusted. Patran generates the input for MD Nastran. For cubic edges, FEEDGE Bulk ries with POINTs are written. By default, the location of the two POINTs is moved to 1/3 of the edge in MD Nastran. The points generated by Patran must not be moved. Therefore, a r entry PARAM, PEDGEP, 1 is written by Patran. PEDGEP=1 indicates that incoming POINTs moved in MD Data ent and 2/3 paramete are not

Chapter 2: Building A Model Adaptive (p-Element) Analysis with the Patran MD Nastran Preference Nastran. The default is PEDGEP= 0, MD Nastran will move the two POINTs to 1/3 an d 2/3 of the edge. The C1 continuous cubic edges improve the accuracy of p-element results. In the Version 69 Release Guide, a cylinder under internal pressure was tested t o determine the quality of shell p-elements for curved geometry. The accuracy of the results was very go od when exact geometry was used. With C1 continuous edges we recover the same quality of results within single precision accuracy. Element and p-Formulation Properties Both element and p-formulation properties are defined using the Element Properti es application by choosing Action: Create, Dimension: 1D/2D/ or 3D, Type: Beam/Shell/Bending Panel /2D Solid/Membrane/ or Solid, and p-Formulation on the main form. The details of the property form for this case are described on (p. 209). Most of the properties are optional and have def aults; the material property name is required. Two properties that may need to be defined are Starting P-orders and Maximum P-o rders. These properties specify the polynomial orders for the element interpolation functions in the three spatial directions. Although these are integer values, in Patran, each property is defin ed using the Patran vector definition. At first, this may seem peculiar, but it gives the user access to ma ny useful tools in the Patran system for defining and manipulating these properties. Typically, a user would d efine these properties with a syntax like <3 4 2> to prescribe polynomial orders of 3, 4, and 2 in the X, Y, and Z directions. Patran will convert these values to floating point <3. 4. 2.>, but the Patran MD Nastran Preference will interpret them. This vector syntax is convenient primarily because it allows the se properties to be defined using the Fields application. In a case where the material properties are consta nt over the model, but it is desirable to prescribe a distribution of p-orders, vector fields can be defined and specified in a single property definition. The Patran MD Nastran Preference will provide additional he lp for this modeling function. At the end of an adaptive analysis, when results are imported, vector, spatial fields will optionally be created containing the p-orders used for each element for each ada ptive cycle. To repeat a single adaptive cycle, it is necessary only to modify the element properties by selecting the appropriate field. A common use of the Maximum P-orders property is in dealing with elements in the

vicinity of stress singularities. These singularities may be caused by the modeling of the geometry (e.g., sharp corners), boundary conditions (e.g., point constraints), or applied forces (e.g., point fo rces). Sometimes it is easier to tell the adaptive analysis to ignore these singular regions than it is to chang e the model. This can be done by setting the Maximum P-orders property for elements in this region to low values (e.g., <1 1 1> or <2 2 2>. These elements are sometimes called sacrificial elements. Loads and Boundary Conditions It is well known in solid mechanics that point forces and constraints cause the stress field in the body to become infinite. In p-adaptive analyses, care must be taken in finite element cr eation and loads application to ensure that these artificial high-stress regions don t dominate the analysis. Generally, the best results are obtained with distributed loads (pressures) or d istributed displacements. There are two options under Loads/BCs for applying distributed displacements. Th e Element Uniform and Element Variable types under Displacements allow displacement constraints to be applied to the

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Adaptive (p-Element) Analysis with the Patran MD Nastran Preference faces of solid elements. If the elements are p-elements, the appropriate FEFACE and GMBC entries are produced. If applied to non-p-elements, the appropriate SPC1 or SPCD entries are produced. Several new loads and boundary conditions support the p-shell and p-beam element s. Distributed loads can be applied to beam elements or to the edge of shell elements. Pressure loads can be applied to the faces of p-shell elements. Temperature loads can be applied to either the nodes or the elements. Analysis Definition Adaptive linear static and normal modes analyses are supported in Version 68 of MSC.Nastran; both solution types are supported by the Patran MD Nastran Preference. Only a few par ameters on the Analysis forms may need to be changed for p-element analyses. If running a versi on of MSC.Nastran prior to Version 68.2 (i.e., Version 68, or 68.1), the OUTPUT2 Request option on the Translation Parameters form must be set to Alter File in order to process the results in Pat ran. The Solution Parameters forms for the linear static and normal modes analyses contain a Max p -Adaptive Cycles option, which is defaulted to 3. The Subcase Parameters form under Subcase Creat e has options to limit the participation of this subcase in the adaptive error analysis. Finally, the A dvanced Output Requests form under Subcase Create has an option to define whether results are to be prod uced for all adaptive cycles or only every nth adaptive cycle. Results Import and Postprocessing Two different approaches are provided for postprocessing results from MD Nastran p-element analyses. Both approaches rely on MD Nastran creating results for a VU mesh where each p-ele ment is automatically subdivided into a number of smaller elements. In the standard appr oach with the default MD Nastran VU mesh (3 x 3 x 3 elements) for solids, (3 x 3 elements) for shells and (3 elements) for beams, the results will automatically be mapped onto the Patran nodes and elemen ts during import. This mapping will occur for all 10, Patran solid element topologies mentioned above. The most accurate mapping and postprocessing takes place when results are mapped to the higher-ord er Patran elements. When the adaptive analysis process increases the p-orders in one or more element s beyond 3, the 3 x 3 x 3 VU mesh, mapping, and postprocessing may not be sufficiently accurate. The Pat ran MD Nastran

Preference provides a second approach to handle this situation. In this case, a user can specify a higherorder VU mesh (e.g. 5 x 5 x 5) on the MD Nastran OUTRCV entry and then import both mod el data and results entities into a new, empty Patran database. In this case, the VU mesh an d results are imported directly, rather than mapped and can be post-processed with greater accuracy. Th e OUTRCV entry is currently supported only with the Bulk Data Include File option on the Translati on Parameters form. It should be noted that, with this import mode, displays of element results (e.g ., fringe plots) may be discontinuous across parent, p-element boundaries. This occurs because the VU gr ids generated by MD Nastran are different in each p-element. Along element boundaries there are coin cident nodes and a result associated with each one. The user should not try to perform an Equivalence oper ation to remove these coincident nodes. If this is done, subsequent postprocessing operations will lik ely be incorrect. For both postprocessing options, a result case is created for each adaptive cycl e in the analysis. The result types in this result case will depend on specific options selected on the Output Request form. By default, the Adaptive Cycle Output Interval option is equal to zero. This means that outp ut quantities specific to

Chapter 2: Building A Model Adaptive (p-Element) Analysis with the Patran MD Nastran Preference p-elements will be written only for the last cycle. If postprocessing of results from intermediate cycles is desired, the Adaptive Cycle Output Interval option should be set equal to one. One of the key uses of output from intermediate adaptive cycles is in examining the convergence of selected quantities (e.g., stresses). This can be done using the X-Y plotting ca pability under the Results application. Potential Pitfalls There are several areas where a user can encounter problems producing correct pelement models for MD Nastran. One is the incorrect usage of the midside nodes in the Patran higher or der-elements. These nodes are used in p-element analysis only for defining the element geometry; analysis degrees of freedom are not associated with these nodes. Therefore it is illegal, for example, to attach non p-elements to assign loads or boundary conditions to these nodes. One way this can occur inadvertentl y is if a nodal force is applied to the face of a Patran solid. This force is interpreted as a point forc e at every node (including the midside nodes) on the face of the solid. For the p-elements, this is not valid. This type of load should instead be applied as an element uniform or element variable pressure. Adaptive Analysis of Existing Models Modifying an existing solid model for adaptive, p-element analysis is relatively straightforward. The first step is to read the NASTRAN input file into Patran using the Analysis/Read Input File option. The model may contain any combination of linear or quadratic tetra, penta, or hexa element s. The second step is to use the Element Props/Modify function to change the Option for all solid propert ies from Standard Formulation to P-Formulation. The element properties form for p-formulation soli ds has many options specific to p-element analysis; but they all have appropriate defaults. This pro perty modification step is the only change that must be made before submitting the model for analysis. Often, however, as discussed in Potential Pitfalls, 21, it is appropriate to mod ify the types of loads and boundary conditions applied to the model. For example, in non p-element models, displacement constraints are applied using MD Nastran SPC entries at grid points. In p-elemen t analyses, elementoriented displacement constraints are more appropriate. Existing displacement LBCs can be modified using the Loads/BCs/Modify/Displacement option. For an SPC type of displacement constraint, the LBC type is nodal. For a p-element analysis, Element Uniform or Element Variable dis

placement constraints are more appropriate. The application region must be changed from a selection of nodes to a selection of element faces. As described above, nodal forces can be troublesome in p-element analyses. If possible, it is beneficial to redefine point forces as pressures acting on an element face . If this is not possible, an alternative is to limit the p-orders in the elements connected to the node with the point force; this can be done by defining a new element property for these elements and defining the Maxi mum P-orders vector appropriately. Element pressures, inertial loads, and nodal temperatures defined in the original model need not be changed for the p-element analysis.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Coordinate Frames 2.4 Coordinate Frames Coordinate frames will generate a unique CORD2R, CORD2C, or CORD2S Bulk Data ent ry, depending on the specified coordinate frame type. The CID field is defined by the Coord ID assigned in Patran. The RID field may or may not be defined, depending on the coordinate frame construct ion method used in Patran. The A1, A2, A3, B1, B2, B3, C1, C2, and C3 fields are derived from the c oordinate frame definition in Patran. Only Coordinate Frames that are referenced by nodes, element properties, or load s and boundary conditions can be translated. For more information on creating coordinate frames see Creating Coordinate Frames (p. 393) in the Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2. To output all the coordinate frames defined in the model whether referenced or n ot, set the environment variable WRITE_ALL_COORDS to ON.

Chapter 2: Building A Model Finite Elements 2.5 Finite Elements The Finite Elements Application in Patran allows the definition of basic finite element construction. Created under Finite Elements are the nodes, element topology, multi-point const raints, and Superelement. For more information on how to create finite element meshes, see Mesh Seed and M esh Forms (p. 25) in the Reference Manual - Part III. Nodes Nodes in Patran will generate unique GRID Bulk Data entries in MD Nastran. Nodes can be created either directly using the Node object, or indirectly using the Mesh object. Each node has associated Reference (CP) and Analysis (CD) coordinate frames. The ID is taken directly fro m the assigned node

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Finite Elements ID. The X1, X2, and X3 fields are defined in the specified CP coordinate frame. If no reference frame is assigned, the global system is used. The PS and SEID fields on the GRID entry ar e left blank. The analysis frame (CD of the GRID) is the coordinate system in which the displacements, degrees of freedom, constraints, and solution vector are defined. The coordinate system inwhich the node location is defined (CP of the GRID) can be either the reference coordinate frame, the analysis coordinate frame, or a global reference (blank), depending on thevalue of the forward translation parameter Node Coordinates. Elements The Finite Elements Application in Patran assigns element connectivity, such as Quad4, for standard finite elements. The type of MD Nastran element to be created is not determined until the element properties are assigned (for example, shell or 2D solid). See the Element Proper ties Form, 87 for details concerning the MD Nastran element types. Elements can be created either directly using the Element object, or indirectly using the Mesh object

Chapter 2: Building A Model Finite Elements .

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Finite Elements This type of form is used to create a 1D, 2D, or 3D element mesh. Beginning IDs for nodes and elements to be created. Elem Shape is used to specify the shape of the elements created by meshing. For example, the shape for a 2D element can be either triangular or quadralateral. Mesher is used to specify how the element mesh is to be created; for example, IsoMesh, Paver. The type of geometry (for example, simple (green) or complex (magenta) surface) may determine the choice of the mesher. List of surface IDs of surfaces to be meshed. For example Surface 1, 2, 3, or Surface 1:3. The value of Global Edge Length specifies the approximate size of the elements created when meshing. The button Select Existing Prop... is used to select an existing element property (for example, 2D Shell) that will be assigned to the elements created by meshing. The button Create New Property is used to create an element property that will be assigned to the elements that will be created by meshing. During creating the element property no application region can be specified; it is specified automatically using all the elements created by meshing. This ghosted area will become dark when an element property is selected.

Chapter 2: Building A Model Finite Elements Multi-point Constraints Multi-point constraints (MPCs) can also be created from the Finite Elements Appl ication. These are special element types that define a rigorous behavior between several specified nodes. The forms for creating MPCs are found by selecting MPC as the Object on the Finite Elements fo rm. The full functionality of the MPC forms are defined in Create Action (FEM Entities). Used to specify the ID to associate to the MPC when it is created.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Finite Elements MPC Types To create an MPC, first select the type of MPC to be created from the option men u. The MPC types that appear in the option menu are dependent on the current settings of the Analysis Code and Analysis Type preferences. The following table describes the MPC types which are supported for MD Nastran. MPC Type Analysis Type Description Explicit Structural Creates an explicit MPC between a dependent degree of freedo m and one or more independent degrees of freedom. The dependent term consists of a node ID and a degree of freedom, while an independent term consists of a coefficient, a node ID, and a degree of freedom. An unlimited number of independent terms can be specified, while only one dependent term can be specified. The constant term is not allowed in MD Nastran. RSSCON Structural Creates an RSSCON type MPC between a dependent node on a Surf-Vol linear 2D plate element and two independent nodes on a linear 3D solid element to connect the plate element to the solid element. One dependent and two independent terms can be specified. Each term consists of a single node. Rigid (Fixed) Structural and ExplicitNonlinear Creates a rigid MPC between one independent node and one or more dependent nodes in which all six structural degrees of freedom are rigidly attached to each other. An unlimited number of dependent terms can be specified, while only one independent term can be specified. Each term consists of a single node. There is no constant term for this MPC type. RBAR Structural and ExplicitNonlinear Creates an RBAR element, which defines a rigid bar between two nodes. Up to two dependent and two independent terms can be specified. Each term consists of a node and a list of degrees of freedom. The nodes specified in the two dependent terms must be the same as the nodes specified in the two independent terms. Any combination of the degrees of freedom of the two nodes can be specified as independent as long as the total number of independent degrees of freedom adds up to six. There is no constant term for this MPC type. RBE1 Structural Creates an RBE1 element, which defines a rigid body connected to an arbitrary number of nodes. An arbitrary number of dependent terms can be specified. Each term consists of a node and a list of degrees of freedom. Any number of independent terms can be specified as long as the total number of degrees of freedom specified in all of the independent terms adds up to six. Since at least one degree of freedom must be specified for each term there is no way the user can create more that six independent terms. There is no constant term for this MPC type.

Chapter 2: Building A Model Finite Elements MPC Type Analysis Type Description RBE2 Structuraland ExplicitNonlinear Creates an RBE2 element, which defines a rigid body between an arbitrary number of nodes. Although the user can only specify one dependent term, an arbitrary number of nodes can be associated to this term. The user is also prompted to associate a list of degrees of freedom to this term. A single independent term can be specified, which consists of a single node. There is no constant term for this MPC type. RBE3 Structuraland ExplicitNonlinear Creates an RBE3 element, which defines the motion of a reference node as the weighted average of the motions of a set of nodes. An arbitrary number of dependent terms can be specified, each term consisting of a node and a list of degrees of freedom. The first dependent term is used to define the reference node. The other dependent terms define additional node/degrees of freedom, which are added to the m-set. An arbitrary number of independent terms can also be specified. Each independent term consists of a constant coefficient (weighting factor), a node, and a list of degrees of freedom. There is no constant term for this MPC type. RROD Structural Creates an RROD element, which defines a pinned rod between two nodes that is rigid in extension. One dependent term is specified, which consists of a node and a single translational degree of freedom. One independent term is specified, which consists of a single node. There is no constant term for this MPC type. RSPLINE Structural Creates an RSPLINE element, which interpolates the displacements of a set of independent nodes to define the displacements at a set of dependent nodes using elastic beam equations. An arbitrary number of dependent terms can be specified. Each dependent term consists of a node, a list of degrees of freedom, and a sequence number. An arbitrary number of independent nodes (minimum of two) can be specified. Each independent term consists of a node and a sequence number. The sequence number is used to order the dependent and independent terms with respect to each other. The only restriction is that the first and the last terms in the sequence must be independent terms. A constant term, called D/L Ratio, must also be specified.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Finite Elements MPC Type Analysis Type Description RTRPLT Structural Creates an RTRPLT element, which defines a rigid triangular pl ate between three nodes. Up to three dependent and three independent terms can be specified. Each term consists of a node and a list of degrees of freedom. The nodes specified in the three dependent terms must be the same as the nodes specified in the three independent terms. Any combination of the degrees of freedom of the three nodes can be specified as independent as long as the total number of independent degrees of freedom adds up to six. There is no constant term for this MPC type. Cyclic Structural Describes cyclic symmetry boundary conditions for a segment of Symmetry the model. If a cyclic symmetry solution sequence is chosen, such as SOL 114, then CYJOIN, CYAX and CYSYM entries are created. If a solution sequence that is not explicitly cyclic symmetric is chosen, such as SOL 101, MPC and SPC entries are created. Be careful, for this option automatically alters the analysis coordinate references of the nodes involved. This could erroneously change the meaning of previously applied load and boundary conditions, as well as element properties. Sliding Structural Describes the boundary conditions of sliding surfaces, such a s pipe Surface sleeves. These boundary conditions are written to the NASTRAN input file as explicit MPCs. Be careful, for this option automatically redefines the analysis coordinate references of all affected nodes. This could erroneously alter the meaning of previously applied load and boundary conditions, as well as element properties. RBAR1 Structural This is an alternate (simplified) form for RBAR. Creates an RBAR1 element, which defines a rigid bar between two nodes, with six degrees of freedom at each end. Each dependent term consists of a node and a list of degrees of freedom, while the independent term consists only of a node (with all six degrees of freedom implied). The constant term is the thermal expansion coefficient, ALPHA.

Chapter 2: Building A Model Finite Elements MPC Type Analysis Type Description RTRPLT1 Structural Alternative format to define a rigid triangular plate element connecting three grid points. Creates an RTRPLT1 element, which defines a rigid triangular plate between three nodes. Each dependent term consists of a node and a list of degrees of freedom, while the independent term consists only of the node (with all six degrees of freedom implied). The constant term is the thermal expansion coefficient, ALPHA. RJOINT Structural Creates an RJOINT element, which defines a rigid joint element connecting two coinciding grid points. Each dependent term consists of a node and a list of degrees of freedom, while the independent term consists only of a node (with all six degrees of freedom implied). There is no constant term for this MPC type. Degrees of Freedom Whenever a list of degrees of freedom is expected for an MPC term, a listbox con taining the valid degrees of freedom is displayed on the form. The following degrees of freedom are supported by the Patran MD Nastran MPCs for the various analysis types: Degree of freedom Analysis Type UX Structural UY Structural UZ Structural RX Structural RY Structural RZ Structural Note: Care must be taken to make sure that a degree of freedom that is selected for an MPC actually exists at the nodes. For example, a node that is attached only to solid structural elements will not have any rotational degrees of freedom. However, Patran will allow you to select rotational degrees of freedom at this node when defining an MPC. Explicit MPCs This subordinate MPC form appears when the Define Terms button is selected on th e Finite Elements form and Explicit is the selected type. This form is used to create an MD Nastra n MPC Bulk Data entry. The difference in explicit MPC equations between Patran and MD Nastran will resu lt in the A1 field of the MD Nastran entry being set to -1.0.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Finite Elements Holds the dependent term information. This term will define the fields for G1 and C1 on the MPC entry. Only one node and DOF combination may be definedfor any given explicit MPC. The A1 field on the MPC entry is automatically set to -1.0. Holds the independent term information. These terms define the Gi, Ci, and Ai fields on the MPC entry, where i is greater than one. As many coefficient, node, and DOF combinations as desired may be defined.

Chapter 2: Building A Model Finite Elements Rigid (Fixed) This subordinate MPC form appears when the Define Terms button is selected on th e Finite Elements form and Rigid (Fixed) is the selected type. This form is used to create an MD N astran RBE2 Bulk Data entry. The CM field on the RBE2 entry will always be 123456. Holds the dependent term information. This term defines the GMi fields on the RBE2 entry. As many nodes as desired may be selected as dependent terms. Holds the independent term information. This term defines the GN field on the RBE2 entry. Only one node may be selected.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Finite Elements RBAR MPCs This subordinate MPC form appears when the Define Terms button is selected on th e Finite Elements form and RBAR is the selected type. This form is used to create an MD Nastran RB AR Bulk Data entry and defines a rigid bar with six degrees of freedom at each end. Both the Depend ent Terms and the Independent Terms lists can have either 1 or 2 node references. The total number of referenced nodes,

Chapter 2: Building A Model Finite Elements however, must be 2. If either or both of these lists references 2 nodes, then th ere must be an overlap in the list of referenced nodes. Holds the dependent term information. Either one or two nodes may bedefined as having dependent terms. The Nodes define the GA and GB fields on the RBAR entry. The DOFs define the CMA and CMB fields. Holds the independent term information. Either one or two nodes may be defined as having independent terms.The Nodes define the GA and GB fields on the RBAR entry.The DOFs define the CNA and CNB fields.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Finite Elements RBE1 MPCs This subordinate MPC form appears when the Define Terms button is selected on th e Finite Elements form and RBE1 is the selected type. This form is used to create an MD Nastran RB E1 Bulk Data entry.

Chapter 2: Building A Model Finite Elements Holds the dependent term information. Defines the GMi and CMi fields on the RBE1 entry. An unlimitednumber of nodes and DOFs may be defined here. Holds the independent term information. Defines the GNi and CNi fields on the RBE1 entry. The totalnumber of Node/DOF pairs defined must equal 6, and be capable ofrepresenting any general rigid body motion.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Finite Elements RBE2 MPCs This subordinate MPC form appears when the Define Terms button is selected on th e Finite Elements form and RBE2 is the selected type. This form is used to create an MD Nastran RB E2 Bulk Data entry.

Chapter 2: Building A Model Finite Elements Holds the dependent term information. This term defines the GMi and CM fields on the RBE2 entry. As many nodes as desired may be selected as dependent terms. Holds the independent term information. This term defines the GN field on the RBE2 entry. Only one node may beselected. RBE3 MPCs

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Finite Elements This subordinate MPC form appears when the Define Terms button is selected on th e Finite Elements form and RBE3 is the selected type. This form is used to create a MD Nastran RBE 3 Bulk Data entry.

Chapter 2: Building A Model Finite Elements Holds the dependent term information. Defines the GMi and CMi fields on the RBE3 entry. The first dependent term will be treated as the reference node, REFGRID and REFC. The rest of the dependent terms become the GMi and CMi components. Holds the independent term information. Defines the Gi, j, Ci, and WTi fields on the RBE3 entry. RROD MPCs

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Finite Elements This subordinate MPC form appears when the Define Terms button is selected on th e Finite Elements form and RROD is the selected type. This form is used to create an MD Nastran RR OD Bulk Data entry.

Chapter 2: Building A Model Finite Elements Holds the dependent term information. Defines the GB and CMB on the RROD entry. Only onetranslational DOF may be referenced for this entry. Holds the independent term information. Defines the GA field on the RROD entry. The CMA field is left blank.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Finite Elements RSPLINE MPCs This subordinate MPC form appears when the Define Terms button is selected on th e Finite Elements form and RSPLINE is the selected type. This form is used to create an MD Nastran RSPLINE Bulk Data entry. The D/L field for this entry is defined on the main MPC form. This MPC ty pe is typically used to tie together two dissimilar meshes.

Chapter 2: Building A Model Finite Elements Holds the dependent term information. Holds the independent term information. Terms with the highest and lowest sequence numbers must be independent. Determines what sequence the independent and dependent terms will be written to the RSPLINE entry. RTRPLT MPCs

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Finite Elements This subordinate MPC form appears when the Define Terms button is selected on th e Finite Elements form and RTRPLT is the selected type. This form is used to create an MD Nastran RTRPLT Bulk Data entry.

Chapter 2: Building A Model Finite Elements Holds the dependent term information. Defines the GA, GB, GC, CMA, CMB, and CMC fields of the RTRPLT entry. Holds the independent term information. The total number of nodes referenced in both the dependent terms and the independent terms must equal three. There must be exactlysix independent degrees of freedom, and they must be capable of describingrigid body motion. Defines the GA, GB, GC, CNA, CNB, and CNC fields of the RTRPLT entry. Cyclic Symmetry MPCs

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Finite Elements The Cyclic Symmetry MPC created by this form will be translated into CYJOIN, CYA X, and CYSYM entries if cyclic symmetric is the selected type, see Solution Parameters, 277, or into SPC and MPC entries if the requested type is not explicitly cyclic symmetric. If the type selected is Cyclic Symmetry, the type ofsymmetry will always berotational. NOTE: MPC option will automatically overwrite theanalysis coordinatereferences on all the nodes belonging to the Dependent and Independent Regions. Be careful that this does not erroneously change the meaning of previouslyapplied loads and boundary conditions, or element properties. Any node lying on the Z axiswill be automatically written to the CYAX entry. Side 2 of the CYJOIN entries. Side 1 of the CYJOIN entries. Sliding Surface MPCs The Sliding Surface MPC created by this form will be translated into explicit MP Cs in the NASTRAN input file.

Chapter 2: Building A Model Finite Elements If a Sliding Surface type is used, note that this MPC option will automatically overwrite the analysis coordinate references on all the nodes belonging to the Dependent and Independent Regions. Be careful that this does not erroneously change the meaning of previously applied loads and boundary conditions, or element properties. RBAR1 MPCs This subordinate MPC form appears when the Define Terms button is selected on th e Finite Elements

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Finite Elements form and RBAR1 is the selected type. This form is used to create an MD Nastran R BAR1 Bulk Data entry.

Chapter 2: Building A Model Finite Elements . RTRPLT1 MPCs This subordinate MPC form appears when the Define Terms button is selected on th e Finite Elements form and RTRPLT1 is the selected type. This form is used to create an MD Nastran RTRPLT1 Bulk Data

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Finite Elements entry.

Chapter 2: Building A Model Finite Elements . RJOINT MPCs This subordinate MPC form appears when the Define Terms button is selected on th e Finite Elements form and RJOINT is the selected type. This form is used to create an MD Nastran RJOINT Bulk Data

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Finite Elements entry.

Chapter 2: Building A Model Finite Elements .

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Finite Elements Superelements In superelement analysis, the model is partitioned into separate collections of elements. These smaller pieces of structure, called Superelement, are first solved as separate structure s by reducing their stiffness matrix, mass matrix, damping matrix, loads and constraints to the boundary nodes and then combined to solve for the whole structure. The first step in creating a superelement is to c reate a Patran group (using Group/Create) that contains the elements in the superelement. This group is then selected in the Finite Elements application on the Create/ Superelement form.

Chapter 2: Building A Model Finite Elements List of existing superelements. The group containing all the elements that define a superelement. Note that the group must contain elements not just nodes. If a group does not contain elements, it will not show up in the Element Definition Group listbox. Brings up an optional subordinate form that allows a user to select boundary nodes of the superelement. By default, the common nodes between the elements in the group and the rest ofthe model are selected as the boundary nodes.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Finite Elements Select Boundary Nodes Allows for manual selection of boundary nodes. Remove selected nodes from the Selected Boundary Nodes box. Add selected nodes to the Selected Boundary Nodes box.

Chapter 2: Building A Model Material Library 2.6 Material Library The Materials form appears when the Material toggle, located on the Patran appli cation selections, is chosen. The selections made on the Materials menu will determine which material form appears, and ultimately, which Nastran material will be created. The following pages give an introduction to the Materials form and details of al l the material property definitions supported by the Nastran Preference. Only material records that are referenced by an element property region or by a laminate lay-up are translated. References to externally defined materials result in special comment s in the input Nastran file, e.g., materials that property values that are not defined in Patran. The forward translator performs material type conversions when needed. This appl ies to both constant material properties and temperature-dependent material properties. For example, a three-dimensional orthotropic material that is referenced by CHEXA elements is converted into a th ree-dimensional anisotropic material. Materials Application Form This form appears when Materials is selected on the main menu. The Materials for m is used to provide options to create the various Nastran materials.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Material Library This toggle defines the basic materialdirectionality and can be set to Isotropic, 2D Orthotropic, 3D Orthotropic, 2D Anisotropic, 3DAnisotropic, or Composite. For Explicit Nonlinear additional materials can be defined. Lists the existing materials with the specified directionality. Defines the material name. A unique material ID will be assigned during translation. Describes the material that is being created. Generates a form that is used to define the material properties. SeeMaterial Input Properties Form, 61. Generates a form that is used to indicate the active portions of the material model. By default, all portions of a created material model are active.

Chapter 2: Building A Model Material Library Material Input Properties Form The Input Properties form is the form where all constitutive material models are defined for each material created. Multiple constitutive models can be created for each material created b y pressing the Apply button on the main Materials form with the proper widgets set on this form. Mult iple constitutive models of the same type are not allowed. The list of existing constitutive models are s hown in the bottom list box. A list of valid constitutive models is given in the table below. Set the Constitutive Model here. Press the Apply button on the main Materials application form to create a constitutive model for the given material. Multipleconstitutive models can be created for the same material. Enter the property values in the databoxes. If a value can be temperature, model, strain rate, or strain dependent, a separate listbox will appear to select a field. These fields must be created in the Fields application as Material type fields. This is a list of current constitutive models. Use the Change Material Status button to turn them on/offfrom translation into the Nastran input deck.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Material Library Material Constitutive Models The following table outlines the options when Create is the selected Action. Object Option 1 Option 2 Option 3 Option 4 Option 5 Isotropic Linear Elastic Nonlinear Elastic Hyperela stic Nearly Incompressible Test Data Mooney Rivlin Order: 1 2 3 Coefficients Mooney Rivlin Ogden Foam Arruda-Boyce Gent Order: 1 2 3 4 5 Elastoplastic Stress/Strain Curve von Mises Tresca MohrCoulomb DruckerPrager Isotropic Kinematic Combined

Chapter 2: Building A Model Material Library Object Option 1 Option 2 Option 3 Option 4 Option 5 Parabolic MohrColomb Buyukoztu rk Concrete Oak Ridge National Labs 2-1/4 CrMo ORNL Reversed Plasticit y ORNL Fully Alpha Reset ORNL Generalize d Plasticit y Isotropic Kinematic Combined Piecewis e Linear CowperSymon ds None Power Law Power Rate Law Johnson-Cook Kumar Hardening von Isotropic Slope Mises Tresca MohrCoulom b DruckerPrager Kinematic Combined

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Material Library Object Option 1 Option 2 Option 3 Option 4 Option 5 Perfectly Plastic Parabolic MohrColomb Buyukoztu rk Concrete Oak Ridge National Labs 2-1/4 CrMo ORNL Reversed Plasticit y ORNL Fully Alpha Reset ORNL Generalize d Plasticit y None Piecewis e Linear CowperSymon ds Rigid Plastic None Power Law Power Rate Law Johnson-Cook Kumar Piecewise-Piecewise Linear Linear CowperSymonds Failure n/a Hill Hoffman Tsai-Wu Maximum Strain

Chapter 2: Building A Model Material Library Object Option 1 Option 2 Option 3 Option 4 Option 5 Failure1/ 2/3

Maximum Stress Maximum Strain Hoffman No Progressive Standard Gradual Selective Immediate Selective Hill Tsai-Wu Hashin Puck HashinTape HashinFabric User Defined Failure Creep Tabular Input Creep Law 111 Creep Law 112 Creep Law 121 Creep Law 122 Creep Law 211 Creep Law 212 Creep Law 221 Creep Law 222 Creep Law 300 MATVP Viscoelas tic No Function Williams-Landel-Ferry Power Series Expansion 2D Orthotro pic Linear Elastic

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Material Library Object Option 1 Option 2 Option 3 Option 4 Option 5 Failure Stress Strain n/a Hill Hoffman Tsai-Wu Maximum Strain Failure1/ 2/3 See Isotropic Entry Elastopla stic Stress/Strain Curve von Mises Tresca MohrCoulom b DruckerPrager Oak Ridge National Labs 2-1/4 CrMo ORNL Reversed Plasticit y ORNL Fully Alpha Reset ORNL Generalize d Plasticit y Isotropic Kinematic Combined Piecewis e Linear CowperSymon ds

Chapter 2: Building A Model Material Library Object Option 1 Option 2 Option 3 Option 4 Option 5 Hardening Slope von Mises Tresca MohrCoulom b DruckerPrager Isotropic Kinematic Combined Perfectly von None Piecewis 3D Orthotro pic Plastic Mises Oak Ridge National Labs 2-1/4 CrMo ORNL Reversed Plasticit y ORNL Fully Alpha Reset ORNL Generalize d Plasticit y e Linear CowperSymon ds Creep MATVP Viscoelas tic See Isotropic Entry Linear Elastic Elastopla stic See 2D Orthotropic Entry Failure1/ 2/3 See 2D Orthotropic Entry Creep See 2D Orthotropic Entry

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Material Library Object Option 1 Option 2 Option 3 Option 4 Option 5 2D Anisotro pic 3D Anisotro pic Fluid Viscoelas tic See Isotropic Entry Linear Elastic Elastopla stic See 2D Orthotropic Entry Failure See Isotropic Entry Failure1/ 2/3 See Isotropic Entry - progressive failure not supported Linear Elastic Elastopla stic See 2D Orthotropic Entry Failure1/ 2/3 See 2D Orthotropic Entry - progressive failure not supported Creep See Isotropic Entry Linear Elastic Composi Laminate te Rule of Mixtures HAL Cont. Fiber HAL Disc. Fiber HAL Cont. Ribbon HAL Disc. Ribbon HAL Particulate Short Fiber 1D Short Fiber 2D

Chapter 2: Building A Model Material Library Additional materials for Explicit Nonlinear (SOL 700) are listed in the followin g table. Object Option 1 Option 2 Option 3 Option 4 Option 5 Isotropic Linear Elastic Linear Elastic (MAT1) Solid Fluid Elastoplastic Plastic Kinematic(MAT 3) Iso.Elastic Plastic(MAT12) Rate Dependent (MAT19) Bilinear Piecewise Linear (MAT24) Biliear Linearized Table Cowper Symonds General Rate Sensitive (MAT64) Powerlaw Resultant (MAT28) Shape Memory (MAT30) With Failure (MAT13) Power Law (MAT18) Ramberg-Osgood (MAT80) Hydro (MAT10) Linearized Viscoelastic Viscoelastic (MAT6) Rigid Material Type 20 No Constraints Global Directions Local Directions MATRIG (Rigid Body Properties) Geometry Defined No Constraints Global Directions Local Directions Johnson Cook Material Type 15 No iteractions Accurate Minimum Pressure No Tension, Min. Stress No Tension, Min. Pressure

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Material Library Object Option 1 Option 2 Option 3 Option 4 Option 5 Rubber Frazer Nash (MAT31) Coefficient Least Square Fit Respect Ignore Blatz-Ko (MAT7) General Viscoelastic (MAT76) Cellular Rubber (MAT87) Mooney Rivlin (MAT27) Arruda-Boyce (MAT127) Coeff. Least Square Hyperelastic (MAT77) Coefficients Least Square Fit 1/2/3 Simplified TensionCompresion Load Compression Load TensionCompressio n Identical True Strain Engineering Strain Rate Simple Average 12 Point Average Foam Soil and Foam (MAT5/14) Active (MAT14) Inactive (MAT 5) Allow Crushing Reversible Low Density Bulk No Tension Urethane Viscosity Maintain Tension (MAT57) Inactive Fu Chang Foam Bulk (MAT83) Viscosity Active Low Density Bulk No With Urethane Viscosity Tension Relaxati (MAT57) Inactive Bulk Viscosity

Active Maintain Tension on curve No Relaxati on Curve

Chapter 2: Building A Model Material Library Object Option 1 Option 2 Option 3 Option 4 Option 5 Viscous Foam (MAT62) Crushable (MAT63) Elastoviscoplatic With Damage (MAT81) Strain Damage Orthotropic RCDC Bilinear Linearized Table Cowper Symond s General Discrete Beam Nonlinear Elastic Discrete Beam (MAT67) Nonlinear Plastic Discrete Beam (MAT68) Side Impact Dummy (SID) Damper Discrete Beam (MAT69) Hydraulic Gas Damper Discrete Beam (MAT70) Cabel Discrete Beam (MAT71) Elastic Spring Discrete Beam (MAT74) Elastic 6 DOF Spring Discrete Beam (MAT93) Inelastic Spring Discrete Beam (MAT94) Inelastic 6 DOF Srping Discrete Beam (MAT95) General Joint Discrete Beam (MAT97) Spring Damper Nonlinear 6 DOF Discrete Beam (MAT119) General Nonlinear 1 DOF Discrete Beam (MAT121) Follow Loading Curve Follow Unloading Curve Follow Unloading Stiffness Follow Quadratic Unloading Elastic Spring (MATDS01) Viscous Damper (MATDS02) Elastic Spring (MATDS03) Nonlinear Elastic Spring (MATDS04) Nonlinear Viscous Damper (MATDS05) General Nonlinear Spring (MATDS06) Spring Maxwell (MATDS07) Inelastic Spring (MATDS08) Tri-linear Degrading (MATDS13) Squat Shear Wall (MATDS14) Muscle (MATDS15)

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Material Library Object Option 1 Option 2 Option 3 Option 4 Option 5 2D Orthotro pic 3D Orthotro pic Seat Belt Seat Belt (MATB01) Spotweld Glass (Laminated) MATDSW1 DF MATDSW2 DFRES DFRESNF DFRESNFP MATDSW3 DFSTR MATDSW4 DFRATE MATDSW5 Laminated Glass (MAT32) DFNS DFSIF DFSTRUC Glass Polymer Composite Enh. Composite Damage Tsai-Wu Theory Chang-Chang Theory Linear Elastic Linear Elastic (MAT2) Composites and Fabrics Honeycomb Composites and Fabrics (MAT58) Composite Honeycomb (MAT26) Zero One Two Three 0.0 1.0 -1.0 Bulk Viscosity Inactive Bulk Viscosity Active Composite Composite Damage (MAT22) Composite Failure (MAT59) Faceted Ellipsoidal Linear Elastic Linear Elastic (MAT2) Modified

Honeycomb Modified Honeycomb (MAT126) Bulk Viscosity Inactive Bulk Viscosity Active LCA .LT. 0 LCA .GT. 0 Zero One Two

Chapter 2: Building A Model Material Library Object Option 1 Option 2 Option 3 Option 4 Option 5 2D Anisotro pic Viscoplastic Viscoplastic (MAT103) Shell From Curve Manual Entry Linear Elastic Linear Elastic (MAT2) 3D Anisotro pic Viscoplastic Viscoplastic (MAT103) Brick From Curve Manual Entry Linear Elastic Linear Elastic The Input Properties form displays the following for linear elastic properties. The translator produces MAT1 entries for isotropic materials, MAT8 entries for 2D orthotropic materials, MAT3 entries using axisymmetric solid elements or MAT9 entries using 3D solid elements (CHEXA, CPEN TA, CTETRA) for 3D orthotropic materials, MAT2 entries for 2D plane stress - 2D anisotropic materials, and MAT9 entries for 3D anisotropic materials. For temperature dependencies, the correspo nding MATTi entries are written referencing TABLEMi entries. Temperature dependency is defined using mat erial fields defined under the Fields application. SOL 600 jobs using 3D Orthotropic material the MAT ORT entry is written. Isotropic Description Elastic Modulus Elastic modulus, E, (Young s modulus). Can be temperature dependent. Poisson Ratio Poisson s ratio (NU). Can be temperature dependent. Should be between -1.0 and 0.5. Shear Modulus Shear modulus (G). Can be temperature dependent. Density Density (RHO). Can be temperature dependent. Thermal Expansion Coefficient Thermal coefficient of expansion (A). Can be tempe rature dependent. Structural Damping Coefficient Structural damping coefficient (GE). Can be tempe rature dependent. Reference Temperature Reference temperature (TREF). 2D/3D Orthotropic

Linear Elastic (MAT2)

Description Elastic Modulus ii Modulus of elasticity in 1-, 2-, and 3-directions. Can be temperature dependent. Poisson Ratio ij Poisson s ratio for uniaxial loading in the three different directions. Can be temperature dependent. Shear Modulus ij In-plane and transverse shear moduli in ij planes. Can be temperature dependent.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Material Library 2D/3D Orthotropic Description Density Density (RHO). Can be temperature dependent. Thermal Expansion Coefficient ii Thermal coefficients of expansion in the three directions. Can be temperature dependent. Structural Damping Coefficient Structural damping coefficient (GE). Can be tempe rature dependent. Reference Temperature Reference temperature (TREF). 2D/3D Anisotropic Description Stiffness ij Elements of the 6x6 symmetric material property matrix in the material coordinate system. Can be temperature dependent. Density Density (RHO). Can be temperature dependent. Thermal Expansion Coefficient ij Thermal coefficients of expansion. Can be tempe rature dependent. Structural Damping Coefficient Structural damping coefficient (GE). Can be tempe rature dependent. Reference Temperature Reference temperature (TREF). Nonlinear Elastic The Input Properties form displays the following for nonlinear elastic propertie s. Use this form to define the nonlinear elastic stress-strain curve on the MATS1 entry. A stress-strain ta ble defined using the Fields application can be selected on this form. Based on this information the translat or will produce MATS1 of type NLELAST and TABLES1 entries. This is used primarily for SOL 106 and 129. Th is option is not supported by SOL 600. Use an elastoplastic constitutive model instead. Isotropic Description Stress/Strain Curve Defines the nonlinear elastic stress-strain curve. You must select a field from the listbox. It can be strain and/or temperature dependent. Tabular definition of the stress-strain curve via the Fields application using a material field of strain should follow the specifications as outlined by Nastran. The first point of the material field should be the origin and the second point must be at the initial yield point. This material curve is elastic, meaning that in both loading and unloading the material behavior follows the stress-strain curve as defined. It is not recommended that both nonlinear elastic and elastoplastic constitutive models be active or defined for the same material. For work hardening, use the Elastoplastic constitutive model. See the Nastran Quick Reference Guide for more details.

Chapter 2: Building A Model Material Library Hyperelastic The Input Properties form displays the following for hyperelastic properties. Us e this form to define the data describing hyperelastic behavior of a material. This data is placed on MATH P and TABLES1 entries or on the MATHE entry for SOL 600. If you select Test Data as the Data Type, the Input Options form reverts to the form used for non-SOL 600 solutions and data is placed on a MATHP entry (Mooney-Rivlin strain energy m odel). To use test data for MATHE/SOL 600 runs, use the Experimental Data Fitting features under th e Tools menu to determine the coefficients and enter them manually. Test Data - Mooney Rivlin Description Tension/Compression TAB1 All data provided must reference a strain dependent field defining the test data. Please refer to the Equibiaxial Tension TAB2 Nastran Quick Reference Guide for descriptions of Simple Shear Data TAB3 each of these tabular inputs. Pure Shear Data TAB4 Pure Volume Compression TABD If Coefficients is selected as the Data Type, use the form to describe the strai n energy potential. The Mooney Rivlin model can be written out as a MATHP or MATHE entry for SOL 600. Ma ke sure you use the one that is consistent with the solution to be run. Ogden, Foam, Arruda-Boyc e, and Gent models are used for SOL 600 MATHE entries only. Mooney Rivlin (MATHP) Description Distortional Deformation Coefficients, Aij Material constants related to distortional deformation. The Order of the Polynomical determines the number of coefficients required as input. Volumetric Deformation Coefficients, Di Material constants related to volumetric deformation. The Order of the Polynomial

determines the number of coefficients required as input. Density RHO Defines the mass density which is an optional property. Volumetric Thermal Expansion Coefficient AV Coefficient of volumetric thermal ex pansion. Reference Temperature TREF Defines the reference temperature for the thermal expansion coefficient. Structural Damping Coefficient GE Structural damping element coefficient.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Material Library Mooney Rivlin (MATHE) Strain Energy Function C10, C01, C11, C20, C30 Density RHO Thermal Expansion Coefficient Bulk Modulus K Reference Temperature TREF Structural Damping Coefficient GE Ogden Bulk Modulus K Density RHO Coefficient of Thermal Expansion Reference Temperature TREF Modulus k Exponent k Foam Bulk Modulus K Density RHO Description Strain energy densities as a function of the strain invariants in the material. May vary with temperature via a defined material field. This option consolidates several of the hyperelastic material models, including Neo-Hookean (C10 only), Mooney-Rivlin (C10 & C01), and Full Third Order Invariant (all coefficients). Defines the mass density Defines the instantaneous coefficient of thermal expansion. This property is optional. May vary with temperature via a defined material field. Defines the Bulk Modulus. Defines the reference temperature for the thermal expansion coefficient.

Structural damping element coefficient. Description Defines the Bulk Modulus. Defines the material mass density. Defines the instantaneous coefficient of thermal expansion. This property is optional. May vary with temperature via a defined material field Defines the reference temperature for the thermal expansion coefficient. .k in the Ogden equation. The number of moduli required as input is dependent on the Order of the Polynomial. .k in the Ogden equation. The number of exponents required as input is dependent on the Order of the Polynomial. Description Defines the Bulk Modulus. Defines the material mass density.

Chapter 2: Building A Model Material Library Foam Description Thermal Expansion Coefficient Defines the instantaneous coefficient of thermal expansion. This property is optional. May vary with temperature via a defined material field Reference Temperature TREF Defines the reference temperature for the thermal expansion coefficient. Modulus n un in the Foam equation. The number of moduli required as input is dependent on the Order of the Polynomial. Deviatoric Exponent n .n in the Foam equation. The number of exponents required as input is dependent on the Order of the Polynomial. Volumetric Exponent n .n in the Foam equation. The number of exponents required as input is dependent on the Order of the Polynomial.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Material Library Arruda- Boyce NKT Chain Length Bulk Modulus K Density RHO Thermal Expansion Coefficient Reference Temperature TREF Gent Tensile Modulus * I1 Maximum 1st Invariant Bulk Modulus K Density RHO Coefficient of Thermal Expansion Reference Temperature TREF Elastoplastic Description Chain density times Boltzmann constant times temperature. May vary with temperature via a defined material field. Average chemical chain cross length. May vary with temperature via a defined material field. Defines the Bulk Modulus. This defines the material mass density. Defines the instantaneous coefficient of thermal expansion. This property is optional. May vary with temperature via a defined material field Defines the reference temperature for the thermal expansion coefficient. Description Defines standard tension modulus (E). May vary with

temperature via a defined material field. Defines I1* = I1 3 . May vary with temperature via a defined material field. Defines the Bulk Modulus. This defines the material mass density. Defines the coefficient of thermal expansion. Defines the reference temperature for the thermal expansion coefficient. The Input Properties form displays the following for elastoplastic properties. U se this form to define the data describing plastic behavior of a material. The stress-strain curve data is input via a material property field of strain and placed on MATS1 and TABLES1 entries. The data input should b e the true equivalent stress vs. equivalent total strain. Other options are placed on the MATEP entry and are valid only for SOL

Chapter 2: Building A Model Material Library 400 & 600. Note that the existence of both an elastoplastic and nonlinear elasti c constitutive models in the same material is not recommended. Stress/Strain Curve Description Yield Function Yield function (YF) criterion: von Mises, Tresca, Mohr-Coulomb, & DruckerPrager supported on MATS1 entry. All others are for SOL 600 and placed on the MATEP entry. SOL 400 only supports von Mises. Hardening Rule Hardening Rule (HR). These are Isotropic, Kinematic, and Combined isotropic and kinematic and are placed on the MATS1 entry or MATEP entry depending on solution sequence and yield function selected. Hardening rules Power Law, Rate Power Law, Johnson-Cook, Kumar are available when no Yield Function is specified. This is used for SOL 600 only on MATEP entry. Strain Rate Method Selects an option for strain-rate dependent yield stress used in SOL 600. Cowper-Symonds requires input of Denominator C and Inverse Exponent P. Stress/Strain Curve This data must reference a strain dependent field. It can also be temperature and strain rate dependent. LIMIT1 in MATS1 determined from supplied tabular field of stress-strain curve. Data is placed on TABLES1 entry. Internal Friction Angle Defined for Mohr-Coulomb and Drucker-Prager yield function placed on the MATS entry LIMIT2. Yield Point Initial yield stress. Stress at Yield Beta Parameter beta for parabolic Mohr-Coulomb or Buyukozturk concrete models. Placed on the MATEP entry. 10th Cycle Yield Stress Equivalent 10th cycle tensile yield stress for Oak Ridge National Labs models (ORNL). Placed on the MATEP entry. Denominator C Constants for the Cowper-Symonds strain rate method. Inverse Exponent P

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Material Library Stress/Strain Curve Description Coefficient A / B / C / Bi Coefficient and exponent data for Power Law, Rate Exponent M / N Power Law, Johnson-Cook, and Kumar hardening rules. initial Strain Rate Additional data input for the Johnson-Cook Room Temperature hardening rule. Melt Temperature Hardening Slope Description Yield Function Yield function (YF) criterion: von Mises, Tresca, Mohr-Coulomb, & DruckerPrager supported on MATS1 entry. Hardening Rule Hardening Rule (HR). These are Isotropic, Kinematic, and Combined isotropic and kinematic and are placed on the MATS1 entry. Strain Rate Method No strain rate methods are available for the Hardening Slope data. Hardening Slope Work hardening slope (H) - slope of stress versus plastic strain. Defined in units of stress. For an elastic-perfectly plastic case, use the Perfectly Plastic data input option. Internal Friction Angle Defined for Mohr-Coulomb and Drucker-Prager yield function placed on the MATS entry LIMIT2. Yield Point Initial yield stress. Perfectly Plastic Description Yield Function See the Stress / Strain Curve table above. All options are identical except there must be a yield function selected. Hardening Rule None are available since no hardening is possible for a perfectly plastic material. Strain Rate Method Piecewise linear or Cowper-Symonds are available.

Chapter 2: Building A Model Material Library Perfectly Plastic Description Yield Point Initial yield stress. All other data input is described in the Stress/Strain Curve table above. Rigid Plastic Description Yield Function No yield functions are available as the material is defined as rigid and then plastic, so no yield is possible. Hardening Rule See the Stress / Strain Curve table above. Valid options are the Power Law, Power Rate Law, Johnson-Cook, Kumar, and Piecewise Linear. Strain Rate Method Piecewise linear or Cowper-Symonds are available only if the Piecewise Linear hardening rule is selected. Stress/Strain Curve Necessary only when not using one of the power law hardening rules (Piecewise-Linear). This data must reference a strain dependent field. It can also be temperature and strain rate dependent. LIMIT1 in MATS1 determined from supplied tabular field of stress-strain curve. Data is placed on TABLES1 entry. All other data input is described in the Stress/Strain Curve table above. Rigid Plastic is only used in SOL 600 and only for isotropic materials. See the Nastran Quick Reference Guide for more information about the necessary d ata for MATS1 and MATEP entries. Failure The Input Properties form displays the following for failure material models. No te that this failure model is for non-SOL 400/600/700 solutions. See Failure 1/2/3 for SOL 400/600/700. No Composite Failure Theory Description Tension Stress Limit

Stress limits for tension, compression, and shear used to compute margins of safety in certain Compression Stress Limit elements. They have no effect on the computational Shear Stress Limit procedures. Failure criteria for the isotropic and two-dimensional orthotropic and anisotrop ic materials appear in the ST, SC, and SS fields on MAT1 and MAT2 entries and the Xt, Xc, Yt, Yc, and S fields on the MAT8 entry.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Material Library Composite Failure Theory: Description Hill, Hoffman, Tsai-Wu, Maximum Failure Limits For 2D orthotropic on the MAT8 entry, the limits can be defined as stress or strain allowables. This is not applicable to isotropic and anisotropic materials. Tension Stress Limit Stress limits for tension, compression, and shear are the same as those defined for non-composite failure. Compression Stress Limit Shear Stress Limit Bonding Shear Stress Limit Allowable shear stress of the bonding material. SB field on the PCOMP entry. Failure criteria for the isotropic and two-dimensional orthotropic and anisotrop ic materials appear in the ST, SC, and SS fields on MAT1 and MAT2 entries and the Xt, Xc, Yt, Yc, and S fields on the MAT8 entry unless composites are being used in which case the data is written to the PCOMP entry as necessary. Failure 1, Failure 2, Failure 3 The Input Properties form displays the following for failure material models use d in SOL 400 and 600. Solution sequences other than SOL 400/600/700 should use the Failure constitutiv e model above instead. Up to three failure constitutive models can be defined for any one material. Fai lure 1 must exist in order for Failure 2 and 3 to be recognized and translated into the proper MATF and MAT TF entries. Temperature dependent properties as defined by material fields are translated on to the MATTF entry. Note also that only Failure 1 allows for definition of progressive failure. Fail ure models 2 and 3 take on whatever progressive failure is defined in Failure 1. Different failure criterio n may exist between all three in the same material definition. The table below outlines the allowable properties. All values are real, 0.0, or left blank with no defaults unless otherwise indicated. Which properties are available is dependent on the F ailure Criterion selected. The following Failure Criteria are available: Maximum Stress Maximum Strain Hill

Hoffman Tsai-Wu Hashin Puck Hashin-Tape

Chapter 2: Building A Model Material Library Hashin-Fabric Property Description Progressive Failure Options Progressive failure options are None, standard Progressive Failure, Gradual or Immediate selective progressive failure for SOL 600. SOL 400 does not support progressive failure models and will ignore this setting if set to anything other than None. Only failure indices are computed when no progressive failure is specified. Anisotropic materials do not support progressive failure. Tension Stress Limit X / Y /Z Tension, compression, and shear stress or strain Tension Strain Limit X / Y / Z limits used in the Maximum Stress or Strain, Hill , Hoffman, and Tsai-Wu failure criteria. Compression Stress Limit X / Y / Z Compression Strain Limit X / Y / Z Shear Stress Limit XY / YZ / ZX Shear Strain Limit XY / YZ / ZX Shear Stress Bond (SB) Allowable shear stress of bonding material between layers for composites only. This is used in SOL 600 only and is ignored for SOL 400. Failure Index Failure index used for Hill, Hoffman, and Tsai-Wu criteria. Interactive Strength XY / YZ / ZX Interactive strength constants for specified plane used in the Tsai-Wu criterion. Max Fiber / Matrix Tension Definable stress limits for Hashin, Puck, HashinMax Fiber / Matrix Compression Tape, and Hashin-Fiber criteria. Max Tape Fiber Tension Max Tape Fiber Compression Max 1st Fiber Tension / Compression Max 2nd Cross Fiber Tension / Compression Max Thickness Tension Max Thickness Compression Layer Shear Strength Shear stress limits for Hashing, Puck, Hashin-Tape, Transverse Shear Strength YZ / ZX and Hashin-Fiber criteria.

Slope P12C / P12T / P23C / P23T of Fracture Slopes of the failure envelope used in Puck failure Envelope criterion.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Material Library Property Description Deactivate Tension X / Y/ Z If any value other than blank or 0.0 is entered for Deactivate Compress X / Y / Z progressive failure options Gradual and Immediate, Deactivate Shear XY / YZ / ZX failed elements are deactivated (placed ICi fields in MATF entry). See the Nastran Quick Reference Deactivate Elements Guide for information. Deactivate Deactivate Deactivate Deactivate Fiber / Matrix Tension Fiber /Matrix Compression Matrix Tension Matrix Compression

Residual Stiffness Factor Reduction fractions or factors. Values can be Matrix Compression Factor between 0.0 and 1.0. Used only for Gradual or Shear Stiffness Factor Immediate progressive failure modes (placed on Ai E33 Fiber Failure Factor fields in MATF entry). See the Nastran Quick Shear Fiber Failure Factor Reference Guide for more information. Creep The Input Properties form displays the following for creep models. Tabular Input Description Data defined by the use of this form to define the primary stiffness, primary da mping, and secondary damping for a creep model with tabular input appears on the CREEP entry for nonSOL 600 runs. Only isotropic materials use this data input method. Creep Law ijk Description Use this form to define the coefficients for one of many empirical creep models available appears on the CREEP entry for non-SOL 600 runs. Only isotropic materials use this creep de finition. MATPV Description Use this form to define either the coefficients and exponents for creep model or provide tabular field data to define Temperature vs. Creep Strain, Creep Strain Rate vs. Stress, Strai n Rate vs. Creep Strain, or Time vs. Creep Strain in SOL 600 runs. This data is written to the MATVP entr y. If tabular data is provided, this data is written to TABLEM1 entries. It is not recommended to mix the exponents and

coefficients and tabular data. Use one or the other.

Chapter 2: Building A Model Material Library Viscoelastic The Input Properties form displays the following for viscoelastic models. This m aterial model is only used in SOL 600 runs and all data is placed on the MATVE, MATTVE entries. Linear elastic or hyperelastic constitutive models for isotropic or anisotropic materials must exi st in addition to the viscoelastic model. Composite The Composite forms provide alternate ways of defining the linear elastic proper ties of materials. All the composite options, except for Laminated Composite, will always result in a homog eneous elastic material in MD Nastran. When the Laminated Composite option is used to create a material and this materi al is then referenced in a Revised or Standard Laminate Plate element property region, a PCOMP entry is cre ated. However, if this material is referenced by a different type of element property region, f or example, Revised or Standard Homogeneous Plate, then the equivalent homogeneous material properties a re used instead of the laminate lay-up data. Only materials created through the Laminated Composite option should be referenced by a Revised or Standard Laminate Plate element property region. Refer to Composite Materials Construction (p. 116) in the Patran Reference Manual. Laminated This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on th e Materials form, Composite is the selected Object, and Laminate is the selected Method. Use this form to define the laminate lay-up data for a composite material. If the resulting material is refe renced in a Revised or Standard Laminate Plate element property region, then an MD Nastran PCOMP entry c ontaining the lay-up data is written. If the resulting material is referenced by any other typ e of element property region, the equivalent homogeneous properties of the material are used

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Material Library .

Chapter 2: Building A Model Element Properties 2.7 Element Properties The Element Properties form appears when the Element Properties toggle, located on the Patran main form, is chosen.There are several option menus available when creating element p roperties. The selections made on the Element Properties menu will determine which element prop erty form appears, and ultimately, which MD Nastran element will be created. The following pages give an introduction to the Element Properties form, and det ails of all the element property definitions supported by the Patran MD Nastran Preference. Element Properties Form This form appears when Element Properties is selected on the main menu. There ar e four option menus on this form. Each will determine which MD Nastran element type will be created and which property forms will appear. The individual property forms are documented later in this se ction. For a full description of this form, see Element Properties Forms (p. 67) in the Patran Ref erence Manual.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Element Properties Use this option menu to define the element s dimension. The options are: 0D (point elements) 1D (bar elements) 2D (tri and quad elements) 3D (tet, wedge, and hex elements) This option menu depends on theselection made in the Dimension option menu. Use this menu to define the general type of element, such as: Mass versus Grounded SpringShell versus 2D_Solid This button is used to quickly edit an element property; for example change the shell thickness. These option menus may or may not be present, and their contents depend heavily on the selections made inDimension and Type. See Table 2-1 for more help. This is used to specify element properties; for example shell thickness, or material orientation. This is used to specify the region (area) of geometry or elements that are to be included in the property definition.

Chapter 2: Building A Model Element Properties The following table outlines the option menus when Analysis Type is set to Struc tural. Table 2-1 Structural Options Dimension Type Option 1 Option 2 0D Mass Coupled Grounded Lumped Grounded Spring Grounded Damper Grounded Bush 1D Beam General Section Standard P-Formulation Curved w/General Section Curved w/Pipe Section Lumped Section Tapered Section Standard P-element General Section (CBEAM) Rod General Section CONROD Pipe Section Spring Damper Scalar Viscous Gap Adaptive Non-Adaptive 1D Mass PLOTEL Bush Spot Weld Connector Fastener Connector Standard

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Element Properties Table 2-1 Structural Options Dimension Type Option 1 Option 2 2D Shell Homogeneous Standard Revised P-element Laminate Standard Revised Equivalent Section Standard Revised P-element Field Point Mesh (exterior acoustic element) Bending Panel Standard Revised P-element 2D-Solid Plane Strain Standard Revised P-Formulation Hyperelastic Formulation Axisymmetric Standard Hyperelastic Formulation PLPLANE Infinite (exterior acoustic element) Membrane Standard Revised P-Formulation Shear Panel 3D Solid Homogeneous Standard P-Formulation Hyperelastic Formulation Laminate Gasket

Chapter 2: Building A Model Element Properties Coupled Point Mass (CONM1) This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on th e Element Properties form and the following options are chosen. Action Dimension Type Option(s) Topologies Create 0D Mass Coupled Point/1 Use this form to create a CONM1 element. This defines a 6 x 6 symmetric mass mat rix at a geometric point of the structural model.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Element Properties Defines the orientation of the 1-2-3 axes of the mass matrix. The value is a reference to an existingcoordinate frame. The 123 axes will be aligned withthe X-Y-Z axes of the specified coordinate system. If a non rectangular coordinate system is specified, thesystem will be evaluated into a local rectangular system, which is then used to orient the mass matrix. This property is the CID field on the CONM1 entry. This property is optional. Defines the values of the mass matrix. These properties are the Mij fields on th e CONM1 entry and can either be real values or references to existing field definitions. Each of these properties are optional; however, at least one must be defined.

Chapter 2: Building A Model Element Properties This is a list of Input Properties available for creating a CONM1 element that w ere not shown on the previous page. Use the menu scroll bar on the Input Properties form to view thes e properties. Prop Name Description Mass Component 3,3 Defines the values of the mass matrix. These are the Mij fields on the CONM1 entry. These properties can either be real values or references to Mass Component 4,1 existing field definitions. Each of these properties are optional; however, at least one must be defined. Mass Mass Mass Mass Mass Mass Mass Mass Mass Mass Mass Mass Mass Component Component Component Component Component Component Component Component Component Component Component Component Component 4,2 4,4 5,1 5,2 5,3 5,4 5,5 6,1 6,2 6,3 6,4 6,5 6,6

Grounded Scalar Mass (CMASS1) This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on th e Element Properties form and the following options are chosen. Action Dimension Type Option(s) Topologies Create 0D Mass Grounded Point/1 Use this form to create a CMASS1 element and a PMASS property. This defines a sc alar mass element of the structural model. Only one node is used in this method, and the other node i s defined to be grounded.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Element Properties Defines the translation mass or rotational inertia value to be applied. This is the M field Defines which degree of freedom this value on the PMASS entry. This property can be will be attached to. This property can be set to UX, UY, UZ, RX, RY, or RZ and defines the either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is setting for the C1 field on the CMAS S1 entry. required. This property is required. Lumped Point Mass (CONM2) This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on th e Element Properties form and the following options are chosen. Action Dimension Type Option(s) Topologies Create 0D Mass Lumped Point/1 Use this form to create a CONM2 element. This defines a concentrated mass at a g eometric point of the structural model.

Chapter 2: Building A Model Element Properties Defines an offset from the specified node towhere the lumped mass actually is to exist inthe structural mode. This vector is defined in the Mass Orientation coordinate system. Defines the X1, X2, and X3 fields on the CONM2 entry. This property is optional. Inertia i,j defines the rotation inertia properties of this lumped mass. These properties are the Iijfields on the CONM2 record. These values can be either real values or references to existingfield definitions. These values a re optional. Defines the translational mass value to be used. This is the M field on the CONM2 entry. This property can either be a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is required. Defines the orientation of the 1-2-3 axes of the mass matrix. This is a reference to an existingcoordinate frame. The 1-2-3 axes will be aligned with the X-Y-Z axes of the specifiedcoordinate system. If a nonrectangul ar CID field on the CONM2 entry. If the This is a list of Input Properties available for creating a CONM2 element that w ere not shown on the previous page. Use the menu scroll bar on the Input Properties form to view thes e properties.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Element Properties Prop Name Description Inertia 3,1 Inertia i,j defines the rotation inertia properties of this lumped mass. These are the Iij fields on the CONM2 entry. These values Inertia 3,2 can be either real values or references to existing field definitions. These values are optional. Inertia 3,3 Grounded Scalar Spring (CELAS1/CELAS1D) This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on th e Element Properties form when the following options are chosen. Action Dimension Type Option(s) Topologies Create 0D Grounded Spring Point/1

Chapter 2: Building A Model Element Properties Use this form to create a CELAS1 or CELAS1D (for SOL 700) element and a PELAS pr operty. This defines a scalar spring element of the structural model. Only one node is used i n this method. The other node is defined to be grounded. Defines the coefficient to be used for this spring. This is the K field on the P ELAS entry. This can either be a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is required. Defines the relationship between the springdeflection and the stresses within th e spring. This property is the S field on the PELAS entry and can either be a real value, or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional. Number of a User Defined Coordinate system, used only for Explicit Nonlinear (SOL 700). This property is optional. Defines what damping is to be included. This is the GE field on the PELAS entry. This property can either be a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional. Defines which degree of freedom this value is to be attached to. This can be set to UX, UY, UZ, RX, RY, or RZ. This property defines the setting of the C1 field on the CELAS1 e ntry. This property is required.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Element Properties Grounded Scalar Damper (CDAMP1/CDAMP1D) This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on th e Element Properties form when the following options are chosen. Action Dimension Type Option(s) Topologies Create 0D Grounded Damper Point/1 Use this form to create a CDAMP1 or CDAMP1D (for SOL 700) element and a PDAMP pr operty. This defines a scalar damper element of the structural model. Only one node is used i n this method. The other node is defined to be grounded. Defines the force per unit velocity value to be used. This property is the B field on the PDAMP entry and can either be a real valueor a reference to an existing field de finition. This property is optional. Defines which degree of freedom this value is to be attached to. This property can be set to UX, UY, UZ, RY, or RZ and defines the setting for the C1 field on the CDAMP1 entry. This property is required. Number of a User Defined Coordinate system, used only for Explicit Nonlinear (SOL 700). This property is optional.

Chapter 2: Building A Model Element Properties Bush This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on th e Element Properties form and the following options are chosen. Action Dimension Type Option(s) Topologies Create 1D Bush Bar/2

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Element Properties This toggle can also be set to Node Idor CID..

Chapter 2: Building A Model Element Properties This is a list of Input Properties available. Use the menu scroll bar on the Inp ut Properties form to view these properties. Prop Name Bush Orientation System Spring Spring Spring Spring Spring Spring Stiff. Stiff. Stiff. Stiff. Stiff. Stiff. Stiff. Stiff. Stiff. Stiff. Stiff. Stiff. Constant 1 Constant 2 Constant 3 Constant 4 Constant 5 Constant 6 Freq Depend Freq Depend Freq Depend Freq Depend Freq Depend Freq Depend Force/Disp Force/Disp Force/Disp Force/Disp Force/Disp Force/Disp 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6

1 2 3 4 5 6

Damping Coefficient Damping Coefficient Damping Coefficient Damping Coefficient Damping Coefficient Damping Coefficient Damp. Freq Depend 1 Damp. Freq Depend 2 Damp. Freq Depend 3 Damp. Freq Depend 4 Damp. Freq Depend 5 Damp. Freq Depend 6

Structural Damping Struc. Damp Freq Depend Stress Recovery TranslationStress Recovery Rotation Strain Recovery TranslationStrain Recovery Rotation Description

CID specifies the Grounded Bush Orientation System. The element X,Y, and Z axes are aligned with the coordinate system principal axes. If the CID is for a cylindrical or spherical coordinate system, the grid point specified locates the system. If CID = 0, the basic coordinate system is used. Defines the stiffness associated with a particular degree of freedom. This property is defined in terms of force per unit displacement and can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition for defining stiffness vs. frequency. Defines the nonlinear force/displacement curves for each degree of freedom of the spring-damper system. Defines the force per velocity damping value for each degree of freedom. This property can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition for defining damping vs. frequency Defines the non-dimensional structural damping coefficient (GE1). This property can be either a real value, or a reference to an existing field definition for defining damping vs. frequency. Stress recovery coefficients. The element stress are computed by multiplying the stress coefficients with the recovered element forces. Strain Recovery Coefficients. The element strains are computed by multiplying the strain coefficients with the recovered element strains.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Element Properties General Section Beam (CBAR) This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on th e Element Properties form and the following options are chosen. Action Dimension Type Option(s) Topologies Create 1D Beam General Section Bar/2

Chapter 2: Building A Model Element Properties Use this form to create a CBAR element and a PBAR or PBARL property. A CBARAO en try will be generated if any Station Distances are specified. This defines a simple beam ele ment in the structural model. Note: CBAR entries will include all user input pin flags.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Element Properties Section Name Specifies a beam section previously created using the beam library Value Type Allows you to define a bar/beam section either by Dimensions (PBARL/PBEAML) or by Properties (PBAR/PBEAM). If Dimensions is choosen, the MD Nastran s built-in section library (Version 69 and later), PBARL/PBEAML, (for the standard Beam Library) or PBRSECT/PBMSECT (for an Arbitrary section) will be used to define the bar/beam. If Properties is chosen, the standard bar/beam properties, PBAR/PBEAM will be used to define the beam section. If the Dimensions Option is set to Dimensions, the Translation Parameters Version must be set to version 69 or later. Material Name Defines the material to be used. A list of all materials currently in the database is displayed when data is entered. Either select from the list using the mouse, or type in the name. This property defines the value to be used in the MID field on the PBAR entry. This property is required. Bar Orientation Defines the local element coordinate system to be used for any cross-sectional properties. This orientation will define the local XY plane, where the x-axis is along the beam. This orientation defines the value for the X1, X2, X3, or G0 fields on the CBAR entry. This property is required. Value Type Specifies how the bar orientation is defined: Vector Specified using a vector Node Id Specified using an existing node in the beam XY plane

When the value type is Vector, it is always input in either the Patran global or some other Patran user defined coordinate system (i.e. <0 1 0 Coord 5>). Reference Coordinates Specifies the MD Nastran coordinate system in which the ba r orientation vector will be written to the CBAR entry: Analysis - Displacement Coordinate System at GA Coord 0 - Basic Coordinate System If Analysis is specified, a G will be written to the first position of the OFFT value on the CBAR entry. If Coord 0 is specified, a B will be written. Note: The reference coordinate system specified does not affect how the input is interpreted within Patran. Only how it is written to the CBAR entry.

Chapter 2: Building A Model Element Properties Offset @ Node 1 Offset @ Node 2 Value Type Reference Coordinates Pinned DOFs @ Node 1 Pinned DOFs @ Node 2 Area Inertia 1,1 Inertia 2,2 Inertia 2,1 Defines the offset from the nodes to the actual centroids of the beam cross section. These orientations are defined as vectors. These properties, after any necessary transformations, become the W1A, W2A, W3A, W1B, W2B, and W3B fields on the CBAR entry. These properties are optional. Specifies how the bar orientation is defined: Vector Specified using a vector

This is the only method available. The Reference Coordinate System controls how the vector input is interpreted in Patran. Specifies the MD Nastran coordinate system in which the offset vectors will be written to the CBAR entry and how the vector input will be interpreted in Patran: Analysis - Displacement Coordinate Systems at GA and GB Element - Element Coordinate System If Analysis is specified, a G will be written to the second or third position of the OFFT value on the CBAR entry. Within Patran, the vector will be interpreted to be in either the Patran global or some other Patran user defined coordinate system (i.e. <0 1 0 Coord 5>). If Element is specified, an E will be written to the second or third position of the OFFT value on the CBAR entry. Within Patran, the vector will be interpreted to be in the Element coordinate system. These degrees of freedom are in the element local coordinate system. Values that can be specified are UX, UY, UZ, RX, RY, RZ, or any combination. These properties are used to remove connections between the node and selected degrees of freedom at

the two ends of the beam. This option is commonly used to create a pin connection by specifying RX, RY, and RZ to be released. Defines the setting of the PA and PB fields on the CBAR record. These properties are optional. Defines the cross-sectional area of the element. This is the A field on the PBAR entry. This value can be either real values or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is required. Defines the various area moments of inertia of the cross section. These are the I1, I2, and I12 fields on the PBAR entry. These values can be either real values or references to existing field definitions. These values are optional.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Element Properties Torsional Constant Shear Stiff, Y Shear Stiff, Z Nonstructural Mass Y Z Y Z Y Z Y Z of of of of of of of of Point Point Point Point Point Point Point Point C C D D E E F F

[Contact Beam Radius] [Station Distances] Create Sections, I C L ..., Beam Library Defines the torsional stiffness of the beam. This is the J field on the PBAR entry. This value can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional. Defines the shear stiffness values. These are the K1 and K2 fields on the PBAR entry. These values can be either real value or references to existing field definitions. This property is optional. Defines mass not included in the mass derived from the material of the element. This is defined in terms of mass per unit length of the beam. This is the NSM field on the PBAR entry. This value can be either a real value or reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional. Indicates the stress recovery. They define the Y and Z coordinates of the stress recovery points across the section of the beam, as defined in the local element coordinate system. These are the C1, C2, D1, D2, E1, E2, F1, and F2 fields on the PBAR entry. These values can be either real values or references to existing field definitions. These properties are optional. This allows the equivalent radius for beam-to-beam contact to be different for each beam cross section. The MD Nastran entry BCBMRAD is written to the .bdf file. The BCBMRAD entry format is different for SOL 400 and SOL 600. Defines up to 6 points along each bar element. Values specified are fractions of the beam length. Therefore, these values are in the range of 0. to 1. This defines the X1 and X6 fields on the CBARAO entry. The SCALE field on the CBARAO entry is always set to FR. The alternate format for the CBARAO entry is not supported. These values are real values. These properties are optional.

Activates the Beam Library forms. These forms will allow the user to define beam properties by choosing a standard cross section type and inputing dimensions.

Chapter 2: Building A Model Element Properties P-Formulation General Beam (CBEAM) This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on th e Element Properties form and the following options are chosen. Action Dimension Type Option(s) Topologies Create 1D Beam General Section Bar/2, Bar/3 P-Formulation Bar/4 Use this form to create a CBEAM element and a PBEAM or PBEAML property. This for m defines a simple beam element in the structural model for an adaptive, p-element analysis. Note: Patran will check the element associativity to other elements sharing this property set and will not export user defined pin flags for nodes which are shared by two beams sharing the same node.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Element Properties Defines the local element coordinate system to be used for any cross-sectional p roperties. This orientation will define the local XY plane, where the x-axis is along the beam, and this orientat ion vector, which can be defined as either a vector or a reference to an existing node, is in the XY plane. This def ines the value for the X1, X2, X3, orG0 fields on the CBAR entry. This property is required. Allows a beam section previously created usingthe beam library to be selected. When a beam section is chosen and the Associate Beam Section option is toggled, the cross sectional properties need not be input on this Input Properties form. Defines the material to be used. A list of all materials currently in the database is displayed when data is entered. Either select from the list using the mouse, or type in the name. This property defines the valueto be used in the MID field on the PBAR entry. This property is required. Allows a user to define a bar/beam section either by Dimensions (PBARL/PBEAML) or by Properties (PBAR/PBEAM). If Dimensions is choosen, the MD Nastran s built-in section library (Version 69 and later), PBARL/PBEAML, will be used to define the bar/beam. If Properties ischosen, the standard bar/beam properties, PBAR/PBEAM will be used to define the beam section. If the Dimensions Option is set to Dimensions, the Translation Parameters Version must be set to version 69 or later. Defines the offset from the nodes to the actual centroids of the beam cross section. These orientations are defined as vectors. These properties, after any necessary transformations, become the W1A, W2A, W3A, W1B, W2B, and W3B fields on the CBEAM entry. On the CBEAM entry, these values are always in the displacement coordinate a

system specified such as <0 1 0 Coord 5>. These properties are optional. Activates the Beam Library forms. Theseforms will allow the user to define beam properties by choosing a standard cross section type and inputting dimensions.

Chapter 2: Building A Model Element Properties This is a list of Input Properties available for creating a CBEAM element and a PBEAM or PBEAML property that were not shown on the previous page. Use the menu scroll bar on th e Input Properties form to view these properties. Prop Name Description Area Defines the cross-sectional area of the element. This is the A field on the PBEAM entry. This value can be either real values or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is required. Inertia 1,1 Defines the various area moments of inertia of the cross section. These are the I1, I2, and I12 fields on the PBEAM entry. These values can be Inertia 2,2 either real values or references to existing field definitions. These values are optional. Inertia 2,1 Torsional Constant Defines the torsional stiffness of the beam. This is the J field on the PBEAM entry. This value can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional. Shear Stiff, Y Defines the shear stiffness values. These are the K1 and K2 fields on the PBEAM entry. These values can be either real values or references Shear Stiff, Z to existing field definitions. This property is optional. Nonstructural Mass Defines mass not included in the mass derived from the materi al of the element. This is defined in terms of mass per unit length of the beam. This is the NSM field on the PBEAM entry. This value can be either a real value or reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional. Y of Point C Indicates the stress recovery. Define the Y and Z coordinates of the stress recovery points across the section of the beam as defined in the Z of Point C local element coordinate system. These are the C1, C2, D1, D2, E1, E2, F1, and F2 fields on the PBEAM entry. These values can be either real X of Point D

values or references to existing field definitions. These properties are Y of Point D optional. X of Point E Y of Point E X of Point F Y of Point F Station Distances Defines up to 6 points along each bar element. Values specified are fractions of the beam length. Therefore, these values are in the range of 0. to 1. This defines the X1 and X6 fields on the CBARAO entry. The SCALE field on the CBARAO entry is always set to FR. The alternate format for the CBARAO records is not supported. These values are real values. These properties are optional.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Element Properties Prop Name Description Starting P-orders and Polynomial orders for displacement representation within elements. Maximum P-orders Each contains a list of three integers referring to the directions defined by the P-order Coordinate System (default elemental). Starting Porders apply to the first adaptive cycle. The adaptive analysis process will limit the polynomial orders to the values specified in Maximum Porders. These are the Polyi fields on the PVAL entry. P-order Coord. System The two sets of three integer p-orders above refer to the axes of this coordinate system. By default, this system is elemental. This is the CID field on the PVAL entry. Activate Error Estimate Flag controlling whether this set of elements participat es in the error analysis. This is the ERREST field in the ADAPT entry. P-order Adaptivity Controls the particular type of p-order adjustment from adapt ive cycle to cycle. This is the TYPE field on the ADAPT entry. Error Tolerance The tolerance used to determine if the adaptive analysis is complete. By default, equal to 0.1. This is the ERRTOL field on the ADAPT entry. Curved General Section Beam (CBEND) This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on th e Element Properties form and the following options are chosen. Action Dimension Type Option(s) Topologies Create 1D Beam Curved w/General Section Bar/2 Use this form to create a CBEND element and a PBEND property. This form defines a curved beam element of the structural model. The CBEND element has several ways to define th e radius of the bend and the orientation of that curvature.This element in Patran always uses the met hod of defining the center of curvature point (GEOM=1). An alternate property of the Curved Pipe element al so exists.

Chapter 2: Building A Model Element Properties Defines the center of curvature of the pipe bend. It is done by either specifying a vector from the first node of the element or by referencing a node. The CBEND element in MD Nastran has several ways to define the radius of the pipe bend and the orientation of that curvature. This defines the settings of the X1, X2, X3, and G0 fields of the CBEND entry. This property is required. Defines the cross-sec This property is the A This value can be eith to an existing field def optional.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Element Properties This is a list of Input Properties available for creating a CBEND element and a PBEND property that were not shown on the previous page. Use the menu scroll bar on the Input Properties form to view these properties. Prop Name Description Inertia 1,1 Defines the various area moments of inertia of the cross section. These properties are the I1 and I2 fields on the PBEND entry. These values Inertia 2,2 can either be real values or references to existing field definitions. These values are optional. Torsional Constant Defines the torsional stiffness of the beam. This is the J field on the PBEND entry. This value can be either a real value, or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional. Shear Stiff, R Defines the shear stiffness values. These properties are the K1 and K2 fields on the PBEND entry. These values can be either real values or Shear Stiff, Z references to existing field definitions. This property is optional. Nonstructural Mass Defines mass not included in the mass derived from the material of the element. This property is defined in terms of mass per unit length of the beam and is the NSM field on the PBEND entry. This value can be either real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional. Radial NA Offset Defines the radial offset of the geometric centroid from the end nodes. Positive values move the centroid of the section towards the center of curvature of the pipe bend. This property is the DELTAN field on the PBEND entry. This value can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional. R of Point C These properties are for stress recovery. They define the R and Z coordinates of the stress recovery points across the section of the beam, Z of Point C as defined in the local element coordinate system. These properties are the C1, C2, D1, D2, E1, E2, F1 and F2 fields on the PBEND entry. R of Point D

These values can be either real values or references to existing field Z of Point D definitions. These properties are optional. R of Point E Z of Point E R of Point F Z of Point F

Chapter 2: Building A Model Element Properties Curved Pipe Section Beam (CBEND) This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on th e Element Properties form and the following options are chosen. Action Dimension Type Option(s) Topologies Create 1D Beam Curved W/Pipe Section Bar/2 Use this form to create a CBEND element and a PBEND property. This defines a cur ved pipe or elbow element of the structural model. The internal pressure is defined as pa rt of the element definition because, for pipe elbows, the internal pressure affects the element stiffness.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Element Properties Defines the Defines the material to be used. A list of all materials currently in the databa se is displayed when center of data is entered. Either select from the list using the mouse, or type in the nam e. Defines the MID curvature of the field on the PBEND entry. This property is required. pipe bend. This can be done either byspecifying avector from the first node of the element or by referencing a node. The CBEND element in MD Nastran has several ways to define the radius of the pipe bend and the orientation of that curvature. Defines the settings of the X1, X2, X3, and G0 fields on the CBEND entry. This element in Patran always uses the method of defining the center of curvature point Indicates the wall thickness of the pipe. This is the t field on the PBEND entry. This value can be either

a real value or a reference to an existingfield definition. This property is required. Defines the offset from the nodes to the actual centroids of the pipecross secti on. These are the RC and ZC fields on the PBEND entry.Indicates the distance fro m the centroid of These values can either be real values or references to existing field cross sec tion to mid-wall location. This is t definitions. These properties are optional. on the PBEND entry. This value can e ither value or a reference to an existing field deThis property is required.

Chapter 2: Building A Model Element Properties This is a list of Input Properties available for creating a CBEND element and a PBEND property that were not shown on the previous page. Use the menu scroll bar on the Input Properties form to view these properties. Prop Name Description Internal Pipe Pressure Indicates the static pressure inside the pipe elbow. This is the P field on the PBEND entry. This value can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional. Nonstructural Mass Defines mass not included in the mass derived from the material of the element. This property is defined in terms of mass per unit length of the beam and is the NSM field on the PBEND entry. This value can either be a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional. Stress Intensification Indicates the desired type of stress intensification to be used. This is a character string value. This property is the FSI field on the PBEND entry. Valid settings of this parameter are General, ASME, and Welding Council. Lumped Area Beam (CBEAM/PBCOMP) This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on th e Element Properties form and the following options are chosen. Action Dimension Type Option(s) Topologies Create 1D Beam Lumped Section Bar/2 Use this form to create a CBEAM element and a PBCOMP property. This defines a be am element of constant cross section, using a lumped area element formulation.The o rientation vector can be defined as either a vector or a reference to an existing node in the XY plane .

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Element Properties Note: Patran will check the element associativity to other elements sharing this property set and will not export user defined pin flags for nodes which are shar ed by two beams sharing the same node.

Chapter 2: Building A Model Element Properties Section Name Value Type Material Name Bar Orientation Value Type Reference Coordinates Offset @ Node 1 Offset @ Node 2 Value Type Reference Coordinates Specifies a beam section previously created using the beam library Allows you to define a bar/beam section either by Dimensions (PBARL/PBEAML) or by Properties (PBAR/PBEAM). If Dimensions is choosen, the MD Nastran s built-in section library (Version 69 and later), PBARL/PBEAML, will be used to define the bar/beam. If Properties is chosen, the standard bar/beam properties, PBAR/PBEAM will be used to define the beam section. If the Dimensions Option is set to Dimensions, the Translation Parameters Version must be set to version 69 or later. Defines the material to be used. A list of all materials currently in the database is displayed when data is entered. Either select from the list using the mouse, or type in the name. This defines the setting of the MID field on the PBCOMP entry. This property is required. Defines the local element coordinate system to be used for any crosssectional properties. This orientation will define the local XY plane, where the x-axis is along the beam. This orientation defines the value for the X1, X2, X3, or G0 fields on the CBAR entry. This property is required. The orientation vector can be defined as either a vector or a reference to an existing node in the XY plane. Analysis - Analysis Coordinate System. Coord 0 - Basic Coordinate System. Defines the offset from the nodes to the actual centroids of the beam cross section. These orientations are defined as vectors. These properties, after any necessary transformations, become the W1A, W2A, W3A, W1B, W2B, and W3B fields on the CBEAM entry. On the CBEAM entry, these values are always in the displacement coordinate system of the node. In Patran, they are either global, or in a system specified such as <0 1 0 Coord 5>. These properties are

optional. Specifies that the offset is defined in terms of a vector. Analysis - Analysis Coordinate System. Element - Element Coordinate System.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Element Properties Pinned DOFs @ Node 1 Indicates whether certain degrees of freedom are to be released. By default, all degrees of freedom can transfer forces at the ends of beams. Pinned DOFs @ Node 2 By releasing specified degrees of freedom, pin or sliding type connections can be created. These degrees-of-freedom are in the element local coordinate system. The values that can be specified here are UX, UY, UZ, RX, RY, RZ, or a combination. These properties define the settings of the PA and PB fields on the CBEAM entry and are optional. Warp DOF @ Node 1 Defines a node ID where the warping degree-of-freedom constraints and results will be placed. These must reference existing nodes within Warp DOF @ Node 2 the model. They are the SA and SB fields on the CBEAM entry. These properties are optional. Area Defines the cross-sectional area of the element. This is the A field on the PBCOMP entry. This value can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional. Nonstructural Mass Defines mass not included in the mass derived from the material of the element. This is defined in terms of mass per unit length of the beam. This is the NSM field on the PBCOMP record. This value can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional. Shear Stiff, Y Defines the shear stiffness values. These are the K1 and K2 fields on the PBCOMP entry. This value can be either a real value or a reference Shear Stiff, Z to an existing field definition. This property is optional. Y of NSM Defines the offset from the centroid of the cross section to the location of the nonstructural mass. These values are measured in the beam Z of NSM cross-section coordinate system. These properties are the M1 and M2 fields on the PBCOMP entry. These values can be either real values or references to existing field definitions. These properties are optional. Symmetry Option Specifies which type of symmetry is being used to define the lumped areas of the beam cross section. This is a character string parameter.

The valid settings are No Symmetry, YZ Symmetry, Y Symmetry, Z Symmetry, or Y=Z Symmetry. This defines the setting of the SECTION field on the PBCOMP entry. This property is optional.

Chapter 2: Building A Model Element Properties Ys of Lumped Areas Defines the locations of the various lumped areas. These are defined in the cross-sectional coordinate system. These properties define the Yi Zs of Lumped Areas and Zi fields on the PBCOMP entry. These values are lists of real values. These properties are optional. Area Factors Defines the Fraction of the total area to be included in this lumped area. The sum of all area factors for a given section must equal 1.0. If the data provided does not meet this requirement, the values will all be scaled to the corrected value. These properties define the values for the Ci fields on the PBCOMP entry. These values are lists of real values. These properties are optional. Tapered Beam (CBEAM) This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on th e Element Properties form and the following options are chosen. Action Dimension Type Option(s) Topologies Create 1D Beam Tapered Bar/2

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Element Properties Use this form to create a CBEAM element and a PBEAM or PBEAML property. This def ines a beam element with varying cross sections.

Chapter 2: Building A Model Element Properties Note: Patran will check the element associativity to other elements sharing this property set and will not export user defined pin flags for nodes which are shared by two beams sharing the same node. Section Name Specifies a beam section previously created using the beam library Value Type Allows you to define a bar/beam section either by Dimensions (PBARL/PBEAML) or by Properties (PBAR/PBEAM). If Dimensions is choosen, the MSC.Nastran s built-in section library (Version 69 and later), PBARL/PBEAML, will be used to define the bar/beam. If Properties is chosen, the standard bar/beam properties, PBAR/PBEAM will be used to define the beam section. If the Dimensions Option is set to Dimensions, the Translation Parameters Version must be set to version 69 or later. Material Name Defines the material to be used. A list of all materials currently in the database is displayed when data is entered. Either select from the list using the mouse, or type in the name. This defines the setting of the MID field on the PBCOMP entry. This property is required. Bar Orientation Defines the local element coordinate system to be used for any crosssectional properties. This orientation will define the local XY plane, where the x-axis is along the beam. This orientation, after any necessary transformations, defines the value for the X1, X2, X3, or G0 fields on the CBEAM entry. This property is required. Value Type Specifies how the bar orientation is defined: Vector Specified using a vector Node Id Specified using an existing node in the beam XY plane

When the value type is Vector, it is always input in either the Patran global or some other Patran user defined coordinate system (i.e. <0 1 0 Coord 5>).

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Element Properties Reference Coordinates Specifies the MD Nastran coordinate system in which the ba r orientation vector will be written to the CBEAM entry: Analysis - Displacement Coordinate System at GA Coord 0 - Basic Coordinate System If Analysis is specified, a G will be written to the first position of the OFFT value on the CBEAM entry. If Coord 0 is specified, a B will be written. Note: The reference coordinate system specified does not affect how the input is interpreted within Patran. Only how it is written to the CBEAM entry. Offset @ Node 1 Defines the offset from the nodes to the shear centers of the beam cross section. These orientations are defined as vectors. These properties, Offset @ Node 2 after any necessary transformations, become the W1A, W2A, W3A, W1B, W2B, and W3B fields on the CBEAM entry. These properties are optional. Value Type Specifies how the bar orientation is defined: Vector Specified using a vector This is the only method available. The Reference Coordinate System controls how the vector input is interpreted in Patran. Reference Coordinates Specifies the MD Nastran coordinate system in which the of fset vectors will be written to the CBEAM entry and how the vector input will be interpreted in Patran: Analysis - Displacement Coordinate Systems at GA and GB Element - Element Coordinate System If Analysis is specified, a G will be written to the second or third position of the OFFT value on the CBEAM entry. Within Patran, the vector will be interpreted to be in either the Patran global or some other Patran user defined coordinate system (i.e. <0 1 0 Coord 5>). If Element is specified, an E will be written to the second or third position of the OFFT value on the CBEAM entry. Within Patran, the vector will be interpreted to be in the Element coordinate system.

Chapter 2: Building A Model Element Properties Pinned DOFs @ Node 1 Indicates whether certain degrees of freedom are to be rele ased. By Pinned DOFs @ Node 2 default, all degrees of freedom can transfer forces at the ends of beams. By releasing specified degrees of freedom, pin or sliding type connections can be created. These degrees-of-freedom are in the element local coordinate system. The values that can be specified here are UX, UY, UZ, RX, RY, RZ, or a combination. These properties define the settings of the PA and PB fields on the CBEAM entry and are optional. Warp DOF @ Node 1 Defines a node ID where the warping degree of freedom constrai nts Warp DOF @ Node 2 and results will be placed. These must reference existing nodes within the model. These are the SA and SB fields on the CBEAM entry. These properties are optional. Station Distances Defines stations along each beam element where the section pro perties will be defined. The values specified here are fractions of the beam length. These values, therefore, are in the range of 0. to 1. These values define the settings of the X/XB fields on the PBEAM record. These values are real values. These properties are optional. Cross-Sect. Areas Defines the cross-sectional area of the element. This property defines the settings of the A fields on the PBEAM record. This value can be either a real value, or reference to an existing field definition. This property is required. Inertias 1,1 Defines the various area moments of inertia of the cross section. T hese Inertias 2,2 defines the settings of the I1, I2, and I12 fields on the PBEAM entry. These values are real values. These properties are optional. Inertias 1,2 Torsional Constants Defines the torsional stiffness parameters. This property de fines the J fields on the PBEAM entry. This is a list of real values, one for each station location. This property is optional. Ys of C Points Defines the Y and Z locations in element coordinates, relative to the Zs of C Points shear center for stress data recovery. These define the C1, C2, D1, D2, E1, E2, F1, and F2 fields on the PBEAM entry. These are lists of real Ys of D points values, one for each station location. These properties are optio nal. Zs of D Points Ys of E Points Zs of E Points Ys of F Points Zs of F Points

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Element Properties Nonstructural Masses NSM Inertia @ Node 1 NSM Inertia @ Node 2 Y Z Y Z of of of of NSM NSM NSM NSM @ @ @ @ Node Node Node Node Y Z Y Z 1 1 2 2

Shear Shear Shear Shear

Stiff, Stiff, Relief Relief

Warp Coeff. @ Node 1 Warp Coeff. @ Node 2 Y Z Y Z of of of of NA NA NA NA @ @ @ @ Node Node Node Node 1 1 2 2

Defines the mass not included in the mass derived from the material of the element. This is defined in terms of mass per unit length of the beam. This property is the NSM field on the PBEAM entry. This is a list of real values, one for each station location. This property is optional. Specified the nonstructural mass moments of inertia per unit length about the nonstructural mass center of gravity at each end of the element. These properties are the NSI(A) and NSI(B) fields on the PBEAM entry. These values can be either real values or references to existing field definitions. These properties are optional. Defines the offset from the centroid of the cross section to the location of the nonstructural mass. These values are measured in the beam cross-section coordinate system. These are the M1(A), M2(A), M1(B), and M2(B) fields on the PBEAM entry. These values can be either real values or references to existing field definitions. These properties are optional. Defines the shear stiffness values. These properties are the K1 and K2 fields on the PBEAM entry. These values can be either real values or references to existing field definitions. These properties are optional. Defines the shear relief coefficients due to taper. These are the S1 and S2 fields on the PBEAM entry. These values can either be real values or references to existing field definitions. These properties are optional. Specifies the warping coefficient at each end of the element. These properties are the CW(A) and CW(B) fields on the PBEAM entry. These values can be either real values or references to existing field

definitions. These properties are optional. Defines the offset from the centroid of the cross section to the location of the neutral axis. These values are measured in the beam cross section coordinate system and are the N1(A), N2(A), N1(B), and N2(B) fields on the PBEAM entry. These values can be either real values or references to existing field definitions. These properties are optional. General Section Beam (CBEAM) This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on th e Element Properties form and the following options are chosen. Action Dimension Type Option(s) Create 1D Beam General Section (CBEAM)

Chapter 2: Building A Model Element Properties This set of options provides a method of creating beam models with warping due t o torsion. The capabilities of this beam properties formulation option are similar to those of the Tapered Section formulation, except that warping due to torsion is handled more conveniently.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Element Properties Note: Patran will check the element associativity to other elements sharing this property set and will not exp defined pin flags for nodes which are shared by two beams sharing the same node. Section Name Specifies a beam section previously created using the beam library Value Type Allows you to define a bar/beam section either by Dimensions (PBARL/PBEAML) or by Properties (PBAR/PBEAM). If Dimensions is choosen, the MSC.Nastran s built-in section library (Version 69 and later), PBARL/PBEAML, will be used to define the bar/beam. If Properties is chosen, the standard bar/beam properties, PBAR/PBEAM will be used to define the beam section. If the Dimensions Option is set to Dimensions, the Translation Parameters Version must be set to version 69 or later. Material Name Defines the material to be used. A list of all materials currently in the database is displayed when data is entered. Either select from the list using the mouse, or type in the name. This defines the setting of the MID field on the PBCOMP entry. This property is required. Bar Orientation Defines the local element coordinate system to be used for any crosssectional properties. This orientation will define the local XY plane, where the x-axis is along the beam. This orientation, after any necessary transformations, defines the value for the X1, X2, X3, or G0 fields on the CBEAM entry. This property is required. Value Type Specifies how the bar orientation is defined: Vector Specified using a vector Node Id Specified using an existing node in the beam XY plane

When the value type is Vector, it is always input in either the Patran global or some other Patran user defined coordinate system (i.e. <0 1 0 Coord 5>).

Chapter 2: Building A Model Element Properties Reference Coordinates Offset @ Node 1 Offset @ Node 2 Value Type Reference Coordinates Specifies the MD Nastran coordinate system in which the bar orientation vector will be written to the CBEAM entry: Analysis - Displacement Coordinate System at GA Coord 0 - Basic Coordinate System If Analysis is specified, a G will be written to the first position of the OFFT value on the CBEAM entry. If Coord 0 is specified, a B will be written. Note: The reference coordinate system specified does not affect how the input is interpreted within Patran. Only how it is written to the CBEAM entry. Defines the offset from the nodes to the shear centers of the beam cross section. These orientations are defined as vectors. These properties, after any necessary transformations, become the W1A, W2A, W3A, W1B, W2B, and W3B fields on the CBEAM entry. These properties are optional. Specifies how the bar orientation is defined: Vector Specified using a vector

This is the only method available. The Reference Coordinate System controls how the vector input is interpreted in Patran. Specifies the MD Nastran coordinate system in which the offset vectors will be written to the CBEAM entry and how the vector input will be interpreted in Patran: Analysis - Displacement Coordinate Systems at GA and GB Element - Element Coordinate System If Analysis is specified, a G will be written to the second or third position

of the OFFT value on the CBEAM entry. Within Patran, the vector will be interpreted to be in either the Patran global or some other Patran user defined coordinate system (i.e. <0 1 0 Coord 5>). If Element is specified, an E will be written to the second or third position of the OFFT value on the CBEAM entry. Within Patran, the vector will be interpreted to be in the Element coordinate system.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Element Properties Pinned DOFs @ Node 1 Pinned DOFs @ Node 2 Warping Option Warp Coeff. @ Node 1Warp Coeff. @ Node 2 Station Distances Cross-Sect. Areas Indicates whether certain degrees of freedom are to be released. By default, all degrees of freedom can transfer forces at the ends of beams. Pin or sliding type connections can be created by releasing specified degrees of freedom. These degrees of freedom are in the element local coordinate system. The values specified here are UX, UY, UZ, RX, RY, RZ, or a combination. These properties define the settings of the PA and PB fields on the CBEAM entry. These properties are optional. This specifies how contraints should be applied to the warping SPOINTs of unmatched ends within the application region (see continuity rules above). The choices available include A free B free , A fixed B fixed , A free B fixed , A fixed B free , or None . The choice of None is used to disable warping altogether for the current element property set, in which case no SPOINTs will be generated or constrained. Only unmatched ends within the application region will be eligible for constraining, and whether or not a constraint is applied will depend on the option selected, and whether the unmatched end is End A or End B of its beam element. If no selection is made for this element property, A free B free is selected by default. Specifies the warping coefficient at each end of the element. These properties are the CW(A) and CW(B) fields on the PBEAM entry. These values can be either real values or references to existing field definitions. These properties are optional. Defines stations along each beam element where the section properties will be defined. The values specified here are fractions of the beam length. These values, therefore, are in the range of 0. to 1. These values define the settings of the X/XB fields on the PBEAM record. This field consists of a set of real values separated by legal delimiters, such as white space and/or commas. If this list is entered, then the properties that follow may also be in the form of lists consisting of the same number of values. If they are in the form of a single real value, then that value will apply to all stations of the beam element. This property is optional. If it is not provided, then all other specified section properties apply to the entire beam, and lists of values will not be accepted. Defines the cross sectional area of the element. This property defines the settings of the A fields on the PBEAM record. This value can be either a real value, a list (if a list of stations has been provided), or a reference to an existing field definition, in which case a single real value will be evaluated for each element of the application region. This property is required.

Chapter 2: Building A Model Element Properties Inertias 1,1 Inertias 2,2 Inertias 1,2 Torsional Constants Ys Zs Ys Zs Ys Zs Ys Zs of of of of of of of of C C D D E E F F Points Points Points Points Points Points Points Points

Nonstructural Masses NSM Inertia @ Node 1 NSM Inertia @ Node 2 Y Z Y Z of of of of NSM NSM NSM NSM @ @ @ @ Node Node Node Node 1 1 2 2

Shear Stiff, Y Shear Stiff, Z Defines the various area moments of inertia of the cross section. These values define the settings of the I1, I2, and I12 fields on the PBEAM entry. These values are single real values that apply to the entire beam, or a list of real values if a list of stations has been provided. These properties are optional. If they are not provided, values of 0 will be assumed. Defines the torsional stiffness parameters. This property defines the J fields on the PBEAM entry. This value is a single real value that applies to the entire beam, or a list of real values if a list of stations has been provided. This property is optional. If it is not provided, a value of 0 will be assumed. Defines the Y and Z locations in element coordinates, relative to the shear center, for stress data recovery. These define the C1, C2, D1, D2, E1, E2, F1, and F2 fields on the PBEAM entry. These values are single real values that apply to the entire beam, or lists of real values if a list of stations has been provided. These properties are optional. If they are not provided, values of 0 will be assumed. Defines the mass not included in the mass derived from the material of the element. This is defined in terms of mass per unit length of the beam. This property is the NSM field on the PBEAM entry. This value is a single real value that applies to the entire beam, or a list of real values if a list of stations has been provided. This property is optional. If it is not provided, a value of 0 will be assumed.

Specifies the nonstructural mass moments of inertia per unit length about the nonstructural mass center of gravity at each end of the element. These properties are the NSI(A) and NSI(B) fields on the PBEAM entry. These values can be either real values or references to existing field definitions. These properties are optional. Defines the offset from the shear center of the cross section to the location of the nonstructural mass. These values are measured in the beam cross-section coordinate system. These are the M1(A), M2(A), M1(B), and M2(B) fields on the PBEAM entry. These values can be either real values or references to existing field definitions. These properties are optional. Defines the shear stiffness values. These properties are the K1 and K2 fields on the PBEAM entry. These values can be either real values or references to existing field definitions. These properties are optional.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Element Properties Shear Relief Y Defines the shear relief coefficients due to taper. These are the S1 and Shear Relief Z S2 fields on the PBEAM entry. These values can either be real val ues or references to existing field definitions. These properties are optional. Y of NA @ Node 1 Defines the offset from the shear center of the cross section t o the Z of NA @ Node 1 location of the neutral axis. These values are measured in the beam Y of NA @ Node 2 cross-section coordinate system. These are the N1(A), N2(A), N1(B), and Z of NA @ Node 2 N2(B) fields on the PBEAM entry. These values can be either real values or references to existing field definitions. These properties are optional. Warping due to torsion is enabled by generating MD Nastran SPOINTs to contain th e warping degrees of freedom. These SPOINTs are not actually present in the Patran database, and t here is no way to recover any results for these SPOINTs. They are created during analysis deck tra nslation, and provide the means to communicate to MD Nastran the continuity and constraint properties of the warping degrees of freedom in the model. These attributes of continuity and constraint are impli ed in the Patran database through the composition of the element properties application region and the set of options selected. These continuity and constraint attributes apply to both warping SPOINTs and end release flags. This connection of these attributes to the composition of the application region is n ew in Patran 2001r3, and represents a change in behavior from previous versions of Patran. The general ru les of implied continuity are as follows. 1. Within the application region, two beam elements are taken to be continuous i f a GRID ID at an end of one of the beam elements matches a GRID ID at one of the ends of the othe r beam element. If a third beam element in the same application region also contains the same GR ID ID, it is assumed that none of the beam elements is continuous at this location. This cond ition is known as a multiple junction . Similarly, if none of the other beam elements in the appli cation region contain a matching GRID ID, the corresponding end of the beam element is taken t o be not continuous. This condition is known as an unmatched end . 2. If warping is enabled, then all instances of beam element continuity must hav

e the matching GRID ID located at End A of one of the beam elements and at End B of the other. End A and End B positions are determined by the order of GRID IDs specified in the eleme nt connectivity array, and the positive direction of the x-axis of the element coor dinate system points from End A to End B . If warping is not enabled, this restiction does not apply. If w arping is enabled, any violation of this requirement will result in a failure to complete the translation of the finite element model. In this event, the user will have to reverse the direction of the improperly oriented beam elements and initiate the translation again. 3. When warping is enabled, all positions of beam element continuity within an a pplication region will be represented by a single SPOINT at each of these positions, which will be generated at the time of analysis deck translation and will appear on the CBEAM entries for the a ppropriate end of both of the beam elements that are continuous at each location. If any end re lease codes have been prescribed for the application region, they will not be applied at location s of beam element continuity. This is new for Patran 2001r3. For earlier versions of Patran, end r elease codes would be applied to all elements of the application region, regardless of continuity.

Chapter 2: Building A Model Element Properties 4. When warping is enabled, individual SPOINTs are generated for all beam ends that are not continuous. This applies to both multiple junctions and unmatched ends . 5. The specified end release codes are applied to all discontinuous beam element ends in the application region, whether multiple junction or unmatched end , with the applied end release codes dependent on what has been prescribed for End A and End B for the application region. If no end release codes have been prescribed for the application region, none ar e generated. 6. When warping is enabled, and for unmatched ends only (not multiple junctions) , constraints applied to the SPOINTs are specified by the warping option specified in the elemen t properties form. For example, if A free B fixed has been selected and the unmatched end is End A of its beam element, it will not be constrained. If it is End B of its element, it wi ll be constrained. The warping SPOINT for a beam element end involved in a multiple junction will n ot be constrained under any circumstances. If the user wishes to constrain warping for a beam element involved in a multiple junction, he will have to do so by splitting the applicat ion region in such a way that the beam element end becomes an unmatched end within its new application region. 7. Warping is considered to be enabled when a value has been specified for the w arping coefficient at either end of the beam element. When the user selects the Beam Library option, values for the warping coefficient get computed autamatically, and thus warping is implicit ly enabled. If the user wishes to disable warping while using the Beam Library option, he must choo se None as his Warping Option on the Input Properties ... form. General Section Rod (CROD) This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on th e Element Properties form and the following options are chosen. Action Dimension Type Option(s) Topologies Create 1D Rod General Section Bar/2 Standard Use this form to create a CROD element and a PROD property. This defines a tensi oncompressiontorsion element of the structural model.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Element Properties

Chapter 2: Building A Model Element Properties Defines the cross-sectional area of the Defines the material to be used. A list of all element. This is the A field on the materials currently in the database is displ ayed PROD entry. This value can be either a when data is entered. Either select from the list real value or a reference to an existingusing the mouse or type in the name. Thi s defines field definition. This property isthe setting of the MID field on the PROD entry . required. This property is required. Defines the coefficient to determine the torsional stress. This is the C field on the PROD entry.Defines mass not included in the This property can be either a real value or a mass derived from the material of the reference to an existing field definition. This element. This property is define d in

property is optional. terms of mass per unit length of the beam. This is the NSM field on the PROD entry. This value can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional. Defines the torsional stiffness of the beam. This is the J field on the PROD entry. This value can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Element Properties General Section Rod (CONROD) This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on th e Element Properties form and the following options are chosen. Action Dimension Type Option(s) Topologies Create 1D Rod General Section Bar/2 CONROD Use this form to create a CONROD element. This defines a tension-compression-tor sion element of the structural model.

Chapter 2: Building A Model Element Properties Defines the material to be used. A list of all materials currently in the databa se is displayed when data is entered. Either select from the list using the mouse, or type in the nam e. This defines the setting of the MID field on the CONROD entry. This property is required. Defines the crosssectional area of the element. This property is the A field on the CONROD entry. This value can be either a real value or a reference to an existing fielddefinition. This property is required. Defines mass not included in the mass derived from the material of the element. This property is definedin terms of mass per unit length of the beam and is the NSM field on the CONROD entry. This value can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional. Defines the coefficient to determine the torsional stress. This property is the C field on the CONROD entry and can either be a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional. Defines the torsional stiffness of the beam. This property is the J field on the CONROD entry. This value can either be a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Element Properties Pipe Section Rod (CTUBE) This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on th e Element Properties form and the following options are chosen. Action Dimension Type Option(s) Topologies Create 1D Rod Pipe Section Bar/2 Use this form to create a CTUBE element and a PTUBE property. This defines a ten sioncompressiontorsion element with a thin-walled tube cross section.

Defines the material to be used. A list of all materials currentlyin the database is displayed whendata is entered. This property defines the setting of the MID field on the PTUBE entry. Either select from the list using themouse, or type inthe name. This property isrequired. field definitions. The outer diameter at Node 1 property is required. The outer diameter at Node 2 Property is optional. Specifies the wall thickness of the pipe. This is the T field on the PTUBE entry. This value can either be a real value or a reference to an existingDefine s mass not included in the mass derived from the material of the element. This property is defined in terms of mass per unit length of thebeam and is the NSM field on the PRTUBE entry. This value can be either a real value or reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional. Defines the material to be used. A list of all materials currentlyin the database is displayed whendata is entered. This property defines the setting of the MID field on the PTUBE entry. Either select from the list using themouse, or type inthe name. This property isrequired. field definitions. The outer diameter at Node 1 property is required. The outer diameter at Node 2 Property is optional. Specifies the wall thickness of the pipe. This is the T field on the PTUBE entry. This value can either be a real value or a reference to an existingDefine s mass not included in the mass derived from the material of the element. This property is defined in terms

of mass per unit length of thebeam and is the NSM field on the PRTUBE entry. This value can be either a real value or reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional. Chapter 2: Building A Model Element Properties Defines the tube outer diameters at each end of the element. These are the OD an d OD2 fields on the PTUBE entry. These values can either be real values or references to existing field definition. This property is required. Scalar Spring (CELAS1/CELAS1D) This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on th e Element Properties form and the following options are chosen. Action Dimension Type Option(s) Topologies Create 1D Spring Bar/2

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Element Properties Use this form to create a CELAS1 or CELAS1D (for SOL 700) element and a PELAS pr operty. This defines a scalar spring of the structural model.

Chapter 2: Building A Model Element Properties Defines the coefficient to be used for this spring. This property is the K field on the PELAS entry and can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is required. Defines the relationship between the springdeflection and the stresses within th e spring. This property is the S field on the PELAS entry and can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional. Number of a User Defined Coordinate system, used only for Explicit Nonlinear (SOL 700). This property is optional. Defines what damping is to be included. This property is the GE field on the PELAS entry and can be either a real value or areference to an existing field definiti on. This property is optional. Defines which degree of freedom this value is to be attached to at each node. The degree of freedom can be set to UX, UY, UZ, RX, RY, or RZ. These properties define the settings of the C1 and C2 fields on the CELAS1 entry. These properties arerequired. Scalar Damper (CDAMP1/CDAMP1D) This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on th e Element Properties

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Element Properties form and the following options are chosen. Action Dimension Type Option(s) Topologies Create 1D Damper Scalar Bar/2 Use this form to create a CDAMP1 or CDAMP1D (for SOL 700) element and a PDAMP pr operty. This defines a scalar damper element of the structural model.

Chapter 2: Building A Model Element Properties Number of a User Defined Coordinate system, usedonly for Explicit Nonlinear (SOL 700). This property is optional. Defines the force per unit velocity value to be used. This is the B field on the PDAMP entry and can either be a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional. Defines which degree of freedom this value will be attached to at each node. This can be set to UX, UY, UZ, RX, RY, or RZ. These define the settings of the C1 and C2 field onthe CDAMP1 entry. These properties are required. Viscous Damper (CVISC) This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on th e Element Properties form and the following options are chosen. Action Dimension Type Option(s) Topologies Create 1D Damper Viscous Bar/2

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Element Properties Use this form to create a CVISC element and a PVISC property. This defines a vis cous damper element of the structural model. This is the C2 field on the PVISC entry. This property can either be a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional. This is the C1 field on the PVISC entry. This property can either be a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional. Gap (CGAP) This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on th e Element Properties form and the following options are chosen. Action Dimension Type Option(s) Topologies Create 1D Gap Adaptive Bar/2 Nonadaptive Use this form to create a CGAP element and a PGAP property. This defines a gap o r frictional element of the structural model for non-linear analysis.

Chapter 2: Building A Model Element Properties Defines the local element coordinate system for this element that can be defined in one of three ways. If the two end nodes of the gap are not coincident, then the Gap Orientation can reference a vector or a node ID. This local x-axis would then run between the two end nodes and the orientation information would define the local xy plane. However, if the two end nodes are coincident, then the Gap Orientation refers to an existing coordinate system definition and will be used as the local element coordinate system. This Gap Orientation defines the settings of the X1, X2, X3, G0, and CID fields on the CGAP entry. This property is required. Defines the initial openingof the gap element. Thenodal coordinates are only used to define the closure direction. This property is the U0 field on the PGAP entry and can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional. Defines the artificial stiffness of the gap when the gap is open or closed. The closed stiffness should be chosen to closely match the stiffness of the surrounding elements. The open stiffness should be approximately 10orders of mag nitude less. These properties are the Ka and Kb fields on the PGAP entry and can either be real value or references to existing field definitions. The closed stiffness property is required. The opened stiffness property is optional. Defines an initial preload across an initially closed gap. For example, this can be used for initial thread loading. If the gap is initially open, setting this value to the initial openingstiffness will improve the solution convergence. This is the F0 f ield on the PGAP entry and can either be a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This

property is optional. This is a list of Input Properties available for creating a CGAP element and a P GAP property that were not shown on the previous page. Use the menu scroll bar on the Input Properties form to view these

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Element Properties properties. Prop Name Description Sliding Stiffness Defines the artificial shear stiffness of the element when the element is closed. This is the Kt field on the PGAP entry. This property can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional. Static Friction Defines the static friction coefficient. This property is the MU1 field on the PGAP entry. This value is optional and can be a real scalar or a spatially varying real scalar field. Kinematic Friction Defines the kinematic friction coefficient. This property is the MU2 field on the PGAP entry. This value is optional and can be a real scalar or a spatially varying real scalar field. Max Penetration Defines the maximum allowable penetration. This property is the TMAX field on the PGAP entry. This value is optional and can be a real scalar or a spatially varying real scalar field. Max Adjust Ratio Defines the maximum allowable adjustment ratio. This property is the MAR field on the PGAP entry. This value is optional and can be a real scalar or a spatially varying real scalar field. Penet. Lower Bound Defines the lower bound for the allowable penetration. This is the TRMIN field on the PGAP entry. This value is optional and can be a real scalar or a spatially varying real scalar field. Friction Coeff. y Defines the coefficient of friction when sliding occurs along this element in the local y and z directions. These are the MU1 and MU2 Friction Coeff. Z fields on the PGAP entry and can be either real values or references to existing field definitions. These properties are optional. Scalar Mass (CMASS1) This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on th e Element Properties form and the following options are chosen. Action Dimension Type Option(s) Topologies Create 1D 1D Mass Bar/2

Chapter 2: Building A Model Element Properties Use this form to create a CMASS1 element and a PMASS property. This defines a sc alar mass element of the structural model. Defines the translation mass or rotational inertia value to be applied. This property is the M field on the PMASS entry and can either be a real value or a reference to an existing fielddefinition. This property is req uired. Defines which degree of freedom this value will be attached to at each node. These can be set to UX, UY, UZ, RX, RY, or RZ and defines the settings of the C1 and C2 field on the CMASS1 entry. These properties are required.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Element Properties PLOTEL This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on th e Element Properties form and the following options are chosen. Action Dimension Type Option(s) Topologies Create 1D PLOTEL Bar/2 Use this form to create a PLOTEL element. Dummy property data not required todefine the PLOTEL property set. (Scalar) Bush This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on th e Element Properties form and the following options are chosen. Action Dimension Type Option(s) Topologies Create 1D Bush Bar/2

Chapter 2: Building A Model Element Properties This toggle can also be set toNode Id or CID.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Element Properties This is a list of Input Properties available. Use the menu scroll bar on the Inp ut Properties form to view these properties. Prop Name Bush Orientation Offset Location Offset Orientation System Offset Orientation Vector Description Element orientation strategy keys off of CID specification. If CID is blank, the element x-axis lies along the line which joins the elements grid points (GA, GB Element Properties/Application Region). The X-Y plane is determined by specifying the Bush Orientation. If a vector input is given, these components define an orientation vector v from the first grid point (GA) of the element in the displacement coordinate system at that point (GA). If the Bush Orientation references a grid point ID (Value), this orientation point forms an orientation vector which extends from the first element grid point to the orientation point. If a CID ..0 is specified for Bush Orientation System, the element X,Y, and Z axes are aligned with the coordinate system principal axes. If the CID is for a cylindrical or spherical coordinate system, the first elemental grid point (GA) is used to locate the system. If CID = 0, the elemental coordinate system is the Basic Coordinate System. If no orientation is specified in any form, the element x-axis is along the line which connects the element s grid points. The material property inputs for this condition must be limited to simple axial and torsional stiffness and damping (k1,k4,B1,B4). Offset Location (0.0 ..s ..1.0) specifies the spring-damper location along the line from GRIDGA to GRIDGB by setting the fraction of the distance from GRIDGA. s=0.50 centers the springdamper. Specifies the coordinate system used to locate the spring-damper offset when it is not on the line from GRIDGA to GRIDGB. Provides the location of the spring-damper in space relative to the offset coordinate system. If the offset orientation system is -1 or blank, the offset orientation vector is ignored.

Chapter 2: Building A Model Element Properties Prop Name Description Spring Constant 1Spring Constant 2Spring Constant 3Spring Constant 4Spring Const ant 5Spring Constant 6Stiff. Freq Depend 1Stiff. Freq Depend 2Stiff. Freq Depend 3Stiff. Freq Depend 4Stiff. Freq Depend 5Stiff. Freq Depend 6 Stiff. Force/Disp 1Stiff. Force/Disp 2Stiff. Force/Disp 3Stiff. Force/Disp 4Stif f. Force/Disp 5Stiff. Force/Disp 6 Damping Coefficient 1Damping Coefficient 2Damping Coefficient 3Damping Coefficie nt 4Damping Coefficient 5Damping Coefficient 6Damp. Freq Depend 1Damp. Freq Depe nd 2Damp. Freq Depend 3Damp. Freq Depend 4Damp. Freq Depend 5Damp. Freq Depend 6 Structural DampingStruc. Damp Freq Depend Stress Recovery TranslationStress Recovery Rotation Strain Recovery TranslationStrain Recovery Rotation Defines the stiffness associated with a particular degree of freedom. This property is defined in terms of force per unit displacement and can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition for defining stiffness vs. frequency. Defines the nonlinear force/displacement curves for each degree of freedom of the spring-damper system. Defines the force per velocity damping value for each degree of freedom. This property can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition for defining damping vs. frequency Defines the non-dimensional structural damping coefficient (GE1). This property can be either a real value, or a reference to an existing field definition for defining damping vs. frequency. Stress Recovery Coefficients. The element stress are computed by multiplying the stress coefficients with the recovered element forces. Strain Recovery Coefficients. The element strains are computed by multiplying the strain coefficients with the recovered element strains.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Element Properties Spot Weld Connector (CWELD) This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on th e Element Properties form and the following options are chosen. Action Dimension Type Option(s) Topologies Create 1D Spot Weld Connector Connector

Chapter 2: Building A Model Element Properties . Note that SPOTWELD properties are created automatically (or pre-existing propert ies selected) when creating Spotwelds through the Finite Elements application. Therefore no applica tion region is required (or presented) in the element properties application when defining or modifying spotweld properties because the existence of the spotweld itself is the application region for the p roperty set.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Element Properties Fastener Connector (CFAST) This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on th e Element Properties form and the following options are chosen. Action Dimension Type Option(s) Topologies Create 1D Fastener Connector Connector

Chapter 2: Building A Model Element Properties . Note that FASTENER properties are created automatically (or pre-existing propert ies selected) when creating Fasteners through the Finite Elements application. Therefore no applica tion region is required (or presented) in the element properties application when defining or modifying fastener properties because the existence of the fastener itself is the application region for the p roperty set.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Element Properties The formula value can be any of the following: String None Douglas Huth Hi-Lok in CFRP Huth Hi-Lok in metal Huth solid rivet Note that Douglas or one of several Huth formulations can be used to calculate s tiffness values of fastener connections automatically, minimizing the need for manual calculation. Stiffness coefficients for the CFAST element are calculated in different steps. Generally, either Douglas or three derivatives of Huth formulas are used. Regardless of the selected formu la, the axial stiffness is always calculated the same way: 1 Ef ---A 4 k = ------------------l The stiffness is inserted into the KT1 parameter of the PFAST entry. The length of the fastener will be determined by summation of the thickness of the two connected shell elements. The Douglas formula is*: 1 k = --c 5 . 11 . c = ----0.8 ----+ ---------+ df 2

. ---------.. dfEf t1 E1 t2 E2 The formula according to Huth is*: 1 k = --c + . a .t1 t2 . 111 1 . c = b ..---------------.. ----------+ ----------+ -------------+ ------------. 2df ..t1 E1 t2 E22Eft12Eft2 . ab Hi-Lok in CFRP 0.6667 4.2

Chapter 2: Building A Model Element Properties ab Hi-Lok in metal 0.6667 3.0 Solid Rivet 0.4 2.2 In the case of composites, the Douglas and Huth formulas have to be used twice. First, the overall (engineering) Young s modulus has to be calculated for both directions (E11 and E2 2), which then has to be applied to the formulas. In this case, the shear stillness of the fastener is direction dependent. For composites or anisotrophic material, the material tensors of the two connected s hell elements have to be transformed into the coordinate system of the CFAST element before the Douglas o r Huth formula is applied. The resulting stiffness is applied to the KT2 and KT3 parameters on the PFAST entry. * The following symbols are used in the formulas: Symbol Meaning Ef Young s modulus of fastener df Diameter of fastener l Length of fastener, evaluated from the FE model E1 Young s modulus of first property connected to the fastener t1 Thickness of first property connected to the fastener E2 Young s modulus of second property connected to the fastener t2 Thickness of second property connected to the fastener Standard Homogeneous Plate (CQUAD4) This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on th e Element Properties form and the following options are chosen. Action Dimension Type Option(s) Topologies Create 2D Shell Homogeneous Tri/3, Quad/4 Standard Formulation Tri/6, Quad/8 Use this form to create a CQUAD4, CTRIA3, CQUAD8, or CTRIA6 element and a PSHELL property. The appropriate fields on the PSHELL entry are filled in or left blank to achieve the requested behavior.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Element Properties

Chapter 2: Building A Model Element Properties Defines the material to be used. A list of all materials currentlyin the database is displayed whendata is entered. Either select one from the list using the mouse or type in the name. This defines the settings of the MID1, MID2, MID3, and MID4 fields on the PSHELL entry. This property is required. Defines the thickness, which will be uniform over each element. This value can either be a real value or a reference to an existing fielddefinition. This property defines the T1, T2, T3, and T4 fields on the CQUAD4/8and CTRIA3/6 entries and/or theT field on the PSHELL entry. This property is Defines the basic orientation for any non-isotropic material within therequired. element. There are three ways to assign this definition: (1) reference a coordinate system, which is then projected onto the element, (2) define a vector that will be projected onto the element, or (3) define a constant angle offset from the default element coordinate system. This defines the setting of the THETA or MCID field on the CQUADi or CTRIAi entry. This scalar value can either be a constant value in degrees, a vector, or a reference to an existing coordinate system. This property is optional. Defines the mass not derived from the material of the element. This is

defined in terms of mass per unit area of the element. This is the NSM field on the PSHELL entry. This value can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Element Properties This is a list of Input Properties, available for creating a CQUADi and a CTRIAi element and a PSHELL property, that were not shown on the previous page. Use the menu scroll bar on t he Input Properties form to view these properties. Prop Name Description Plate Offset Defines the offset of the element s reference plane from the plane defined by the nodal locations. This is the ZOFFS field on the CQUAD4/8 entry and can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional. Fiber Dist. 1 Defines the distance from the element s reference plane to the bottom and top most extreme fibers, respectively. These properties define the Fiber Dist. 2 Z1 and Z2 fields on the PSHELL entry and can be either real values or references to existing field definitions. This property is optional. Nonlinear Formulation This optional property word can take on any of the three values Automatic, Large Strain, or Small Strain and is only recognized for implicit nonlinear (SOL 400) analyses. Automatic is the default if not specified and determines if large or small strain is appropriate based on the existence of an elastoplastic material constitutive model and/or if the elements are contained in a contact body. If appropriate, the PSHLN1/2 entry is written for this property set. Large Strain forces the PSHLN1/2 entry to be written, regardless; and Small Strain forces it not to be written, regardless. In addition, if large strain is forced or detected, the usage of NLMOPTS, LRGSTRN,0 or 1 is written based on the setting on the Load Increment Parameters form when defining a Subcase. See Static Subcase Parameters for Implicit Nonlinear Solution Type, 376. Revised Homogeneous Plate (CQUADR) This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on th e Element Properties form and the following options are chosen. Action Dimension Type Option(s) Topologies Create 2D Shell Homogeneous Tri/3, Quad/4 Revised Formulation Use this form to create a CTRIAR or CQUADR element and a PSHELL property. The

appropriate fields on the PSHELL entry are filled in or left blank to achieve th e requested behavior.

159 Chapter 2: Building A Model Element Properties

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Element Properties Defines the mass not included in the mass derived from the material of the element. This property is defined in terms ofmass per unit area of the element. and this is the NSM field on the PSHELL entry. This value can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional.

Chapter 2: Building A Model Element Properties P-Formulation Homogeneous Plate (CQUAD4) This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on th e Element Properties form and the following options are chosen. Information on this form is used to c reate input for an adaptive, p-element analysis. Action Dimension Type Option(s) Topologies Create 2D Shell Homogeneous Tri/3, Quad/4,Tri/6, Quad/8, Tri/7, Quad/9, Tri/9, Quad/12, Tri/13, P-Formulation Quad/16 Use this form to create a CQUAD4 or CTRIA3 element and a PSHELL property. The appropriate fields on the PSHELL entry are filled in or left blank in order to a chieve the requested behavior.The p-formulation shell element is supported in MSC.Nastran Version 69 or later. Therefore, the MD Nastran Version in the Translation Parameter form must be set to 69.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Element Properties Defines the basic orientation for any non-isotropic material within the element. There are two ways to assign this definition: (1) reference a coordinate system, then the projected xaxis of the coordinatesystem is the material x-axis (2) define a constant angle offset from the projected x-axis of the basicsystem.This defines the setting of the THETA or MCID field on the CQUAD4 or CTRIA3 entry. Thisproperty is optional. Defines the mass not included in the mass derived from the material of the element. This property is defined in terms of mass per unit area of the element and this is the NSM field on the PSHELL entry. This value can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional. Defines the material to be used. A list of all materials currently in the database is displayed when data is entered. Either select from the list using the mouse or type in the name. This property defines the settings of the MID1, MID2, MID3, and MID4 fields on the PSHELL entry. This property is required. Defines the distance from the element s reference plane tothe top and bottom most extreme fibers respectively. These properties are the Z1 and Z2 fields on the PSHELL entryand can be either real values or references to existing field definitions. These properties are optional. Defines a uniform thickness, which will cover each element. This property defines

the T1, T2, T3, and T4 fields on the CQUAD4 or CTRIA3 entry and/or the T field on the PSHELL entry and can beeither a real value or a reference to existing field definition. This property is required. This is a list of Input Properties, available for creating a CQUAD4 and a CTRIA3 element, that were not shown on the previous page. Use the menu scroll bar on the Input Properties form to view these

Chapter 2: Building A Model Element Properties properties. Prop Name Description Plate Offset Defines the offset of the element s reference plane from the plane defined by the nodal locations. This is the ZOFFS field on the CQUAD4 or CTRIA3 entry and can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional. Fiber Dist. 1 Defines the distance from the element s reference plane to the top and bottom most extreme fibers, respectively. These properties define the Fiber Dist. 2 Z1 and Z2 fields on the PSHELL entry and can be either real values or references to existing field definitions. This property is optional. Starting P-orders and Polynomial orders for displacement representation within e lements. Each contains a list of three integers referring to the directions defined Maximum P-orders by the P--order Coordinate System (default elemental). Starting Porders apply to the first adaptive cycle. The adaptive analysis process will limit the polynomial orders to the values specified in Maximum P-orders. These are the Polyi fields on the PVAL entry. P-order Coord. System The three sets of three integer p-orders above refer to the axes of this coordinate system. By default, this system is elemental. This is the CID field on the PVAL entry. Activate Error Estimate Flag that controls whether or not this set of elements p articipates in the error analysis. This is the ERREST field on the ADAPT entry. P-order Adaptivity Controls the particular type of p-order adjustment from adapt ive cycle to cycle. This is the TYPE field on the ADAPT entry. Error Tolerance The tolerance used to determine if the adaptive analysis is complete. By default this value is equal to 0.1. This is the ERRTOL field on the ADAPT entry. Stress Threshold Value Elements with von Mises stress below this value will not participate in the error analysis. By default this value is equal to 0.0. This is the SIGTOL field on the ADAPT entry. Strain Threshold Value Elements with von Mises strain below this value will not participate in the error analysis.By default this value is equal to1.0E-8. This is the

EPSTOL field on the ADAPT entry. Standard Laminate Plate (CQUAD4/PCOMP) This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on th e Element Properties form and the following options are chosen. Action Dimension Type Option(s) Topologies Create 2D Shell Laminate Tri/3, Quad/4 Standard Formulation Tri/6, Quad/8

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Element Properties Use this form to create a CTRIA3, CTRIA6, CQUAD4, or CQUAD8 element and a PCOMP property.

Defines the basic orientation for any non-isotropic material within the element. There are three ways toassign this definition: (1) reference a coordinate system, which is then projected onto the element, (2) define a vector that will be projected onto the element, or (3) define a constant angle offset from the default element coordinate system. This property defines thesetting of the THETA or MCID field on the CTRIA3, CTRIA6 CQUAD4, or CQUAD8 entry. This scalar value can either be a constant value or a reference to an existing coordinate system. This property is optional. Chapter 2: Building A Model Element Properties Defines the material to be used. A list of all materials currently in the database is displayedwhen data is entered. Either select from the list using the mouse or type thename in. The specified material must be a laminate material in Patran. The data in this material definition defines the settings ofthe MIDi, Ti, and THETAi fields on the PCOMP entry. This property is required. Defines mass not included in the mass derived from the material of the element. This is the NSM field on the PCOMP entry. This property is definedin terms of mass per unit area of theelemen t and can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional.

Defines the offset of the element s reference plane from the plane defined by the nodal locations. This is the ZOFFS field on the CTRIA3, CTRIA6, CQUAD4, or CQUAD8 entry. This value can beeither a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Element Properties Prop Name Description Laminate Options Laminate option placed on the LAM field of the PCOMP/PCOMPG entry. No option implies all plies must be specified and all stiffness terms developed. MEM - all plies are specified but only membrane terms are computed. BEND - all plies specified but only bending terms computed. SMEAR - all plies specified, stacking sequence ignored and TS/T and 12I/T**3 terms set to zero. SMCORE - all plies specified with the last ply specifying core properties and the previous plies specifying face sheet properties. See the Nastran Quick Reference Guide for more details. Nonlinear Formulation This optional property word can take on any of the three values Automatic, Large Strain, or Small Strain and is only recognized for implicit nonlinear (SOL 400) analyses. Automatic is the default if not specified and determines if large or small strain is appropriate based on the existence of an elastoplastic material constitutive model and/or if the elements are contained in a contact body. If appropriate, the PSHLN1/2 entry is written for this property set. Large Strain forces the PSHLN1/2 entry to be written, regardless; and Small Strain forces it not to be written, regardless. In addition, if large strain is forced or detected, the usage of NLMOPTS, LRGSTRN,0 or 1 is written based on the setting on the Load Increment Parameters form when defining a Subcase. See Static Subcase Parameters for Implicit Nonlinear Solution Type, 376. Revised Laminate Plate (CQUADR/PCOMP) This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on th e Element Properties form and the following options are chosen. Action Dimension Type Option(s) Topologies Create 2D Shell Laminate Tri/3, Quad/4 Revised Formulation

Chapter 2: Building A Model Element Properties Use this form to create a CQUADR or CTRIAR element and a PCOMP property. Defines the material to be used. A list of all Defines mass not included in the mass materials currently in the database is displayed derived from the material of the when data is entered. Either select from the list element. This is the NSM field on the using the mouse or type in the name. The specified PCOMP entry. This property is defined material must be a laminate material in Patran. The in mass per unit area, of the element. data in this material definition defines the settings of This value can be either a real value or the MIDi, Ti, and THETAi fields on the PCOMP a reference to an existing field entry. This property is required. definition. This property is optional. Defines the basic orientation for any non-isotropic material within the element. There are three ways to assign this definition: (1) reference a coordinate system, which is then projected onto the element, (2) define a vector that will be projected onto the element, or (3) def ine a constant angle offset from the default element coordinate system. This defines the setting of t he THETA or MCID field on the CTRIAR or CQUADR entry. This scalar value can either be a cons tant value or a reference to an existing coordinate system. This property is optional. See Standard Laminate Plate (CQUAD4/PCOMP), 163 for a description of the SOL 400 Laminate and Nonlinear Formulation options.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Element Properties Standard Equivalent Section Plate (CQUAD4) This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on th e Element Properties form and the following options are chosen. Action Dimension Type Option(s) Topologies Create 2D Shell Equivalent Section Tri/3, Quad/4 Standard Formulation Tri/6, Quad/8 Use this form to create a CTRIA3, CTRIA6, CQUAD4, or CQUAD8 element and a PSHELL property. The appropriate fields on the PSHELL entry are filled in or left blank in order to achieve the requested behavior.

Chapter 2: Building A Model Element Properties Defines the materials to be used to describe the membrane, bending, shear, and c oupling behavior of the element. A list of all materials currently in the database is displayed w hen data is entered. These properties define the settings of the MID1, MID2, MID3, and MID4 fields on the PSHELL entry. Either select from the list using the mouse or type in the name. These pr operties are optional. Defines the uniform thickness for each element. This property defines thesetting of the Ti, T2, T3, and T4 fields on the CTRIA3, CTRIA6, CQUAD4, or CQUAD8 entry and/or the T field on the PSHELL entry. This value can be eithera real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is required. Defines the basic orientation for any non-isotropic material within the element. There are three ways toassign this definition: (1) reference a coordinate system, which is then projected onto the element, (2) define a vector that will be projected onto the element, or (3) define a constant angle offset from the default element coordinate system. This definesthe setting of the THETA fiel d on the CTRIA3, CTRIA6, CQUAD4, or CQUAD8 entry. This scalar value can be either a constant value or a reference to an existing coordinate system. This property is optional. This is a list of Input Properties available for creating a CTRIA3, CTRIA6, CQUA D4, or CQUAD8

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Element Properties element and a PSHELL property that were not shown on the previous page. Use the menu scroll bar on the Input Properties form to view these properties. Prop Name Description Bending Stiffness Defines the bending stiffness parameter. This is the 12I/T3 field on the PSHELL entry. This value can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional. Thickness Ratio Defines the ratio of transverse shear thickness to the membrane thickness. This property is the TS/T field on the PSHELL entry. This value can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional. Nonstructural Mass Defines mass not included in the mass derived from the material of the element. This is defined in terms of mass per unit area of the element. This property is the NSM field on the PSHELL entry. This value can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional. Plate Offset Defines the offset of the element s reference plane from the plane defined by the nodal locations. This property is the ZOFFS field on the CTRIA3, CTRIA6, CQUAD4, or CQUAD8 entry. This value can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional. Fiber Distance 1 Defines the distance from the element s reference plane to the top and bottom most extreme fibers, respectively. These properties are the Z1 Fiber Distance 2 and Z2 fields on the PSHELL entry. These values can be either real values or references to existing field definitions. These properties are optional. Nonlinear Formulation This optional property word can take on any of the three values Automatic, Large Strain, or Small Strain and is only recognized for implicit nonlinear (SOL 400) analyses. Automatic is the default if not specified and determines if large or small strain is appropriate based on the existence of an elastoplastic material constitutive model and/or if the elements are contained in a contact body. If appropriate, the PSHLN1/2 entry is written for this property set. Large Strain forces the PSHLN1/2 entry to be written, regardless; and Small Strain forces it not to be written, regardless. In addition, if large strain is forced or detected, the usage of NLMOPTS, LRGSTRN,0 or 1 is written based on the setting on the Load Increment Parameters form when defining a Subcase. See Static Subcase Parameters for Implicit Nonlinear Solution Type, 376.

Chapter 2: Building A Model Element Properties Revised Equivalent Section Plate (CQUADR) This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on th e Element Properties form and the following options are chosen. Action Dimension Type Option(s) Topologies Create 2D Shell Equivalent Section Tri/3, Quad/4 Revised Formulation Use this form to create a CTRIAR or CQUADR element and a PSHELL property. The appropriate fields on the PSHELL entry are filled in or left blank in order to a chieve the requested behavior.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Element Properties Defines the materials to be used to describe the membrane, bending, shear, and c oupling behavior of the element. A list of all materials currently in the database is di splayed when data is entered. These properties define the settings of the MID1, MID2, MID3, and MID4 fields, on the PSHELL entry. Either select from the list using the mouse or type in the name. T hese properties Defines the uniform thickness, which will be Defines the basic orientation for any non used for each element. This property isotropic material within the element. There defines the setting of the Ti, T2, T3, and T4 are three ways to assign this definition: (1) fields on the CTRIAR or CQUADR entry reference a coordinate system which is then and/or the T field on the PSHELL entry. projected onto the element, (2) define a This value can be either a real value or a vector that will be projected onto the references to an existing field definition. element, or (3) define a constant angle offset This property is required. from the default element coordinate system. This property defines the setting of theTHETA field on the CQUADR or CTRIAR entry. This scalar value can either be a constant value or a reference to an existingcoordinate system. This property is optional. are optional.

Chapter 2: Building A Model Element Properties This is a list of Input Properties available for creating a CTRIAR or CQUADR ele ment and a PSHELL property that were not shown on the previous page. Use the menu scroll bar on th e Input Properties form to view these properties. Prop Name Description Bending Stiffness Defines the bending stiffness parameter. This property is the 12I/T3 field on the PSHELL entry. This value can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional. Thickness Ratio Defines the ratio of transverse shear thickness to the membrane thickness. This is the TS/T field on the PSHELL entry. This value can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional. Nonstructural Mass Defines mass not included in the mass derived from the material of the element. This property is defined in terms of mass per unit area of the element. This is the NSM field on the PSHELL entry. This value can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional. Fiber Distance 1 Defines the distance from the element s reference plane to the top and bottom most extreme fibers respectively. These properties are the Z1 Fiber Distance 2 and Z2 fields on the PSHELL entry. These values can be either real values or references to existing field definitions. These properties are optional. Nonlinear Formulation This optional property word can take on any of the three values Automatic, Large Strain, or Small Strain and is only recognized for implicit nonlinear (SOL 400) analyses. Automatic is the default if not specified and determines if large or small strain is appropriate based on the existence of an elastoplastic material constitutive model and/or if the elements are contained in a contact body. If appropriate, the PSHLN1/2 entry is written for this property set. Large Strain forces the PSHLN1/2 entry to be written, regardless; and Small Strain forces it not to be written, regardless. In addition, if large strain is forced or detected, the usage of NLMOPTS, LRGSTRN,0 or 1 is written based on the setting on the Load Increment Parameters form when defining a Subcase. See Static Subcase Parameters for Implicit Nonlinear Solution Type, 376.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Element Properties P-Formulation Equivalent Section Plate (CQUAD4) This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on th e Element Properties form and the following options are chosen. Information on this form is used to c reate input for an adaptive, p-element analysis. Action Dimension Type Option(s) Topologies Create 2D Shell Equivalent Section Tri/3, Quad/4, Tri/6, Quad/8, Tri/7, Quad/9, P-Formulation Tri/9, Quad/12, Tri/13, Quad/16 Use this form to create a CQUAD4, or CTRIA3 element and a PSHELL property. The appropriate fields on the PSHELL entry are filled in or left blank in order to a chieve the requested behavior. The p-formulation shell element is supported in MSC.Nastran Version 69 or later. Therefore, the MSC.Nastran Version in the Translation Parameter form must be set to 69.

Chapter 2: Building A Model Element Properties Defines the materials to be used to describe the membrane, bending, shear, and c oupling behavior of the element. A list of all materials currently in the database is di splayed when data is entered. These properties define the settings of the MID1, MID2, MID3, and MID4 fields, on the PSHELL entry. Either select from the list using the mouse or type in the name. T hese properties Defines the uniform thickness, which will be used for each element. This property defines the setting of the Ti, T2, T3, and T4 fields on the CTRIAR3 or CQUAD4 entry and/or the T field on the PSHELL entry. This value can be either a real value or a references to an existing field definition. This property is required. are optional. Defines the basic orientation for any nonisotropic material within the element. There are two ways to assign this definition: (1) reference a coordinate system, then the projected x-axis of the coordinate system is the material x-axis (2) define a constant angle offset from theprojected x-axis of basic system.This property is optional. This is a list of Input Properties, available for creating a CQUAD4 and a CTRIA3 element that were not shown on the previous page. Use the menu scroll bar on the Input Properties form to view these

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Element Properties properties. Prop Name Description Bending Stiffness Defines the bending stiffness parameter. This property is the 12I/T3 field on the PSHELL entry. This value can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional. Thickness Ratio Defines the ratio of transverse shear thickness to the membrane thickness. This is the TS/T field on the PSHELL entry. This value can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional. Nonstructural Mass Defines mass not included in the mass derived from the material of the element. This property is defined in terms of mass per unit area of the element. This is the NSM field on the PSHELL entry. This value can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional. Plate Offset Defines the offset of the element s reference plane from the plane defined by the nodal locations. This is the ZOFFS field on the CQUAD4 or CTRIA3entry and can be either real value or reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional. Fiber Dist. 1 Defines the distance from the element s reference plane to the top and bottom most extreme fibers, respectively. These properties define the Z1 Fiber Dist. 2 and Z2 fields on the PSHELL entry and can be either real value or references to existing field definitions. This property is optional. Starting P-orders and Polynomial orders for displacement representation within e lements. Maximum P-orders Each contains a list of three integers referring to the directi ons defined by the P-order Coordinate System (default elemental). Starting P-orders apply to the first adaptive cycle. The adaptive analysis process will limit the polynomial orders to the values specified in Maximum P-orders. These are the Polyi fields in the PVAL entry. P-order Coord. System The three sets of three integer p-orders above refer to the axes of this coordinate system. By default, this system is elemental. This is the CID field on the PVAL entry. Activate Error Estimate Flag controlling whether this set of elements participat es in the error

analysis. This is the ERREST field in the ADAPT entry. P-order Adaptivity Controls the particular type of p-order adjustment from adapt ive cycle to cycle. This is the TYPE field on the ADAPT entry. Error Tolerance The tolerance used to determine if the adaptive analysis is complete. By default, equal to 0.1. This is the ERRTOL field on the ADAPT entry.

Chapter 2: Building A Model Element Properties Prop Name Description Stress Threshold Value Elements with von Mises stress below this value will not participate in the error analysis. By default, equal to 0.0. This is the SIGTOL field on the ADAPT entry. Strain Threshold Value Elements with von Mises strain below this value will not participate in the error analysis. By default, equal to1.0E-8. This is the EPSTOL field on the ADAPT entry. Field Point Mesh (CQUAD4/TRIA3)(Exterior Acoustics) This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on th e Element Properties form and the following options are chosen. Action Dimension Type Option(s) Topologies Create 2D Shell Field Point Mesh Tri/3, Quad/4 Use this form to create a CTRIA3, CQUAD4 elements for creating acoustic field po int mesh for an exterior acoustics analysis. No property cards are created. The mate rial referenced should be the same as that defined for the 3D solid elements and exterior acoust ic infinite elements used to define the surrounding fluid environment of the structure, although no actual materials is written. In order to recover results on these meshes, you must set the output request ACFPFR ESULT.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Element Properties Each acoustic field point mesh defined is written to a seperate section of the b ulk data using the BEGIN AFPM=id.

Chapter 2: Building A Model Element Properties Standard Bending Panel (CQUAD4) This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on th e Element Properties form and the following options are chosen. Action Dimension Type Option(s) Topologies Create 2D Bending Panel Standard Formulation Tri/3, Quad/4 Tri/6, Quad/8 Use this form to create a CTRIA3, CTRIA6, CQUAD4, or CQUAD8 element and a PSHELL property. The appropriate fields on the PSHELL entry are filled in or left blank in order to achieve the requested behavior.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Element Properties Defines the material to be used. A list of all materials currently in the databa se is displayedwhen data is entered. Either select from the list using the mouse or type in the name. This property defines the settings of the MID1, MID2, MID3, and MID4 fields on the PS HELL entry. This property is required. Defines the basic orientation for any non-isotropic material within theelement. There are three ways to assignthis def inition: (1) reference a coordinate system which is then projected onto the element, (2) define a vector that will be projected onto the element, or (3) define a constant angle offset from the default element coordinate system. This property defines the setting of the THETA or MCID field on the CTRIA3, CTRIA6, CQUAD4, or CQUAD8 entry. This scalar value can either be a constant value or a reference to an existing coordinate system. This property is optional. Defines the uniform thickness for each element. This defines the T1, T2, T3, and T4 fields on the CQUAD4/8 andCTRIA3/6 entries and/or the T field on the PSHELL entry. This value can beeither a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property isrequired. Defines the mass not derived from the material of the element. This property is defined in mass per unit area of the element and is the NSM field on the PSHELL entry. This value can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional.

Chapter 2: Building A Model Element Properties This is a list of Input Properties available for creating a CTRIA3, CTRIA6, CQUA D4 or CQUAD8 element and a PSHELL property that were not shown on the previous page. Use the menu scroll bar on the Input Properties form to view these properties. Prop Name Description Fiber Dist. 1 Defines the distance from the element s reference plane to the top and bottom most extreme fibers respectively. These properties define the Z1 Fiber Dist. 2 and Z2 fields on the PSHELL entry and these values can be either real values or references to existing field definitions. These properties are optional. Revised Bending Panel (CQUADR) This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on th e Element Properties form and the following options are chosen. Action Dimension Type Option(s) Topologies Create 2D Bending Panel Revised Formulation Tri/3, Quad/4 Use this form to create a CTRIAR or CQUADR element and a PSHELL property. The appropriate fields on the PSHELL entry are filled in or left blank in order to a chieve the requested behavior.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Element Properties Defines the material to be used. A list of all materials currently in the databa se is displayed when data is entered. Either select from the list using the mouse o rtype in the name. This property defines the settings of the MID1, MID2, MID3, and MID4 fields on the PSHELL entry. This property is required. Defines the distance from the element s reference plane to the top and bottom most extreme fibers, respectively. These properties are the Z1 and Z2 fields on the PSHELL entry. These values can be either real values or references to existing field definitions. This property is optional. Defines the basic orientation for any non-isotropic material within the element. There are three ways to assign this definition: (1) reference a coordinate system, which is then projected onto the element, (2) define a vector that will be projected onto the element, or (3) define a constant angle offset from the default element coordinate system. This defines the setting of the THETA or MCID field on the CTRIAR or CQUADR entry. This scalar value can either be a constant value or a reference to an existing coordinate system. This property is optional. Defines the uniform thickness, which will be used for each element. This defines the T1, T2, T3, and T4 fields on the CTRIAR or CQUADR entry and/or theT field on the PSHELL entry. This value can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definitions. Thisproperty is required. Defines the mass not included in the mass derived from the material of the element. This is defined in terms of mass per unit area of the element. This is the NSM field on the PSHELL entry. This value can either be real values or a reference to and existingfield definition. This property is optional.

Chapter 2: Building A Model Element Properties P-Formulation Bending Panel (CQUAD4) This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on th e Element Properties form and the following options are chosen. Information on this form is used to c reate input for an adaptive, p-element analysis. Action Dimension Type Option(s) Topologies Create 2D Bending Panel P- Formulation Tri/3, Quad/4, Tri/6, Quad/8, Tri/7, Quad/9, Tri/9, Quad/12, Tri/13, Quad/16 Use this form to create a CTRIA3, or CQUAD4 element and a PSHELL property. The appropriate fields on the PSHELL entry are filled in or left blank in order to a chieve the requested behavior. The p-formulation shell element is supported in MSC.Nastran Version 69 or later. Therefore, the MSC.Nastran Version in the Translation Parameters form must be set to 69.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Element Properties Defines the material to be used. A list of all materials currently in the database is displayed when data is entered. Either select from the list using the mouse or type in the name. This property defines the settings of theMID1, MI D2, MID3, and MID4 fields on the PSHELL entry. This property is required. Defines the basic orientation for any non-isotropic material within the element. There are two ways to assign this definition: (1) reference a coordinate system, then the projected x-axis of the coordinate system is the material x-axis or (2) define a constant angle offset from the projected x-axis of basic system.This property defines the setting of the THETA or MCID field on the CQUAD4 or CTRIA3 entry. This property is optional. Defines the uniform thickness, which will be used for each element. This defines the T1, T2, T3, and T4 fields on the CQUAD4 or CTRIA3 entry and/or theT field on the PSHELL entry and this valuecan b e either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is required. This is a list of Input Properties available for creating a CTRIA3 or CQUAD4 ele ment and a PSHELL property that were not shown on the previous page. Use the menu scroll bar on th e Input Properties form

to view these properties. Prop Name Nonstructural Mass Fiber Dist. 1 Fiber Dist. 2 Starting P-orders and Maximum P-orders P-order Coord. System Activate Error Estimate P-order Adaptivity Error Tolerance Stress Threshold Value Strain Threshold Value Chapter 2: Building A Model Element Properties Description Defines mass not included in the mass derived from the material of the element. This property is defined in terms of mass per unit area of the element. This is the NSM field on the PSHELL entry. This value can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional. Defines the distance from the element s reference plane to the top and bottom most extreme fibers, respectively. These properties define the Z1 and Z2 fields on the PSHELL entry. These values can be either real values or references to existing field definitions. These properties are optional. Polynomial orders for displacement representation within elements. Each contains a list of three integers referring to the directions defined by the P-order Coordinate System (default elemental). Starting P-orders apply to the first adaptive cycle. The adaptive analysis process will limit the polynomial orders to the values specified in Maximum P-orders. These are the Polyi fields on the PVAL entry. The three sets of three integer p-orders above refer to the axes of this coordinate system. By default this system is elemental. This is the CID field on the PVAL entry.

Flag controlling whether this set of elements participates in the error analysis. This is the ERREST field on the ADAPT entry. Controls the particular type of p-order adjustment from adaptive cycle to cycle. This is the TYPE field on the ADAPT entry. The tolerance used to determine if the adaptive analysis is complete. By default this value is equal to 0.1. This is the ERRTOL field on the ADAPT entry. Elements with von Mises stress below this value will not participate in the error analysis. By default this value is equal to 0.0. This is the SIGTOL field on the ADAPT entry. Elements with von Mises strain below this value will not participate in the error analysis. By default this value is equal to1.0E-8. This is the EPSTOL field on the ADAPT entry.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Element Properties Standard Axisymmetric Solid (CTRIAX6) This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on th e Element Properties form and the following options are chosen. Action Dimension Type Option(s) Topologies Create 2D 2D Solid Axisymmetric Tri/3, Tri/6 Use this form to create a CTRIAX6 axisymmetric solid element. This defines an is oparametric and axisymmetric triangular cross section ring element with midside nodes.

Chapter 2: Building A Model Element Properties Defines the basic orientation for any non-isotropic material within the element. There are three ways to assign this definition: (1) reference a coordinate system, whi ch is then projected onto the element, (2) define a vector that will be projected onto the element, or (3) define a constant angle offset from the default element coordina tesystem. This defines the setting of the TH field on the CTRIAX6 entry. This sc alar value can be either a constant value or a reference to an existing coordinate sy stem. This property is optional. Defines the material to be used. A list of all materials currently in the database is displayed when data is entered. Either select from the list using the mouse or type in the name. This defines the setting of the MID field on the CTRIAX6 entry. This property is required. PLPLANE Axisymmetric Solid (CTRIAX, CQUADX) This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on th e Element Properties form and the following options are chosen. Action Dimension Type Option 1 Option 2 Topologies Create 2D 2D Solid Axisymmetric Hyperelastic Tri/3, Tri/6, QUAD/4, PLPLANE QUAD/8 Use this form to create axisymmetric solid elements. This defines an isoparametr ic and axisymmetric cross section ring element with or without midside nodes.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Element Properties Location of stress and strain output. the this defines the STR field on the PLPLANE entry. For SOL600 solutions use the PLPLANE option and any material type. For non-SOL600 runs, use the Hypereleastic option with Mooney-Rivlin materials. 2D Axi-Symmetric Laminated Solid Composite This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on th e Element Properties form and the following options are chosen. Action Dimension Type Option(s) Create 2D 2D Solid Laminate Topologies CQUADX Use this form to create CQUADX elements and a PLCOMP property.

Chapter 2: Building A Model Element Properties Defines the material to be used. A list of all materials currently in the database is displayed when data is entered. Either select from the list using the mouse or type in the name. This property defines the PLCOMP entry to be used. This property isrequired. Defines the basic orientation for any non-isotropic materialwithin the element. There are three ways to assign this definition: (1) reference a coordinate system, which is then projected onto the element, (2) define a vector that will be projected onto the element, or (3) define a constant angle offset from the default element coordinate system. This scalar value can either be a constant value or a reference to an existing coordinate system. This property is optional. Note: Only method 3 is supported in this release. Defines element edge used as base ply orientation. Not used for axisymmetric elements

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Element Properties Standard Plane Strain Solid (CQUAD4) This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on th e Element Properties form and the following options are chosen. Action Dimension Type Option(s) Topologies Create 2D 2D Solid Plane Strain Tri/3, Quad/4 Standard Formulation Tri/6, Quad/8 Use this form to create a CTRIA3, CTRIA6, CQUAD4, or CQUAD8 element and a PSHELL property. The appropriate fields on the PSHELL entry are filled in or left blank in order to achieve the requested behavior.

Chapter 2: Building A Model Element Properties Defines the material to be used. A list of all materials currently in the databa se is displayed when data is entered. Either select from the list using the mouse or t ype in the name. This property defines the setting of the MID1 field on the PSHELL entry. T he MID2field on the PSHELL entry will be set to -1 to define plane strain behavi or. This property is required. The presence of nonstructural mass in the model The orientation of the material directions does not change the stiffness of the model. can be specified by the Material Orientation parameter value CID, Real Scalar, or Vector. Revised Plane Strain Solid (CQUADR) This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on th e Element Properties form and the following options are chosen. Action Dimension Type Option(s) Topologies Create 2D 2D Solid Plane Strain Tri/3, Quad/4 Revised Formulation Use this form to create a CTRIAR or CQUADR element and a PSHELL property. The ap propriate fields on the PSHELL entry are filled in or left blank in order to achieve the requeste d behavior.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Element Properties Defines the material to be used. A list of all materials currently in the databa se is displayed whendata is entered. Either select from the list using the mouse or type in the name. This property defines the setting of the MID1 field on the PSHELL entry. The MID2 field on the PSHELL entry willbe set to -1 to define plane strain behavior. This property is required.

Chapter 2: Building A Model Element Properties P-Formulation Plane Strain Solid (CQUAD4) This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on th e Element Properties form and the following options are chosen. Information on this form is used to c reate input for an adaptive, p-element analysis. Action Dimension Type Option(s) Topologies Create 2D 2D Solid Plane Strain Tri/3, Quad/4, Tri/6, Quad/8, Tri/7, Quad/9, Tri/9, Quad/12, Tri/13, P- Formulation Quad/16 Use this form to create a CQUAD4 or CTRIA3 element and a PSHELL property. The ap propriate fields on the PSHELL entry are filled in or left blank in order to achieve the requeste d behavior. The pformulation shell element is supported in MSC.Nastran Version 69 or later. Therefore, the MS C.Nastran Version in the Translation Parameters form must be set to 69.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Element Properties Defines the material to be used. A list of all materials currently in the databa se is displayed when data is entered. Either select from the list using the mouse, or type in the nam e. This property defines the setting of the MID1 field on the PSHELL entry. This property is requ ired. The MID2 field on the PSHELL entry will be set to -1 to define plane strain behavior. Defines the basic orientation for any non-isotropic material within the element. There are two ways Polynomial orders for displaceme nt to assign this definition: (1) reference a representation within elements. Each coordinate system, then the projected x-axis of contains a list of three integer s referring tothe coordinate system is the material x-axis the directions define d by the P-order (2) define a constant angle offset from the Coordinate System (default elemental ). projected x-axis of basic system. This defines the Starting P-orders apply to th e first adaptive setting of the THETA or MCID field on thecycle. The adaptive analysis process wi ll limit CQUAD4 or CTRIA3 entry. This property isthe polynomial orders to the values spec ified optional. in Maximum P-orders. These are the Polyi fields on the PVAL entry.

Chapter 2: Building A Model Element Properties Additional properties on the form which do not appear on the previous page are: Prop Name Description P-order Coord. System The three sets of three integer p-orders above refer to the axes of this coordinate system. By default, this system is elemental. This is the CID field on the PVAL entry. Activate Error Estimate Flag controlling whether this set of elements participat es in the error analysis. This is the ERREST field on the ADAPT entry. P-order Adaptivity Controls the particular type of p-order adjustment from adapt ive cycle to cycle. This is the TYPE field on the ADAPT entry. Error Tolerance The tolerance used to determine if the adaptive analysis is complete. By default this value is equal to 0.1. This is the ERRTOL field on the ADAPT entry. Stress Threshold Value Elements with von Mises stress below this value will not participate in the error analysis. By default this value is equal to 0.0. This is the SIGTOL field on the ADAPT entry. Strain Threshold Value Elements with von Mises strain below this value will not participate in the error analysis. By default this value is equal to 1.0E-8. This is the EPSTOL field on the ADAPT entry. Infinite (Exterior Acoustic Element)(CACINF3/CACINF4) These elements are used in exterior acoustic analysis (frequency response) and p laced on the outside of the solid mesh representing the fluid (coincident with the outside surface). The must share the same nodes as the solid mesh. They simulate the fluid proprties reaching to infinity beyond the boundary of the solid mesh representing the fluid. The surfaces that these elements connect to must be convex. However it is not necessary that the surface be smooth. They also take on the same fluid propr ties as the solid fluid mesh. Action Dimension Type Option(s) Topologies Create 2D 2D Solid Infinite Tri/3, Quad/4

Use this form to create a CACINF3, CACINF4 elements and a PACINF property. The a ppropriate fields on the PACINF entry are filled in or left blank in order to achieve the requeste d behavior.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Element Properties Interger value that defines the radialinterpolation order, which must bedefined and greater than zero. The pole of the acoustic infinite elements. This must be coorinate location defined in the global Patrancoordinate system. A node ID can alsobe sel ected graphically. Defines the material to be used. This material is generally the same material used to define the solid fluid mesh in an exterior acoustics analysis (MAT10). The samematerial should also be referenced when using acoustic field point meshes. 2D Plane Strain Laminated Solid Composite This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on th e Element Properties form and the following options are chosen. Action Dimension Type Option(s) Create 2D 2D Solid Laminate Topologies QUAD/4, QUAD/8 Use this form to create quadratic elements and a PLCOMP property.

Chapter 2: Building A Model Element Properties Defines the material to be used. A list of all materials currently in the database isdisplayed when data is entered. Either sel ect from the list using the mouse or type in thename. This property defines the PLCO MP entry to be used. This property is required. Defines the basic orientation for any non-isotropic material within the element. There are three ways to assign this definition: (1) reference a coordinate system, which is then projected onto the element, (2) define a vector that will be projected onto the element, or (3) define a constant angle offset from the default element coordinate system. This scalar value can either be a constant value or a reference to an existing coordinate system. This property is optional. Note: Only method 3 is supported in this release. Defines element edge used as base ply orientation. Not used for axisymmetric elements Standard Membrane (CQUAD4) This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on th e Element Properties

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Element Properties form and the following options are chosen. Action Dimension Type Option(s) Topologies Create 2D Membrane Standard Formulation Tri/3, Quad/4 Tri /6, Quad/8 Use this form to create a CTRIA3, CTRIA6, CQUAD4, or CQUAD8 element and a PSHELL property. The appropriate fields on the PSHELL entry are filled in or left blank in order to achieve the requested behavior.

Chapter 2: Building A Model Element Properties Defines the material to be used. A list of all materials currently in the databa se is displayed when data is entered. Either select from the list using the mouse or type in the name. This property defines the settings of the MID1 field on the PSHELL entry. This proper ty is required. Defines the mass not derived from the Defines the uniform thickness that will material of the element. This property be used for each element. This value is defined in mass per unit area of the can either be a real value or reference element and is the NSM field on the an existing field definition. This property PSHELL entry. This value can be eitherdefines the T1, T2, T3, and T4 fields on a real value or a reference to an the CTRIA3, CTRIA6, CQUAD4, or existing field definition. This property is CQUAD8 entry and/or the T field on t he optional. PSHELL entry. This property is required. Defines the basic orientation for any non-isotropic material within the element. There are three ways to assign this definition: (1)reference a coordinate system, whic h is then projected onto the element. (2) define a vector that will be projected onto the element, or (3) define a constant angle offset from the default element coordinate system . This property defines the setting of the THETA or MCID field on the CTRIA3, CTRIA6, CQUAD4, or CQUAD8 entry. This scalar value can either be a constant value or are ference to an existing coordinate system. This property is optional. Revised Membrane (CQUADR) This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on th e Element Properties

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Element Properties form and the following options are chosen. Action Dimension Type Option(s) Topologies Create 2D Membrane Revised Formulation Tri/3, Quad/4 Use this form to create a CTRIAR or CQUADR element and a PSHELL property. The ap propriate fields on the PSHELL entry are filled in or left blank in order to achieve the requeste d behavior.

Chapter 2: Building A Model Element Properties Defines the mass not derived from the material of the element. This property isdefined in terms of mass per unit area of the element and is the NSM field on the PSHELL entry. This value can be either a real value or a reference to an existingfield definition. This property is optio nal. Defines the uniform thickness that will be used for each element. This value can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property defines the T1, T2, T3, and T4 fields on the CTRIAR or CQUADR entry and/or theT field on the PSHELL entry. Thisproperty i s required. Defines the material to be used. A list of all materials currently in the database is displayed when data is entered. Either select from the list using the mouse or type inthe name. This defines the settings of the MID1 field on the PSHELL entry. This property is required. Defines the basic orientation for any non-isotropic material within the element. There are three ways to assign this definition: (1) reference a coordinate system, which i s then projected onto the element, (2) define a vector that will be projected onto the element, or (3) define a constant angle offset from the default element coordinate system. This defines the setting of the THETA or MCID field on the CTRIAR or CQUADR entry. This scalar va lue can either be a constant value or a reference to an existing coordinate system. This property is optional. P-Formulation Membrane (CQUAD4) This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on th e Element Properties

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Element Properties form and the following options are chosen. Information on this form is used to c reate input for an adaptive, p-element analysis. Action Dimension Type Option(s) Topologies Create 2D Membrane P- Formulation Tri/3, Quad/4, Tri/6, Quad/8, Tri/7, Quad/9. Tri/9, Quad/12, Tri/13, Quad/16 Use this form to create a CQUAD4 or CTRIA3 element and a PSHELL property. The ap propriate fields on the PSHELL entry are filled in or left blank in order to achieve the requeste d behavior. The pformulation shell element issupported in MSC.Nastran Version 69 or later. Therefore, the MSC .Nastran Version in the Translation Parameters form must be set to 69.

Chapter 2: Building A Model Element Properties Defines the material to be used. A list of all materials currently in the databa se is displayed when data is entered. Either select from the list using the mouse or type in the name. Thisproperty defines the setting of the MID1 field on the PSHELL entry. T his property is required. Defines the basic orientation for any non-isotropic material within theelement. There are two ways to assignthis defin ition: (1) reference a coordinate system, then the projected x-axis of the coordinate system is the material x-axis or (2) define a constant angle offset from the projected x-axis of basic system. This property defines the setting of the THETA or MCID field onthe CQUAD4 or CTRIA3 entry. Thisproperty is optional. Polynomial orders for displacement representation within elements. Eachcontains a list of three integers referring to the directions defined by the P-order Coordinate System (default elemental). Starting P-orders apply to the first adaptivecycle. The adaptive analysis proces s willlimit the polynomial orders to the valuesspecified in Maximum P-orders. Th ese arethe Polyi fields on the PVAL entry.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Element Properties Additional properties on the form which do not appear on the previous page are: Prop Name Description P-order Coord. System The three sets of three integer p-orders above refer to the axes of this coordinate system. By default this system is elemental. This is the CID field on the PVAL entry. Activate Error Estimate Flag controlling whether this set of elements participat es in the error analysis. This is the ERREST field on the ADAPT entry. P-order Adaptivity Controls the particular type of p-order adjustment from adapt ive cycle to cycle. This is the TYPE field on the ADAPT entry. Error Tolerance The tolerance used to determine if the adaptive analysis is complete. By default this value is equal to 0.1. This is the ERRTOL field on the ADAPT entry. Stress Threshold Value Elements with von Mises stress below this value will not participate in the error analysis. By default this value is equal to 0.0. This is the SIGTOL field on the ADAPT entry. Strain Threshold Value Elements with von Mises strain below this value will not participate in the error analysis. By default this value is equal to 1.0E-8. This is the EPSTOL field on the ADAPT entry. Shear Panel (CSHEAR) This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on th e Element Properties form and the following options are chosen. Action Dimension Type Option(s) Topologies Create 2D Shear Panel Quad/4 Use this form to create a CSHEAR element and a PSHEAR property. This defines a s hear panel element of the structural model.

Chapter 2: Building A Model Element Properties Defines the material to be used. A list of all materials currently in the database is displayed when data is entered. Either select from the list using the mouse or type in the name. This defines the settings of the MID field on the PSHEAR entry. This property is required. Defines the uniform thickness, which will be used for each element. This defines the T field on the PSHEAR entry. This property is required. This value can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. Defines the effectiveness factor for extensional stiffness along the 2-3 and 1-4 sides. This is theF2 field on the PSHEAR entry. This value can beeither a real value or a reference to an existingfield definiti on. This property is optional. Defines the effectiveness factor for extensional stiffness along the 1-2 and 3-4 sides. This is the F1 field on the PSHEAR entry. This value can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional. Defines mass not included in the mass derived from the material of the element. This is defined in mass per unit area of the element. This is the NSM field on the PSHEAR entry. This value can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Element Properties Additional properties on the form which do not appear on the previous page are: Nonlinear Formulation This optional property word can take on any of the three values Automatic, Large Strain, or Small Strain and is only recognized for implicit nonlinear (SOL 400) analyses. Automatic is the default if not specified and determines if large or small strain is appropriate based on the existence of an elastoplastic material constitutive model and/or if the elements are contained in a contact body. If appropriate, the PSHEARN entry is written for this property set. Large Strain forces the PSHEARN entry to be written, regardless; and Small Strain forces it not to be written, regardless. In addition, if large strain is forced or detected, the usage of NLMOPTS, LRGSTRN,0 or 1 is written based on the setting on the Load Increment Parameters form when defining a Subcase. See Static Subcase Parameters for Implicit Nonlinear Solution Type, 376. Solid (CHEXA) This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on th e Element Properties form and the following options are chosen. Action Dimension Type Option 1 Option 2 Topologies Create 3D Solid Homogeneous Standard Tet/4, Wedge/6 Laminate (HEX/8 Formulation Hex/8, Tet/10 only) P-Formulation Wedge/15, Hex/20 Hyperelastic Formulation Use this form to create a CHEXA, CTETRA, or CPENTA element and a PSOLID property or a CHEXA and a PCOMP property.

207 Chapter 2: Building A Model Element Properties

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Element Properties Defines the material to be used. A list of all materials currently in the database is displayed when data is entered. Either select from the list using the mouse or type in the name. This property defines the settings of the MID field on the PSOLID entryor references a PCOMP entry in the case of Laminated Composites. This property is required. Defines both the orientation of referenced nonisotropic materials and solid element results. This can be set to Global, Elemental, or to a specific coordinate framereference and defines the CORDM field on the PSOLID entry. The default is Global. Nonlinear stresses and strains are output in the Elemental system regardless of the setting. Defines where the output for these elements are to be reported. This property can be set to either Gauss or Grid and is the STRESS field on the PSOLID entry. This property is optional. Defines the type ofintegration network to beused. This property is the IN field on the PSOLID entryand can be set to Bubble, Two, or Three. This property is optional. Defines the integration scheme to be used. This property is the ISOP field on the PSOLID entry and can be set to Reduced or Full. This property is optional.

Chapter 2: Building A Model Element Properties Additional properties on the form which do not appear on the previous page are: Nonlinear Formulation This optional property word can take on any of the three values Automatic, Large Strain, or Small Strain and is only recognized for implicit nonlinear (SOL 400) analyses. Automatic is the default if not specified and determines if large or small strain is appropriate based on the existence of an elastoplastic material constitutive model and/or if the elements are contained in a contact body. If appropriate, the PSLDN1 entry is written for this property set. Large Strain forces the PSLDN1 entry to be written, regardless; and Small Strain forces it not to be written, regardless. In addition, if large strain is forced or detected, the usage of NLMOPTS, LRGSTRN,0 or 1 is written based on the setting on the Load Increment Parameters form when defining a Subcase. See Static Subcase Parameters for Implicit Nonlinear Solution Type, 376. P-Formulation Solid (CHEXA) This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on th e Element Properties form and the following options are chosen. Information on this form is used to c reate input for an adaptive, p-element analysis: Action Dimension Type Option(s) Topologies Create 3D Solid P-Formulation Tet/4, Wedge/6 Hex/8, Tet/10 Wedge/15, Hex/20, Tet/16, Tet/40, Wedge/24,Wedge/52, Hex/32, Hex/64 Use this form to create a CHEXA, CTETRA, or CPENTA element and a PSOLID property .

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Element Properties Defines orientation for the referenced material. This property can be set to Global, Elemental or to a user-defined coordinate systemand defines the CORDM field on the PSOLID entry. The default is Global. This property is optional. Polynomial orders for displacement representation within elements. Eachcontains a list of three integers referring to the directions defined by the P-order Coord. System (defaultelemental). Starting P-orders apply to the first adaptive cycle. The adaptive analysis process will limit thepolynomial orders to the values specified in Maximum P-orders. These are the Polyi fields on the PVAL entry. Defines the material to be used. A list of all materials currently in the database is displayed when data is entered. Either select from the list using the mouse or type in the name. Thisproperty defines the settingof the MID field on the PSOLID entry. This property is required.

Chapter 2: Building A Model Element Properties Additional properties on the form which do not appear on the previous page are: Prop Name Description P-order Coord. System The three sets of three integer p-orders above refer to the axes of this coordinate system. By default, this system is elemental. This is the CID field on the PVAL entry. Activate Error Estimate Flag controlling whether this set of elements participat es in the error analysis. This is the ERREST field on the ADAPT entry. P-order Adaptivity Controls the particular type of p-order adjustment from adapt ive cycle to cycle. This is the TYPE field on the ADAPT entry. Error Tolerance The tolerance used to determine if the adaptive analysis is complete. By default the value is equal to 0.1. This is the ERRTOL field on the ADAPT entry. Stress Threshold Value Elements with von Mises stress below this value will not participate in the error analysis. By default the value is equal to 0.0. This is the SIGTOL field on the ADAPT entry. Strain Threshold Value Elements with von Mises strain below this value will not participate in the error analysis. By default the value is equal to 1.0E-8. This is the EPSTOL field on the ADAPT entry. Integration Network Defines the type of integration network to be used. This property is the IN field on the PSOLID entry and can be set to Bubble, Two, or Three. This property is optional. Integration Scheme Defines where the output for these elements are to be reported. This can be set to either Gauss or Grid. This property is the STRESS field on the PSOLID entry. This property is optional. Hyperelastic Plane Strain Solid (CQUAD4) This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on th e Element Properties form and the following options are chosen. Information on this form is used to c reate input for a nonlinear analysis: Action Dimension Type Option(s) Topologies Create 2D 2D Solid Plane Strain Tri/3, Quad/4, Tri/6, Hyperelastic Quad/8, Quad/9 Formulation

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Element Properties Use this form to create a CQUAD, CQUAD4, CQUAD8, CTRIA3, or CTRIA6 element and a PLPLANE property. Defines the material to be used. A Identification number list of all materials currently in the of a coordinate database is displayed when data is Location of stress and strain system defining the entered. Either select from the list output. the options are GAUS

plane of deformation. using the mouse or type in the (default) or GRID. this defines

This defines the CID name. This property defines the the STR field on the PLPLANE field on the PLPLANE setting of the MID field on the entry. entry. PLPLANE entry. This property is required. Hyperelastic Axisym Solid (CTRIAX6) This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on th e Element Properties form and the following options are chosen. Information on this form is used to c reate input for a nonlinear analysis: Action Dimension Type Option(s) Topologies Create 2D 2D Solid Axisymmetric CQUADX, Hyperelastic CTRIAX Formulation

Chapter 2: Building A Model Element Properties Use this form to create a CQUADX or CTRIAX element and a PLPLANE property. Defines the material to be used. A list of all materials currently in the database isdisplayed when data is entered. Either sel ect Location of stress and strain output. the from the list using the mouse or type in the options are GAUS (default) or GRID. sname. This property defines the setting ofdefines the STR field on the PLPLANE entry. the MID field on the PLPLANE entry. This property is required.

thi

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Element Properties Hyperelastic Solid (CHEXA) This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on th e Element Properties form and the following options are chosen. Information on this form is used to c reate input for a nonlinear analysis: Action Dimension Type Option(s) Topologies Create 3D Solid Hyperelastic HEX, PENT, TET Formulation Use this form to create a CHEXA, CTETRA, or CPENTA element and a PLSOLID propert y. Defines the material to be used. A list of all materials currently in the database is displayed when data is entered. Either select from the list using the mouse or type in the name. This property defines the setting of the MID field onthe PLSOLID entry. This property is required. Location of stress and strain output. the options are GAUS (default) or GRID. this defines the STR field on the PLSOLID entry.

Chapter 2: Building A Model Element Properties Additional properties on the form which do not appear on the form above: Nonlinear Formulation This optional property word can take on any of the three values Automatic, Large Strain, or Small Strain and is only recognized for implicit nonlinear (SOL 400) analyses. Automatic is the default if not specified and determines if large or small strain is appropriate based on the existence of an elastoplastic material constitutive model and/or if the elements are contained in a contact body. If appropriate, the PSLDN1 entry is written for this property set. Large Strain forces the PSLDN1 entry to be written, regardless; and Small Strain forces it not to be written, regardless. In addition, if large strain is forced or detected, the usage of NLMOPTS, LRGSTRN,0 or 1 is written based on the setting on the Load Increment Parameters form when defining a Subcase. See Static Subcase Parameters for Implicit Nonlinear Solution Type, 376. 3D Laminate Solid (CHEXA) This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on th e Element Properties form and the following options are chosen. Action Dimension Type Option(s) Topologies Create 3D Solid Laminate HEX, PENT, TET Use this form to create CHEXA elements and a PCOMP (SOL 600) or PCOMPLS (SOL400) property.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Element Properties Defines the material to be used. A list of all materials currently in the database isdisplayed when data is entered. Eithersele ct from the list using the mouse or typein the name. This property defines the PCOMP entry to be used. This property is required. Defines element face used as base ply orientation. Defines the basic orientation for any non-isotropic material within the element. There are three ways to assign this definition: (1) reference a coordinate system, which is then projected onto the element, (2) define a vector that will be projected onto the element, or (3) define a constant angle offset from the default element coordinate system. This scalar value can either be a constant value or a reference to an existingcoordinate system. This property is optional. Note: Only method 3 is supported in this release. Defines available laminate options BEND , SMEAR , SMCORE (see MD Nastran QRG for definitions. MEM ,

Chapter 2: Building A Model Beam Modeling 2.8 Beam Modeling Modeling structures composed of beams can be more complicated than modeling shel l, plate, or solid structures. First, it is necessary to define bending, extensional, and torsional stiffness that may be complex functions of the beam cross sectional dimensions. Then it is necessary t o define the orientation of this cross section in space. Finally, if the centroid of the cross section is offset from the two finite element nodes defining the beam element, these offsets must be explicitly define d. Fortunately, Patran provides a number of tools to simplify these aspects of modeling. Cross Section Definition The cross section properties are defined on the pages General Section Beam (CBAR), 102 and Tapered Beam (CBEAM), 119. rectly into the data boxes labeled Area, Inertia i,j, Torsional large I-beam icon on these forms to access the Beam Library form. The Beam nvenient way of defining properties for standard cross sections Create Action The first step in using the beam library is to select the section icon for the p articular cross section desired (e.g. I-section).Then the dimensions for each of the components of the beam sect ion must be entered. element property forms shown on The properties can be entered di Constant, etc. or by pushing the Library forms are a much more co and are shown below.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Beam Modeling Enter the dimensions of the beam section here, referring tothe beam section icon. Current beam section as selected from the section library iconpalette. Therequired dimensions are shown. Beam section library icon palette. Select the icon representing the desired section. Calculates the beam properties based on the current dimensions and displays an image of the scaled section along with the properties. These forward and backward arrows provide access to additional beam section icons. Writes the current beam properties to a report file. Beam section name to be created. List of existing beam sections. This list can be filtered to contain only the se ction names of interest using the filter mechanism.

Chapter 2: Building A Model Beam Modeling Finally, a section name must be entered and the Apply button pushed. The other o ptions available with the beam library are documented in the Patran Reference Manual, see Beam Library (p. 475) in the Patran Reference Manual. Once one or more beam sections have been defined, these can be selected in the section data box on the element properties form. Supplied Functions I-Beam - Six dimensions -- lower flange thickness (t1), upper flange thickness (t2),lower flange width (w1), upper flange width (w2), overall height (H), and w eb thickness (t)-- allows for symmetric or unsymmetrical I-beam definition. Angle - Open section, four dimensions -- overall height (H), overall width (W), horizontal flange thickness (t1), vertical flange thickness (t2). Tee - Four dimensions -- overall height (H), overall width (W), horizontal flang e thickness (t1), vertical flange thickness (t2). Solid-Rod - Solid section, one dimension -- radius (R). Box-Symmetric - Closed section, four dimensions -- overall height (H), overall w idth (W), top and bottom flange thicknesses (t1), side flange thicknesses (t2). Tube - Closed section, two dimensions -- outer radius (R1), inner radius (R2). Channel - Open section, four dimensions -- overall height (H), overall width (W) , top and bottom flange thicknesses (t1), shear web thickness (t).

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Beam Modeling Bar - Solid section, two dimensions -- height (H) and width (W). Box-Unsymmetrical - Closed section, six dimensions -- overall height (H), overal l width (W), top flange thickness (t1), bottom flange thickness (t2), right side f lange thickness (t3), left side flange thickness (t4). Hat - Four dimensions -- overall height (H), top of hat flange width (W), bottom of hat flange width for one side (W1), thickness (t). H-Beam - Four dimensions -- overall height (H), width between inner edges of ver tical flanges (W), horizontal shear web thickness (t), and thickness of one vertical f lange (W1/2). Cross - Four dimensions -- overall height (H), vertical flange thickness (t), ho rizontal flange thickness (t2), length of free horizontal flange for one side (W/2). Z-Beam - Four dimensions -- overall height (H2), height of vertical flange betwe en as measured between horizontal flanges, length of free horizontal flange for one si de (W), thickness (t1). Hexagonal - Solid section, three dimensions -- overall height (H), overall width (W), horizontal distance from side vertex to top or bottom surface vertex along the c ommon edge (i.e., diagonal edge hypotenuse times the cosine of the exterior diagonal a ngle). Cross Section Orientation The Bar Orientation data box the y-axis of the beam cross section is oriented in lls MSC.Nastran that the cross section y-axis lies in ecting the two node points) and this vector. The n this case the y-axis lies in the plane defined by on the Input Properties form is used to define how space. By default the Value Type is Vector. This te the plane defined by the beam s x-axis (the line conn Value Type pop up menu may be changed to Node ID. I the x-axis and the selected node.

Chapter 2: Building A Model Beam Modeling When the Value Type is Vector and the Bar Orientation data box is selected the f ollowing select box appears on the screen. These select tools provide different options for defining vectors. They are disc ussed inmore detail in the Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual. These three tools define the orientation vector as the 1 (x), 2(y), or 3(z) axis of a selected coordinate system. This is a convenient way to specify the orientation when it is aligned with one of the three axes of a rectangularcoordinate system. When the system is not rectangular (e.g. cylindrical) these tools may not provide the desired definition because the defined vector does not change direction atdifferent points in space--these tool s just provide an alternate way to define a global vector. This tool may be used to define a general vector with respect to an alternate coordinate system. When this icon is picked, the select menu changesto the one on the right. These tools provide different ways to define vectors. In addition, the user is requested toselect a coordinate system in whichthis vector is defined. The simplest list processor syntax that appears in the databox for a vector in an alternate coordinate system is <x_component, y_component, z_component> coord cord_id (e.g. <1, 0, 0> coord 3). In many cases it iseasy to simply type a definition in this form into the Bar Orientation databox. After the orientation has been defined, there are two ways to verify its correct ness in Patran. The first option is in the Element Properties application. By selecting the Show Action, t

he Definition of X Y Plane property, and Display Method Vector Plot, the vectors defining the orienta tion will be shown on the model. A second option can be used when the Beam Library has been used to de fine the beam cross section. There is an option on the Display form Display>LBC/Element Property Att ributes (p. 385) in the Patran Reference Manual called Beam Display. The menu allows different display o ptions for displaying an outline of the defined cross section on the model in the correct location and orientation. Users should be aware of one difference between the Patran and MD Nastran defini tions for cross section orientation. In Patran the orientation is completely independent of the analysis coordinate system at the beam nodes. In MD Nastran, the orientation vector is assumed to be defined in th e same system as the analysis system at the first node of the beam. In Patran it is perfectly permiss ible to define the orientation in a different coordinate system from that analysis system. When the NASTRAN inp ut file is generated, the necessary transformation of this vector to the analysis system at node 1 wil l be performed.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Beam Modeling Cross Section End Offsets Two data boxes are provided on the Element Properties, Input Properties form to optionally define an offset from either node 1 to the cross section centroid (Offset @ Node 1) or fro m node 2 to the cross section centroid (Offset @ Node 2). The same select menu tools are available for defining these vectors. One difference between the orientation definition and the offset definitions, ho wever, is that for the offset the magnitude of the vector is important. Because of this, the select menu tools are usually not very convenient. Typically, offsets are defined by typing the definition (e.g <x, y, z> or <x, y, z> coord n>) into the appropriate data box. Two options are available for verifying the definitions of offsets; these option s are very similar to those for orientations. The Element Properties, Show Action will allow the end offsets to be displayed as vectors on the model. This option is not especially useful because the vector pl ot shows only the direction of the offset, not the magnitude of the offset. It is usually much more useful t o view the Beam Display menu on the Display form Display>LBC/Element Property Attributes (p. 385) in the Patran Reference Manual to select the display option with offsets. The viewport will then show th e beam displayed in both the offset and non-offset positions. Stiffened Cylinder Example Figure 2-1 shows a simple example of a circular cylinder stiffened with Z-stiffe ners. The cross section was defined by selecting the Beam Library icon on the Element Properties/Input P roperties form. The Z cross section was selected on the Beam Library form, the cross section dimension s input, a section name input, and the Apply button pushed. On the Input Properties form, the Use Beam S ection toggle is set to ON. The defined section name is selected in the [Section Name] data box. The str ing <-1.0 0. 0.> coord 1 is typed into the Bar Orientation data box to align the cross section orientat ion with the radial direction of the global, cylindrical system. Similarly, the strings <-2.0 0.0 0.0> coord 1 and <-2.0 0.0 0.0> coord 1

Chapter 2: Building A Model Beam Modeling typed into the Offset @ Node 1 and Offset @ Node 2 data boxes define the end off sets to be radially inward. 1 R T Z X Y Z Figure 2-1 Stiffened Cylinder

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Loads and Boundary Conditions 2.9 Loads and Boundary Conditions The Loads and Boundary Conditions form will appear when the Loads/BCs toggle, lo cated on the Patran main form, is chosen. When creating a load and boundary condition there are seve ral option menus. The selections made on the Loads and Boundary Conditions menu will determine which l oad and boundary conditions form appears, and ultimately, which MD Nastran loads and boundary con ditions will be created. The following pages give an introduction to the Loads and Boundary Conditions fo rm and details of all the loads and boundary conditions supported by the Patran MD Nastran Analysts Pr eference. Loads & Boundary Conditions Form This form appears when Loads/BCs is selected on the main menu. The Loads and Bou ndary Conditions form is used to provide options to create the various MD Nastran loads and bound ary conditions. For a definition of full functionality, see Loads and Boundary Conditions Form (p. 27) in the Patran Reference Manual. Options for defining slide line contact are also accessed from this main Loads and Boundary Conditions form. For more information see Defining Contact Regions, 247.

Chapter 2: Building A Model Loads and Boundary Conditions Defines the general load type to be applied. Object choices are Displacement, Fo rce, Pressure, Temperature, Inertial Load, Initial Displacement, Initial Velocity, Ve locity, Acceleration, Distributed Load, CID Distributed Load, Total Load, Contact, Initi al Temperature, Planar Rigid Wall and Init.Rotation Field. Defines what type of region is to be loaded. The available options depend on the selectedObject. The general selections can b e Nodal, Element Uniform, or Element Variable. Nodal is applied explicitly to nodes. Element Uniform defines a constant value to be applied over anentire element, element face, or e lement edge. Element Variable defines a value that varies across an entire element, element face, or element edge. Current Load Case type is set on the Load Case menu. When the Load Cases toggle located on the main menu is chosen, the Load Cases menu will appear. Under Load Case Type, select either Static or Time Dependent, then enter the name of the case, and click on the Apply button. Generates either a Static, 226 or Time Dependent, 229 Input Data form, depending onthe current Load Case Type.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Loads and Boundary Conditions The following table outlines the options when Create is the selected Action. Object Type Displacement Nodal Element Uniform Element Variable Force Nodal Pressure Element Uniform Element Variable Temperature Nodal Element Uniform Element Variable Inertial Load Element Uniform Initial Displacement Nodal Initial Velocity Nodal Velocity Nodal Acceleration Nodal Distributed Load Element Uniform Element Variable CID Distributed Load Element Uniform Element Variable Total Load Element Uniform Contact Element Uniform Initial Plastic Strain Element Uniform Initial Stress Element Uniform Initial Temperature Nodal Planar Rigid Wall * Nodal Init. Rotation Field * Nodal * For SOL 700 only. Static This subordinate form appears when the Input Data button is selected on the Load s and Boundary Conditions form and the Current Load Case Type is Static. The Current Load Case Type is set on the Load Case form. For more information see Loads & Boundary Conditions Form, 224. The i nformation on the

Chapter 2: Building A Model Loads and Boundary Conditions Input Data form will vary depending on the selected Object. Defined below is the standard information found on this form.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Loads and Boundary Conditions Defines a general scaling factor for all values defined on this form. The default value is 1.0. Primarily usedwhen field definitions are used to define the load values. Input Data in this section will vary. See Object Tables, 231 for detailed information. When specifying real values in the Input Data entries, spatial fields can be referenced. All defined spatial fieldscurrently in the database are listed. I f the input focus is placed in the Input Data entry and a spatial field is selected by clicking in this list, a reference to that field will be entered in the Input Data entry. This button will display a Discrete FEM Fields input form to allow field creation and modification within the loads/bcs application. Visible only when focus is set in a databox which can have a DFEM field reference. Defines the coordinate frame used to interpret the degree-of-freedom data defined on this form. This only appears on the form for Nodal type loads. This can be a reference to any existing coordinate frame definition.

Chapter 2: Building A Model Loads and Boundary Conditions Time Dependent This subordinate form appears when the Input Data button is selected on the Load s and Boundary Condition form and the Current Load Case Type is Time Dependent. The Current Loa d Case Type is set on the Load Case form. For more information see Loads & Boundary Conditions Form , 224 and Load Cases, 246. The information on the Input Data form will vary, depending on the s elected Object. Defined below is the standard information found on this form.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Loads and Boundary Conditions Input Data 1 Load/BC Set Scale Factor Spatial Dependence * Time Dependence Spatial Fields Time Dependent Fields Coord 0 Analysis Coordinate Frame OK Reset Trans Accel (A1,A2,A3) Rot Velocity (w1,w2,w3) Rot Accel (a1,a2,a3) When specifying real values in the Input Data entries, spatial fields can be ref erenced. All defined spatial fields currently in the database are listed. If the input focus is placed in the Input FEM Dependent Data... This button will display a Discrete FEM Fields input form to allow field creatio n and modification within the loads/bcs application. Visible only when focus is se t in a databox which can have a DFEM field reference. Defines a general scalingfactor for all values defined on this form.The default value is 1.0. Primarily usedwhen field definitions are used to define the load values. Input Data in this section will vary. See Object Tables, 231 for detailed information. When specifying time dependent values in the Input Data entries, timedependent fields can be referenced. All defined timedependent fields currently in the database are listed. If the input focus is placed in the Input Data entry and a timedependent field is selectedby clicking in this list, a reference to that field will be entered in the Input Data entry. Defines the coordinate frame to be used to interpret the degree-of-freedom data defined on this form. This onlyappears on the form for Nodal type loads. This can be a reference to any existing coordinate frame definition.

Data entry and a spatial field is selected by clicking in this list, a reference to that field will be entered in the Input Data entry.

Chapter 2: Building A Model Loads and Boundary Conditions Object Tables These are areas on the static and transient input data forms where the load data values are defined. The data fields that appear depend on the selected load Object and Type. In some cas es, the data fields also depend on the selected Target Element Type. The following Object Tables outline and define the various input data that pertains to a specific selected object: Displacement / Velocty / Acceleration Object Type Analysis Type Option Displacement Velocity Acceleration Nodal Structural Standard Creates MD Nastran SPC1 and SPCD Bulk Data for Displacement entries. All non bla nk entries will cause an SPC1 entry to be created. If the specified value is not 0.0, an SCPD en try will also be created to define the non zero enforced displacement or rotation. Phase angle specificat ions will create DPHASE entries for all corresponding non blank translational or rotational data in freq uency response analysis. Displacement, Velocity and Acceleration LBCs used in frequency response / dynami c analysis also define the RLOAD1 entries with DISP, VELOC, and ACCEL keywords, respectively. Fo r frequency response analysis, the LBCs must reference a frequency range of interest defined as a non-spatial frequency field such that a TABLEDi entry is created. The load case needs to be defined as Time/Frequency dependent to do this. Values given via this option are total enfo rced values. For relative enforced values used in SOL 400, see the description for the Relative Displaceme nt option below. Input Data Description Translations (T1,T2,T3) Defines the total enforced translational values. These are in model length units. Rotations (R1,R2,R3) Defines the total enforced rotational values. These are in radians. Translational Phase Angles Defines the phase angle for out-of-phase loading in frequency (Tth1,Tth2,Tth3) response analysis for the translational values. These are in degrees.

Rotational Phase Angles Defines the phase angle for out-of-phase loading in frequency (Rth1,Rth2,Rth3) response analysis for the rotational values. These are in degrees. Object Type Analysis Type Dimension Displacement Element Uniform Structural 3D Element Variable Applies a zero or nonzero total displacement boundary condition to the face of s olid elements. The primary use of this boundary condition is to apply constraints to p-elements; bu t it may also be used for standard solid elements. If applied to a p-element solid, the appropriate FEFACE and GMBC entries are created. If applied to a standard solid element, the appropriate SPC1 and SPCD e ntries are created. In

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Loads and Boundary Conditions frequency response analysis, the phase angles are written as DPHASE entries. See comments above for nodal displacements. Input Data Description Translations (T1,T2,T3) Defines the enforced translational displacement values. These values are in model-length units. Translation Phases Defines the phase angle for out-of-phase loading in frequency response (Tth1,Tth2,Tth3) analysis for the translational displacement values. These are i n degrees. Object Type Analysis Type Option Displacement Nodal Structural Relative Displacement Applies a zero or nonzero relative displacement boundary condition as opposed to a total magnitude. This is used in SOL 400 only with multiple steps and not applicable to other solution sequences. This LBC will be ignored if present in a referenced load case for solution sequences othe r than SOL 400. The appropriate SPC1 and SPCR entries are created. For example, if a DOF is specifie d on a SPCR with 0.0 for step 2, the relative displacement of this DOF for step 2 with respective to step 1 is 0.0. The total displacement of step 2 is 0.2 if the solution of step 1 for this DOF is 0.2. Input Data Description Relative Translations (T1,T2,T3) Defines the relative enforced translational displacement values in vector form, each value separated by a comma between the brackets <>. If no enforced translation is to be specified, the particular component should be left blank. Relative Rotations (R1,R2,R3) Defined the relative enforced rotational displacement values in vector form, each value separated by a comma between the brackets <>. If no enforced rotation is to be specified, the particular component should be left blank. Force Object Type Analysis Type Force Nodal Structural

Creates MD Nastran FORCE and MOMENT Bulk Data entries. Creates the DPHASE entrie s in frequency response analysis when specifying phase angles for out-of-phase loadin g. RLOAD1 entries are created for dynamic analysis and reference the appropriate FORCE entries. For fr equency response analysis, the force LBCs must reference a frequency range of interest defined as a non-spatial frequency field such that a TABLEDi entry is created. The load case needs to be defined as Time/Frequency dependent to do this.

Chapter 2: Building A Model Loads and Boundary Conditions Input Data Description Force (F1,F2,F3) Defines the applied forces in the translation degrees of freedo m. This defines the N vector and the F magnitude on the FORCE entry. Moment (M1,M2,M3) Defines the applied moments in the rotational degrees of freed om. This defines the N vector and the M magnitude on the MOMENT entry. Force Phase Angles (Fth1,Fth2,Fth3) Defines the phase angle for out-of-phase loading in frequency response analysis for the corresponding force components. These are in degrees. Moment Phase Angles (Mth1,Mth2,Mth3) Defines the phase angle for out-of-phase loading in frequency response analysis for the corresponding moment components. These are in degrees. Pressure Object Type Analysis Type Dimension Pressure Element Uniform Structural 2D Creates MD Nastran, PLOAD4, PLOADX1, or FORCE Bulk Data entries. Input Data Description Top Surf Pressure Defines the top surface pressure load on shell elements using a PLOAD4 entry. The negative of this value defines the P1, P2, P3, and P4 values. These values are all equal for a given element, producing a uniform pressure field across that face. Bot Surf Pressure Defines the bottom surface pressure load on shell elements using a PLOAD4 entry. This value defines the P1 through P4 values.These values are all equal for a given element, producing a uniform pressure field across that face. Edge Pressure For Axisymmetric Solid elements (CTRIAX6), defines the P1 through P3 values on the PLOADX1 entry where THETA on that entry is defined as zero. For other 2D elements, this will be interpreted as a load per unit length (i.e. independent of thickness) and converted into equivalent nodal loads (FORCE entries). If a scalar field is referenced, it will be evaluated at the middle of the application region. Object Type Analysis Type Dimension Pressure Element Uniform Structural 3D Creates MD Nastran PLOAD4 Bulk Data entries.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Loads and Boundary Conditions Input Data Description Pressure Defines the face pressure value on solid elements using a PLOAD4 entry. This defines the P1, P2, P3, and P4 values. If a scalar field is referenced, it will be evaluated once at the center of the applied region. Object Type Analysis Type Dimension Pressure Element Variable Structural 2D Creates MD Nastran, PLOAD4, PLOADX1, or FORCE Bulk Data entries. Input Data Description Top Surf Pressure Defines the top surface pressure load on shell elements using a PLOAD4 entry. The negative of this value defines the P1, P2, P3, and P4 values. If a scalar field is referenced, it will be evaluated separately for the P1 through P4 values. Bot Surf Pressure Defines the bottom surface pressure load on shell elements using a PLOAD4 entry. This value defines the P1 through P4 values. If a scalar field is referenced, it will be evaluated separately for the P1 through P4 values. Edge Pressure For Axisymmetric Solid elements (CTRIAX6), defines the P1 through P3 values on the PLOADX1 entry where THETA on that entry is defined as zero. For other 2D elements, this will be interpreted as a load per unit length (e.g., independent of thickness) and converted into equivalent nodal loads (FORCE entries). If a scalar field is referenced, it will be evaluated independently at each node. Object Type Analysis Type Dimension Pressure Element Variable Structural 3D Creates MD Nastran PLOAD4 Bulk Data entries.

Chapter 2: Building A Model Loads and Boundary Conditions Input Data Description Pressure Defines the face pressure value on solid elements using a PLOAD4 entry. This defines the P1, P2, P3, and P4 values. If a scalar field is referenced, it will be evaluated separately for each of the P1 through P4 values. Temperature Object Type Analysis Type Temperature Nodal Structural Creates MD Nastran TEMP Bulk Data entries. Input Data Description Temperature Defines the T fields on the TEMP entry. Object Type Analysis Type Dimension Temperature Element Uniform Structural 1D Creates MD Nastran TEMPRB Bulk Data entries. Input Data Description Temperature Defines a uniform temperature field using a TEMPRB entry. The temperature value is used for both the TA and TB fields. The T1a, T1b, T2a, and T2b fields are all defined as 0.0. Object Type Analysis Type Dimension Temperature Element Uniform Structural 2D Creates MD Nastran TEMPP1 Bulk Data entries. Input Data Description Temperature Defines a uniform temperature field using a TEMPP1 entry. The temperature value is used for the T field. The gradient through the thickness is defined to be 0.0. Object Type

Analysis Type Dimension Temperature Element Variable Structural 1D Creates MD Nastran TEMPRB Bulk Data entries.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Loads and Boundary Conditions Input Data Description Centroid Temp Defines a variable temperature file using a TEMPRB entry. A field reference will be evaluated at either end of the element to define the TA and TB fields. Axis-1 Gradient erence will be evaluated at Axis-2 Gradient erence will be evaluated at Defines the temperature gradient in the 1 direction. A field ref either end of the element to define the T1a and T1b fields. Defines the temperature gradient in the 2 direction. A field ref either end of the element to define the T2a and T2b fields.

Object Type Analysis Type Dimension Temperature Element Variable Structural 2D Creates MD Nastran TEMPP1 Bulk Data entries. Input Data Description Top Surf Temp Defines the temperature on the top surface of a shell element. The top and bottom values are used to compute the average and gradient values on the TEMPP1 entry. Bot Surf Temp Defines the temperature on the bottom surface of a shell element. The top and bottom values are used to compute the average and gradient values on the TEMPP1 entry. Object Type Analysis Type Dimension Temperature Element Uniform Structural 1D, 2D, 3D Element Variable This option applies only to the P-formulation elements. A TEMPF and DEQATN entry are created for the constant temperature case. A TEMPF and TABLE3D entry are created for the cas e when a spatial field is referenced. Input Data Description Temperature Defines the temperature or temperature distribution in the element. Inertial Load Object Type Analysis Type

Inertial Load Element Uniform Structural Creates MD Nastran GRAV and RFORCE Bulk Data entries.

Chapter 2: Building A Model Loads and Boundary Conditions Input Data Description Trans Accel (A1,A2,A3) Defines the N vector and the G magnitude value on the GRA V entry. Rot Velocity (w1,w2,w3) Defines the R vector and the A magnitude value on the RF ORCE entry. Rot Accel (a1,a2,a3) Defines the R vector and the RACC magnitude value on the RF ORCE entry. The acceleration and velocity vectors are defined with respect to the input anal ysis coordinate frame. The origin of the rotational vectors is the origin of the analysis coordinate frame. Note that rotational velocity and rotational acceleration cannot be defined together in the same set.In genera ting the GRAV and RFORCE entries, the interface produces one GRAV and/or RFORCE entry image for ea ch Patran load set. Initial Displacement Object Initial Displacement Type Nodal Analysis Type Structural Creates a set of MD Nastran TIC Bulk Data entries. Input Data Description Translations (T1,T2,T3) Defines the U0 fields for translational degrees of freed om on the TIC entry. A unique TIC entry will be created for each non blank entry. Rotations (R1,R2,R3) Defines the U0 fields for rotational degrees of freedom on the TIC entry. A unique TIC entry will be created for each non blank entry. Initial Velocity Object Type Analysis Type Initial Velocity Nodal Structural Creates a set of MD Nastran TIC Bulk Data entries.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Loads and Boundary Conditions Input Data Description Trans Veloc (v1,v2,v3) Defines the V0 fields for translational degrees of freedom on the TIC entry. A unique TIC entry will be created for each non blank entry. Rot Veloc (w1,w2,w3) Defines the V0 fields for rotational degrees of freedom on the TIC entry. A unique TIC entry will be created for each non blank entry. Distributed Load Object Type Analysis Type Dimension Distributed Load Element Uniform Structural 1D Element Variable Defines distributed force or moment loading along beam elements using MD Nastran PLOAD1 entries. The coordinate system in which the load is applied is defined by the beam axis a nd the Bar Orientation element property. The Bar Orientation must be defined before this Distributed Lo ad can be created. If the Bar Orientation is subsequently changed, the Distributed Load must be updated ma nually if necessary. For the element variable type, a field reference is evaluated at each end of the beam to define a linear load variation. Input Data Description Edge Distributed Load Defines the FXE, FYE, and FZE fields on three PLOAD1 entri es. (f1,f2,f3) Edge Distributed Moment Defines the MXE, MYE, and MZE fields on three PLOAD1 ent ries. (m1,m2,m3) Object Type Analysis Type Dimension Distributed Load Element Uniform Structural 2D Element Variable Defines a distributed force or moment load along the edges of 2D elements. The c oordinate system for

the load is defined by the surface or element edge and normal. The x direction i s along the edge. Positive x is determined by the element corner node connectivity. See Patran Element Libr ary (p. 341) in the Reference Manual - Part III. For example, if the element is a CQUAD4, with node connectivity of 1, 2, 3, 4. The positive x directions for each edge would be from nodes 1 to 2, 2 to 3 , 3 to 4, and 4 to 1. The z direction is normal to the surface or element. Positive z is in the direction of the element normal. The y direction is normal to x and z. Positive y is determined by the cross product of the z and x axes and always points into the element. The MD Nastran entries generated, depend on the element type. For the element variable type, a field reference is evaluated at all element nod es lying on the edge.

Chapter 2: Building A Model Loads and Boundary Conditions Input Data Description Edge Distributed Load(f1,f2,f3) For axisymmetric solid elements (CTRIAX6), the PA, PB, and THETA fields on the PLOADX1 entry are defined. For other 2D elements, the input vector is interpreted as load per unit length and converted into equivalent nodal loads (FORCE entries). Edge Distributed Moment(m1,m2,m3) For 2D shell elements, the input vector is interpreted as moment per unit length and converted into equivalent nodal moments (MOMENT entries). Contact Object Type Analysis Type Contact Element Uniform Structural This form is used to define certain data for the MD Nastran Input entries. Other data entries are defined under the Analysis Application when setting up a job for nonlinear static or non linear transient dynamic analysis. A contact table is also supported; by default, all contact bodies init ially have the potential to interact with all other contact bodies and themselves. This default behavior can be modified under the Contact Table form, located on the Solution Parameters subform in the Analysis A pplication when creating a Load Step. Preview Rigid Body Motion After defining the Input Properties you can use the Preview Rigid Body Motion to check the movement of the rigid bodies in place. This is an effective tool for verifying the direct ions for LBCs.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Loads and Boundary Conditions Slideline (SOL 400 and SOL 600) Input Description Penetration Type If the Penetration Type is One Sided, nodes in the Slave Region are not allowed to penetrate the segments of the Master Region. If Symmetric, in addition, nodes in the Master Region are not allowed to penetrate segments of the Slave Region. Static Friction Coefficient of static friction between the two surfaces. Coefficient (MU1) Stiffness in Stick FSTIF is a penalty parameter in the contact formulation. The default value (FSTIF) is usually adequate. Penalty Stiffness SFAC is a penalty parameter in the contact formulation. The de fault value Scaling Factor (SFAC) is usually adequate. Slideline Width (W1) Slideline Width is constant along the slideline and is used to determine the area for contact stress calculation. This is the Wi field on the BFRIC entry. Vector Pointing from A vector must be defined which lies in the contact plane an d points from the Master to Slave Surface Master region to the Slave region. This vector is used t o define the coordinate system on the BCONP entry and the BLSEG entries for each region.

Chapter 2: Building A Model Loads and Boundary Conditions Deformable Body (SOL 400, SOL 600, and SOL 700 ) . Friction Coefficient (MU) Define (type of contact) Boundary Type C0 Continuity Auto Detect Discontinuities Feature Angle MFD Increment Select Discontinuities... Edge Contact... Select Contact Area... Select Exclusion Region... Select Deactivation Region... Description Coefficient of static friction for this contact body. For contact between two bodies with different friction coefficients, the average value is used. Select 1) Analytic Contact, 2) Contact Area, 3) Exclusion Region, or 4) Glue Deactivation. The Contact Area and Exclusion Region are defined using MD Nastran entry BCHANGE in the .bdf file, with NODE for Contact Area, and EXCLUDE for Exclusion Region. The Glue Deactivation is defined using MD Nastran entry UNGLUE. Select either 1) Analytic, or 2) Discrete. By default, a deformable contact body boundary is defined by the free faces of its elements; this is used by the Discrete option. However, instead of using the free faces of the elements (Discrete), it is possible to use spline surfaces (2D) to represent the outer faces (element faces) of the contact bodies; this is used by the Analytic option. The Analytic option can improve the accuracy of deformabledeformable contact analysis. Using this, enforces C0-continuity at edges where the normal vector to the outer contour of the structure indicates a discontinuity. This is enabled for 3D analysis only. Select this to cause the automatic detection of any discontinuity.

If the angle between the normals of two touching (adjacent) segments of contact bodies is greater than the Feature Angle, there is a discontinuity there , and the discontinuity (at edge) is preserved. The MFD file contains the spline surfaces that were created to represent some or all of the outer faces of the contact model. Using this causes the spline surfaces to be written to an MFD file every nth increment. This file is an Patran database, and can be opened with Patran, and the spline surfaces can be compared with the contact model. See Select Deactivation Region, 242 See Edge Contact Subform, 242 See Select Contact Area, 242 See Select Exclusion Region, 242 See Select Deactivation Region, 242 Select Discontinuities Subform

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Loads and Boundary Conditions . Description Select (entity type) Choose to either select Geometry or FEM to define any disco ntinuities. Detect Discontinuities Click on this button to determine if there are any discon tinuities for the entities that define the Application Region. Define Discontinuities Select entities to define the discontinuities. Edge Contact Subform . Description Include Outside (Solid When detecting contact of solid elements (for example, CHEXA elements) Element) use this to include contact of the outside of the elements. For details refer to the BCBODY entry (defines a flexible or rigid contact body in 2D or 3D) of the MD Nastran QRG. The entry that is used for the BCBODY entry is COPTB (flag that indicates how body surfaces may contact). Check Layers (Shell For contact bodies composed of shell elements, this option menu chooses Element) the layers to be checked. Available options are: Top and Bottom, Top Only, Bottom Only. Check Layers and Ignore Thickness combination enters the appropriate flag in the 10th field of the 2nd data block. Ignore Thickness Turn this button ON to ignore shell thickness. Check Layers and Ignore Thickness combination enters the appropriate flag in the 10th field of the 2nd data block. Include Edges (Edges) Use this to specify how body surfaces may contact. There are three options, Beam/Bar, Free and Hard Shell, or Both. For details refer to the BCBODY entry (defines a flexible or rigid contact body in 2D or 3D) of the MD Nastran QRG. The entry that is used for the BCBODY entry is COPTB (flag that indicates how body surfaces may contact). Select Contact Area . Description Select (entity type) Choose to either select Geometry or FEM to define the conta ct area.

Define Contact Area Select entities to define the contact area. Select Exclusion Region . Description Select (entity type) Choose to either select Geometry or FEM to define the exclu sion region. Define Exclusion Select entities to define the exclusion region. Region Select Deactivation Region

Chapter 2: Building A Model Loads and Boundary Conditions . Description Select (entity type) Choose to either select Geometry or FEM to define the glue deactivation region. Define Deactivated Select entities to define the entities that are to be un-glue d. Entities Rigid Body (SOL 600 and SOL 700 only) The input data form differs for 1D and 2D rigid bodies. One dimensional rigid su rfaces are defined as beam elements, or as curves (which may optionally be meshed with beam elements p rior to translation) and used in 2D problems. Two dimensional rigid surfaces must be defined as Quad/ 4 or Tri/3 elements, or as surfaces (which may optionally be meshed with Quad/4 or Tri/3 elements pri or to translation) and are used in 3D problems. The elements will be translated as 4-node patches if me shed or as NURB surfaces if not meshed.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Loads and Boundary Conditions Input Description Flip Contact Side Upon defining each rigid body, MSC.Patran displays normal vect ors or tic marks. These should point inward to the rigid body. In other words, the side opposite the side with the vectors is the side of contact. Generally, the vector points away from the body in which it wants to contact. If it does not point inward, then use the modify option to turn this toggle ON. The direction of the inward normal will be reversed. Symmetry Plane This specifies that the surface or body is a symmetry plane. It i s OFF by default. Null Initial Motion This toggle is enabled only for Velocity and Position type o f Motion Control. If it is ON, the initial velocity, position, and angular velocity/rotation are s et to zero in the CONTACT option regardless of their settings here (for increment zero). Motion Motion of rigid bodies can be controlled in a number of different ways: Control velocity, position (displacement), or forces/moments. Velocity For velocity controlled rigid bodies, define the X and Y velocity compo nents (vector) for 2D problems or X, Y, and Z for 3D problems. Angular For velocity controlled rigid bodies, if the rigid body rotates, give it s angular Velocity (rad/time) velocity in radians per time (seconds usually) about the cen ter of rotation (global Z axis for 2D problems) or axis of rotation (for 3D problems). Friction Coefficient of static friction for this contact body. For contact betwe en two Coefficient (MU) bodies with different friction coefficients the average value i s used. Rotation This is a point or node that defines the center of rotation of the rigi d body. If Reference Point left blank the rotation reference point will default to the orig in. Axis of For 2D rigid surfaces in a 3D problem, aside from the rotation reference point, Rotation if you wish to define rotation you must also specify the axis in the fo rm of a vector. First Control Node This is for Force or SPCD controlled rigid motion. It is the node to which the force or SPCD is applied. A separate LBC must be defined for the force, but the application node must also be specified here. If both force and moment are specified, they must use different control nodes even if they are coincident. If only 1 control node is specified the rigid body will not be allowed to rotate. Second Control This is for Moment controlled rigid motion. It is the node to whi ch the moment Node is applied. A separate LBC must be defined for the moment, but the applicat ion node must also be specified here. It also acts as the rotation reference point. If both force and moment are specified, they must use different control nodes

even if they are coincident. Planar Rigid Wall (SOL 700 only)

Chapter 2: Building A Model Loads and Boundary Conditions Object Planar Rigid Wall TypeNodal Analysis Type Explicit Nonlinear Two different planar rigid wall options exist: 1. Kinematic rigid wall without friction 2. Penalty method based rigid wall with friction These are seen as options at the top of the Input Data form. The user must selec t which wall will be used. Both wall s position and orientation are defined by selecting a coordinate system which has its origin on the plane and the local z axis as the outward normal from the contact surface. T his defines a WALL Bulk Data entry. There are only parameters associated with the penalty based planar r igid wall. Input Data Description Static Friction Coefficient Static coefficient of friction. Kinetic Friction Coefficient Kinetic coefficient of friction. Exponential Decay Coefficient Exponential decay coefficient EXP. Initial Rotation Field (SOL 700 only) Object Type Analysis Type Init. Rotation Field Nodal Explicit Nonlinear Defines a velocity field of grid points consisting of a rotation and a traslatio n specification. Creates a TIC3 Bulk Data entry. Input Data Description Trans Veloc(v1,v2,v3) Defines the initial translational velocity values. These a re in model length units per unit time. Rot Veloc (w1,w2,w3) Defines the initial rotational velocity values. These are i n degrees per unit time. Rotation Center Defines a point at the center of rotation.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Load Cases 2.10 Load Cases Load cases in Patran are used to group a series of load sets into one load envir onment for the model. Load cases are selected when defining an analysis job. The usage within MD Nastran is similar. The individual load sets are translated into MD Nastran load sets, and the load cases are used to create the SUBCASE commands in the Case Control Section. For information on how to define multiple static and/or transient load cases, se e Load Cases Application (Ch. 5) in the Patran Reference Manual.

Chapter 2: Building A Model Defining Contact Regions 2.11 Defining Contact Regions The MD Nastran preference supports 3D slideline contact functionality introduced in MSC.Nastran Version 68. This capability allows the user to model contact between 2D and 3D s tructural regions or rigid bodies. This functionality can be accessed by using in the Loads/BCs Application in Patr an. After selecting the Contact Object on the main form, the first step is to define the regions that ma y come into contact. Pushing the Application Region button brings up the following form

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Defining Contact Regions . One or more curves, surface edges, or solid edges are defined for the Master and Slave application regions. The application region can only contain geometric entities. Tomodel contact between FEM entities withou t associated geometry, curves must first be created from the nodes using the tools available in the Geometry application. Toggles the select box between Master and Slave regions. The Master and Slave application regions can be defined in either order. Select the curve or edge. Adds the entities in the Select Curves databox to either the Master Region or Slave Region depending on the setting of the Active Regionoption menu. Application Region Geometry Filter Geometry Master Surface: Slide Line Slave Surface: Slide Line Active Region: Master Select Curves Add Remove Master Region Slave Region OK Clear u

Chapter 2: Building A Model Defining Contact Regions Contact The second step is to define a set of properties of these contacting surfaces. T his is done by pushing the Input Data button on the main Application form to bring up the following subordi nate form. If the Penetration Type is One Sided, nodes in the Slave Region are not allowed to penetrate the segments of the MasterRegion. If Two Sided, in addition, nodes in the Master Region are not allowed to penetrate segments of the Slave Region. This is the PTYPE field on the BCONP entry. Coefficient of static friction between the two surfaces. This is the MU1 field on the BFRIC entry. FSTIF on the BFRIC entry and SFAC on the BCONP entry are penalty parameters in the contact formulation. The default values are usually adequate. Slideline Width is constant along the slideline and isused to determine the area for contact stress calculation. This is the Wi field on the BFRIC entry. A vector must be defined which lies in the contact plane and points from the Master region to theSlave region. This vector is used to define the coordinate system on the BCONP entry and the BLSEG entries for each region. Input Data Penetration Type: One Sided Friction Coefficient (MU1) Stiffness in Stick (FSTIF) Penalty Stiffness Scaling Factor (SFAC) 1.0 Slideline Width (W1)

A Vector Pointing from Master to Slave Surface OK Reset

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Rotor Dynamics 2.12 Rotor Dynamics The MD Nastran Preference supports steady state and transient rotor dynamics, in troduced in MSC.Nastran 2004. This capability allows you to model structures with rotating p arts, allowing for gyroscopic effects to be included. Rotor Dynamics are modelled using Rotor and Unbalance entities, created within t he Rotor Dynamics... selection under the Tools menu:

Chapter 2: Building A Model Rotor Dynamics Rotor Dynamics Form The Rotor Dynamics form is accessed from the Rotor Dynamics... selection under t he Tools menu. This form is used to create, modify, delete, or show Rotors, which define spin proper ties, including the axis of rotation, spin direction, damping factor, and speed. Create ModifyDelete Show Steady State Transient Rotor Unbalance (Transient only) A set of co-linear nodes that make up the rotor model (spin axis). These are the grids in the MD Nastran ROTORG Bulk Data entry. Two nodes defining the spin direction. These are the GRIDA and GRIDB fields in the MD Nastran RSPINR and RSPINT Bulk Data entries. These nodes must be included in the Rotor Node List above. Rotor structural damping factor (default 0.0). This is the GR field of the MD Nastran RSPINR and RSPINT Bulk Data entries. Spin Profile (Steady State) Spin History (Transient)

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Rotor Dynamics Spin Profile Form For Steady State analyses, the Spin Profile form is used to define the relative spin rates. The unit for the speed entries. RPM for revolutions per minute, or Cycles/Time for frequency. This value defines the SPDUNIT field of the MD Nastran RSPINR Bulk Data entry, and are translated to either FREQ . List of relative spin rates. Entries must be in ascending or descending order. At least oneentry required (no default). These va lues make up the SPEEDi fields of the MD Nastran RSPINR Bulk Data entry. Spin History Form For Transient analyses, the Spin History form is used to define the spin rates. RPM or

Chapter 2: Building A Model Rotor Dynamics The unit for the speed entries. RPM for revolutions per minute, or Cycles/Time for frequency. This value defines the SPDUNIT field of the MD Nastran RSPINT Bulk Data entry, and are translated to either FREQ . A constant multiplier to be applied to the Time Dependent Field. A time dependent field that defines the spinrate as a function of time. This fie ld, with the Speed Amplitude applied to it, will betranslated into an MD Nastran TABLED1 Bulk Data entry that is referenced by the RSPINT entry. Unbalance Form The Rotor Dynamics Unbalance form is used to create, modify, delete, or show Unb alances, which define unbalance loads for transient analyses in terms of cylindrical system with the r otor axis as the Z axis. RPM or

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Rotor Dynamics Create Modify Delete Show The unbalance is applied to a node, which must be included in a transient rotor. When a transient rotor is selected, the Node listbox is populatedwith nodes from that rotor s axis. T he unbalance node may then be selected from that list, assuring that it belongs to an existing transient rotor. This node defines the GRID field of the MD Nastran UNBALNC Bulk Data entry. Displays the Unbalance Properties form to define the remaining parameters for the MD Nastran UNBALNC Bulk Data entry.

Chapter 2: Building A Model Rotor Dynamics Unbalance Properties Form The Unbalance Properties Form is used to define the remaining parameters for the Unbalance.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Rotor Dynamics Define the MASS, ROFFSET, and ZOFFSET fields of the MD Nastran UNBALNC Bulk Data entry. For each of these values, either a constant real value may be specified, or a time dependent field my be selected from the list below. Time dependent fields are translated to TABLED1entries, and referenced by integer ID values inthe appropriate UNBALNC fields. Defaults are 1.0 for Radial Offset and 0.0 for Z Offset. There is no default for Mass. Angular position, in degrees, of the mass in the unbalance coordinate system (default 0.0). This defines the THETA field of the MD Nastran UNBALNC Bulk Data entry. The start and termination times for applying the unbalance load. The default start time is 0.0, while the default termination time is 999999.0. These values define the Ton and Toff fields of the MD Nastran UNBALNC Bulk Data entry. Correction flag to specify whether 1) the mass will be used to modify the total mass in the transient response calculations, 2) the effect of the rotor spin rate change will be included in the transient response calculation, or 3) both. Possible values are None, Mass, Speed, or Both (default None). This value defines the CFLAG field of the MD Nastran UNBALNC Bulk Data entry. Defines the coordinate system orientation relative to the ACID of the unbalance node (no default). This vector defines the X1, X2, and X3 fields of the MD Nastran UNBALNC Bulk Data entry.

257 Chapter 2: Building A Model Rotor Dynamics

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Rotor Dynamics

Running an Analysis 3 Review of the Analysis Form 260 Translation Parameters 265 Solution Types 271 Direct Text Input 276 Solution Parameters 277 Select Superelements 352 Subcases 354 Subcase Parameters 357 Output Requests 415 Select Superelements 352 Select Explicit MPCs... 443 Non-Structural Mass Properties 444 Select NSM Properties... 449 Subcase Select 451 Restart Parameters 454 Optimize 460 Toptomize 462 Interactive Analysis 470

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Review of the Analysis Form 3.1 Review of the Analysis Form The Analysis form appears when the Analysis toggle, located on the Patran mainfo rm, is chosen. To run an analysis, or to create a NASTRAN input file, select Analyze as the Action on the Analysis form. Other forms brought up by the Analysis form are used to define translation parameters, solution type, solution parameters, output requests, and the load cases. These forms are described on th e following pages. For further information see The Analysis Form (p. 8) in the MSC.Patran Reference Man ual.

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis Review of the Analysis Form Analysis Form This form appears when the Analysis toggle is chosen on the main menu. When prep aring for an analysis run, select Analyze as the Action. Actions can be set to: Analyze or Optimize or Toptomize Access Results Read Input File Delete Monitor (if Patran Analysis Manager is installed). Abort (if Patran Analysis Manager is installed). Indicates the selected Analysis Code and Analysis Type, as defined in the Preferences>Analysis (p. 431) in the Patran Reference Manual. List of already existing jobs. If one of these jobs is selected, the name will appear in the Job Name list box and allparameters for this job wil l be retrieved from the database. An existing job can be submitted again by simply selecting itand pushing Apply. It is often convenient to select an existingjob, modify a few parameters and pus h Apply to submit the new job. Name of job. This name will be used as the base file name for all resulting MD Nastran files and message files. This text is used to generate the TITLE entry in the MD Nastran executive control section. Displays the Translation Parameters form to specify parameters not directly related to the solution. These areprimarily used by the Application Preferences during the forward translation. Displays the Solution Types form to select the desired type of analysis to run. Opens the Direct Text Input form which allows you to directly enter data for the BULK DATA, Case Control, Executive Control and File Management sections of the NASTRANinput file. Opens the Select Superelements form which allows you to select the superelements active for the specified job. Displays the Subcases form to select a list of load cases to be included in this analysis run. The list of selected load

cases is order dependent. Displays the Subcase Select form to select a sequence ofsubcases associated with an analysis job.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Review of the Analysis Form The following table outlines the selections for the Analyze action. Object Method Entire Model Full Run Check Run Analysis Deck Model Only Load SimXpert Selected Group Full Run Check Run Analysis Deck Model Only Load SimXpert Existing Deck Full Run Load SimXpert Restart Full Run Check Run Analysis Deck Interactive Full Run The Object indicates which part of the model is to be analyzed. There are four c hoices: Entire Model, Current Group, Existing Deck, and Restart. Entire Model is the selected Object if the whole model is to be analyzed. Selected Group is for specifying the group analyzed. Select the button Select Group..., under Existing select Cancel. The name of the selected group will appear or more information see The Group Menu (p. 262) in that contains the model that is to be Groups select the desired group, then in the Analysis form under Group: . F the Patran Reference Manual.

Existing Deck is selected if you wish to simply submit an existing input file to MD Nastran. The jobname appearing in the Job Name listbox is appended with the suffix .bdf to form the input filename. This file must reside in the current directory. You may also use Existing Deck to directly edit the MD Nastran Bulk Data file.

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis Review of the Analysis Form Restart is selected if you wish to restart an analysis. Currently, restarts are only supported for the Linear Static (101), Nonlinear Static (106), and Normal Modes (103) solution types. The Restart Parameters, 454 form allows you to specify where to resume the analysis. Interactive analysis utilizes the Patran Preference for MD Nastran capability fo r performing visual interactive modal frequency response analysis. The process begins by crea ting a modal analysis solution using MD Nastran. The interactive modal frequency response ana lysis is then performed using Patran Analysis: Analyze / Interactive / Full Run. The chain tha t is followed is 1) using Select Nastran .MASTER... select a .DBALL file, 2) using Create Loading ... specify the loading (for example, Acoustic, Force), 3) using Output Requests... specify the desired output, and 4) using View Results... view the results. The Method indicates how far the translation is to be taken.The methods are list ed below: Full Run is the selected type if an Analysis Deck translation is done, and the r esulting input file is submitted to MD Nastran for complete analysis. Check Run is the selected type if an Analysis Deck translation is done, and the resulting input file is submitted to MD Nastran for a check run only. Analysis Deck is the selected type if the Model Deck translation is done, plus a ll load case, analysis type and analysis parameter data are translated. A complete input file, ready for MD Nastran should be generated. Model Only is the selected type if a Bulk Data file is created that contains onl y the model data including node, element, coordinate frame, element property, material property, and loads and boundary condition data. The translation stops at that point. Load SimXpert will lauch SimXpert and automatically transfer the finite element model. The environment variable MSC_SX_HOME must be set to a valid local installation direc tory of SimXpert for this capability to be available. Overview of Analysis Job Definition and Submittal To submit a single load case, linear static analysis job to MD Nastran it is nec essary only to click the Apply button on the main Analysis form. Appropriate defaults and selections will

be made automatically. Other solution types or multiple load cases will require access to one or more l ower-level forms. Several different analysis examples are considered below. To perform a multiple load case, linear static analysis, it is necessary only to open the Subcase Select form. Subcases with the same names as the user-defined load case names and with appropriate defaults can be selected for inclusion in the job. If a change to one or more parameters for a subcase is desired (e.g., to change an output request), the Subcases... form must be accessed. Then it is simple to select a subcase and bring up the appropriate form (e.g., Output Requests) to make change s. For other analysis types (e.g., Normal Modes), the first step is to bring up the Solution Type form and make the appropriate selection. A lower-level Solution Parameters form can be ac cessed from the Solution Type form to change parameters that affect the overall analysis. Just a s for the linear static case, subcases are automatically created for each defined load case. These can be sele cted on the Subcase Select form or modified on the Subcases form.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Review of the Analysis Form In the Patran MD Nastran Interface, a subcase can be thought of as a Patran load case with some additional parameters (e.g., Output Requests) associated with it. This associati on is further strengthened since the default subcases are created for each load case and have the same name as their associated load case. In the rest of this document, the terms load case and subcase will general ly be used interchangeably. When a specific form is referenced, Load case and Subcase will be capitalized.

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis Translation Parameters 3.2 Translation Parameters Translation parameters define output file formats, numerical tolerances, process ing options, numbering offsets, and external include files.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Translation Parameters Tolerances Bulk Data Format Node Coordinates Coordinate Frame Coordinates MD Nastran Version Number of Tasks Write Properties on Element Entries Write Continuation Markers Write Global Ply IDs Convert CBARs to CBEAMs Division - prevents divide by zero errors. Numerical - determines if two real values are equal. Writing determines if a value is approximately zero when generating a Bulk Data entry field. Sorted Bulk Data - Sorts Bulk Data entries alphabetically. Card Format - Determines whether the real number can be written to a standard (8 character) NASTRAN field or to a double (16 character) NASTRAN field. Write Stored Precision - When ON it writes all data as double precision if the data double precision information. Precision Control Options - Specifies where to round off a grid point coordinate, material, property, or other entity value before its written out to the bdf file. For example if this value is specified as 2 the number 1.3398 will be written out as 1.34. Defines which coordinate frame is used when generating the grid coordinates. Defines which coordinate frame is used when generating the grid coordinates. This can be set to reference frame, analysis frame, or global. This should not affect the analysis. It only changes the method used in the grid creation. This determines which coordinate frame is referenced in the CP field of the GRID entry. Specifies the version of MD Nastran. The version specified here is used for two purposes: to create the full name of the ALTER file to be used, and to determine which Solution Sequence to use. Use only whole numbers and letters; for example, 66a, 67 and 68; 67.5 is the same as 67. This version number can be overridden by setting the environment variable NASTRAN_VERSION . Represents the number of processors to be used to run an analysis. It is assumed that the environment is configured for distributed parallel processing.

Specifies that properties will be written to the element entries for all element s where it is allowed in MD Nastran. This option is OFF by default. This option can be turned ON to write continuation markers for Bulk Data entries. When ON, attempts to keep the Global Ply IDs consistent between MD Nastran and Patran. Converts all CBARs to CBEAMS

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis Translation Parameters Write PARTSuperelement This is ON by default and if ON and superelements are sel ected (see Select Superelements, 352 then BEGIN BULK SUPER = id sections are written in to the input file for each selected superelement. If OFF and superelements are selected, then SESET entries are written instead to define the superelements. Geometry Check Checks the element shapes to make sure they are valid. You can se t different warning levels from None to Fatal depending on how crucial the element shapes are to your model. Use Iterative Solver Activates the iterative solver for analysis. The analysis m anger does not support this option and must be disabled when using this option. Ext. Superelement Spec... Subform used for defining superelement specifications. Numbering Options... Subform used to indicate offsets for all IDS to be automati cally assigned during translation. Bulk Data Include File... Prompts you for the filename of the include file.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Translation Parameters External Superelement Specifications With this form you can define the options for the External Superelements Bulk Da ta entry. Please see the MD Nastran Quick Reference Guide for more information about External Superelemen ts. The available methods are: NONE No EXTSEOUT entry created. DMIGPCH Requires an EXTIDMATRIXDB DMIGDB DMIGOP2 ASM BULK and EXT BULK require theEXTID method. Numbering Options This form is activated by the Numbering Options button on the Translation Parame ters form. It allows the user to indicate offsets for all IDS to be automatically assigned during tra nslation. For example, if the

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis Translation Parameters user types 100 into the Element Properties Offset box, the numbering of element properties in the resulting NASTRAN input file will begin at 101. The Begin. Contin. Marker box allows the user to specify the continuation of the mnemonic format used on multiple line, Bulk Data entries. IDs Encoded in Names allows the user to activate recognition of IDs encoded into the name of any named entity, such as a material. Number Only will recognize and use an ID if, and only if, the name of the entity is an actual number like 105. This option is ON by default. Beginning Number will recognize an ID if thenumber begins the name, such as 52_shell_property. This option is OFF by default. Trailing Number will recognize an ID if it trails the name, such as shell_property_52. This option is OFF by default. Encoded Syntax will recognize an ID if it directly follows the first occurrence of the specified syntax. For example, with this option activated and the specified syntax set to . , the ID assigned to a material given the name Steel_1027.32 would be 32. Note that both the Patran Neutral file reader and the Patran MD Nastran input fi le reader preserve the IDs of named entities with a . syntax, so that a NASTRAN PSHELL record of ID 12 will b e assigned the name PSHELL.12. This last option allows great continuity between input model data and output model data. This option is ON by default and the default Syntax Marker is . .

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Translation Parameters Select File

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis Solution Types 3.3 Solution Types The Solution Type form defines the type of analysis and Solution Parameters. You r choice for the Solution Type will in turn affect additional forms you complete for Solution Par ameters, 277, Subcase Parameters, 357, and Output Requests, 415. See Table 3-1. To set the Solution Type: Click on the Analysis Application button.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Solution Types On the Analysis Application form, click Solution Type... and select the Solution Type from the list of available Solution Types. For Analysis Type Explicit Nonlinear: Solution Type Defines the solution type. Linear Static Selects Solution Sequence (SOL) 101, 114, 1, or 47 depending on th e selected Solution Parameters. You may select one or more subcases in SOLs 1 and 101.

Nonlinear Static Normal Modes Buckling Complex Eigenvalue Frequency Response Transient Response Nonlinear Transient Implicit Nonlinear DDAM Solution Explicit Nonlinear Chapter 3: Running an Analysis Solution Types Selects Solution Sequence 66 or 106, depending on the version of MD Nastran. Version 66 and below yields SOL 66, and Version 67 and above yields SOL 106. You may select one or more subcases. Selects Solution Sequence 103, 115, 3, or 48 depending on the Solution Parameters. You may select only one subcase. Selects Solution Sequence 105, 77, or 5 depending on the selected Solution Parameters. Only one subcase may be selected that defines the static preload. The buckling subcase is automatically generated. The output requests for this Solution Type are applied to the static preload subcase. The default output requests for the buckling subcase are displacements and constraint forces. Selects Solution Sequence 107, 110, 28, or 29 depending on the selected Solution Parameters. You may select only one subcase. Selects Solution Sequence 108, 111, 118, 26, or 30 depending on the selected Solution Parameters. You may specify only one subcase for Solution Sequences 118, 26, or 30. For Solution Sequences 108 or 111, multiple subcases may be selected. Selects Solution Sequence 109, 112, 27, or 31 depending on the selected Solution Parameters. You may specify only one subcase for Solution Sequences 27 or 31. For Solutions Sequences 109 or 112, multiple subcases may be selected. Selects Solution Sequence 99 or 129, depending on the MD Nastran Version. Version 66 and below yields SOL 99; Version 67 and above yields SOL 129. You may select only one subcase. Selects Solution Sequence 400 or 600 (depending on SOL400RUN*

toggle). Selects Solution Sequence 187, Dynamic Design Analysis Method (DDAM). Selects Solution Sequence 700.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Solution Types Select ASET/QSET...

Select existing Degree of Freedom Lists for use in making an ASET or a QSET in the input file. The ASET toggle creates a user selected unreferenced SPOINTS in the ASET of input file. The QSET toggle creates a user selected number of unreferenced SPOINTS in the QSET of the input file. Solution Parameters... Brings up a solution-type-dependent subordinate form that allows you to specify parameters which apply to the complete solution. Solution Type Database Run CyclicSymmetry Formulation MD Nastran Version Solution Parameter Settings Linear Static Off Off -1 Off On -47 On Off -101 On On -114

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis Solution Types Solution Type Database Run CyclicSymmetry Formulation MD Nastran Version Solution Parameter Settings Nonlinear Static -66 or Below 66 -67 or Above 106 Normal Modes Off Off -3 Off On -48 On Off -103 On On -115 Buckling Off Off -5 On On -77 On Off -105 Complex Eigenvalue Off --Direct -28 Off --Modal -29 On --Direct -107 On --Modal -110 Frequency Response Off --Direct -26 Off --Modal -30 On Off Direct -108 On --Modal -111 On On Direct -118 Transient Response Off --Direct -27 Off --Modal -31 On --Direct -109 On --Modal -112 Nonlinear Transient -66 or Below 99 --

67 or Above 129 Implicit Nonlinear 400 600 DDAM Solution 2004 187 Explicit Nonlinear 2005 700

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Direct Text Input 3.4 Direct Text Input This form is used to directly enter entries in the File Management, Executive Co ntrol, Case Control, and BULK DATA sections of the NASTRAN input file. The input file reader also creates these entries for any unsupported entries in the input file. If the data is entered by the user th e Write to Input Deck toggle default is ON. If the data comes from the input file reader the default for the Input Deck toggle is OFF. These entries may be reviewed and edited by the user. If they should be written to any input files subsequently created by the interface, the appropriate Write to Input Deck toggl e should be set to ON. Text entered into the Case Control section is written to the input file before t he first subcase. The Direct Text Input option on the Subcases form should be used to directly enter text wit hin a subcase definition. Switches to determine which data section the MD Nastran input would be sent. Resets the form back Resets all four Saves the current Clears the current setting and data for theto the data values it forms back to its four sections and form. had at the last OK. previous value and closes the form. closes the form.

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis Solution Parameters 3.5 Solution Parameters Linear Static This subordinate form appears when the Solution Parameters button is selected on the Solution Type form when Linear Static is selected. Depending on the setting of the Database Ru n and Cyclic Symmetry parameters, this Solution Type will generate a SOL 101, 114, 1, or 47 input file .

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Solution Parameters Database Run Cyclic Symmetry Automatic Constraints Inertia Relief Alternate Reduction SOL 600 Run Contact Parameters Shell Normal Tolerance Angle Mass Calculation Data Deck Echo Plate Rz Stiffness Factor Maximum Printed Lines Maximum Run Time Wt-Mass Conversion Node ID for Wt. Gener. Indicates whether a Structured Solution Sequence (SOL 101 or 114) is to be used or a Rigid Format (SOL 1 or 47). If selected, a Structured Solution Sequence is sel ected. Indicates that this model is a sector of a cyclically repeating part (SOL 114 or 47). Indicates that an AUTOSPC entry is requested, so that MD Nastran will constrain model singularities. Indicates that the inertia relief flags are to be set by including the PARAM, IN REL,1 command. This flag can only be chosen if Database Run is selected and Cyclic Symmetry is disabled. If inertia relief is selected, a node-ID for weight genera tion must be selected. A PARAM, GRDPNT and a SUPORT command will be written to the input file using the same node-ID selected for weight generation. The SUPORT entry will specify all 6 degrees of freedom. Indicates that an alternate method of performing the static condensation is desi red. The PARAM, ALTRED,YES command is included if selected and if Database Run is also selected Indicates a SOL 600 run. Same as the contact parameters available for the Implicit Nonlinear solution typ e.

Only used with linear contact capability. Indicates that MD Nastran will define grid point normals for a Faceted Shell Sur face based on the Tolerance Angle. This data appears on a PARAM, SNORM entry. Defines how the mass matrix is to be treated within MD Nastran. This controls th e setting of the COUPMASS parameter. This parameter can be set to either Coupled o r Lumped. If set to Coupled, COUPMASS will be set to +1, otherwise, it will be set to -1. Indicates how the data file entry images are to be printed in the MD Nastran pri nt file. This controls the setting used for the ECHO Case Control command. This parameter can have one of three settings: Sorted, Unsorted, or None. Defines the in plane stiffness factor to be applied to shell elements. This defi nes the K6ROT parameter. This is an alternate method to suppress the grid point singular ities and is intended primarily for geometric nonlinear analysis. Limits the size of the MD Nastran print file that will be generated. This define s the setting of the MAXLINES Case Control command. Limits the amount of CPU time expressed in CPU minutes that can be used by this run. This is used to prevent runaway jobs. This defines the setting of the TIME Executive Control statement. Defines the conversion factor between weight and mass measures. This defines the setting of the WTMASS parameter. Indicates the node ID that is to be used for the Grid Point Weight Generator. Th is is the GRDPNT parameter.

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis Solution Parameters Default Initial Defines the Default Initial Temperature: TEMPD value for subcase entry Temperature TEMP(INITIAL) Default Load Temperature Defines the Default Load Temperature: Sets the TEMPD va lue for the subcase entry TEMP(LOAD) subcase entry. Rigid Element Type: The Rigid element type optionmenu presents three different t ypes of rigid elements, corresponding to the three possible values for the Nastran RIGID= case control. They are:

LINEAR: Selects linear rigid elements, which are the rigid elements that have been available in MD Nastran since its inception. LAGR: Selects the new Lagrange rigid elements with the Lagrange multplier method. LGELIM: Selects the new Lagrange rigid elements with the Lagrange elimination method. See the Nastran quick reference quide for more details. Results Output Format On the Results Output Format form you choose which output formats you want to us e with your solution type. For more details, please see Results Output Format, 348 . The table outlines the Database Run and Cyclic Symmetry selections, and the SOL types that will be used. Database Run Cyclic Symmetry SOL On Off 101 On On 114 Off Off 1 Off On 47 Nonlinear Static This subordinate form appears when the Solution Parameters button is selected on the Solution Type form, when Nonlinear Static is selected. If the MD Nastran version specified is Version 66 or lower, then Solution Sequence (SOL) 66 will be employed. However, if the MD Nastran version specified is version 67 or higher, then Solution Sequence 106 will be employed except as described be low. For more

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Solution Parameters information about specification of the MD Nastran version number, see the Transl ation Parameters, 265 form. Indicates that an AUTOSPC entry is requested. MD Nastran will automatically cons train model singularities. Indicates that displacements, which can cause a difference in the formulation of the stiffness matrix, may be encountered. Therefore, the stiffness matrix may need to be periodically recomputed based on the displaced shape. Indicates, as the part deflects, that the applied forces will remain aligned with the deformed part rather than maintaining their global orientation. This can only be selected if Large Displacements is also selected. The default solution sequence for Nonlinear Static is 106, but can be changed to any oneof the following if desired: 400, 60 0, 700. Only features of 106 are used in any case. For specific features particular to 600 or 700, please use the Implicit Nonlinear type or set the Analysis Type to Explicit Nonlinear, respectively.

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis Solution Parameters The following table outlines the selections for Large Displacements and Follower Forces, and the altered LGDISP parameter setting for each. Large Displacements Follower Forces LGDISP Off On -1 On On 1 On Off 2 This is a list of the data input, available for defining the Nonlinear Static So lution Parameters, that were not shown on the previous page. Parameter Name Description Mass Calculation Defines how the mass matrix is to be treated within MD Nastran. This controls the setting of the COUPMASS parameter. This parameter can be set to either Coupled o r Lumped. If set to Coupled, COUPMASS will be set to +1, otherwise, it will be set to -1. Data Deck Echo Indicates how the data file entry images are to be printed in the MD Nastran print file. This controls the setting used for the ECHO Case Control command. This parameter can have one of three settings: Sorted, Unsorted, or None. Plate Rz Stiffness Factor Defines the in plane stiffness factor to be applied to shell elements. This defines the K6ROT parameter. This is an alternate method to suppress the grid point singular ities and is intended primarily for geometric nonlinear analysis. Maximum Printed Lines Limits the size of the MD Nastran print file that will be generated. This defines the setting of the MAXLINES Case Control command. Maximum Run Time Limits the amount of CPU time expressed in CPU minutes that can be used by this run. This is used to prevent runaway jobs. This defines the setting of the TIME Executive Control statement. Wt-Mass Conversion Defines the conversion factor between weight and mass measure s. This defines the setting of the WTMASS parameter. Node ID for Wt. Gener. Indicates the node ID that is to be used for the Grid Poi nt Weight Generator. This is the GRDPNT parameter. Results Output Format On the Results Output Format form you choose which output formats you want to use with your solution type. For more details, please see Results Output Format, 348 .

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Solution Parameters Normal Modes This subordinate form appears when Solution Parameters is selected on the Soluti on Type form when Normal Modes is selected. Use this form to generate a SOL 103, 115, 3, or 48 inp ut file, depending on the Database Run and Cyclic Symmetry parameters below. See Real Eigenvalue Extraction, 284. Not shown unless Cyclic Symmetry is on. If the version is Version nce is SOL 103, then these controls are selectable on the Normal Modes Subcase Parameters, 364 form. 68 and the solution seque

The following table outlines the selections for Database Run and Cyclic Symmetry , and the altered SOL type for each. Indicates whether a Structured Solution Sequence (SOLs 103 or 115 ) is to be used, or a Rigid Format (SOL 3 or 48). If Database Run is selected, a Structured Solution S equence will be selected. Database Run Cyclic Symmetry SOL On Off 103 On On 115 Off Off 3 Off On 48

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis Solution Parameters This is a list of data input, available for defining the Normal Modes Solution P arameters, that were not shown on the previous page. Parameter Name Cyclic Symmetry Automatic Constraints SOL 600 Run Residual Vector Computation Shell Normal Tolerance Angle Mass Calculation Data Deck Echo Plate Rz Stiffness Factor Maximum Printed Lines Maximum Run Time Wt-Mass Conversion Node ID for Wt. Gener. Default Inital Temperature Rigid Element Type Max p-Adaptive Cycles Description Indicates that this model is a sector of a cyclically repeating part (SOL 115 or 48). Indicates that an AUTOSPC entry is requested, so that MD Nastran will constrain model singularities. Select this to perform a SOL 600 analysis. The Residual Vector Computation toggle writes RESVEC=YES or RESVEC=NO to the Case Control. This calculates residual vectors due to applied loads. The default is to calculate residual vectors. Indicates that MD Nastran will define grid point normals for a Faceted Shell Sur face based on the Tolerance Angle. This data appears on a PARAM, SNORM entry. Defines how the mass matrix is to be treated within MD Nastran. This controls th e setting of the COUPMASS parameter. This parameter can be set to either Coupled or Lumped. If set to Coupled, COUPMASS will be set to +1, otherwise, it will be

set to -1. Indicates how the data file entry images are to be printed in the MD Nastran pri nt file. This controls the setting used for the ECHO Case Control command. This parameter can have one of three settings: Sorted, Unsorted, or None. Defines the in plane stiffness factor to be applied to shell elements. This defi nes the K6ROT parameter. This is an alternate method to suppress the grid point singularities and is intended primarily for geometric nonlinear analysis. Limits the size of the MD Nastran print file that will be generated. This define s the setting of the MAXLINES Case Control command. Limits the amount of CPU time expressed in CPU minutes that can be used by this run (used to prevent runaway jobs). This defines the setting of the TIME Executi ve Control statement. Defines the conversion factor between weight and mass measures. This defines the

setting of the WTMASS parameter. Indicates the node ID that is to be used for the Grid Point Weight Generator. Th is is the GRDPNT parameter. Specify the initial temperature. There are three ways to define a rigid element. They are 1) Linear, 2) Lagrangia n, or 3) Lgelim. Specify the maximum number of p-Adaptive cycles.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Solution Parameters Parameter Name Description Dynamic Reduction Brings up the Dynamic Reduction Parameters form for defining t he dynamic reduction controls. Results Output Format On the Results Output Format form you choose which output formats you want to use with your solution type. For more details, please see Results Output Format, 348. Real Eigenvalue Extraction This subordinate form appears when the Eigenvalue Extraction button is selected on the Normal Modes, Frequency Response, or Transient Response Solution Parameters forms. It also app ears when the Real Eigenvalue Extraction button is selected on the Complex Eigenvalue Solution Para meter form. Use this form to create either EIGR or EIGRL Bulk Data entries. Defines the method to use to extract the real eigenvalues. This parameter can be set to any one of the following: Lanczos, Automatic Givens, Automatic Householder, Modified Givens, Modified Householder, Givens, Householder, Enhanced Inverse Power, or Inverse Po wer. If this selection is set to Lanczos, an EIGRL Bulk Data entry should be created. Ot herwise, this defines the setting of the METHOD field on the EIGR Bulk Data entry. Defines the lower and upper limits to the range of frequencies to be examined. These are the F1and F2 fields on the EIGR Bulk Data entry or the V1 and V2 fields on the EIGRL Bulk Data entry. Indicates an estimate of the number of eigenvalues to be located. This parameter can only be specified if Extraction Method is set toEnhanced Inverse Power or Invers e Power. This is the NE field on the EIGR Bulk Data entry.

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis Solution Parameters This is a list of data input available for defining the Real Eigenvalue Extracti on that was not shown on the previous page. Parameter Name Description Number of Desired Roots Indicates the limit to how many eigenvalues to be comput ed. This is the ND field on the EIGR or EIGRL Bulk Data entries. Diagnostic Output Level Defines the level of desired output. This can take any i nteger value between 0 and 3. This parameter can only be specified if Extraction Method is set to Lanczos. Thi s is the MSGLVL field on the EIGRL Bulk Data entry. Normalization Method Indicates what type of eigenvalue normalization is to be do ne. This parameter can take one of three settings: Mass, Maximum, or Point. This parameter cannot be specified if Extraction Method is set to Lanczos. Defines the setting of the NOR M field on the EIGR Bulk Data entry. Normalization Point Defines the point to be used in the normalization. This can only be selected if Normalization Method is set to Point. This parameter cannot be specified if Extraction Method is set to Lanczos. This is the G field on the EIGR Bulk Data e ntry. Normalization Component Defines the degree-of-freedom component at the Normaliza tion Point to be used. This can only be selected if Normalization Method is set to Point. This parameter can not be specified if Extraction Method is set to Lanczos. This is the C field on the EIGR Bulk Data entry.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Solution Parameters Dynamic Reduction Parameters This subordinate form appears when the Dynamic Reduction button is selected on t he Normal Modes, Complex Eigenvalue, Frequency Response, or Transient Response Solution Parameter s forms. Use this form to create the DYNRED Bulk Data entry. A flag that indicates whether or not any dynamic reduction is desired. Indicates the maximum frequency to be considered when performing dynamicreduction. This parameter can only be selected if Perform Dynamic Reduction is set to ON. This is the FMAX field. Indicates which method is to be used in selecting coordinates. This parameter can be set to either Automatic or Manual. This parameter can only beselected if Perform Dynamic Reduction is set to ON. This determines if the program will automatically select the number of generalized coordinates. Indicates the number of scalar points that must be retained in this dynamic redu ction. This parameter can only be selected if Perform Dynamic Reduction is set to ON and Met hod of Coordinate Selection is set to Manual. The Application Preference will automatic ally create this many SPOINTs, and place them in the a-set and the q-set. Defines the number of generalized coordinates to be included in the dynamic redu ction. This parameter can only be selected if Perform Dynamic Reduction is set to ON, a nd Method of Coordinate Selection is set to Manual. This is the NQDES field.

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis Solution Parameters Buckling This subordinate form appears when Solution Parameters is selected on the Soluti on Type form when Buckling is selected. Use this form to generate a SOL 105, 77, or 5 input file, depending on the setting of the Database Run and Cyclic Symmetry parameters. Indicates that an AUTOSPC entry is requested, so that MD Nastran will automatica lly constrain model singularities. Indicates whether a Structured Solution Sequence (SOL 105) is to be used or aRigid Format or unstructured Solution Sequence (SOL 5 or 77). If Database Run is selected, a Structured Solution Sequence will be selected. Indicates that this model is a sector of a cyclically repeating part. See Real Eigenvalue Extraction, 284.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Solution Parameters The following table outlines the selections for Database Run and Cyclic Symmetry , and the altered SOL type for each. Database Run Cyclic Symmetry SOL On Off 105 On On 77 Off Off 5 This is a list of data input available for defining the Buckling Solution Parame ters that were not shown on the previous page. Parameter Name Description Mass Calculation Defines how the mass matrix is to be treated within MD Nastran. This controls the setting of the COUPMASS parameter. This parameter can be set to either Coupled o r Lumped. If set to Coupled, COUPMASS will be set to +1, otherwise, it will be set to -1. Data Deck Echo Indicates how the data file entry images are to be printed in the MD Nastran print file. This controls the setting used for the ECHO Case Control command. This parameter can have one of three settings: Sorted, Unsorted, or None. Plate Rz Stiffness Factor Defines the in plane stiffness factor to be applied to shell elements. This defines the K6ROT parameter. This is an alternate method to suppress the grid point singular ities and is intended primarily for geometric nonlinear analysis. Maximum Printed Lines Limits the size of the MD Nastran print file that will be generated. This defines the setting of the MAXLINES Case Control command. Maximum Run Time Limits the amount of CPU time expressed in CPU minutes that can be used by this run. This is used to prevent runaway jobs. This defines the setting of the TIME Executive Control statement. Wt-Mass Conversion Defines the conversion factor between weight and mass measure s. This defines the setting of the WTMASS parameter. Node ID for Wt. Gener. Indicates the node ID that is to be used for the Grid Poi nt Weight Generator. This is the GRDPNT parameter. Eigenvalue Extraction Brings up the Buckling Eigenvalue Extraction form for defi ning the eigenvalue extraction controls. Results Output Format

On the Results Output Format form you choose which output formats you want to us e with your solution type. For more details, please see Results Output Format, 348 .

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis Solution Parameters Buckling Eigenvalue Extraction This subordinate form appears when the Eigenvalue Extraction button is selected on the Buckling Solution Parameters form. Use this form to create either EIGB or EIGRL Bulk Data entries, depending on the selected extraction method. Defines the method to use to extract the buckling eigenvalues. This parameter ca n be set to any one of thefollowing: Lanczos, Enhanced Inverse Power, or Inverse Power. If Lanczos is selected, an EIGRL entry will be created. If Inverse Power or Enhanced Inverse Power are selected, and EIGB entry will be created with theMETHOD field set to either INV or SINV specified, respe ctively. Defines the lower and upper limits to the range of eigenvalues to be examined. These are the L1 and L2 fields on the EIGB entry or the V1 and V2 fields on the EIGRL entry. Indicates an estimate of the number of eigenvalues to be located. This parameter can only be specified if Extraction Method is set to Inverse Power. This is the NEP field on the EIGB entry. Indicates the limit to how many eigenvalues to be computed. This value can only be selected if Extraction Methods set to Lanczos. This is the NP field on the EIGRL entry.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Solution Parameters This is a list of data input, available for defining the Buckling Eigenvalue Ext raction, that was not shown on the previous page. Parameter Name Description Number of Desired Positive Roots Indicates the limit to how many positive eigenv alues to be computed. This value can only be selected if Extraction Method is set to Inverse Power or Enhanced Inverse Power. This is the NDP field on the EIGB entry. Number of Desired Negative Roots Indicates the limit to how many negative eigenv alues to be computed. This value cannot be selected if Extraction Method is set to Inverse Power or Enhanced Inverse Power. This is the NDN field on the EIGB entry. Diagnostic Output Level Defines the level of desired output. This can take any i nteger value in the range of 0 through 3. This parameter can only be specified if Extraction Method is set to Lanczos. This is the MSGLVL field on the EIGRL Bulk Data entry. Normalization Method Indicates what type of eigenvalue normalization is to be do ne. This parameter can take one of two settings: Maximum or Point. This parameter cannot be specified if Extraction Method is set to Lanczos. This is the NORM field on the EIGB entry. Normalization Point Defines the point to be used in the normalization. This can only be selected if Normalization Method is set to Point. This parameter cannot be specified if Extraction Method is set to Lanczos. This is the G field on the EIGB entry. Normalization Component Defines the degree-of-freedom component at the Normaliza tion Point to be used. This, too, can only be selected if Normalization Method is set to Point. This parameter cannot be specified if Extraction Method is set to Lanczos. This is the C field on the EIGB entry.

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis Solution Parameters Complex Eigenvalue This subordinate form appears when Solution Parameters is selected on the Soluti on Type form when Complex Eigenvalue is selected. When you specify the Database Run and Formulatio n parameters (from the Solution Type form), Patran generates a SOL 107, 110, 28, or 29 input file. See Complex Eigenvalue Extraction, 294. See Real Eigenvalue Extraction, 284. See Dynamic Reduction Parameters, 286.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Solution Parameters The following table outlines the selections for Database Run and Formulation, an d the altered SOL type for each. If you select Database Run, a Structured Solution Sequence (SOLs 107 o r 110) will be selected. If you deselect Database Run a Rigid Format Solution Sequence (SOLs 28 or 29) wi ll be selected. Database Run Formulation SOL On Direct 107 On Modal 110 Off Direct 28 Off Modal 29 This is a list of data input available for defining the Complex Eigenvalue Solut ion Parameters that was not shown on the previous page. Parameter Name Description Automatic Constraints Indicates that an AUTOSPC entry is requested, so that MD N astran will constrain model singularities. Residual Vector The Residual Vector Computation toggle writes RESVEC=YES or RESV EC=NO to the Case Control. This calculates residual vectors due to applied loads. The def ault Computation is to calculate residual vectors. Shell Normal Indicates that MD Nastran will define grid point normals for a Face ted Shell Surface based on the Tolerance Angle. This data appears on a PARAM, SNORM entry. Tolerance Angle Mass Calculation Defines how the mass matrix is to be treated within MD Nastran. This controls the setting of the COUPMASS parameter. This parameter can be set to either Coupled o r Lumped. If set to Coupled, COUPMASS will be set to +1, otherwise, it will be set to -1. Data Deck Echo Indicates how the data file entry images are to be printed in the MD Nastran print file. This controls the setting used for the ECHO Case Control command. This parameter can have one of three settings: Sorted, Unsorted, or None. Plate Rz Stiffness Factor Defines the in plane stiffness factor to be applied to shell elements. This defines the K6ROT parameter. This is an alternate method to suppress the grid point singular ities and is intended primarily for geometric nonlinear analysis. Maximum Printed Lines Limits the size of the MD Nastran print file that will be generated. This defines the

setting of the MAXLINES Case Control command. Maximum Run Time Limits the amount of CPU time expressed in CPU minutes that can be used by this run. This is used to prevent runaway jobs. This defines the setting of the TIME Executive Control statement. Wt-Mass Conversion Defines the conversion factor between weight and mass measure s. This defines the setting of the WTMASS parameter. Node ID for Wt. Gener. Indicates the node ID that is to be used for the Grid Poi nt Weight Generator. This is the GRDPNT parameter.

Parameter Name Default Inital Temperature Default Load Temperature Rigid Element Type Struct. Damping Coeff. Complex Eigenvalue Real Eigenvalue Dynamic Reduction Results Output Format Chapter 3: Running an Analysis Solution Parameters Description Specify the initial temperature. Specify load temperature. There is one rigid element type, Linear. Defines a global damping coefficient to applied. This defines the G parameter (e .g., PARAM, G, value). Brings up the Complex Eigenvalue Extraction form for defining the complex eigenvalue extraction controls. Brings up the Real Eigenvalue Extraction form for defining the real eigenvalue extraction controls. Brings up the Dynamic Reduction Parameters form for defining the dynamic reduction controls. On the Results Output Format form you choose which output formats you want to us e with your solution type. For more details, please see Results Output Format, 348 .

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Solution Parameters Complex Eigenvalue Extraction This subordinate form appears when the Complex Eigenvalue button is selected on the Complex Eigenvalue Solution Parameters form. Use this form to create an EIGC Bulk Data e ntry. Defines the method to use to extract the complex eigenvalues. This parameter can be set to any one of the following: Complex Lanczos, Upper Hessenberg, Inverse Power, or Determinate. This defines the setting of the METHOD field. Defines the real component of the beginning of lines in the complex plane. These values cannot be selected if Extraction Method is set to Upper Hessenberg. This is a list of real values. They arethe ALPHAAJ fields. Defines the real component of the end of lines in the complex plane. These values cannot be selected if Extraction Method is set to Complex Lanczos or Upper Hessenberg. This is a list of real values. They are the ALPHABJ fields. Defines the imaginary component of the beginning of lines in the complex plane. These values cannot beselected if Extraction Method is set to Upper Hessenberg. This is a list of real values. They are theOMEGAAJ fields.

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis Solution Parameters This is a list of data input available for defining the Complex Eigenvalue Extra ction that was not shown on the previous page. Parameter Name Description Omega of B Points Defines the imaginary component of the end of lines in the com plex plane. These values cannot be selected if Extraction Method is set to Complex Lanczos or Uppe r Hessenberg. This is a list of real values. They are the OMEGABJ fields. Width of Regions Defines the width of the region in the complex plane. This valu e cannot be selected if Extraction Method is set to Complex Lanczos or Upper Hessenberg. This is a li st of real values. They are the LJ fields. Estimated Number of Indicates an estimate of the number of eigenvalues to be loc ated within the specified Roots region. This value cannot be selected if Extraction Method is set to Compl ex Lanczos or Upper Hessenberg. This is a list of integer values. They are the NEJ fields. Number of Desired Roots Indicates the limit to how many eigenvalues to be comput ed within the specified region. This value cannot be selected if Extraction Method is set to Complex Lan czos or Upper Hessenberg. This is a list of integer values. They are the NDJ fields. Normalization Method Indicates what type of eigenvalue normalization is to be do ne. This parameter can take one of two settings: Maximum or Point. This is the NORM field on the EIGC entry. Normalization Point Defines the point to be used in the normalization. This is t he G field on the EIGC Bulk Data entry. Normalization Component Defines the degree-of-freedom component at the Normaliza tion Point to be used. This can only be selected if Extraction Method is set to Inverse Power or Determinate . This is the C field on the EIGC Bulk Data entry.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Solution Parameters Frequency Response This subordinate form appears when Solution Parameters is selected on the Soluti on Type form when Frequency Response is selected. Patran generates a SOL 108, 111, 118, 26, or 30 input file when you specify the Database Run, Cyclic Symmetry, and Formulation parameters (from the Solution Type form). See Real Eigenvalue Extraction, 284. See Dynamic Reduction Parameters, 286. The following table outlines the selections for Database Run, Formulation, and C yclic Symmetry parameters, and the altered SOL type for each. If Database Run is selected, a St ructured Solution Sequence (SOLs 108, 111, 118) will be selected. If Database Run is deselected, a Rigid Fo rmat (SOLs 26 or 30) will beselected.

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis Solution Parameters Database Run Formulation Cyclic Symmetry SOL On Direct Off 108 On Direct On 118 On Modal -111 Off Direct -26 Off Modal -30 This is a list of data input, available for defining the Frequency Response Solu tion Parameters that were not shown on the previous page. Parameter Name Description Cyclic Symmetry Indicates that this model is a sector of a cyclically repeating part, and the appropriate flags will be set. This can only be set if Database Run is selected and Formulat ion is set to Direct (SOL 118). Automatic Constraints Indicates that an AUTOSPC entry is requested, so that MD N astran will constrain model singularities. Residual Vector The Residual Vector Computation toggle writes RESVEC=YES or RESV EC=NO to the Case Control. This calculates residual vectors due to applied loads. The def ault Computation is to calculate residual vectors. Shell Normal Indicates that MD Nastran will define grid point normals for a Face ted Shell Surface based on the Tolerance Angle. This data appears on a PARAM, SNORM entry. Tolerance Angle Mass Calculation Defines how the mass matrix is to be treated within MD Nastran. This controls the setting of the COUPMASS parameter. This parameter can be set to either Coupled o r Lumped. If set to Coupled, COUPMASS will be set to +1, otherwise, it will be set to -1. Data Deck Echo Indicates how the data file entry images are to be printed in the MD Nastran print file. This controls the setting used for the ECHO Case Control command. This parameter can have one of three settings: Sorted, Unsorted, or None. Plate Rz Stiffness Factor Defines the in plane stiffness factor to be applied to shell elements. This defines the K6ROT parameter. This is an alternate method to suppress the grid point singular ities and is intended primarily for geometric nonlinear analysis.

Maximum Printed Lines Limits the size of the MD Nastran print file that will be generated. This defines the setting of the MAXLINES Case Control command. Maximum Run Time Limits the amount of CPU time expressed in CPU minutes that can be used by this run. This is used to prevent runaway jobs. This defines the setting of the TIME Executive Control statement. Wt-Mass Conversion Defines the conversion factor between weight and mass measure s. This defines the setting of the WTMASS parameter.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Solution Parameters Parameter Name Description Node ID for Wt. Gener. Indicates the node ID that is to be used for the Grid Poi nt Weight Generator. This is the GRDPNT parameter. Default Inital Temperature Specify the initial temperature. Default Load Temperature Specify load temperature. Rigid Element Type There is one rigid element type, Linear. Struct. Damping Coeff. Defines a global damping coefficient to applied. This def ines the G parameter (e.g., PARAM, G, value). Eigenvalue Extraction Calls up the Real Eigenvalue Extraction form that is used to define the eigenvalue extraction controls. These parameters can only be specified if Formulation is se t to Modal. Dynamic Reduction Calls up another form that is used to define the dynamic reduc tion controls. These parameters can only be specified if Formulation is set to Modal. Results Output Format On the Results Output Format form you choose which output formats you want to us e with your solution type. For more details, please see Results Output Format, 348 .

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis Solution Parameters Transient Response This subordinate form appears when Solution Parameters is selected on the Soluti on Type form when Transient Response is selected. Patran generates a SOL 109, 112, 27, or 31 input file, when you specify Database Run and Formulation parameters (from the Solution Type form). These options are only availablefor a "Modal" solution.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Solution Parameters The following table outlines the selections for Database Run and Formulation, an d the altered SOL type for each. If Database Run is selected, a Structured Solution Sequence (SOLs 109, 112) will be selected. If Database Run is deselected, a Rigid Format (SOLs 27 or 31) will be selected. Database Run Formulation SOL On Direct 109 On Modal 112 Off Direct 27 Off Modal 31 This is a list of data input available for defining the Transient Solution Param eters that was not shown on the previous page. Parameter Name Description Automatic Constraints Indicates that an AUTOSPC entry is requested, so that MD N astran will constrain model singularities. Residual Vector The Residual Vector Computation toggle writes RESVEC=YES or RESV EC=NO to the Case Control. This calculates residual vectors due to applied loads. The def ault Computation is to calculate residual vectors. SOL 600 Run Select this to perform a SOL 600 analysis. SOL 700 Run Select this to perform a SOL 700 analysis. To do this is necessary t o use the Direct method. Shell Normal Indicates that MD Nastran will define grid point normals for a Face ted Shell Surface based on the Tolerance Angle. This data appears on a PARAM, SNORM entry. Tolerance Angle Mass Calculation Defines how the mass matrix will be treated within MD Nastran. This controls the setting of the COUPMASS parameter. This parameter can be set to either Coupled o r Lumped. If set to Coupled, COUPMASS will be set to +1, otherwise, it will be set to -1. Data Deck Echo Indicates how the data file entry images are to be printed in the MD Nastran print file. This controls the setting used for the ECHO Case Control command. This parameter can have one of three settings: Sorted, Unsorted, or None. Plate Rz Stiffness Factor Defines the in plane stiffness factor to be applied to

shell elements. This defines the K6ROT parameter. This is an alternate method to suppress the grid point singular ities and is intended primarily for geometric nonlinear analysis. Maximum Printed Lines Limits the size of the MD Nastran print file that will be generated. This defines the setting of the MAXLINES Case Control command. Maximum Run Time Limits the amount of CPU time expressed in CPU minutes that can be used by this run. This is used to prevent runaway jobs. This defines the setting of the TIME Executive Control statement.

Parameter Name Wt-Mass Conversion Node ID for Wt. Gener. Default Inital Temperature Default Load Temperature Rigid Element Type Struct. Damping Coeff. W3, Damping Factor W4, Damping Factor1 Eigenvalue Extraction Dynamic Reduction Results Output Format Chapter 3: Running an Analysis Solution Parameters Description Defines the conversion factor between weight and mass measures. This defines the setting of the WTMASS parameter. Indicates the node ID that is to be used for the Grid Point Weight Generator. Th is is the GRDPNT parameter. Specify the initial temperature. Specify load temperature. There is one rigid element type, Linear. Defines a global damping coefficient to applied. This defines the G parameter (e .g., PARAM, G, value.) Defines W3 and W4 parameters. These parameters alter the damping characteristics of the model. Calls up the Real Eigenvalue Extraction form that is used to define the eigenval ue extraction controls. These parameters can only be specified if Formulation is se t to Modal. Calls up the Dynamic Reduction Parameters form that is used to define the dynami c reduction controls. These parameters can only be specified if Formulation is set to

Modal. On the Results Output Format form you choose which output formats you want to us e with your solution type. For more details, please see Results Output Format, 348 .

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Solution Parameters Nonlinear Transient This subordinate form appears when Solution Parameters is selected on the Soluti on Type form when Nonlinear Transient is selected. Use this form to generate either a SOL 99 or a SOL 129 input file, depending on the version of MD Nastran indicated on the translation parameter fo rm except as indicated below. Version 66 and below yields SOL 99 and Version 67 and above yields SOL 12 9. Indicates that an AUTOSPC entry is requested, so that MD Nastran willconstrain m odel singularities. The default solution sequence for Nonlinear Transient is 129, but can be changed to any one of the following if desired: 400, 600, 700. Only featuresof 129 are used in any cas e. For specific features particular to 600 or 700, please use the ImplicitNonlinear type or set the Analy sis Type to Explicit Nonlinear, respectively. Defines how the mass matrix is to be treated within MD Nastran. This controls the setting of theCOUPMASS parameter. This parameter c an be set to either Coupled or Lumped. If set to Coupled, COUPMASS will be set to +1, otherwise, it will be set to -1. Indicates how the data file entry images are to be printed in theMD Nastran print file. This controls thesetting used for the ECHO Case Control command. This parameter can have one of three settings: Sorted, Unsorted, or None.

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis Solution Parameters This is a list of data input available for defining the Nonlinear Transient Solu tion Parameters that was not shown on the previous page. Parameter Name Description Plate Rz Stiffness Factor Defines the in plane stiffness factor to be applied to shell elements. This defi nes the K6ROT parameter. This is an alternate method to suppress the grid point singular ities and is intended primarily for geometric nonlinear analysis. Maximum Printed Lines Limits the size of the MD Nastran print file that will be generated. This define s the setting of the MAXLINES Case Control command. Maximum Run Time Limits the amount of CPU time expressed in CPU minutes that can be used by this run. This is used to prevent runaway jobs. This defines the setting of the TIME Executive Control statement. Wt-Mass Conversion Defines the conversion factor between weight and mass measures. This defines the setting of the WTMASS parameter. Node ID for Wt. Gener. Indicates the node ID that is to be used for the Grid Point Weight Generator. Th is is the GRDPNT parameter. Struct. Damping Coeff. Defines a global damping coefficient to applied. This defines the G parameter (e .g., PARAM, G, value.) W3, Damping Factor Define W3 and W4 parameters. These parameters alter the damping characteristics of the model. W4, Damping Factor Results Output Format On the Results Output Format form you choose which output formats you want to us e with your solution type. For more details, please see Results Output Format, 348 .

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Solution Parameters Implicit Nonlinear This the form 600 subordinate form appears when the Solution Parameters button is selected on Solution Type when Implicit Nonlinear is selected. Use this form to generate a SOL 400 or input file.

The default solution sequence for Implicit Nonlinear is 600. By toggling the SOL 400 Run ON, Patran will write a SOL 400 input file. Not all features of SOL 600 are accessible using SOL 400, so use with caution and check your input file and results carefully. Solver / Options... See Solver Options Subform (SOL 600), 306. Contact Parameters... See Contact Parameters Subform, 307. Direct Text Input... This subform is used to directly enter entries in the File Management, Executive Control, Case Control, and Bulk Data sections of the MD Nastran input file. See Direct Text Input, 276. Restart Parameters... See Restart Parameters Subform, 315. Advanced Job Control... See Advanced Job Control Subform (SOL 600), 317.

Domain Decomposition... Assumed Strain Constant Dilatation Plane Stress Reduced Integration Creep Shell Shear Correction SOL 400 Run Default Initial or Load Temperature Results Output Format... Chapter 3: Running an Analysis Solution Parameters See Domain Decomposition, 318. For SOL 600, if ON, (default is ON), places the MARCASUM parameter into the input file. This forces all elements that can deal with assumed strain to use th is formulation. This improves the bending behavior of Marc elements 3, 7, and 11. F or SOL 400, the NLMOPTS entry is written with the ASSUM option. Again, this is a global setting and forces all elements that can use this formulation to adopt it . If ON, (default is OFF), places the MARCDILT parameter into the input file. This will force all elements that can deal with constant dilatation (for nearly incompressible analysis) to use this formulation. This affects Marc element type s 7, 10, 11, 19, and 20 only and recommended for elastic-plastic and creep analysis. (SOL 600 only) Replaces plane strain elements with plane stress elements. (SOL 600 only) Specifies that a lower number of element integration points be used to integrate exactly. (SOL 600 only) For SOL 400, writes the NLMOPTS entry with the CREEP option defaults for creep analysis. For SOL 400 (only), forces all shell elements using nonlinear formulations to us e the shear correction. This writes the NLMOPTS entry with the TSHEAR option. Use this to select a SOL 400 simulation, instead of a SOL 600 simulation. For SOL 400 allows for specification of a general initial temperature and a gene ral loading temperature. TEMPD entries are written for both with Case Control

TEMPERATURE(INITIAL) and TEMPERATURE(LOAD) entries calling out the corresponding TEMPD entries in the bulk data. On the Results Output Format form you choose which output formats you want to us e with your solution type. For more details, please see Results Output Format, 348 .

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Solution Parameters Solver Options Subform (SOL 600) Specifies the solver to be used in numerically inverting the system matrix of li near equilibrium equations. Inconsistent MPCs There are three choices for dealing with problem MPCs, 1) Reorder (reorder the DOFs that are used to define the problem MPCs), 2) Continue (continue the analysis with no changes to the MPCs DOFs), or 3) Stop (stop the analysis). Solver Type Chooses Direct Profile, Iterative Sparse, Direct Sparse , Hardware Sparse, Multifrontal Sparse (default), or External Sparse as the solver. Non-Symmetric Specifies non-symmetric for Solver Type of Direct Profile or Multifrontal Sparse. Non-Positive Definite Specifies non-positive definite option valid for all solver types, use ON. On by default in SOL 600, use Nastran Default. Can un select this option by using OFF. Memory Defines the amount of work space in words. This can be left blank and the translator will automatically determine this based on model size. Multifrontal Sparse Parameters

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis Solution Parameters Out-of-Core Threshold For Hardware and Multifrontal Sparse solvers only. Default is 100. Represents the number of real*4 words in millions of words. Only for SGI computers running the IRIX operating system. Bandwidth Optimization Turns on the optimize option for the Direct Profile or Multifrontal Sparse solvers and uses the Sloan algorithm. Other solvers have their own optimizer and use it by default. Contact Parameters Subform Defines options for detecting and handling contact.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Solution Parameters Deformable-Deformable Method Optimize Constraint Equations Contact Detection... Separation... Friction Parameters... Enable Initial Contact Initial Contact... Penetration Check Reduce Printout of Surface Definition In Double-Sided method, for each contact body pair, nodes of both bodies will be checked for contact. In Single-Sided method, for each contact body pair, only nodes of the lower-numbered body will be checked for contact. Results are dependent upon the order in which contact bodies are defined. Use this to decrease the bandwidth of the model. See Contact Detection Subform, 309. See Separation Subform, 311. See Friction Parameters Subform, 312. Click on checkbox to activate the capability for control of initial contact. The initial contact is for creating an MD Nastran entry BCTABLE with ID = 0 to be used for increment 0. For SOL 600, this causes rigid contact bodies to be moved so they just touch adjacent flexible contact bodies. For SOL 101 and 400, a BCTABLE is used with ID = 0, which causes rigid contact bodies to be moved, as for SOL 600, and/or adjusting the coordinates of all active nodes on the surface of all deformable BCBODYs to remove any prestressed condition. See Initial Contact Subform, 314. This controls contact penetration checking, sometimes referred to as the increment splitting option. Available options are: At End of Increment, Per Iteration (default), Suppressed (Fixed), Suppressed (Adaptive). At End of Increment means penetration is checked at the end of a load increment. Per Iteration means that penetration is checked at the end of every iteration within an increment. If penetration is detected, increments are split. Suppress is to suppress this feature for Fixed and Adaptive load stepping types. This controls reduction of printout of surface definition.

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis Solution Parameters Contact Detection Subform On the Contact Control Parameters subform, select Contact Detection... This form controls general contact parameters for contact detection.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Solution Parameters Distance Tolerance Bias on Distance Tolerance Suppress Bounding Box Check Include Outside (Solid Element) Include Outside (Rigid Surface) Check Layers Ignore Thickness Include Edges Activate Quadratic Contact Activate 3D Beam-Beam Contact Distance below which a node is considered touching a body (error). Leave the box blank to have MSC.Marc calculate the tolerance as the smaller of 1/20 element edge length or 1/4 shell thickness. Contact tolerance BIAS factor. The value should be within the range of zero to one. Models with shell elements seem to be sensitive to this parameter. You may need to experiment with this value if you have shell element models that will not converge. The SOL 600 default is 0.9. Turn ON this button if you want to suppress bounding box checking. This might eliminate penetration, but slows down the solution. When detecting contact of elements (beam/bar, shell, solid elements) use this to include contact of the outside of the elements. For details refer to the BCPARA entry (contact parameters) of the MD Nastran QRG. The entries that are used for the BCPARA entry are ITOPBM (beam/bar), ITOPSH (plate/shell), and ITOPSD (solid). When detecting contact of rigid surfaces use this to include contact of the edge s of the surfaces. For details refer to the BCPARA entry (contact parameters) of the MD Nastran QRG. The entries that are used for the BCPARA entry are ITOPBM (beam/bar), ITOPSH (plate/shell), and ITOPSD (solid). For contact bodies composed of shell elements, this option menu chooses the layers to be checked. Available options are: Top and Bottom, Top Only, Bottom Only. Check Layers and Ignore Thickness combination enters the appropriate flag in the 10th field of the 2nd data block.

Turn this button ON to ignore shell thickness. Check Layers and Ignore Thickness combination enters the appropriate flag in the 10th field of the 2nd data block. Use this to detect contact of edges. There are three options, Beam/Bar, Free and Hard Shell, or Both. For details refer to the BCPARA entry (contact parameters) of the MD Nastran QRG. The entries that are used for the BCPARA entry are ITOPBM (beam/bar), ITOPSH (plate/shell), and ITOPSD (solid). Use this to detect the contact of the edges of quadratic elements (midside nodes). Turn this button ON to activate 3D beam-beam contact. Activate 3D BeamBeam Contact enters a one(1) in the 13th field of the 2nd data block. This creat es the MD Nastran Bulk Data entry BCPARA, and uses the entry BEAMP.

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis Solution Parameters Separation Subform On the Contact Control Parameters subform, select Separation... This form contro ls general contact parameters for contact separation. Maximum Separations Maximum number of separations allowed in each increment. Maximum Separations is entered in the 6th field of the 2nd data block. Default is 9999. Retain Value on NCYCLE Turn ON this button if you do not want to reset NCYCLE to zero when separation occurs. This speeds up the solution, but might result in instabilities. You can not set this and Suppress Bounding Box simultaneously. Retain Value of NCYCLE enters a three(3) in field 8 of the 2nd data block. Increment Specifies whether chattering is allowed or not. Increment and Chattering enters the appropriate flag in the 9th field of the 2nd data block. Chattering Specifies the separation criterion (forces or stresses) and the critical value a t which the separation will take place. Increment and Chattering enters the appropriate flag in the 9th field of the 2nd data block.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Solution Parameters Separation Criterion Specifies in which increment (current or next) the separation is allowed to occu r. Separation Criterion enters a one(1) in the 12th field of the 2nd data block if separation is based on stresses. Force Value Force/Stress Value is placed in the 5th field of the 3rd data block. Stress Value Friction Parameters Subform On the Contact Control Parameters subform, select Friction Parameters...

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis Solution Parameters Friction Type Method Relative Sliding Velocity Transition Region Multiplier to FrictionCoefficient Friction Force Tolerance Heat Generation Conversion Factor Available options for friction Type are: None (default), Shear (for metal formin g), Coulomb (for normal contact), Shear for Rolling, Coulomb for Rolling, StickSlip, Bilinear Shear, and Bilinear Coulomb. The MD Nastran entry BCPARA is written to the .bdf file, with FTYPE used. Type and Method: places 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 , or 5 in the 4th field of the 2nd data block depending on fiction type, and place s a 0 or 1 in the 5th field of the 2rd data block for friction based on nodal forces or nodal stresses, respectively for Coulomb fiction. Stick-Slip is a Coulomb type friction. For Coulomb type of friction models (options 2, 4, and 5 above), there are 2 methods for computing friction: Nodal Stress, Nodal Force (default). Type and Method: places 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 in the 4th field of the 2nd data block depend ing on fiction type, and places a 0 or 1 in the 5th field of the 2rd data block for friction based on nodal forces or nodal stresses, respectively for Coulomb fiction. Critical value for sliding velocity below which surfaces will be simulated as sticking. Relative Sliding Velocity is placed in the 1st field of the 3rd data b lock for all friction models except Stick-Slip. Slip-to-Stick transition region. Transition Region is placed in the 1st field of the 3rd data block for Stick-Slip model. Friction coefficient multiplier. Multiplier to Friction Coefficient and Friction Force Tolerance are placed in the 7th and 8th field of the 3rd data block respectively for the Stick-Slip friction model.

Friction Force Tolerance. Multiplier to Friction Coefficient and Friction Force Tolerance are placed in the 7th and 8th field of the 3rd data block respectively for the Stick-Slip friction model. A factor related to how much heat is generated by the friction process.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Solution Parameters Initial Contact Subform On the Contact Control Parameters subform, select Initial Contact...

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis Solution Parameters Restart Parameters Subform Includes a Restart option in the MD Nastran input file. Restarts are only suppor ted for SOL 600 in the current release. Restart Type You can Write restart data, Read restart data and Read and Write restart data. T he default is None for no restart data. Create Continuous Results If when restarting a job, you wish the results form the previous run to be copie d File into the new POST file, then turn this ON. This will place the RESTART or RESTART LAST options before the POST option in the input file. Otherwise they are placed after the POST option which flags MSC.Marc not to copy the results to the new POST file. If you turn this ON, you must have a restarname.t16 and/or restartname.t19 file in your local directory or the MSC.Marc analysis will fail. Last Converged Increment Writes a RESTART LAST instead of a RESTART option. ON by default. Reauto OFF by default. This places a REAUTO option in the input file. Any additional data needed for the REAUTO option are extracted from the first Load Step information for the restart job. Only if the Restart Type is set to Read or Read and Write is the REAUTO written or the toggle visible to the user.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Solution Parameters Restart from Increment Defines the increment to be read from the file specified in the Select Restart F ile form. This is entered in the 3rd data field on the 2nd card of the RESTART option. It is only requested when Restart Type is set to Read or Read and Write. The last increment on the restart file is used for the RESTART LAST option when Last Converged Increment is ON. Increments Between Writing Defines the number of increments between writing data to the restart file. This is entered in the 2nd data field on the 2nd card of the RESTART option. It is only requested when Restart Type is set to Write or Read and Write. When Last Converted Increment is ON, this is the 4th field of the 2nd data block of the RESTART LAST option. Select Restart File... This brings up a file browser to select the restart file when the Restart Type i s set to Read or Read and Write. This file is specified on the command line for invoking the MSC.Marc solver using the -r option.

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis Solution Parameters Advanced Job Control Subform (SOL 600) Sets alternate versions of the solver and alternate formats for the results file , for SOL 600 jobs. Marc Version Specifies the version of MSC.Marc to run the analysis. Marc Results File Format Specifies the file format for the output from the analy sis. Marc Results File Type Defines the binary output and/or text format of output from the analysis. Binary is recommended since .t16 files are linarily compatible across platforms and take up less space.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Solution Parameters Marc scratch files w/ Nastran s Use Environment Variables Use to enable the use of environment variables. Suppress Non-SOLMARC Errors Suppress errors that are not SOL 600 errors. Submit Marc Job Submit SOL 600 jobs to Marc. Use Marc License Use this to search for, then use Marc licenses. Copy Marc Files Make copies of Marc files; for example copy .t16 file. Filter Marc Text Delete Marc Files Delete Marc files after the corresponding Patran files are cre ated. Gradually Release Constraints Analysis Control Defaults Creates the Nastran Bulk Data entry PARAM, MARCDEF. It s three values are Nastran Development (recommended by Nastran development; Marc SHELL_SECT parameter is set to 11), Marc-Mentat (current Marc standard), Marc Development (recommended by both Marc and Nastran development). Marc Submit Command Locates the submit command to run the MSC.Marc analysis (optional). For Specify Full Command its list box will be un-ghosted. Domain Decomposition Domain Decomposition is used to partition the model into seperate parts (domains ) for parallel processing. The Method used to do this is named Domain Decomposition Method (DDM ). This form designates that domain decomposition be done manually, semi-automatically, or au tomatically, for either SOL 400 or SOL 600 jobs.

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis Solution Parameters

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Solution Parameters Decomposition Method Set this to Automatic if you wish MD Nastran to automatical ly create the domains during analysis run time. Set to Semi-Automatic if you wish to have MSC.Patran automatically break the model into domains which can be visualized before submittal. Set to Manual to have full control over the domains. This requires the creation of the groups before they can be selected here in this form and associated to a domain. Number of Domains This determines how many domains are to be created. When you c hange this number and press the Enter or Return key, the spread sheet updates with this number of rows. The default is 1. This corresponds to the number of CPUs desired to run the job. For the Automatic method, this is the only input that is required and the spreadsheet is not visible. Model or Current Group This is for choosing a part of the model to decompose for parallel processing: Model -- decompose all of the model, Current Group -decompose just the current group. This choice must be consistent with what part of the model is specified for analysis (Analysis: Analyze / Entire Model or Selected Group). This is only active if Decomposition Method is set to Automatic or Semi-Automatic. Metis Method There are three Methods that can be used to partition the Model or Current Group into Domains. They are, 1) Nodal Position, 2) Element Topology, or 3) Best (a procedure that accounts for the best of the nodal, element, or vector type algorithms). This method can only be used if Decomposition Method is set to Automatic. Domain Island Removal Using this option causes some parts of disjoint domains (d omain islands) to be combined with adjacent domains. This can only be used if Decomposition Method is set to Automatic. Coarse Graph Using this option sometimes produces domain islands (disjoint domai ns). This option (the default) is recommended to reduce the time to decompose the initial global domain. Use this only if there is a definite need for a bette r decomposition. This can only be used if Decomposition Method is set to Automatic. Single POST File If more than one CPU processor is used to solve the problem, th e seperate/multiple results files can be compiled into a single file for postprocessing using Single POST File. Create Click Create to create Domain Information spreadsheet rows. After doing this the number of rows will equal the value of Number of Domains in the form. If Decomposition Method is set to Manual, the previously created group names will be selectable in Select a Group window at the bottom. Visualize This is used to display groups. Select a group name for the heading Do main Information under Group. Click Visualize to display just that group. This can be done for some or all of the groups.

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis Solution Parameters Reset Graphics Click Reset Graphics to reset the viewport graphics. Validate This is for validating (checking) that the domains are not disjoint. Fo r two adjacent domains, the nodes at the interface of the domains must be in both domains. Domain Information The window with the definition of each Domain. For a given Do main there is a corresponding unique Group name. DDAM DDAM is an acronym for Dynamic Design Analysis Method, or DDAM is a methodology for analyzing ship-mounted equipment that the US Navy uses in the event of a near-miss underwa ter. Most FEA products follow the DDAM methodology, as does any hand calculation. MSC has made several improvements to its products that make DDAM easier to use. To accommodate the special spectrum and summing conventions MSC made several mod ifications to MD Nastran. A DMAP alter in MD Nastran puts out data important for a DDAM analys is. A stand-alone Fortran program reads the MD Nastran data, calculates the spectral data, formats DDAM run information, and sends data back to MD Nastran for further postprocessing. MSC s DDAM has the following capabilities. Calculates all three shock directions simultaneously. Automatically calculates the appropriate spectra from input of the coefficients. Performs the NRL sum. Contains modal selection following 3010 Rev 1 convention. Provides manual mode selection if needed. Provides mode-by-mode output if desired. Uses all available MD Nastran elements. Provides NRL summed output in MD Nastran OP2 format for use with most postproces sors. Offers an alternate coefficient input method is available that avoids using the Fortran program, but the classified coefficients must be entered directly in the data file. Has unlimited model size. Uses MSC s Lanczos Eigenvalue solver for fast solutions.

DDAM has the following limitations. All base input points must be rigidly connected to a single grid flagged on a SU PORT entry. There is no easy method to handle closely spaced modes as defined by 3010. MD Nastran printed output (.f06 file) is not labeled well, and must be used care fully in order to avoid mistakes. This is especially true of the mode-by-mode output. A DDAM data file will not read into Patran/MSC.FEA completely.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Solution Parameters .XDB output not available for NRL summed quantities MD Nastran requires additional input switch to be toggled in Patran in order to plot NRL summed von Mises and combined beam stresses. MD Nastran does not calculate beam and bar shear stresses. They are not included in the von Mises and combined stresses reported by MD Nastran DDAM. DDAM in Patran DDAM in MD Nastran is a process that involves three main parts, and a number of smaller parts. The entire procedure is accessed from a simple interface in Patran that integrates t he process. Part 1, Modal Analysis - A modal analysis is run in MD Nastran. This supplies th e frequencies, mode shapes and modal participation for the model. Part 2, Spectrum Generation Using the output from Part 1, you can use a Fortran program to calculate the shock spectrum. This is based on the DDS-072 or NRL 1396 documents , or you can manually enter your own spectrum. Part 3, Spectrum Application and Data Recovery The calculated spectrum from Part 2 is applied to the mode shapes calculated in Part 1, and the results are calculated on a mode-bymode basis. The results from this are then summed using an NRL sum to produce results , one set for each shock direction. The Patran interface presents you with a selection of options to calculate the s pectrum and sum the results. The options are stored, and when the MD Nastran modal analysis complete s, the Fortran program automatically starts, using the stored options to drive it. MD Nastran automatic ally resumes after the completion of the Fortran program and finishes the analysis. During is process, a number of files will be created that are inputs and outputs from this process, all named jobname.xxx using the jobname chosen in Patran. The most important files a re: jobname.ddd jobname.f11 jobname.f13 jobname.ver the DDAM potions file that drives the Fortran program the modal information needed to calculate the spectrum the calculated spectra information for input back into MD Nastran modal verification file

jobname.opw jobname.opx jobname.opy jobname.opz

Nastran OP2 file with the mode shapes Nastran op2 file with the NRL summed results for x-shock Nastran op2 file with the NRL summed results for y-shock Nastran op2 file with the NRL summed results for z-shock

Once the run is complete, you can look over both the results and the modal verif ication file. If the results are not as expected or desired, there are a number of more advanced capabilities of this DDAM procedure for more control over the process. These include some that are on the Patran for ms (changes in 80%

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis Solution Parameters criterion, minimum G value) and ones that can be accessed using the Patran Direc t Text capability (modebymode output, specific mode selection). DDAM Model Preparation In order to run DDAM, all of the fixed base points (excitation inputs) in the mo del must be rigidly connected to a single point. The MD Nastran RBE2 element is used for this, conne cting the independent node (the SUPORT point) to all of the other fixed base/excitation points (depend ent grids) in all 6 degrees of freedom. This point is flagged for the SUPORT entry in the DDAM setup. It is not necessary that this point is separated (spatially) from the other input points, you can select one o f the base points to be the SUPORT point, as long as all the excitation points are then connected to it. It is not advisable to have any other translational constraints in the model, as they will remove modal mass fro m the model and the 80% criterion will not necessarily be correct, and the model will have base points t hat will not be excited. You may have rotational constraints to hold shafting and to remove plate and bar sin gularities, as the rotational components are not used in the DDAM excitation. No loads or other boundary conditions are needed for the analysis. As per 3010, you need to add operating loads to the shock loads at the conclusion of the analysis. Set up the model like any other modal analysis, with the exception of the SUPORT point. Mass and material density are required to obtain correct mode shapes. The modal analysis parameters are set up on the Subcase Opt ions form, where you can select the number of desired modes, the lower frequency bound, and an upper frequency bound. The analysis uses a Lanczos extraction routine with mass normalization, and uses the default Lanczos debugging information level. You will not have control over these parameters in DDAM.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Solution Parameters DDAM Solution Parameters This subordinate form appears when the Solution Parameters button is selected on the Solution Type form when DDAM is selected. Use this form to generate a SOL 187 input file. Automatic Constraints Indicates that an AUTOSPC entry is requested. MD Nastran w ill automatically constrain model singularities. Shell Normal Tol. Angle Indicates that MD Nastran will define grid point normals for a Faceted Shell Surface based on the Tolerance Angle. This data appears on a PARAM, SNORM entry. Mass Calculation

Lumped Coupled Data Deck Echo None Sorted Unsorted Plate Rz Stiffness factor Maximum Printed Lines Maximum Run Time Wt-Mass Node id Default Default SUPPORT Conversion for Wt. Gener Initial Temperature Load Temperature Node

Results Output Format Chapter 3: Running an Analysis Solution Parameters Defines how the mass matrix is to be treated within MD Nastran. This controls th e setting of the COUPMASS parameter. This parameter can be set to either Coupled or Lumped. If set to Coupled, COUPMASS will be set to +1, otherwise, it will be set to -1. Indicates how the data file entry images are to be printed in the MD Nastran pri nt file. This controls the setting used for the ECHO Case Control command. This parameter can have one of three settings: Sorted, Unsorted, or None. Defines the in plane stiffness factor to be applied to shell elements. This defi nes the K6ROT parameter. This is an alternate method to suppress the grid point singularities and is intended primarily for geometric nonlinear analysis. Limits the size of the MD Nastran print file that will be generated. This define s the setting of the MAXLINES Case Control command. Limits the amount of CPU time expressed in CPU minutes that can be used by this run. This is used to prevent runaway jobs. This defines the setting of the TIME Executive Control statement. Defines the conversion factor between weight and mass measures. This defines the setting of the WTMASS parameter. Indicates the node ID that is to be used for the Grid Point Weight Generator. Th

is is the GRDPNT parameter. Defines the Default Initial Temperature: TEMPD value for subcase entry TEMP(INITIAL) Defines the Default Load Temperature: Sets the TEMPD value for the subcase entry TEMP(LOAD) subcase entry. Selects the point you have chosen for your base input. Note that this is a requi red choice with no default, and that you can only pick one node. If multiple nodes a re entered in the data box, only the first one is used. On the Results Output Format form you choose which output formats you want to use with your solution type. For more details, please see Results Output Format, 348.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Solution Parameters Explicit Nonlinear This subordinate form appears when the Solution Parameters button is selected on the Solution Type form when Explicit Nonlinear is selected under Preferences: Analysis... . Use th is form to generate a SOL 700 input file. Parameter Name Description Large Displacements Use this to cause the large displacement formulation to be u sed. Follower Forces Use this to cause the forces to move (translate and rotate) with the model. Prestress Option Use this to cause the pre-stresses to be calculated. Maximum Printed Lines Limits the size of the MD Nastran print file that will be generated. This defines the setting of the MAXLINES Case Control command. Maximum Run Time Limits the amount of CPU time expressed in CPU minutes that can be used by this run. This is used to prevent runaway jobs. This defines the setting of the TIME Executive Control statement.

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis Solution Parameters Parameter Name Description Wt-Mass Conversion Defines the conversion factor between weight and mass measure s. This defines the setting of the WTMASS parameter. Node ID for Wt. Gener. Indicates the node ID that is to be used for the Grid Poi nt Weight Generator. This is the GRDPNT parameter. SOL 700 Default Settings Either Dytran or Ls-Dyna default settings can be used. Sol700 Parameters... Displays the Sol700 Parameters and Extra Data form that is used for specifing parameter values for such things as execution control, dynamic relaxation (entry DAMPGBL), general parameters, contact, and Eulerian parameters. See Sol700 Parameters Subform, 327 Resultts Output Use this to specify the types of files that are to be written fo r the SOL 700 analysis. Format... For example, XDB (jobname.xdb) and Print (jobname.f06).See Results Output Format, 348 Sol700 Parameters Subform This subordinate form appears when Sol700 Parameters button is selected on the S olution Parameters form of either Explicit Nonlinear or other structural Solution Type where Sol700 is available such as: SOL700,101 SOL700,106 SOL700,109 SOL700,129 Linear Static NonLinear Static Direct Transient Response NonLinear Transient

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Solution Parameters . The supported parameters are shown in the following table: Form Parameters Execution Control Parameters... DYSTATIC, DYBLDTIM, DYINISTEP, DYTSTEPERODE, DYMINSTEP, DYMAXSTEP, DYSTEPFCTL, DYTERMNENDMAS, DYTSTEPDT2MS Dynamic Relaxation... This is for specifying the entries for the DAMPGBL Bulk Data entry. This is for defining parameter values for static analysis using dynamic relaxation for SOL 700 only.

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis Solution Parameters Form Parameters General Parameters... DYLDKND, DYCOWPRD, DYCOWPRP, DYBULKL, DYHRGIHQ, DYRGQH, DYENERGYHGEN, DYSHELLFORM, DYSHTHICK, DYSHNIP Contact Parameters... DYCONSLSFAC, DYCONRWPNAL, DYCONPENOPT, DYCONTHKCHG, DYCONENMASS, DYCONECDT, DYCONIGNORE, DYCONSKIPTWG Binary OutputDatabase File Parameters... DYBEAMIP, DYMAXINT, DYNEIPS, DYNINTSL, DYNEIPH, DYSTRFLG, DYSIGFLG, DYEPSFLG, DYRLTFLG, DYENGFLG, DYCMPFLG, DYIEVERP, DYDCOMP, DYSHGE, DYSTSSZ, DYN3THDT Time History Output Request... This is for specifying the type of output file (Binary, ASCII, Both), and the Output Time Interval. Hourglass Setting... See Hourglass Setting Subform, 329 Merge Rigid Mat... See Merge Rigid Material Subform, 331 Dynamic Relaxation for Restart... See Dynamic Relaxation for Restart Subform, 333 Damping PerProperty... See Damping Per Property Subform, 335 Rigid Body Switch and Merge... See Rigid Body Switch and Merge Subform, 337 Eulerian Parameters... See Eulerian Parameters Subform, 343 SPH Control Parameters... See SPH Control Parameters Subform, 346 Hourglass Setting Subform This subordinate form appears when Hourglass Setting button is selected on the S ol700 Parameters and Extra Data form of either Explicit Nonlinear or other structural Solution Type w here Sol700 is available such as: SOL700,101 SOL700,106 SOL700,109 SOL700,129 Linear Static NonLinear Static Direct Transient Response NonLinear Transient

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Solution Parameters .

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis Solution Parameters The supported parameters are shown in the following table: Form Parameters Existing Hourglass Setting List of previously created hourglass settings. Hourglass Name Specify the name. Property Type Specify either a Shell (2D) or Solid (3D) element type. Control Type Choose one of several types of controlling the hourglass effects. T he choices are: 1) Standard LSDyna Viscous (Property Type = Shell or Solid), 2) Flanagan-Belytschko Viscous (Property Type = Shell or Solid), 3) Flan-Bely. Visc. + Vol. Integ. (exact volume integration for solid elements) (Property Type = Solid), 4) Flanagan-Belytschko Stiffness (Property Type = Shell or Solid), 5) Flan-Bely. Stiff. + Vol. Integ. (exact volume integration for solid elements) (Property Type = Solid), 6) Flanagan-Bindeman Stiffness (Property Type = Solid), 7) Fully Integrated Shell (Property Type = Shell). These entries are defined on the HGSUPPR Bulk Data entry in the MD Nastran Quick Reference Guide. Hourglass Coefficient This entry is defined on the HGSUPPR Bulk Data entry in the MD Nastran Quick Reference Guide. Warping Hourglass Coeff. This entry is defined on the HGSUPPR Bulk Data entry in the MD Nastran Quick Reference Guide. Bending HourglassCoeff. This entry is defined on the HGSUPPR Bulk Data entry in the MD Nastran Quick Reference Guide. Linear Bulk Visc. Coeff. This entry is defined on the HGSUPPR Bulk Data entry in the MD Nastran Quick Reference Guide. Quadr. Bulk Visc. Coeff. This entry is defined on the HGSUPPR Bulk Data entry in the MD Nastran Quick Reference Guide. Select Property Set Select a previously created element property. For example, P roperties > Create > 2D > Shell > Options: Explicit PSHELL1 > Input Properties... > Shell Formulations > HUGHES. Add Click Add after input all necessary data into the Hourglass Setting form to create an Existing Hourglass Setting. Modify Click Modify after input all changed data into the Hourglass Setting form to update an Existing Hourglass Setting. You must first select the particular Existing Hourglass Setting. Merge Rigid Material Subform This subordinate form appears when Merge Rigid Mat button is selected on the Sol 700 Parameters and Extra Data form of either Explicit Nonlinear or other structural Solution Type w

here Sol700 is available such as:

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Solution Parameters SOL700,101 - Linear Static SOL700,106 - NonLinear Static SOL700,109 - Direct Transient Response SOL700,129 - NonLinear Transient .

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis Solution Parameters The supported parameters are shown in the following table: Form Parameters Existing MergedMaterials List of previously merged MATRIG materials. MATRIG is an MD Nastran Bulk Data entry for defining rigid body properties. Merged Material Name Specify the name of merged material to be created. Select Material to be Merged into Specify the name of an MATRIG material to merge other MATRIG materials into. Select Materials to be Merged Specify the names of MATRIG materials that are to be merged into the merged material whos name is specified under Merged Material Name. Add Click Add after input all necessary data into the Rigid Materials form to cr eate an Existing Merged Materials. Modify Click Modify after input all changed data into the Rigid Materials form t o update an Existing Merged Materials. You must first select the particular Existing Merged Materials. Dynamic Relaxation for Restart Subform This subordinate form appears when Dynamic Relaxation for Restart button is sele cted on the Sol700 Parameters and Extra Data form of either Explicit Nonlinear or other structural Solution Type where Sol700 is available such as: SOL700,101 SOL700,106 SOL700,109 SOL700,129 Linear Static NonLinear Static Direct Transient Response NonLinear Transient

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Solution Parameters . The supported parameters are shown in the following table: Form Parameters Relaxation Use this to not use (None Active) or use (Activated Relaxation) relax ation in performing the simulation. [Termination Time] The time to stop the simulation. This is optional ([ ]). ConvergenceTolerance Specify convergence tolerance. Number of Iterations Specify the maximum number of iterations. Papadrakakis AutoControl Click the checkbox to specify that convergence control is to be automatic using the Papadrakakis method.

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis Solution Parameters Form Parameters PapadrakakisConvergenceTolerance To use this it is necessary to not select Papadrakakis Auto Control. Relaxation Factor Specify the value of the Relaxation Factor. Time step scale Factor Specify the value of the Time step scale Factor. Damping Per Property Subform This subordinate form appears when Damping Per Property button is selected on th e Sol700 Parameters and Extra Data form of either Explicit Nonlinear or other structural Solution Ty pe where Sol700 is available such as: SOL700,101 SOL700,106 SOL700,109 SOL700,129 Linear Static NonLinear Static Direct Transient Response NonLinear Transient

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Solution Parameters . The supported parameters are shown in the following table: Form Parameters Damping Type Select either Property (use property) or Stiffness (use Rayleigh da mping). System Damping Constant Table Select a time dependent field under Time Dependent Field. This field will be multiplied by the Scalar Factor for Load Curve entry. The (X,Y,Z) Trans. Damping Forces and (X,Y,Z) Rot. Damping Moments entries (all of these form a 6 component load vector) are multiplied by the scaled time dependent field.

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis Solution Parameters Form Parameters Time DependentField Select a Field, with it being entered into the System Damping Constant Table list box. For example, select the field named damping_vs_time under Time Dependent Field. For System Damping Constant Table f:damping_vs_time appears. Scale Factor for Load Curve Specify the scale factor that will multiply the Time Dependent Field specified under System Damping Constant Table. X Trans. Damping Forces Scale factor for X translation damping forces, in the global coordinate system directions. Y Trans. Damping Forces Scale factor for Y translation damping forces, in the global coordinate system directions. Z Trans. Damping Forces Scale factor for Z translation damping forces, in the global coordinate system directions. X Rot. DampingMoments Scale factor for X rotation damping moments, in the global coordinate system directions. Y Rot. DampingMoments Scale factor for Y rotation damping moments, in the global coordinate system directions. Z Rot. Damping Moments Scale factor for Z rotation damping moments, in the global coordinate system directions. Rayleigh Damping Coeff. Specify the scalar coefficient (.) that the global stiffness matrix is multiplie d by to obtain the Rayleigh damping matrix. Rigid Body Switch and Merge Subform This subordinate form appears when Rigid Body Switch and Merge button is selecte d on the Sol700 Parameters and Extra Data form of either Explicit Nonlinear or other structural Solution Type where Sol700 is available such as: SOL700,101 SOL700,106 SOL700,109 SOL700,129 Linear Static NonLinear Static Direct Transient Response NonLinear Transient

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Solution Parameters . The supported parameters are shown in the following table: Form Parameters Option Only option is At Start (D2R0000). Existing Merged Properties List of deformable body and rigid body properties that have already been merged. Merged Body Name Specify the name of the Existing Merged Properties entry to be created. Deformable Property Select an entry under Deformable Property

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis Solution Parameters Form Parameters Master Rigid Property Select an entry under Master Rigid Property Add Click Add to create an entry under Existing Merged Properties. Modify Click Modify to save the changed selections under Deformable Property and Master Rigid Property to update an Existing Merged Properties. You must first select th e particular Existing Merged Properties. Define Set of Parts to be Switched See Define Set of Parts to be Switched Subform, 340 Define Inertial Properties of Rigid Body See Define Inertial Properties of Rigid Body Subform, 342

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Solution Parameters Define Set of Parts to be Switched Subform This subordinate form appears when Define Set of Parts to be Switched button is selected on the Rigid or Deformable Parts Switching form of either Explicit Nonlinear or other structu ral Solution Type where Sol700 is available such as: SOL700,101 SOL700,106 SOL700,109 SOL700,129 Linear Static NonLinear Static Direct Transient Response NonLinear Transient.

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis Solution Parameters The supported parameters are shown in the following table: Form Parameters Option Only option is At Stage (D2RAUTO). Existing MergedProperties List of deformable body and rigid body properties that have already been merged. Merged Body Name Specify the name of the Existing Merged Properties entry to be created. Deformable Property Select an entry under Deformable Property. Master Rigid Property Select an entry under Master Rigid Property. For example, a 2D Shell Element Pro perty created using an Isotropic (SOL 700) Rigid MATRIG material. Add Click Add to create an entry under Existing Merged Properties. Modify Click Modify to save the changed selections under Deformable Property and Master Rigid Property to update an Existing Merged Properties. You must first select the part icular Existing Merged Properties. Starting Switch Time Specify the time to switch the deformable and rigid propert ies. Ending Switch Time Specify the time to terminate the switching of the deformable and rigid properties. Delay Period Specify the time delay (.. for switching. Rigid Wall/Contact Surf Number Specify the surface numbers for rigid walls/surfaces that are to contact. Related Switch Set Max. Permited Time Step Size Specify the maximum time step. Number of Deformable Parts to Rigid Specify the number of deformable parts that will be switched to rigid parts. Number of RigidParts to Deformable Specify the number of rigid parts that will be switched to deformable parts. Activation Code Switch Select one of the five flags, 1) EQ.0, 2) EQ.1, 3) EQ.2, 4) EQ.3, or 5) EQ.4. Pair of Related Switches Select one of the three flags, 1) EQ.0, 2) EQ.1, 3) EQ.-1. Nodal Rigid Body Activation Flag Select one of the three flags, 1) EQ.0, 2) EQ.1, 3) EQ.2. Nodal Constraint Activation Flag Select one of the three flags, 1) EQ.0, 2) EQ.1, 3) EQ.2. Rigid WallActivation Flag Select one of the three flags, 1) EQ.0, 2) EQ.1, 3) EQ.2.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Solution Parameters Define Inertial Properties of Rigid Body Subform This subordinate form appears when Define Inertial Properties of Rigid Body butt on is selected on the Rigid or Deformable Parts Switching form of either Explicit Nonlinear or other s tructural Solution Type where Sol700 is available such as: SOL700,101 SOL700,106 SOL700,109 SOL700,129 . Linear Static NonLinear Static Direct Transient Response NonLinear Transient

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis Solution Parameters The supported parameters are shown in the following table: Form Parameters Option Only option is New Rigid Props. (D2RINNER). Master Rigid Property Select a Master Rigid Property. For example, a 2D Shell Element Property created using an Isotropic (SOL 700) Rigid MATRIG material. X Coord of Center of Mass X coordinate of center of mass. Y Coord of Center of Mass Y coordinate of center of mass. Z Coord of Center of Mass Z coordinate of center of mass. Translational Mass Scalar mass value for translation, not rotation. XX Comp. of InertiaTensor (IXX) XX (1,1) component of inertia tensor matrix. XY Comp. of InertiaTensor (IXY) XY (1,2) component of inertia tensor matrix. XZComp. of InertiaTensor (IXZ) XZ (1,3) component of inertia tensor matrix. YY Comp. of InertiaTensor (IYY) YY (2,2) component of inertia tensor matrix. YZ Comp. of InertiaTensor (IYZ) YZ (2,3) component of inertia tensor matrix. ZZ Comp. of Inertia Tensor (IZZ) ZZ (3,3) component of inertia tensor matrix. Eulerian Parameters Subform This subordinate form appears when Eulerian Parameters button is selected on the Sol700 Parameters and Extra Data form of either Explicit Nonlinear or other structural Solution Type w here Sol700 is available such as: SOL700,101 SOL700,106 SOL700,109 SOL700,129 Linear Static NonLinear Static Direct Transient Response NonLinear Transient

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Solution Parameters . The supported parameters are shown in the following table: Form Parameters Euler BoundaryTreatment There are three choices, 1) Default, 2) Extrapolate (extrapolate structural mesh pressure to Euler elements at solid/fluid boundary), or 3) Element (solid/fluid boundary Eul er element pressure equals the structural element pressure at the solid/fluid boundary). Multi-Mat. Trans. Scheme There are three choices, 1) Default (Impulse), 2) Average (face (surface) veloci ty is averaged simply), or 3) Impulse (face (surface) velocity is impulse weighted). Material Failure Option There are three choices, 1) Default (No Fail), 2) Fail (activates transport of f ail fraction and thereby keeps track of material that has failed), or 3) No Fail (failed Euler ma terial can support shear stress again as soon as new material enters the Euler element).

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis Solution Parameters Form Parameters Multi-Material Array Size The multi-material Eulerian elements use an overflow array to store their materi al data. This array can hold Multi-Material Array Size times the number of Eulerian elements. If more the 10% of the Eulerian elements have more than one material, the value of MultiMaterial Array Size must be increased. Initial Condition Accuracy A parameter value used to specify the accuracy of the initial conditions in Eule rian elements, when using the geometric shape definition. The parameter value is specified in t he input file using PARAM, MICRO, value. Mimimum Velocity A parameter value used to specify the minimum velocity. If a ca lculated velocity is less than this, it is set to zero (0). It is mainly used to eliminate harmless small value s. The parameter value is specified in the input file using PARAM, VELCUT, value. Maximum Velocity Specify the maximum velocity for Eulerian and Lagrangian meshes . Although it is not usually necessary to limit the velocity in Eulerian meshes, there are occasions in regions of near-vacuous flow where using this can be an advantage. The same thing applies t o Lagrangian meshes, where there is contact. The parameter value is specified in t he input file using PARAM, VELMAX, value, YES/NO. Default is 1.0e10, YES. See the next row for information on what YES/NO means. Small Mass Removal Because very high velocities occur mostly in Eulerian element s with very small mass, the mass in these elements may need to be removed for the analysis to be stable. The above parameter (PARAM, VELMAX) is used to specify whether or not to eliminate small masses. YES = eliminate the mass for Eulerian elements for which the velocity is > the value of VELMAX. NO = do not eliminate the mass for Eulerian elements for which the ve locity is > the value of VELMAX. Default = YES. Universal Gas Constant Specify the value of the universal gas constant. The parameter value is specifie d in the input file using PARAM, UGASC, value. Single MaterialElements Specify the minimum density of single material Eulerian elements. For arbitrary LagrangeEuler (ALE) coupling, Eulerian single material elements with strength cannot be used. Single Mats. withStrength Specify the minimum density of single material Eulerian elements with strength.

For arbitrary Lagrange-Euler (ALE) coupling, Eulerian single material elements with strength cannot be used. Multi-Material Elements Specify the minimum density of multi-material Eulerian elements. Roe Solver Scheme Specify whether or not to use the Roe solver. The Roe solver a ccounts for momentum exchange between Lagrange (structure) and Eulerian material. Spatial Accuracy There are two schemes that can be used. They are, 1) 1st Order (left and right state variables are taken as the values the state variables have at the left- and the right-elem ent center), or 2) 2nd Order (left- and right-state variable values at a face by including the l eft-left and the right-right element). Time Integration Scheme There are two schemes that can be used. They are, 1) 1st Order, or 2) 2nd Order (three-stage time integration scheme).

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Solution Parameters SPH Control Parameters Subform This subordinate form appears when SPH Control Parameters (SPH refers to smooth p article hydrodynamics ) button is selected on the Sol700 Parameters and Extra Data form of either Explicit Nonlinear or other structural Solution Type where Sol700 is available such as: SOL700,101 - Linear Static SOL700,106 - NonLinear Static SOL700,109 - Direct Transient Response SOL700,129 - NonLinear Transient .

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis Solution Parameters The supported parameters are shown in the following table: Form Parameters Number of Cycles Specify the number of cycles between particle sorting. Death Time Specify the time when SPH calculations are to be stopped. Initial Number of Specify the initial number of neighbors per particle. This par ameter is for specifying how Neighbors much memory is to be allocated for arrays during initialization. If th e value is positive, the memory will be dynamically allocated. If the value is negative, the memory alloc ation will be static (constant). During the calculation only the closest SPH elements will be considered as neighbors. Using this option can avoid memory allocation problems. Particle Approx. There are six theories to choose from, 1) Renormalization (appr oximation), 2) Symmetric Theory (formulation), 3) Sym. Renormalization (symmetric renormalization approxi mation), 4) Tensor (tensor formulation), 5) Fluid Particle (fluid particle approximation), 6 ) Fluid Particle Renorm (fluid particle with renormalization approximation). Start Time Specify the time to begin particle approximation. Maximum Velocity Maximum velocity for the SPH particles. Particles whos velocity > this value are deactivated. Computation of Select one of the following for two different SPH parts, 1) Parti cle Approximation Approx. (approximation is calculated), or 2) No Particle Approximation (approxim ation is not calculated; two different SPH materials cannot interact with each other, and pen etration is allowed). Intergration Type Select 1) 0 ( ), or 2) 1 ( ), for time integrating to obtain the smoothing length. dt d ht. ... 1 d --ht..div v..= dt d ht. ... 1 d --ht..div v... .13. =

Smoothing LengthComput. Select 1) Bucket (sort based on algorithm; very fast), or 2) Global (computation for all the model particles ). This is done during initialization. Box Type Select either 1) Fixed (the box remains fixed in space), or 2) Moving ( the user specifies two corners of the box and a the time dependent Field to describe the motion of the two corners). As long as a given SPH particle is in a box, the SPH calculation for the particl e is performed for the box. If the particle leaves the box it was inside, it is deactivated. Select Box Select the name of a box under Select Box. A box must have been previ ously created under Loads/BCs: Create / Box Definition / Nodal. Tail Vector Specify a vector, <X1 Y1 Z1>, that defines the minimum coordinates o f the box (coordinates of the corner of the box at the minimum location).

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Solution Parameters Form Parameters Head Vector Specify a vector, <X2 Y2 Z2>, that defines the maximum coordinates o f the box (coordinates of the corner of the box at the maximum location). Motion Vs Time Data Specify the time dependent Field that defines the motion of the two corners of t he box. Vel./Disp. Flag Specify whether the time dependent Field is a Velocity or Displa cement field. Coord. System Specify the coordinate system that the Tail and Head Vectors are d efined in. Results Output Format With the results output format form you can choose which output formats you want to use with each solution sequence. The appropriate defaults are set for each solution type. Thes e defaults can be changed or set in the settings.pcl file. Data Output Defines the type of data output. OP2 Specifies output of data to a MD Nastran OUTPUT2 file (*.op2). This will pla ce a PARAM, POST, -1 in the input file. XDB Specifies output of data to a MSC.Access database (*.xdb). This will place a PARAM, POST, 0 in the input file. Print Specifies output of data to a MD Nastran print file (*.f06). Punch Specifies output of data to a MD Nastran punch file (*.pch). MASTER Only When ON, only a .master file is written. MASTER/DBALL When ON, both a .master file and a .dball file are written. XDB Buffer Size For the XDB results file, defines the buffer size used for accessing results.

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis Solution Parameters OUTPUT2 Requests Specifies type of OUTPUT2 commands. P3 Built In - signals the use of MD Nastran internal OUTPUT2 commands geared toward Patran. These commands are also appropriate for PATRAN 2. The P3 Built In option is appropriate only for Database Runs, see Solution Parameters, 277. If Database Run has been deselected, this option will be set internally to e . Alter Fil

Alter File - specifies the use of an external alter file found on the Patran fil e path and following the msc_v#_sol#.alt naming convention. See Files, 572 for more details. CADA-X Alter - specifies the use of an LMS CADA-X specific alter file that is identical to the Alter File but with an additional .lms extension, for example, msc_v67_sol103.alt.lms . P2 Built In - specifies use of MD Nastran internal OUTPUT2 commands geared toward PATRAN 2. OUTPUT2 Format Specifies format of the MD Nastran OUTPUT2 (*.op2) files. Use Text format when the resulting OUTPUT2 file must be transported between heterogeneous computer platforms. A new variable has been added to the settings.pcl file for results output format defaults per SOL sequence: NASTRAN_nnn_DATA_OUTPUT OP2+PUNCH Where nnn is the solution sequence 101, 400 etc... and OP2+XDB+PRINT+PUNCH+MASTE R +DBALL are the options. This variable is only read from the settings.pcl file wh en opening a new database, creating a new job or changing the solution sequence of an existing jo b. Otherwise the results output settings are retrieved from the database for an existing job. Note that t hese variables must be added to the settings.pcl file by the user and if they do not exist, a standard defaul t is used. Also note that OP2 and XDB are mutually exclusive and both cannot be specified at the same time. Th e same is true for MASTER Only and MASTER/DBALL. The settings.pcl file may have one of these variab les for each SOL sequence defined in Patran (>100).

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Solution Parameters ADAMS Preparation This form is used when you want to prepare a database for an Adams job.

ADAMS Output Units Craig-Bampton Modes Bounds Num. Shapes to Adams ADAMS Debug Print Strip Face Create .out(OP2 file) for MSC Fatigue Mass Options Output Requests Transfer Groups to ADAMS Chapter 3: Running an Analysis Solution Parameters MNF Only Full Run + MNF Mass - Your options are: Kilogram, Pound-Mass, Slug, Gram, OunceMass, Kilo-Pound-Mass, Megagram Force - Newton, Pounds-Force, Ounce-Force, Dyne, Kilo-Newton, KiloPound-Force Length - Millimeter, Centimeter, Meter, Kilometer, Inch, Foot, Mile Time - Millisecond, Second, Minute, Hour Lower Bound Upper Bound Partial Constant File Full None

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Select Superelements 3.6 Select Superelements The superelements created in the FEM menu are displayed in the form below. The s uperelements for a subcase are selected by highlighting the name in the listbox. Default button uns elects all the superelements. If Write PART Superelements toggle is ON in the Translation Param eters, 265 form, then BEGIN BULK SUPER=id sections are written to the input file to define the superel ements, otherwise if this is OFF, SESET entries are used. In addition to selecting the superelement, you can specify the superelement tree definition. This tell the analysis which superelement are upstream of others and thus, not directly connec ted to the residual structure or superelement zero (SE0). To define an upstream SE relative to its d ownstream SE, use the form shown below to fill out the spreadsheet. Put focus in the Downstream databo x, select a superelement from the list, then select the upstream from the list and press Add. This adds a row to the spreadsheet. Repeat this for every upstream element you need to define. Clicking on a row in the spreadsheet and clicking Remove will remove the defintion. Downstream SEs can only appear in the speadsheet once. This writes the SETREE entry.

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis Select Superelements SE0 SE1 SE2SE3 SE4 SE6SE5 In this example, SE1, SE2, & SE3 are upstream of the residual. This is not necessary to define in the SE tree. However SE4 is upstream of SE3 and SE5 & SE6 are upstream of SE4. These should be defined in the tree.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Subcases 3.7 Subcases This form appears when the Subcases... button is selected on the Analysis form. The subcase is the MD Nastran mechanism for associating loads and boundary conditions, output requests , and various other parameters to be used during part of a complete run. The Patran MD Nastran interface automatically associates default parameters and output requests with each Patran load case to create a subcase with the same name as the load case. Y ou can access the Subcase Parameters... and Output Requests... forms to view or modify these defaults. Options are Create, Delete, and Global Data. Displays all the available subcases associated with the current Solution Sequence. The subcase name that is being created or modified is displayed in this databox. It can betyped in or picked from the Avai lable Subcases listbox. Displays all the available loadcases in the currentdatabase. Only one loadcase c an be selected per subcase. For Normal Modes and Complex Eigenvalue solution types, free-free runs can begenerated by using an empty load case.

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis Subcases Deleting Subcases To delete subcases, select Subcases from the Analysis form, and set the Action t o Delete. Select the subcase(s) to delete. Apply to delete the selected subcases.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Subcases Editing Subcases To edit global data for subcases, select Subcases from the Analysis form, and se t the Action to Global Data. The following form appears. Apply changes the output requests for all selectedsubcases. Cancel closes the fo rm without changes. Select Subcase(s) to edit associated data. Use Output Requests... to edit the output requestsassociated with the selected s ubcases. The Edit Output Request form appears. See Edit Output Requests Form, 426.

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis Subcase Parameters 3.8 Subcase Parameters The subcase parameters represent the settings in MD Nastran Case Control that ta ke effect within a subcase and do not affect the analysis in other subcases. Currently, the followi ng solution sequences have subcase parameters associated with them. Solution Sequences Other Conditions Description Linear Static Subcase Parameters, 358 SOL 101 Model has p-elements and utilizes Version 68 Selects the subcase to participate in the error analysis calculations in an adaptive analysis. By default the subcase participates in the error analysis. Nonlinear Static Subcase Parameters, 359 SOL 106, 66 None Selects nonlinear static iteration parameters. Nonlinear Transient Subcase Parameters, 362 SOL 129, 99 None Selects nonlinear transient iteration parameters. Normal Modes Subcase Parameters, 364 SOL 103 Version 68 Selects real eigenvalue extraction parameters. Implicit Nonlinear Subcase Parameters, 375 DDAM Subcase Parameters, 407 Explicit Nonlinear Subcase Parameters, 409

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Subcase Parameters Linear Static Subcase Parameters This form is available for solution sequence 101 for MSC.Nastran Version 68 and for models that contain p-elements. The form allows the inclusion of subcases in the error analysis. Thi s toggle sets the ADACT Case Control command. Used to turn rotor dynamics on for the linear static subcase. If enabled, the Specify Rotor Speed button will be enabled, and can be selected to display the Rotor Speed Form, below. See Contact Table, 396 for more information. The reference rotor for the subcase. This drives the RGYRO case control and Bulk Data (REFROTR field) in the MD Nastran Bulk Datafile. Relative speed to the reference rotor. Thesevalues define the SPDUNIT and SPEED fields of the MD Nastran RGYRO Bulk Data entry. The SPDHIGH and SPDLOW entries are left blank.

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis Subcase Parameters Nonlinear Static Subcase Parameters This subordinate form appears when the Subcase Parameters button is selected on the Subcases form when the solution type is Nonlinear Static. This form allows the definition of t he parameters that control the interation criteria for a Nonlinear Static analysis. All of the data is part of the NLPARM Bulk Data entry. If Arc-Length Method is selected, additional data for the NLPCI Bulk Data entry is generated. Defines the number of increments to be used to apply the full load. This is the NINC field. Defines what method to use to control the stiffness. Matrix updates as the load is incrementally applied. This parameter can have one of three settings: Automatic, SemiAutomatic, or Controlled Iter. This defines the setting of the KMETHOD field. Defines the number of iterations to be used after each matrix update. This is the KSTEP field. Defines the limit for the number of iterations that can be done in any given increment. This is the MAXITER field. Opens a subordinate form to activate the Arc-LengthMethod which is turned OFF by default. The Arc-LengthMethod is used to explore post-buckling paths. Opens subordinate form to define eigenvalue extraction parameters. See Solvers/Options, 404 for more information. Activates a normal mode analysis of the prestressed system at the end of the sub case. Activates a buckling analysis at the end of the subcase.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Subcase Parameters This is a list of data input available for defining the Static Nonlinear Iterati ons that was not shown on the previous page. Parameter Name Description Displacement Error Indicates whether a displacement convergence criteria should be used. If Displacement Error is selected, the Displacement Tolerance field becomes active. Displacement Tolerance This value defines the tolerance on displacements. The displacement tolerance mu st be met between iterations to define convergence. If Displacement Error is select ed, a U is entered in the CONV field. The Displacement Tolerance is the EPSU field. Load Error Indicates whether a load convergence criteria should be used. If Load Error is selected, the Load Tolerance field becomes active. This value defines the tolera nce Load Tolerance on load equilibrium. The load equilibrium tolerance must be met between iteratio ns to define convergence. If Load Error is selected, a P is entered in the CONV fie ld. Load Tolerance is the EPSP field. Work Error Indicates whether a work convergence criteria should be used. If Work Error is selected, the Work Tolerance field becomes active. This value defines the tolera nce Work Tolerance on work error. The work tolerance must be met between iterations to define convergence. If Work Error is selected, a W is entered in the CONV field. Work Tolerance is the EPSW field. Default Load Temperatures Creates TEMPD entry for specified Subcase and is called out using TEMP case control. This defines temperatures on all grids(modes) that do not have specific temperature LBCs defined

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis Subcase Parameters Arc-Length Method Parameters This subordinate form appears when the Arc-Length Method button is selected on t he Subcase Parameters form. This form allows the definition of parameters that control the Arc-Length Method. All of the data is part of the NLPCI Bulk Data entry. Defines the type of Arc-Length Method: CRIS = Crisfield method (default) RIKS = Riks method MRIKS = modified Riks method Minimum allowable arc-length adjustment ratio between increments for the adaptive arc-length method 0.0.MINALR.1.0.

Maximum allowable arc-length adjustment ratio between increments for the adaptive arc-length method MAXALR.1.0. Scale factor w for arc-length criteria: w=0, displacement controlw>0, combined load and displacements control w1, load control Desired number of iterations for convergence to be used for the adaptive arc-lengthadjustments. This is the DESITER field Maximum number of controlled increment steps allowed within the subcase. This is the MXINC field.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Subcase Parameters Nonlinear Transient Subcase Parameters This subordinate form appears when the Subcase Parameters button is selected on the Subcases form when the solution type is Nonlinear Transient. All of the data is part of the TS TEPNL Bulk Data entry. Defines the Ending Time and Number of Time Steps for the subcase. Defines what method to use to control the stiffness. The Mass matrix updates as the load is incrementally applied. This parameter can have one of threesettings: Adaptive, Automatic, or T ime Step. This is the METHOD field. Defines the number of time steps to be used in each matrix update. This can only be set if Matrix Update Method is set to Time Step. This is the NDT field. Defines the maximum number of time step bisections tobe used in each matrix upda te. This can only be set if Matrix Update Method is set to Adaptive. This is the MAXBIS field. Defines the limit for the number of iterations that can be done in any given increment. This is the MAXITER field.

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis Subcase Parameters This is a list of data input available for defining the Transient Nonlinear Iter ations that was not shown on the previous page. Parameter Name Description Displacement Error Indicates whether a displacement convergence criteria should be used. If Displacement Error is selected, the Displacement Tolerance field becomes active. Displacement Tolerance This value defines the tolerance on displacements that must be met between interactions to define convergence. If Displacement Error is selected, a U is en tered in the CONV field. The Displacement Tolerance is the EPSU field. Load Error Indicates whether a load convergence criteria should be used. If Load Error is selected, the Load Tolerance field becomes active. This value defines the tolera nce Load Tolerance on load equilibrium that must be met between iterations to define convergence. I f Load Error is selected, a P is entered in the CONV field. Load Tolerance is the EPSP field. Work Error Indicates whether a work convergence criteria should be used. If Work Error is selected, the Work Tolerance field becomes active. This value defines the tolera nce Work Tolerance on work error that must be met between iterations to define convergence. If Work Error is selected, a W is entered in the CONV field. Work Tolerance is the EPSW field. Default Load Temperatures Creates TEMPD entry for specified Subcase and is called out using TEMP case control. This defines temperatures on all grids(modes) that do not have specific temperature LBCs defined

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Subcase Parameters Normal Modes Subcase Parameters The Normal Modes subcase parameters form is available only for Solution 106 for MSC.Nastran Version 70.7. Use this form to create either EIGR or EIGRL Bulk Data entries. Defines the method to use to extract the real eigenvalues. This parameter can be set to any one of the following: Lanczos, Automatic Givens, Automatic Householder, Modified Givens, Mo dified Householder, Givens, Householder, Enhanced Inverse Power, or Inverse Power. If this is set to Lanczos, this indicates that an EIGRL Bulk Data entry should be created. Otherwise, this defines the setting of the METHOD field on the EIGR Bulk Data entry. Defines the lower and upper limits to the range of frequencies to be examined. These are the F1and F2 fields on the EIGR Bulk Da ta entry or the V1 and V2 fields on the EIGRL Bulk Data entry. Indicates an estimate of the number of eigenvalues to be located. This parameter can only be specified if Extraction Method is set to Enhanced Inverse Power or Inverse Power. This is the NE field on the EIGR Bulk Data entry. See Contact Table, 396 for more information.

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis Subcase Parameters This is a list of data input available for defining the Real Eigenvalue Extracti on that was not shown on the previous page. Parameter Name Description Number of Desired Roots Indicates the limit to how many eigenvalues to be computed. This is the ND field on the EIGR or EIGRL Bulk Data entries. Diagnostic Output Level Defines the level of desired output. This can take any integer value between 0 a nd 3. This parameter can only be specified if Extraction Method is set to Lanczos. This is the MSGLVL field on the EIGRL Bulk Data entry. Normalization Method Indicates what type of eigenvalue normalization is to be done. This parameter ca n take one of three settings: Mass, Maximum, or Point. This parameter cannot be specified if Extraction Method is set to Lanczos. Defines the setting of the NOR M field on the EIGR Bulk Data entry. Normalization Point Defines the point to be used in the normalization. This can only be selected if Normalization Method is set to Point. This parameter cannot be specified if Extraction Method is set to Lanczos. This is the G field on the EIGR Bulk Data entry. Normalization Component Defines the degree-of-freedom component at the Normalization Point to be used. This can only be selected if Normalization Method is set to Point. This paramete r cannot be specified if Extraction Method is set to Lanczos. This is the C field on the EIGR Bulk Data entry. Number of Modes in Error Indicates how many modes will participate in the error analysis when the model Analysis contains p-elements. This data sets the ADACT Case Control command. Default Load Temperatures Creates TEMPD entry for specified Subcase and is called out using TEMP case control. This defines temperatures on all grids(modes) that do not have specific temperature LBCs defined

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Subcase Parameters Complex Eigenvalue Subcase Parameters This subordinate form appears when you select Subcase Parameters button on the S ubcases form and the solution type is Complex Eigenvalue. Used to turn rotor dynamics on for thecomplex eigenvalue subcase. If enabled, th e Specify Spin Properties button will be enabled, and can be selected to display the Spinning Properties Form, below. Rotor dynamics is disabled by default. See Contact Table, 396 for more information. Synchronous (default) or Asynchronous Defines the SYNCFLG field of the MD Nastran RGYRO Bulk Data entry. The reference rotor for the subcase. This drives the RGYRO Case Control and Bulk Data (REFROTR field) in the MD Nastran Bulk Datafile. Relative speeds to the reference rotor. These values define the SPDUNIT, SPDHIGH, and SPDLOW fields of the MD Nastran RGYRO Bulk Data entry. The SPEED value is left lank. For Asynchronous analyses, a single Speed databox is presented, defining SPEED field, while SPDHIGH and SPDLOW are left blank.

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis Subcase Parameters Transient Response Subcase Parameters This subordinate form appears when you select Subcase Parameters button on the S ubcases form and the solution type is Transient Response. Use this form to specify the time step inte rval and duration for a transient response analysis. All of the data is part of the TSTEP Bulk Data entr y. Direct Transient and Modal Transient Solutions This is the subcase parameters form for the Direct Transient and Modal Transient solution. Use this button to define your TSTEP entry. Modal Damping is only shown if you select ModalDamping formulation from the Solu tion Type form. Use this button to define your TABDMP1 entry. You must enter at least one value of frequency and damping on the spreadsheet for damping to occur. See Contact Table, 396 for more information.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Subcase Parameters Define Time Step Use this form to define the time steps in a linear table. Values of Delta-T (Tim e Increment) must be positive. See MD Nastran Quick Reference Guide TSTEP for more information. The "Skip Factor" column is optional. If the column is empty, MD Nastran assumes the Skip Factoris 1. "Add Row" adds a row after the selected row. To insert a row at the beginning of the table, select click on the row label and select "Add Row". No. of Time Steps and Delta-T determine the solution points in time. The skip fa ctor defines which of the solution points you wish to perform results processing on. A skip factor of 1 in dicates every time step, 2 indicates every other solution step, etc. Total solution time accumulates in ord er of entry. For the example shown, MD Nastran will calculate output at 100 time steps rangin g between 1. and 100. Define Damping Use this form to define Damping in a linear table. Values of frequency must be p ositive. Discontinuities (same value of frequency, different value of damping) are allowed at all locatio ns except the first and last entries in the table. See MD Nastran Quick Reference Guide TABDMP1 for more info rmation. Modal Damping does not allow a discontinuity to exist as either the first or las t entries in the modal damping data. This will cause an error in MD Nastran. It is strongly recommended that you do not create such scenario. If the first and second frequencies (two lowest frequencies) are the same value, a warning will be issued, even if the damping value for those frequencies are the same. If the last and se cond to last frequencies

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis Subcase Parameters (two highest frequencies) are the same value, a warning will be issued, even if the damping value for those frequencies are the same. "Add Row" adds a row after the selected row. To insert a row at the beginning of the table, click onthe row label and select "Ad d Row".

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Subcase Parameters Frequency Response Subcase Parameters This subordinate form appears when you select the Subcase Parameters button on t he Subcases form and the solution type is Frequency Response. Use this form to specify the frequencie s for a frequency response analysis. All of the data is part of a FREQi Bulk Data entry. Frequency Solution This is the Frequency Subcase Parameter Form. Use this button to define FREQ,FREQ1,FREQ2, FREQ3, FREQ4 entries. Modal Damping is only shown if you select Modal Damping formulation from the Solution Type form. Use this button to define a TABDMP1 entry. At least one value of frequency and damping must be entered on the spreadsheet for damping to occur. Used to turn rotor dynamics on for the complex eigenvalue subcase. If enabled, the Specify Spin Properties button will be enabled, and can be selected to display the Spinning Properties Form, below. Rotor dynamics is disabled by default. See Contact Table, 411 for more information. See Solvers/Options, 404 for more information.

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis Subcase Parameters Use this form to create FREQi entries. "Add Row" adds a row after the selected row. To insert a row at the beginning of the table, click on the row label and select "Add Row". The driving column on this form is the Increment type. Direct Frequency When the Increment type is... Patran... Discrete Creates a FREQ entry where Start Freq is the frequency value. Multiple Discrete rows will be written to the same FREQ entry. End Freq. and No. Incr. columns are not used. Linear Creates a FREQ1 entry. The Start Freq. will be the first frequency and th e End Freq. and No. Increments will have a linear progression in between. Logarithmic Creates a FREQ2. Same as Linear, except it will have a logarithmic p rogression. Modal Frequency When the Increment Type is... Patran... Discrete Creates a FREQ entry where Start Freq is the frequency value. Multiple Discrete rows will be written to the same FREQ entry. End Freq, No. Incr. and Cluster/Spread columns are not used.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Subcase Parameters Linear Creates a FREQ1 entry. The Start Freq. will be the first frequency and th e End Freq. and No. Increments will have a linear progression in between. The Cluster/Spread column is not used. Logarithmic Creates a FREQ2. Same as Linear, except it will have a logarithmic progression. Lin. Cluster Creates a FREQ3 with type set to LINEAR. This results in a linear distribution o f solution frequencies between each successive pair of natural modes in the specif ied frequency interval. The Cluster value, which has a default of 1.0 is used to bia s the linear distribution of solution frequencies. A smaller cluster value has a close r spacing towards the center, CLUSTER greater than 1.0 has a closer spacing at the ends of the frequency range. Log. Cluster Same as Lin. Cluster except that a logarithmic interpolation is used between the start and end frequencies. Lin. Spread Creates a FREQ4 entry. The default value of spread is 0.1. The spread is a fract ional amount specified for each mode. With a spread of 0.3 and No. Incr. of 21, there will be 21 evenly spaced frequencies between 0.7*FN and 1.3*FN, where FN a natural frequency, for all natural frequencies between the specified Start Freq and End Freq values. Fractional Spread Creates a FREQ5 entry. Enter the Start Frequency and End Frequency. These are th e lower and upper bound for the excitation (solution) frequency domain, respective ly. It is desired to obtain a set of excitation frequencies around and at each natural frequency, obtained previously from the corresponding modal analysis for this simulation. T his is done by providing a list of fractions; for example {fr_1, fr_2, ..., fr_n}. The list is multiplied by each natural frequency to provide a list of excitation frequencies f or each natural frequency; for example fn_j * {fr_1, fr_2, ..., fr_n}, where fn_j i s the jth natural frequency. The fractions cannot be inserted on a single row of the Defin e Frequencies form, but multiple rows must be created, with just one fraction per row.

Define Damping Use this form to define the damping in a linear table. Values of frequency must be positive. Discontinuities (same value of frequency, different value of damping) are allowe d at all locations except the first and last entries in the table. See MD Nastran Quick Reference Guide TA BDMP1 for more information. Modal Damping does not allow a discontinuity to exist as either the first or las t entry in the modal damping data. This will cause an error in MD Nastran. It is strongly recommended that you do not create such scenario. If the first and second frequencies (two lowest frequencies) are the same value, a warning will be issued, even if the damping values for those frequencies are the same. If the last and s econd to last frequencies

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis Subcase Parameters (two highest frequencies) are the same value, a warning will be issued, even if the damping values for those frequencies are the same. "Add Row" adds a row after the selected row. To insert a row at the beginning of the table, click onthe row label and select "Ad d Row". To create a Field for the damping data, click in the Create a Field checkbox. To bring in damping data from an existing Field, click on the Load Data From Field button, then select the Field. Spinning Properties, Frequency Response Presented when Rotor Dynamics is ON and the Specify Spinning Properties button i s selected.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Subcase Parameters Synchronous (default) orAsynchronous Defines the SYNCFLG field of the MD Nastran RGYRO Bulk Data entry. The reference rotor for the subcase. This drives the RGYRO Case Dontrol and Bulk Data (REFROTR field) in the MD Nastran Bulk Datafile. Relative speeds to the reference rotor. These values define the SPDUNIT, SPDHIGH, and SPDLOW fields of the MD Nastran RGYRO Bulk Data entry. The SPEED value is left lank. For Asynchronous analyses, a single Speeddatabox is presented, defining SPEED fi eld, while SPDHIGH and SPDLOW are left blank. For Synchronous analyses with Frequency Dependent Looping OFF, no speed databoxes are presented, and SPDHIGH, SPDLOW, SPEED are all left blank. Rather, a param, gyroavg,-1 entry is generated. Frequency Dependent Looping is ON by default.

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis Subcase Parameters Implicit Nonlinear Subcase Parameters The type of nonlinear analysis can be changed in each SOL 600 or SOL 400 subcase . To specify this change, the Subcases form includes an Analysis Type pull-down menu with options for static, normal modes, buckling, transient dynamic, creep, and body approach analyses. For SOL 4 00 there is an additional Analysis Type, complex eigenvalue. In turn, specifying the subcase pa rameters is dependent on the Analysis Type selected for the subcase. The following sections define the subcase parameters for each analysis type.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Subcase Parameters Static Subcase Parameters for Implicit Nonlinear Solution Type This subform defines the parameters for a SOL 400 or 600 static analysis subcase . Linearity Prescribes the nonlinear effects for the subcase. Nonlinear Solution Parameters Nonlinear Geometric Effects Defines the type of geometric or material nonlineari ty to be included in the subcase. Follower Forces Specifies whether forces will follow displacements.

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis Subcase Parameters Load Increment Parameters Defines whether the load increments will be fixed or adapted in each iteration and the method by which adaptive load increments will be determined. Iteration Parameters Sets forth the iterative procedures that are employed to solve the equilibrium problem at each load increment. Contact Table Activates, deactivates, and controls the behavior of contact bodies in the analysis. Active/Deactive Elements Defines groups of elements to be active or deactive for the subcase. Break Squeal Parameters For defining parameter values for modeling break squeal for the subcase. (SOL 400 only). Implicit Nonlinear Normal Modes Subcase Parameters This subform defines the parameters for a normal modes analysis subcase (SOL 400 and 600 only). See Normal Modes Subcase Parameters, 364 for more information. Implicit Nonlinear Buckling Subcase Parameters For buckling nonlinear analysis the subcase parameters control the eigenvalue ex traction techniques and the range of frequencies to be targeted for extraction. This subform defines the parameters for a buckling analysis subcase (SOL 400 and 600 only). See Normal Modes Subcase Parameters, 36 4 for more information.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Subcase Parameters Implicit Nonlinear Transient Dynamic Subcase Parameters This subform defines the parameters for a transient dynamic analysis subcase for SOL 600 and SOL 400. Linearity Prescribes the nonlinear effects for the subcase. Nonlinear Solution Parameters Nonlinear Geometric Effects Defines the type of geometric or material nonlineari ty to be included in the subcase. Follower Forces Specifies whether forces will follow displacements.

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis Subcase Parameters Load Increment Parameters Defines whether the load increments will be fixed or adapted in each iteration and the method by which adaptive load increments will be determined. Iteration Parameters Sets forth the iterative procedures that are employed to solve the equilibrium problem at each load increment. Contact Table Activates, deactivates, and controls the behavior of contact bodies in the analysis. Active/Deactive Elements Defines groups of elements to be active or deactive for the subcase (SOL 600 only).

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Subcase Parameters Implicit Nonlinear Creep Subcase Parameters This subform defines the parameters for a SOL 600 and SOL 400 Creep analysis sub case. Creep Solution Parameters Procedure Defines either Explicit creep formulation or Implicit creep formulation. Nonlinear Geometric Effects Defines the type of geometric or material nonlineari ty to be included in the subcase. Follower Forces Specifies whether forces will follow displacements. Increment Type Defines a fixed or adaptive increment method.

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis Subcase Parameters Adaptive Increment Parameters... For adaptive methods, sets boundaries for incre mentation. Load Increment Parameters Defines whether the load increments will be fixed or a dapted in each iteration and the method by which adaptive load increments will be determined. Iteration Parameters Sets forth the iterative procedures that are employed to solve the equilibrium problem at each load increment. Contact Table Activates, deactivates, and controls the behavior of contact bodies in the analysis. Active/Deactive Elements Defines groups of elements to be active or deactive for the subcase (SOL 600 only). Break Squeal Parameters Implicit Nonlinear Body Approach Subcase Parameters This subform defines the parameters for a SOL 600 body approach analysis subcase

Body Approach Parameters Total Time Places a time step option in the Load Step. Synchronized If ON, specifies that when the first rigid body comes into contact, the rest stop moving. Contact Table Activates, deactivates, and controls the behavior of contact bodies in the analy sis. See Contact Table, 396

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Subcase Parameters Implicit Nonlinear Complex Eigenvalue Subcase Parameters This subform defines the parameters for a SOL 400 (only) complex eigenvalue anal ysis subcase Formulation Select either Direct or Modal. Enable Rotor Dynamics Click in checkbox to activate rotor dynamics. Specify Spinning Properties... Click to access the form for specifying the rotor speed. See Spinning Properties, Frequency Response, 373 Contact Table... Activates, deactivates, and controls the behavior of contact bodies in the analy sis. See Contact Table, 396

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis Subcase Parameters Load Increment Parameters Load and time step incrementation parameters for Statics and Transient Dynamics appear on this subordinate form. For other analysis types, this information appears directly on the Solution Parameters form. The Load Increment Parameters form differs depending on your designation of a Fi xed or Adaptive Increment Type and whether an arclength method is to be used if you select an Ad aptive Incrementation scheme.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Subcase Parameters Adaptive Load Incrementation without Arclength Static Transient Dynamic Increment Type Adaptive Arclength Method None Trial Time Step Size Defines the initial time step size. Default is 1% of Total Time if left blank. Time Step Scale Factor Indicates load will be allowed to be scaled up by 20% eac h increment if possible. Default is 1.2. Minimum Time Step Indicates the smallest time step that can be used. Default is Trial Time Step / 1000 if left blank. Maximum Time Step Indicates the largest time step that can be used. Default is T otal Time / 2 if left blank. Maximum # of Steps Defines the maximum number of time steps. It can be left blan k which will default to the Initial Step Size divided by the Total Time.

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis Subcase Parameters Total Time This is the total time of the analysis for a particular step. It defaults to one (1) if left blank for static load cases. For time dependent load cases, the total time is th e length of time between distinct time points if left blank. Otherwise the actual value i s used (not recommended because it can t be variable). # of Steps of Output Indicates that this many increments evenly spaced in time will be place in the o utput file. Default is 0 if left blank. Which means all converged increments will be o utput (SOL 600 only). Quasi-static Inertial ON by default. Damping Criteria Multiple adaptive load stepping criteria is available. By default, none of this is necessary. These criteria are described below in Adaptive Load Incrementation Criteria, 387. Time Integration Scheme For Transient Dynamics, indicates the time integration scheme to use in dynamic analysis. Minimum Iteration per Enter these values for a SOL 400 run. For SOL 600 these va lues are defined on the Increment Iteration Parameters, 391 form. Maximum Iteration per Enter these values for a SOL 400 run. For SOL 600 these values are defined on th e Increment Iteration Parameters, 391 form. Matrix Update Method This is the method for controlling stiffness updates. This is the KMETHOD field on the NLPARM entry for SOL 400 runs. Load Increment Parameters for SOL 600 and SOL 400, Creep analysis. The MD Nastra n entries used for this are NLADAPT, NLPARM, and TSTEPNL.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Subcase Parameters Creep Increment Type There are three choices, 1) Fixed, 2) Adaptive, and 3) Adaptive C reep. Suggested Time Increment The approximate time step. Total Time The total time for the creep analysis. Max # of Increment Allowed This is for NSMAX. Creep Tests This is for RAC. Relative Strain Tolerance This is for TCSTRN. Relative Stress Tolerance This is for TCSTRS. Low Stress Cut-off Tolerance This is for TCOFF.

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis Subcase Parameters Adaptive Load Incrementation Criteria This for the MD Nastran NLAUTO entry, Parameters for Automatic Load/Time Steppin g. (SOL 600 only). Adaptive Criteria Description Treat Criteria as: If Limits, sets 3rd field to zero (0) in 3rd data block (defa ult). If Targets, sets field to one (1). This is for LIMITAR. Use Automatic Criteria Uses automatic physical criteria if top toggle is ON. Bot tom toggle defines what Continue if not Satisfied happens if the criteria is not met. Both OFF by defaul t. This is for IPHYS.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Subcase Parameters Adaptive Criteria Description Ratio Between Steps: Defines the [Smallest] and [Largest] ratios acceptable between load increments. For Smallest, default = 0.1, For Largest, default=10.0. This is for RSMALL and RBIG. [Number of Cutbacks] Blank by default. default value is 10 if left blank or zero. This is for NCUT. Increment Criteria Selects the type of criteria to be used.The labels XXX Range and XXX Increment Allowed will change based on the Increment Criteria selected. This is for CRITERIA. Loading Table Instances Determines how loading tables (Use Tables must be ON in the Job Parameters form) are treated. By default loads are increased or decreased such that they al ways Reach Peaks-Valleys Only. If you wish you can Reach All Points in Tables or Ignore all Points in Tables. Write Instances to Post File Writes Loading Table Instances to the Post file if toggle is ON. Note that if to ggle is ON, then only those instances are written to the POST file and not all the increments of the analysis. This is for IDMPFLG. Nodal Temp. Check There are three choices, 1) Omit Check, 2) Below Finish Temperature (to complete time period when all node temperatures are < FTEMP), and 3) Above Finish Temperature (to complete time period when all node temperatures are > FTEMP). This is for IFINISH. Finish Temperature The terminal temperature. This is for FTEMP. Use Criterion For a criteria to be used, this toggle must be turned ON. Criterion Range The first and last fields are zero and 1e20 respectively and cannot change. The second and third must be the same as well as the 4th/5th and 6th/7th which defin e the ranges. The Criterion title changes according to the Increment Criterion chosen. Criterion Increment The chosen. Criterion title changes according to the Increment Criteria

Allowed Select a Group (Optional) You can optionally select a group of elements to which this criterion is to be applied. No group is selected by default.

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis Subcase Parameters Adaptive Load Incrementation with Arclength (SOL 600 only) Static Adaptive Increment Parameter Description Arclength Method Selects the arclength root procedure: Crisfield, Riks/Ramm, Modified Riks/Ramm, or Crisfield-Modified Riks/Ramm. The default is Modified Riks/Ram. If None is selected the form updates as shown (p. 383). For Transient Dynamics, this is the only option available for adaptive load incrementation. Automatic Cutback This feature is ON by default. If an increment does not converge, a restart from the last increment cuts the increment size in half. Number of Cutbacks This is associated with Automatic Cutback. This parameter determines how many times a cutback is allowed.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Subcase Parameters Adaptive Increment Parameter Description Initial Fraction of Load This is the fraction of the total load that should be a pplied in the first iteration Applied to 1st Increment of the first increment. Max. Fraction of Load AppliedThis is the maximum fraction of the load that can b e applied in any in Any Increment increment. Max/Min Ratio Arc Length Used to define the minimal arclength. The default is 0.01. / Initial Arc Length Max. # of Increments Defines the maximum number of increments. Program will end if this value is exceeded. Total Time This is the total time of the analysis for a particular step. It defaults to one (1) if left blank for static load cases. For time dependent load cases, the tota l time is the length of time between distinct time points if left blank. Otherwise the actual value is used (not recommended because it can t be variable). Fixed Load Incrementation Static Transient Dynamic

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis Subcase Parameters Fixed Increment Parameter Description Automatic Cutback Applies to Nonlinear Statics only. It is ON by default. If an increment does not converge, it allows for a restart from the last increment cuts the increment size in half. Number of Cutbacks This is associated with Automatic Cutback. This parameter determines how many times a cutback is allowed. Number of Increments For Statics and Creep this is the number of increments spec ified in the or NLAUTO option. Or for Transient Dynamics defines the number of steps to Number of Steps use throughout the analysis for Fixed time step type. Default is 10. Total Time For Statics, this enters the NLAUTO option which is the total time as defined in this widget. For Transient Dynamics this is the total time. For Creep, the total time is either placed in the 2nd data block of a CREEP INCREMENT option or the total time is divided by the Number of Increments, if this value is present, and the incremental time is written to the 2nd data block of the CREEP option. Gamma / Beta For Transient Dynamics only. Default is 0.5. Time Integration Scheme For Transient Dynamics, the Houbolt and Central Difference cannot be selected. Indicates the time integration scheme to use in dynamic analysis.Single Step Houbolt is the default. Minimum Iteration per Increment Enter these values for a SOL 400 run. For SOL 600 these values are defined on the Iteration Parameters, 391 form. Maximum Iteration per Increment Enter these values for a SOL 400 run. For SOL 600 these values are defined on the Iteration Parameters, 391 form. Matrix Update Method This is the method for controlling stiffness updates. This is the KMETHOD field on the NLPARM entry for SOL 400 runs. Iteration Parameters

This subordinate form appears when the Subcase Parameters... / Iteration Paramet ers... button is selected for Analysis Type: Static, Transient Dynamics, Creep, ... Subcases form. Unless otherwise specified all

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Subcase Parameters parameter references apply to the NLSTRAT (SOL600) entry for the form on the lef t, and NLPARM (SOL 400) entry for the form on the right . SOL 600 Iteration Parameter Description Proceed if not Converged Forces the analysis to proceed even if the increment did not converge. Initial Stress Stiffness There are five choices, 1) Full, 2) None, 3) Tensile, 4) Deviatoric, and 5) Begin Increment. Non-positive Definite This forces the non-positive definite flag (IKNONPOS param) ON in the NLSTRAT option. A new NLSTRAT option is written for each step if a change in this flag has been detected from Subcase to Subcase.

SOL 600 Iteration Parameter Iteration Method Max # of Iterations per Increment Minimum # of Iterations per Increment Desired # of Iterations per Increment Matrix Update Method Tolerance Method Residuals/Displacements And Or Error Type Chapter 3: Running an Analysis Subcase Parameters Description Indicates the iteration method (IKMETH param) to be used. This is can be set to Full Newton-Raphson, Modified Newton-Raphson, NewtonRaphson with Strain Correction, or Secant Method. Full Newton-Raphson is default. Defines the maximum number of iterations (MAXREC param) allowed for convergence in any increment. This number is negative if Proceed if not Converged is ON from the Solution Parameter form. This specifies the minimum number of iterations per Increment (MINREC param) option. It can be an integer number zero or greater. If this is set greater than zero, every increment will perform at least this many iterations. Defines the number of desired iterations in an increment (ATRECYC param) which is placed on the NLSTRAT option. If the actual number of iterations is less than this value, this will be used to figure out how much to increase the load step for the next increment. In a similar manner if the actual number of iterations is greater than this number (but less than the Max # of Iterations per Increment, this will be used to decrease the load step in the next increment. Obviously if Adaptive incrementation is not specified, this data will not be used. There are six choices for updating the stiffness matrix, 1) Automatic (MD Nastran automatically selects the most efficient strategy based on convergence rates), 2) Controlled Iters.(MD Nastran updates the matrix at every KSTEP interations and at convergence if KSTEP <= MAXITER), 3) Adaptive, 4) Semi-Automatic (MD Nastran for each load increment (i)

performs a single iteration based upon the new/next load, (ii) updates the stiffness matrix, and (iii) resumes the normal Automatic option), 5) Full Newton (MD Nastran updates the stiffness matrix every iteration), and 6) Pure Full Newton (the same as the Full Newton method, except EPSU = 0.01, EPSW = -0.01, and MAXLS = 0.0). Defines the tolerance method to be used (CONVTYP param). This can be set to Residual, Incremental Displacement, or Incremental Strain Energy. If you want the Tolerance Method to use both Residuals and Displacements to determine convergence set this to And. If you want either one or the other to determine convergence, set this to OR. If Tolerance Method is set to Residual or Displacement, then these two toggles are enabled. Both are OFF by default. If one is ON, the other is OFF. These toggles work in combination with Tolerance Method. If both are OFF, then Tolerance Method determines what is written. Indicates the type of error to use (IRELABS param). This can be set to Relative or Absolute or Both.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Subcase Parameters SOL 600 Iteration Parameter Description Automatic Switching This controls automatic switching (the AUTOSW param on the NLSTRAT option) between Residuals and Displacement tolerances if one or the other fails to converge. Residual Tolerances Values and labels in this frame depend on the Tolerance Method and Error Type setting and are discussed below. Relative Residual Force The value of this widget (default is 0.1 on force) is written to the RCKI param. Relative Displacement Relative Energy Relative Residual Moment Relative Rotation Minimum Reaction Force The value of these widgets (default is blank) is written to the appropriate Minimum DisplacementMAXxx or MINxx param. Minimum Minimum Maximum Maximum Maximum Maximum Reaction Moment Rotation Residual Force Displacement Residual Moment Rotation

SOL 400 Iteration Parameter Description Min # of Iterations per Increment Specify the fewest number of iterations per load increment. Max # of Iterations per Increment Specify the largest number of iterations per load increment. Number of Iterations per Update Specify the allowable number of iterations per stiffness matrix update, (KSTEP). Matrix Update Method There are six choices for updating the stiffness matrix, 1) Automatic (MD Nastran automatically selects the most efficient strategy based on convergence rates), 2) Controlled Iters.(MD Nastran updates the matrix at every KSTEP interations and at convergence if KSTEP <= MAXITER), 3) Adaptive, 4) Semi-Automatic (MD Nastran for each load increment (i) performs a single iteration based upon the new/next load, (ii) updates the

stiffness matrix, and (iii) resumes the normal Automatic option), 5) Full Newton (MD Nastran updates the stiffness matrix every iteration), and 6) Pure Full Newton (the same as the Full Newton method, except EPSU = 0.01, EPSW = -0.01, and MAXLS = 0.0). Automatic Switching If selected, automatically switch to an appropriate convergence checking flag if an unappropriated flag is selected.

SOL 400 Iteration Parameter Displacement ErrorLoad Error Work Error Vector Componet MethodLength Method Displacement ToleranceLoad Tolerance Work Tolerance Maximum # of Divergence Conditions Maximum # of Correction Vectors Maximum # of Line Searches Fraction of Effective Stress Line Search Tolerance Maximum # of Bisections Maximum Incremental Rotations Chapter 3: Running an Analysis Subcase Parameters Description If any of these toggles are ON, then the appropriate CONV=U, P, W, V, or N is written to the NLPARM entry to activate the repective convergence criteria. Specifies the tolerance value if the above corresponding toggles are activated. This is written in the EPSU, EPSP, and EPSW fields of the NLPARM entry. Leave blank for default values. Specifies the MAXDIV, MAXQN, MAXLS, FSTRESS, LSTOL, MAXBLS, and RTOLB fields of the NLPARM entry. It is recommended to use the default values. Please consult the MD Nastran Quick Reference Guide for more information.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Subcase Parameters Contact Table A contact table is used to control the behavior of and to activate or deactivate , or in some cases, remove contact bodies from the analysis. This is used for both linear and nonlinear con tact.

. Input Global Contact Detection Touch All Glue All Deactivate All Import/Export Select Existing Contact Matrix Body Type Release Chapter 3: Running an Analysis Subcase Parameters Description Changing this setting should be done with caution as it will over-write any cont act detection changes made to individual contact pairs in the cells. This option set s the contact detection method in all cells in the contact table. Default (by body #) -This is the default where contact is checked in the order t he bodies are written to the input file which is the order in which they are create d. In this scenario, the most finely meshed bodies should be listed first. There will be contact checks first for nodes of the first body with respect to the second body and then for nodes of the second body with respect to the first body. If Single Side d contact is activated on the Contact Parameters subform, then only the first chec k is done. Automatic -Unlike the default, the contact detection is automatically determined and is not dependent on the order they are listed but determined by the solver ordering the bodies starting with those having the smallest edge length. Then th ere will be only a check on contact for nodes of the first body with respect to the second body and not the other way around. First ->Second - Blanks the lower triangular section of the table matrix such th at no input can be accepted. Only the contact bodies from the upper portion are written, which forces the contact check of the first body (the one higher in the contact table) with respect to the second body.

Second-> First - Blanks the upper triangular section of the table matrix such th at no input can be accepted. Only the contact bodies from the lower portion are written. Contact detection is done opposite of First->Second. Double-Sided -Writes both upper and lower portions of the table matrix. This overrules the Single Sided contact parameter set on the Contact Parameters subform. Places a T to indicate touching status for all deformable-deformable or rigid deformable bodies. Places a G to indicate glued status for all deformable-deformable or rigid-defor mable bodies. Blanks the spreadsheet cells. Import or Export a file with contact matrix definition data. The format must be CSV. Select an existing Contact Table from a set of tables. A matrix defining what and how contact bodies contact. Lists the body type for each body; either Deformable or Rigid. This cell can be toggled for each body to Y or N (Yes or No). If Y, this indicat es that the particular contact body is to be removed from this Subcase. The forces assoc iated with this body can be removed immediately in the first increment or gradually ov er the time of the entire Subcase with the Force Removal switch described below.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Subcase Parameters Input Description The Contact Matrix entries The rows correspond to Touching Body. The columns correspond to Touched Body. An entry of the matrix, for example (Row i,Column j), will have the entry of T, G, or blank . T = touching, G = glue, blank = no contact. To change a matrix cell entry, select the cell (click once) to select it, then click on the cell once to change to the next selection. For example, T -> G. Touching Body These are informational or convenience list boxes to allow you to see which bodi es an Touched Body active cell references and to see what settings are active for Distance Toleranc e and other related parameters below. You must click on the touched/touching bodies to see what values, if any, have been set for the pair combination. Distance Tolerance Set the Distance Tolerance for this pair of contact bodies. You must press the E nter or Return key to accept the data in this data box. A nonspatial field can be refere nced that will write this data in TABLE format, if this parameter varies with time, temper ature, or some other independent variable. This overrides any other settings for Distan ce Tolerance. Bias Factor Bias the domain defined by the distance tolerance. Analysis Properties Select Structural. Separation Threshold Specify a threshold (force or stress) such that if the contact load (force or st ress) is < this threshold value, the contacting body remains in contact with the contacted body. Separation Force Set the Separation Force for this pair of contact bodies. You must press the Ent er or Return key to accept the data in this data box. A nonspatial field can be refere nced that will write this data in TABLE format, if this parameter varies with time, temper ature, or some other independent variable. This overrides any other settings for Separa tion Force.

Friction Coefficient Set the Friction Coefficient for this pair of contact bodies. You must press the Enter or Return key to accept the data in this data box. A nonspatial field can be refere nced that will write this data in TABLE format, if this parameter varies with time, temper ature, or some other independent variable. This overrides any other settings for Fricti on Coefficient. Interference Closure Set the Interference Closure for this pair of contact bodies. You must press the Enter or Return key to accept the data in this data box. A nonspatial field can be ref erenced that will write this data in TABLE format, if this parameter varies with time, temperature, or some other independent variable. This overrides any other settin gs for Interference Closure. Friction Stress Limit This is a bound on the maximum friction stress. This is the friction stress limi t for the limit bilinear model, .t . If the shear stress reaches the limit value, the applied fr iction limit force is reduced so that the maximum shear stress is given by min ...n..t . . Slide Off Distance Specify the distance a node must slide off a surface, at an edge, before the nod e travels on the surface, at the edge, that is at an angle to the surface that is being sl id off of.

Input Description Heat Transfer Coefficient Set the Heat Transfer Coefficient for this pair of con tact bodies. You must press the Enter or Return key to accept the data in this data box. A nonspatial field can be referenced that will write this data in TABLE format, if this parameter varies w ith time, temperature, or some other independent variable. This overrides any other settings for Heat Transfer Coefficient. This is only used in Coupled analysis (H eat transfer and Coupled analysis not supported in MSC.Nastran 2004. Force Removal Select 1) Immediate, or 2) Gradual. This is activated when a body is is set to Release. For example, 1-seal can be set to Release by clicking once on the corresponding Release cell, then clicking once again to change from N to Y. The MD Nastran ent ry BCMOVE is written to the .bdf file. Contact Detection Select 1) Automatic, 2) Double Sided, 3) 1st->2nd, or 4) 2nd-> 1st. Retain Gaps/Overlaps This is only applicable for the Glued option. Any initial g ap or overlap between the node and the contacted body will not be removed (otherwise the node is projected onto the body which is the default). For deformable-deformable contact only. Stress-free Initial Contact This is only applicable for initial contact in incre ment zero, where coordinates of nodes in contact can be adapted such that they cause stress-free initial contact . This is important if, due to inaccuracies during mesh generation, there is a small gap/o verlap between a node and the contacted element edge/face. For deformable-deformable contact only. Delayed Slide Off By default, at sharp corners, a node will slide off a contacte d segment as soon as it passes the corner by a distance greater than the contact error tolerance. This e xtends this tangential tolerance. For deformable-deformable contact only. Allow Separation Breaking Glue Parameters... See Breaking Glue Parameters Subform, 400 Edge Contact... See Edge Contact Subform, 401 Chapter 3: Running an Analysis Subcase Parameters

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Subcase Parameters Breaking Glue Parameters Subform Un-gluing (breaking) a glued contact can be done by specifying the Breaking Glue Parameter values in the following form: This form can only be used when there is glued contact (there is G in the Contac t Table matrix cells). . Input Description Max Normal Stress The maximum normal stress that will cause the glued contact to become un-glued. Max Tangential Stress The maximum tangential stress that will cause the glued co ntact to become un-glued. First Exponent The exponent of the tangential stress term (BGM) in the following equation: . BGN . BGM .sigman .sigmat --------------------+ ------------------. 1.0 . BGSN .. BGST . Second Exponent The exponent of the normal stress term (BGN) in the following eq uation: . BGN . BGM .sigman .sigmat --------------------+ ------------------. 1.0 . BGSN .. BGST .

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis 401 Subcase Parameters Edge Contact Subform : . Input Description Include Outside (Solid When detecting contact of solid elements (for example, CH EXA elements) use Element) this to include contact of the outside of the elements.For details refe r to the BCTABLE entry (defines contact table) of the MD Nastran QRG. The entries that are used for the BCTABLE entry are COPTM and COPTS. These flags indicate how master and slave surfaces may contact. Include Outside of Rigid When detecting contact of rigid surfaces use this to in clude contact of the outside Surface of the rigid surfaces. For details refer to the BCTABLE entry (defines c ontact table) of the MD Nastran QRG. The entries that are used for the BCTABLE entry are COPTM and COPTS. These flags indicate how master and slave surfaces may contact. Check Layers For contact bodies composed of shell elements, this option menu cho oses the layers to be checked. Available options are: Top and Bottom, Top Only, Bottom Only. Check Layers and Ignore Thickness combination enters the appropriate flag in the 10th field of the 2nd data block.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Subcase Parameters Input Description Ignore Thickness Turn this button ON to ignore shell thickness. Check Layers and Ignore Thickness combination enters the appropriate flag in the 10th field of the 2nd data block. Include Edges Use this to detect contact of edges. There are three options, Beam/Bar, Free and Hard Shell, or Both. For details refer to the BCTABLE entry (defines contact table) of the MD Nastran QRG. The entries that are used for the BCTABLE entry are COPTM and COPTS. These flags indicate how master and slave surfaces may contact. Active/Deactive Elements Defines groups of elements to be active or deactive for the subcase. Active/Deactive Group Description Group of Element to Deactivate Lists all groups. Elements in the selected group will be deactivated. Group of Elements to Activate Lists all groups. Elements in the selected group w ill be activated.

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis Subcase Parameters Break Squeal Parameters Defines parameter values for modeling break squeal. (SOL 400 only). Active/Deactive Group Description Enable Break Squeal The form is activated when this checkbox is selected. Load Factor Defines the load factor for which the break squeal analysis is to be performed. Average Stiffness Approximate average stiffness per unit area between the break pads and disk. This parameter is used as a penalty contact stiffness for break squeal. It needs to be a large value, but not so large that numerical instabilities result. If th is parameter is large eneough, increasing it by a few orders of magnitude will not appreciably affect the squeal modes. Break Squeal Only This is used to specify whether or not the nonlinear analysis will be continued after the break squeal event. If this is selected, the nonlinear iterations will cease immediatly after the event, otherwise the nonlinear iterations will be continued.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Subcase Parameters Active/Deactive Group Description Axis of Rotation Vector This is a vector of direction cosines, <X-dir cosine, Y-dir cosine, Z-dir cosine>, where this is for the axis of rotation, and the directions are in the basic coordinate system. Point on Axis of Rotation These are the coordinates of a point on the axis of rotation, [X,Y,Z]. The coordinates are in the basic coordinate system. Solvers/Options In general, this form is used to select the Nastran solver and other possible op tions. An SMETHOD case control entry is written specifying the solver type to use and possibly an ITER bulk data entry for additional options. Only certain solutions allow the use of the SMETHOD case con trol as controlled by

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis Subcase Parameters the user interface. If a solution does not support a solver option, that option is not presented in the form or menus. Solver Type Description Nastran Default No SMETHOD or ITER entries are written. Nastran uses whatever solver is the defa ult for the solution being used. Iterative ElementAn SMETHOD case control with the entry ELEMENT is used which invokes the Based (CASI) iterative CASI (element-based) solver using all defaults. This is only available for SOL 101 and 400 and is generally used with large solid models. Certain restrictions apply and you should consult the Nastran Quick Reference Guide regarding the usage of this solver. Iterative Matrix-Based An SMETHOD case control with the entry MATRIX is used to invoke the matrix-based iterative solver using all defaults. Iterative (Customized) An SMETHOD case control referencing the ID of an ITER bulk data entry is written to the input deck. The ITER entry invokes the solver options. Those options are des cribed in the table below.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Subcase Parameters Iterative Option Description Preconditioner Five preconditioners are available: Jacobi, Cholesky, Jacobi/Cholesky, and CASI. The CASI is the element-based iterative solver. See the table above. All other preco nditioners are the matrix-based iterative solver. Various options are allowed for each as c ontrolled by the user interface. See the entries below. To use a default preconditioner ba sed on the solution type, set this to Analysis Default. Consult the Nastran Quick Reference Guide for more details as to which defaults are used for each solution type. Maximum Number of Leave this blank to accept the default. Otherwise specify the maximum number of Iterations iterations allowed. Diagonal Scaling The Jacobi and Cholesky preconditioners allow diagonal scaling. Reduced Turn this toggle on to invoke the reduced incomplete Cholesky preconditioner as opposed to just the incomplete Cholesky. This can be combined with or without diagonal s caling. Block Turn this toggle on to invoke the block incomplete Cholesky preconditioner. You must specify real or complex also. Real / Complex This is only used for the block incomplete Cholesky preconditioner. p-version For p-element analysis, you can turn this toggle on to invoke the Jacobi, Choles ky or combined Cholesky/Jacobi preconditioner. This cannot be combined with any other options. Padding Specify the padding value for reduced incomplete Cholesky with any of its option s. Leave this blank to specify the defaults. Each option has its own default, therefore i t is recommended that you leave this blank. Extraction Specify the extraction level for reduced or block incomplete Cholesky preconditi oner. The default is zero.

Geometric Progression Turn this toggle on if you wish to use geometric progression convergence criteri on. Epsilon This is a user-given convergence parameter. Default is 1e-6. If present, the sol ver will use additional external convergence criterion. See the Nastran Quick Reference G uide for more details. Blank this field out if only the internal convergence criterion is required. Print Messages for Off by default. Turn ON if you want more diagnostics for each iteration. Otherwise only each Iteration minimal messaging is given. Terminate Early Turn this toggle ON if you want the run to terminate with only a resource estimation. (Resource Estimate Only)

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis Subcase Parameters DDAM Subcase Parameters This subform defines the parameters for a SOL 187 DDAM analysis subcase

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Subcase Parameters Spectrum Source Coef Source F(x) Type Coefficient Options Ship Type Mount Location Elastic/Plastic Weight Cutoff Minimum G Level Fore/Aft Axis Vertical AxisModal Analysis Number of Desired Roots Lower Upper Select File for a user-defined spectrum, or Coef for a DDAM style coefficient equation. If you select File, a button appears to the right to let you select th e file where the spectrum is defined. If you select Coef, two other buttons appear: Select File for a user-written coefficient file, or Default to use the coefficie nts built into the Fortran program. Note that the built-in coefficients we deliver in the program are NOT the DDS-072 coefficients. If you use this option for a real DDAM analysis, the Fortran file must be edited and recompiled. If you select Fil e, a button appears to the right to let you choose the file where the coefficient d ata is stored. Choices are NRL 1396 and DDS 072. This option toggles between the old NRL 1396 style equations, and the current DDS-072 style equations used for DDAM. Select Surface or Submerged Choice of Deck, Hull, or Shell. Select Elastic or Plastic. Choosing Plastic uses the Elastic/Plastic coefficient s; Elastic uses the elastic coefficients. Default uses the default value compiled into the PCL code, which is 80%. If you

choose Enter Value the text box becomes available and you can enter a percentage manually. The number entered is the percentage, not the fraction, so 100% of the modal mass is entered as 100. If you select N/A, no minimum G value is used. If you enter a value, all modal accelerations below the minimum are set to the minimum. It is necessary to have the model oriented orthogonal to a global cartesian axis system, although not necessarily in one particular orientation. This toggle identifies which global axis is to be interpreted as Fore/Aft. This identifies the axis that is in the vertical direction. These are the limits that control the eigenvalue analysis and are the values fro m the Nastran EIGRL entry. ND is the number of desired roots, V1 is the lower frequency limit, V2 is the upper frequency limit. For the effects of using one o f more of these, see the EIGRL section of the MD Nastran Quick Reference Guide.

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis Subcase Parameters Explicit Nonlinear Subcase Parameters This subordinate form appears when the Subcase Parameters button is selected on the Subcases form when the solution type is Explicit Nonlinear. All of the data is part of the TST EPNL Bulk Data entry Defines TSTEPNL. Similar to SOL 129, Nonlinear Transient Defines BCTABLE. Similar to SOL 600 Implicit Nonlinear Contact Table... Activates, deactivates, and controls the behavior of contact bo dies in the analysis.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Subcase Parameters Selects the highest and lowest natural frequencvalues to be extracted Selects which Degrees of Freedom are used todetermine the peaks Selects the output interval of accelerations, velocities, or displacements of the eigenvalues The Type of Response menu specifies whether Acceleration, Velocity, or Displacement response will be used to select the modes. Selects which Degrees of Freedom to be in the eigenvectors (3 for translations only, 6for translations and rotations The Method of Normalization menu specifies the method used to normalize the eigenvectors

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis Subcase Parameters Contact Table A contact table is used to control the behavior of contact bodies and to activat e or deactivate, or in some cases, remove contact bodies from the analysis. This form defines the BCTABLE en try. Additional Data... Additional Contact Data for Explicit Nonlinear.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Subcase Parameters Additional Contact Data This subordinate form defines additional contact data for Explicit Nonlinear.

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis Subcase Parameters Adaptive Mesh Post-Processing Support has been added for adaptive mesh post-processing for airbag analysis. Below is an adapted mesh model as read in from the DBALL file and stored using o ffset ID s in separate groups. The user can then select one or more time increments from the Quick Plot Results menu for postprocessing. The Quick Plot algorithm pulls up the mesh associated with the increment(s) sele cted for post-processing. Using this method a user can do a pseudo-animation to show the progression of the analysis. The model is loaded by a cylindrical rigid pin with a 200 lb load at t he center. Additional Information The following is also now supported for SOL 700 jobs: Additional Properties PBEAM71 BPEAMD PBELTD PELAS1 PLPLANE PLSOLID PSHELL1 PSHELLD PSPRMA

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Subcase Parameters GUI for time domain NVH Many additional materials

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis Output Requests 3.9 Output Requests This allows the definition of what data is desired from the analysis code in the form of results. For most solution sequences, the form consists of two formats: Basic and Advanced. The Ba sic form retains the simplicity of being able to specify the output requests over the entire model an d uses the default settings of MD Nastran Case Control commands. There is a special set defined in Patran ca lled ALL FEM. This set represents all nodes and elements associated with Object defined on the Anal ysis Form, 261. This default set is used for all output requests in the Basic Output Requests, 416 fo rm. The Advanced version of this form allows the user to vary these default options. Since output requests have to be appropriate to the type of analysis, the form changes depending on th e solution sequence. The Advanced Output Requests, 417 also adds the capability of being able to associat e a given output request to a subset of the model using Patran groups. This capability can be used effect ively in significantly reducing the results that are created for a model, optimizing the sizes and tran slation times of output files. The creation of Patran groups are documented in Group>Create (p. 263) in the Pat ran Reference Manual. The results types that will be brought into Patran due to any of these requests, are documented in Supported OUTPUT2 Result and Model Quantities, 502. In that chapter, tables are presented that correlate the MD Nastran results block, and the Patran primary and secondary results label s with the various output requests. Note: Many of the output requests that can be defined on the Output Request forms curr ently apply only to the printed values in the MD Nastran output file; these result quantitie s cannot be imported and postprocessed in Patran. For guidance on specific quantities, revie w Supported OUTPUT2 Result and Model Quantities, 502. MD Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600) produces stress and strain results that differ from those results available with other solution sequences. A detailed discussion of the stress and strain measures for SOL 600 is given in Stress and Strain Measures for Nonlinear Analysis (Ch. 2) in the MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600) User s Guide.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Output Requests Basic Output Requests This form is used to select output requests with their default options. The set is always All FEM, which means results for all nodes or elements in the model. A default set of output re quests is always preselected. The available output requests depend on the active Solution Sequence as indicated by this value. This option menu is used to switch between the advanced and basic versions of this form. This listbox displays the appropriate result types that may be selected for the solutionsequence indicated at the top of the form. Theoutput requests are selected one at a time by clicking. This listbox displays the selected output requests for the subcase shown at the top of the form. The Delete button deletes the output request highlighted in the Output Requests listbox. The TITLE, SUBTITLE and LABEL are written to the MD Nastran output file. Note: The OK button accepts the output requests and closes the form. The Default s button deletes all output requests and replaces them with defaults. The Cancel button closes the fo rm without saving the output requests.

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis Output Requests Advanced Output Requests This form provides great flexibility in creating output requests. Output request s may be associated with different groups (SET options in MD Nastran) as well as different superelements1 . The output requests available depend on the chosen Solution Types, 271, Solution Parameters, 277, an d Translation Parameters, 265. The Advanced Output Requests form is sensitive to the Result Ty pe selected. The Form Type, Delete, OK, Defaults, and Cancel buttons operate exactly like on the Basic Output Requests, 416 form. A description of the output requests and their associated options are listed in Table 3-1 and Table 3-2. 1At the present time, superelement specifications are allowed only in the struct ured linear static solution type (Solution Sequence 101).

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Output Requests Use this listbox to select the result type to This listbox is used to select the group to which the be created. output requests relate. This databox appears for SOL 101 and 103 when the model contains p-elements. Other options will bepresented, such as Percent of Step Outputand Intermediate Output Options depending on conditions listed in Table 3-2. Use this list box to select output requests thatare to be modified or deleted. These are the options that are appropriate to the highlighted result type. They also indicate the options that were selected for a highlighted output request. See Table 3-1.

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis Output Requests Table 3-1 Output Request Descriptions Output Request Case Control Command or Bulk Data Entry Description Acoustic Intensity INTENSITY Requests acoustic intensity for external acoustics analysis (frequency response). Acoustic Power ACPOWER Requests acoustic power radiated from surface for external acoustics analysis (frequency response). Acoustic Field Point Mesh ACFPMRESULT Requests acoustic field point mesh results for external acoustics analysis (frequency response). You are given a list of all acoustic field point meshes defined and groups with nodes. Each one selected is translated into its own BEGIN AFPM section in the bulk data. Acoustic Velocities VELOCITY Requests nodal velocities. This is for acoustic velocities at the node points of Field Point Mesh. Displacements DISPLACEMENT Requests nodal displacements. Eigenvectors VECTOR Requests nodal eigenvectors. Element Stresses STRESS Requests elemental stresses. Constraint Forces SPCFORCES Requests forces of single- point constraints. MultiPoint Constraint Forces MPCFORCES Requests forces of multipoint constraints (for versions 68 or higher). Element Forces FORCE Requests elemental forces. Applied Loads OLOAD Requests equivalent nodal applied loads. Nonlinear Applied Loads NLLOAD Requests equivalent nonlinear applied loads. Sorting and format options are not allowed with this request. Element Strain Energies ESE Requests elemental strain energies and energy densities. No options are allowed with this output request. Element Strains STRAIN Requests elemental strains. Grid Point Stresses GPSTRESS Requests stresses at grid points. Velocities VELOCITY Requests nodal velocities.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Output Requests Table 3-1 Output Request Descriptions (continued) Output Request Case Control Command or Bulk Data Entry Description Accelerations ACCELERATION Requests nodal accelerations. Grid Point Force Balance GPFORCE Requests grid point force balance at nodes. Sorting and format options are not allowed with this request. Grid Point Stress Discontinuities GPSDCON Requests mesh stress discontinuities based on grid point stresses. Element Stress Discontinuity ELSDCON Requests mesh stress discontinuities based on element stresses. Nonlinear Stress NLSTRESS Requests the form and type of nonlinear element stress output. Contact Results BOUTPUT Requests contact regions for output. Table 3-2 Output Request Form Options Options Label Case Control or Bulk Data Options Groups Multiple Select Allowed Descriptions Sorting By Node/ Element SORT1 Elements No Output is presented as tabular listing of nodes/elements for each load, frequency, eigenvalue, or time. By Frequency/ Time SORT2 Elements No Output is presented as tabular listing of frequency or time for each node or element. Format Rectangular REAL Elements No Requests real and imaginary format for complex output. Polar PHASE Elements No Requests magnitude and phase format for complex output. Tensor Von Mises VONMISES Elements No Requests von Mises stresses or strains. Maximum Shear MAXS Elements No Requests Maximum shear or Octahedral stresses or strains.

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis Output Requests Table 3-2 Output Request Form Options (continued) Options Label Case Control or Bulk Data Options Groups MultipleSelect Allowed Descriptions Element Points Cubic CUBIC Elements No Requests QUAD4 stresses or strains at the corner grid points as well as the center using the strain gage approach with cubic bending correction. Corner CORNER Elements No Requests QUAD4 stresses or strains at the corner grid points as well as the center. Center CENTER Elements No Requests QUAD4 stresses or strains at the center only. Strain Gage SGAGE Elements No Requests QUAD4 stresses or strains at the corner grid points as well as the center using the strain gage approach. Bilinear BILIN Elements No Requests QUAD4 stresses or strains at the corner grid points as well as the center using bilinear extrapolation. Composite Plate Options Element Stresses NOCOMPS= -1, LSTRN = 0 in Bulk Data Elements: Surfaces No Composite element ply stresses and failure indices are suppressed. Element stresses for the equivalent homogeneous element are output. Ply Stresses NOCOMPS=1,LS TRN = 0 in Bulk Data Elements: Surfaces No Composite element ply stresses and failure indices are output. Model should contain PCOMP entry defining composites.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Output Requests Table 3-2 Output Request Form Options (continued) Options Label Case Control or Bulk Data Options Groups Multiple Select Allowed Descriptions Composite Plate Options Ply Strains NOCOMPS=1,LS TRN = 1 in Bulk Data Elements: Surfaces No Composite element ply strains and failure indices are output. Model should contain PCOMP entry defining composites. Ply Element NOCOMPS=0,LS Elements: No Composite element ply stresses Stresses TRN=0 in Bulk Data Surfaces and failure indices as well as Element stresses for the equivalent homogeneous element are output. Model should contain PCOMP entry defining composites. Element and NOCOMPS=0,LS Elements: No Composite element ply strains and Ply Strains TRN=1 in Bulk Data Surfaces failure indices as well as Element stresses for the equivalent homogeneous element are output. Model should contain PCOMP entry defining composites. Plate Strain Plane Curv. STRCUR Elements: No This option is available for Options Surfaces Element Strains output requests only. Strains and curvatures are output at the reference plane for plate elements. Fiber FIBER Elements: Surfaces No This option is available for Element Strains output requests only. Strains at locations Z1 and Z2 (specified under element properties) are output at the reference plane for plate elements. Sorting By Node /Element SORT1 Nodes No Output is presented as tabular listing of nodes/elements for each load, frequency, eigenvalue, or time.

By Frequency/ Time SORT2 Nodes No Output is presented as tabular listing of frequency or time for each node or element. Format Rectangular REAL Nodes No Requests real and imaginary format for complex output. Polar PHASE Nodes No Requests magnitude and phase format for complex output.

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis Output Requests Table 3-2 Output Request Form Options (continued) Options Label Case Control or Bulk Data Options Groups MultipleSelect Allowed Descriptions Output Coord COORD CID Elements: Yes Selects the output coordinate Coordinate Surfaces, Volumes frame for grid point stress output. Coord 0 is the basic coordinate frame. Volume Output Both Blank Elements: Volumes Yes Requests direct stress, principal stresses, direction cosines, mean pressure stress and von Mises equivalent stresses to be output. Principal PRINCIPAL Elements: Volumes Yes Requests principal stresses, direction cosines, mean pressure stress and von Mises equivalent stresses to be output. Direct DIRECT Elements: Volumes Yes Requests direct stress, mean pressure stress and von Mises equivalent stresses to be output. Fiber All FIBER, ALL Elements: Surfaces Yes Specifies that grid point stresses will be output at all fibre locations, that is at Z1, Z2 and the reference plane. Z1 and Z2 distances are specified as element properties (default Z1=-thickness/2, Z2= +thickness/2). Fiber Mid FIBER, MID Elements: Surfaces Yes Specifies that grid point stresses will be output at the reference plane. Z1 FIBER, Z1 Elements: Surfaces Yes Specifies that grid point stresses will be output at distance Z1 from the reference plane (default Z1=thickness/ 2). Z2 FIBER, Z2 Elements:

Surfaces Yes Specifies that grid point stresses will be output at distance Z2 from the reference plane (default Z2=+thickness/2).

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Output Requests Table 3-2 Output Request Form Options (continued) Options Label Case Control or Bulk Data Options Groups Multiple Select Allowed Descriptions Normal X1 NORMAL X1 Elements: Surfaces, Yes Specifies the x-axis of the output coordinate frame to be the reference direction for the positive fiber and shear stress output. X2 NORMAL X2 Elements: Surfaces Yes Specifies the y-axis of the output coordinate frame to be the reference direction for the positive fiber and shear stress output. X3 NORMAL X3 Elements: Surfaces Yes Specifies the z-axis of the output coordinate frame to be the reference direction for the positive fiber and shear stress output. Method Topological TOPOLOGI-CAL Elements: Surfaces Yes Specifies the topological method for calculating average grid point stresses. This is the default. Geometric GEOMETRIC Elements: Surfaces Yes Specifies the geometric interpolation method for calculating average grid point stresses. This method should be used when there are large differences in slope between adjacent elements. X-axis of X1 AXIS, X1 Elements: Yes Specifies that the x-axis of the Basic Coord Surfaces output coordinate frame should be used as the x-output axis and the local x-axis when geometric interpolation method is used. X-axis of Basic Coord X2 AXIS, X2 Elements: Surfaces Yes Specifies that the y-axis of the output coordinate frame should be used as the x-output axis and the local x-axis when geometric interpolation method is used. X3 AXIS, X3 Elements:

Surfaces Yes Specifies that the z-axis of the output coordinate frame should be used as the x-output axis and the local x-axis when geometric interpolation method is used.

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis Output Requests Table 3-2 Output Request Form Options (continued) Options Label Case Control or Bulk Data Options Groups MultipleSelect Allowed Descriptions Branch Break BREAK Elements: Surfaces Yes Treats multiple element intersections as stress discontinuities in the geometric interpolation method. No Break NOBREAK Elements: Surfaces Yes Does not treat multiple element intersections as stress discontinuities in the geometric interpolation method. Tolerance 0.0 TOL=0.0 Elements: Surfaces Yes Defines the tolerance to be used for interelement slope differences. Slopes beyond this tolerance will signify discontinuous stresses. Percent of 100 NOi Field of All Once per An integer n that specifies the Step Output TSTEP and TSTEPNL entry subcase percentage of intermediate outputs to be presented for transient and nonlinear transient analyses. Adaptive 0 BY = n on p-elements Once per An integer n that requests Cycle OUTPUT Bulk subcase intermediate outputs for each nth Output Data entry adaptive cycle. For n=0, only the Interval last adaptive cycle results are output. This is available for SOLs 101 and 103 for versions 68 and higher. Intermediate Output Options Yes INTOUT field of NLPARM Bulk Data entry All Once per subcase Intermediate outputs are requested for every computed load increment. Applicable for nonlinear static solution type only. No INTOUT field of NLPARM Bulk Data entry All Once per

subcase Intermediate outputs are requested for the last load of the subcase. Applicable for nonlinear static solution type only. All INTOUT field of NLPARM Bulk Data entry All Once per subcase Intermediate outputs are requested for every computed and userspecified load increment. Applicable for nonlinear static solution type only.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Output Requests Table 3-2 Output Request Form Options (continued) Options Label Case Control or Bulk Data Options Groups Multiple Select Allowed Descriptions Suppress Print for Result Type N/A Specifies PLOT option instead of PRINT on the Case Control All Yes Print to the .f06 file is suppressed for the result type when this is selected. Output request entry. Output Print Specifies PRINT All Yes The printer will be the output Device on a Case Control medium for the .f06 file. Options request entry, e.g. DISPL. Punch Specifies PUNCH on a Case Control All Yes The punch file will be the output medium. request entry, e.g. DISPL. Both Specifies both All Yes The printer and punch file will be PRINT and the output medium. PUNCH. Edit Output Requests Form Use this form to edit the outputs request associated with selected subcases. To access this form, select the Output Requests button on the Subcases form with the Action set to Global Data.

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis Output Requests Selecting the Default button when asingle cell is selected resets the selected output request to its default setting. The row labels for the spreadsheet are the selectedsubcases from the parent form. The Output Requests for each subcase are stored in cells of the spreadsheet. Clears the selected cells. You can select individual cells, multiple cells ina column, entire columns, or entire rows. Inactive (greyed out) until a subcase label (column1) is selected. When this but ton is selected, the top half of the form will become inactive, and the default output request function (named user_change_default_out_req) will be called. This will load user defined defaults or the system defineddefaults if user ones do no t exist. Closes the form and saves the selected changes. To apply the new output requests, you must select Apply on the parentSubcases/Global Data for m. Notes: The Edit Output Requests form opens with focus in the first result type of the f irst subcase. The top half of the Edit Output Requests form is similar to the Advanced Output Request form. The spreadsheet column labels are the result types for the current solution type . Putting focus in a cell causes the top half of the form to reflect the current s etting, just like the current advanced output request form. This means that the databox RESULT TYPE: g ets updated with the result type of the currently selected cell. The OUTPUT REQUESTS : databox is also updated to show the actual content of the cell.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Output Requests If a cell is initially empty, selecting it will cause the top half of the form t o display the appropriate default setting for the selected result type (i.e., column). Selecting a column header will allow you to change all subcase output requests o f a particular type. The top half of the Edit Output Requests form will set to the default requ est of the particular result type. When you select a set of contiguous column cells, the top half of the form will configure to the upper most selected cell. You cannot select multiple columns. Default Output Request Information In order to make use of this new feature you will need to create a PCL file that contains the function user_change_default_out_req which will overwrite the existing default file in Pa tran. This new PCL file will need to be compiled and then the resulting library (.plb) will need to be loaded into Patran. This can be done using the p3midilog.pcl or the p3epilog.pcl file. The user_change_default_out_reqfunction makes use of the mscn_user_add_out_req and the mscn_user_del_out_req functions to add and delete default Output Request types. These two functions are defined as follows: mscn_user_add_out_req (or_num, or_value) Description: This function adds either a specified version or a default version of an Output Request type to the list of default Output Requests. Input: INTEGER or_num The OR number of the output request type to add (See Table 3-3). STRING or_value The value of the selected output request type. Blank implies the default value. mscn_user_del_out_req (or_num) Description: This function deletes the specified Output Request type from the list of default Output Requests.

Input: INTEGER or_num The OR number of the Output Request type to delete (See Table 3-3 ). Code Sample FUNTION user_change_default_out_req(sol_seq) INTEGER sol_seqIF (sol_seq == 101 sol_seq == 106) THEN

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis Output Requests /* This will add this version of the Output Request type to the list of default */ /* Output Requests for solution 101 and 106. */ mscn_user_add_out_req (4, MPCFORCES(SORT2,REAL)=ALL FEM ) /* This will add the default version of these Output Request types from the list */ /* of default Output Requests for solution 101 and 106. */ mscn_user_add_out_req (10, )

mscn_user_add_out_req (6, ) /* This will delete these Output Request types from the list ofdefault */ /* Output Requests for solution 101 and 106. */ mscn_user_del_out_req (1) mscn_user_del_out_req (2) mscn_user_del_out_req (3) END IF END FUNCTION The following is a table that shows the current predefined default Output Reques ts (those marked with an X) and the allowed options (those marked with an O) for the various solution sequences. Table 3-3 Result ID Number Result ID Number (SolutionSequence) OR Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 101 xxxooo oo o o o o o o o x 103 ooxoo oo o o o x 105 xoxooo oo o o o x 106 xxx oo o o o x 107 ooxoo o x 108 xoxooo o o o o 109 xoxoooo o o o o o 110 ooxoo o x 111 xoxooo o o o o 112 xoxoooo o o o o o 114 xxxooo oo o o x o o 115 ooxoo oo o o o 129 xox oo o o o o o 153 o o o o o o x x o o 159 o o o o o o x x o o o o 400 x x

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Output Requests Table 3-3 Result ID Number 600 x 700 xox oo o o o o o x 1 = Displacement, 2 = stress, 3 = spcforces, 4 = mpcforces, 5 = forces, 6 = oloa d, 7 = nlload, 8 = ese, 9 = strain, 10 = gpstress, 11 = velocity, 12 = acceleration, 13 = gpforce, 14 = gp sdcon, 15 = elsdcon, 16 = vector, 17 = thermal, 18 = flux, 19 = ht_oload, 20 = ht_spcforces, 21 =enthalpy, 22 = hdot OR # Default Value 1 DISPLACEMENT(SORT1,REAL)=All FEM 2 STRESS(SORT1,REAL,VONMISES,BILIN)=All FEM;PARAM,NOCOMPS,-1 3 SPCFORCES(SORT1,REAL)=All FEM 4 MPCFORCES(SORT1,REAL)=All FEM 5 FORCE(SORT1,REAL,BILIN)=All FEM 6 OLOAD(SORT1,REAL)=All FEM 7 NLLOAD=All FEM 8 ESE=All FEM 9 STRAIN(SORT1,REAL,VONMISES,STRCUR,BILIN)=All FEM 10 GPSTRESS=All FEM; VOLUME # SET,PRINCIPAL,SYSTEM Coord 0; SURFACE # SET #,FIBRE ALL,SYSTEM Coord 0, AXIS X1,NORMAL R, TOPOLOGICAL,BRANCH BREAK 11 VELOCITY(SORT1,REAL)=All FEM 12 ACCELERATION(SORT1,REAL)=All FEM 13 GPFORCE=All FEM 14 GPSDCON=All FEM; VOLUME # SET #,PRINCIPAL,SYSTEM Coord 0; SURFACE # SET #,FIBRE ALL,SYSTEM Coord 0, AXIS X1,NORMAL R, TOPOLOGICAL 0.,BRANCH BREAK 15 ELSDCON=All FEM; VOLUME # SET #,PRINCIPAL,SYSTEM Coord 0; SURFACE # SET #,FIBRE ALL,SYSTEM Coord 0, AXIS X1,NORMAL R, TOPOLOGICAL 0.,BRANCH BREAK 16 VECTOR(SORT1,REAL)=All FEM 17 THERMAL=(SORT1,PRINT)=All FEM 18 FLUX(SORT1,PRINT)=All FEM 19 OLOAD(SORT1,PRINT)=All FEM 20 SPCFORCES(SORT1,PRINT)=All FEM 21 ENTHALPY(SORT1,PRINT)=All FEM 22 HDOT(SORT1,PRINT)=All FEM

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis Output Requests 431 23 24 NLSTRESS BCCONTACT Note: In SOL 109, 112 & 159 will have SORT2 as the default in some versions of P atran. Subcases Direct Text Input This form is used to directly enter entries into the Case Control section for th e defined subcase. Directly entered entries may potentially conflict with those created by the interface. Writing these entries to the file can be controlled with this toggle. Resets the form back Resets all four forms back Clears the current to the data values it Saves the current to its previous value and form. setting and data for the had at the last OK. closes the form. four sections and closes the form.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Output Requests SOL 600 Output Requests This subform defines the output data for a SOL 600 analysis subcase Echo Marc Input File Produces an echo of the input file. Results in Marc Print File Writes results to a print file. Results (POST) File Options Increments between Writing Results Defines the number of increments between writ ing results to the MD Nastran results file after the first increment of the analysis. The default is one (1) for every increment. Note: You can select a fixed number of increments of output on the subcase parameters-load increments parameters form. Select Nodal Results... Brings up a subform for selecting nodal results Select Element Results... Brings up a subform for selecting elemental results. Output requests for all subcases.

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis Output Requests Select Nodal Results This subform controls which nodal result quantities are returned from the analys is. Available Result Types Lists all of the available result types for the analysis. The numbers in parentheses are the MSC.Marc POST code numbers, that will be specified on the MARCOUT entry Selected Result Types Shows the set of result types that have been selected to be returned in the analysis.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Output Requests The following table shows the post codes that may be selected for a SOL 600 stru ctural nonlinear analysis. Nodal Result Postcode Default(?) DISPLACEMENT 1 YES ROTATION 2 no EXTERNAL FORCE 3 no EXTERNAL MOMENT 4 no REACTION FORCE 5 YES REACTION MOMENT 6 no PORE PRESSURE 23 no VELOCITY 28 no ROTATIONAL VELOCITY 29 no ACCELERATION 30 no ROTATIONAL ACCELERATION 31 no MODAL MASS 32 no ROTATION MODAL MASS 33 no CONTACT NORMAL STRESS 34 no CONTACT NORMAL FORCE 35 no FRICTION STRESS 36 no FRICTION FORCE 37 no CONTACT STATUS 38 no CONTACT TOUCHED BODY 39 no HERRMANN VARIABLE 40 no POST CODE, No. -11 -11 thru -16 no POST CODE, No. -22 -21 thru -23 no POST CODE, No. -31 -31 no POST CODE, No. -41 -41 no POST CODE, No. -51 -51 no Note: The POST CODE (<0) are for user-defined quantities via user subroutine UPS TNO.

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis Output Requests Element Output Requests This subform controls which element result quantities are returned from the MSC. Marc analysis.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Output Requests Available Result Types Lists all of the available result types for the analysis. The numbers in parentheses are the MSC.Marc POST code numbers. Selected Result Types Shows the set of result types that have been selected to b e returned in the analysis. Element X-section Results Defines the number of layer points to use through the cross sectionof homogeneou s shells, plates and beams. This number must beodd if not a composite. Note: If no changes are made to the default output requests, no MARCOUT entry will be written and MD Nastran will determine the appropriate output. The following table shows the post codes that may be selected for a SOL 600 stru ctural nonlinear analysis. Elemental Result Postcode Solutions Default(?) STRAIN, TOTAL COMPONENTS 301 nonlinear only YES STRAIN, TOTAL COMPONENTS 461 nonlinear only no (defined system) STRAIN, ELASTIC COMPONENTS 401 any no STRAIN, ELASTIC COMPONENTS 421 any no

(global system) STRAIN, ELASTIC EQUIVALENT 127 any no STRAIN, PLASTIC COMPONENTS 321 nonlinear only no STRAIN, PLASTIC COMPONENTS 431 nonlinear only no (global system) STRAIN, PLASTIC EQUIVALENT 27 nonlinear only no STRAIN, PLASTIC EQUIVALENT 7 nonlinear only no (from rate) STRAIN, CRACKING 381 nonlinear only no COMPONENTS STRAIN, CREEP COMPONENTS 331 creep only

no STRAIN, CREEP COMPONENTS 441 creep only YES (global system) STRAIN, CREEP EQUIVALENT 37 creep only no STRAIN, CREEP EQUIVALENT 8 creep only no (from rate) STRAIN, THERMAL 371 any no STRAIN, THICKNESS 49 any no STRAIN, VELOCITY 451 nonlinear only no

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis Output Requests Elemental Result Postcode Solutions Default(?) STRESS, COMPONENTS 311 any no STRESS, COMPONENTS 391 an no (defined system) STRESS, COMPONENTS 411 any YES (global system) STRESS, EQUIVALENT YIELD 59 nonlinear only no STRESS, EQUIVALENT MISES 17 any no STRESS, MEAN NORMAL 18 any no STRESS, INTERLAMINAR SHEAR 108

any no No. 1 STRESS, INTERLAMINAR SHEAR 109 any no No. 2 STRESS, INTERLAMINAR 501,511 any no COMPONENTS STRESS, CAUCHY COMPONENTS 341 nonlinear only no STRESS, CAUCHY EQUIVALENT 47 nonlinear only no STRESS, HARMONIC 351 (real) harmonic only no COMPONENTS 361(imag) STRESS, REBAR UNDEFORMED 471 any no STRESS, REBAR DEFORMED 481 any no

FORCES, ELEMENT 264-269 any no BIMOMENT 270 any no STRAIN RATE, PLASTIC 28 nonlinear only no STRAIN RATE, EQUIVALENT 175 any no VISCOPLASTIC STATE VARIABLE, SECOND 29 any no STATE VARIABLE, THIRD 39 any no TEMPERATURE, ELEMENT TOTAL 9 any no TEMPERATURE, ELEMENT

10 any no INCREMENTAL STRAIN ENERGY DENSITY, TOTAL 48 nonlinear only no STRAIN ENERGY DENSITY, 58 any no ELASTIC STRAIN ENERGY DENSITY, 68 nonlinear only no PLASTIC THICKNESS, ELEMENT 20 any no

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Output Requests Elemental Result Postcode Solutions Default(?) VOLUME, ELEMENT 78 any no VOLUME, VOID FRACTION 177 any no GRAIN SIZE 79 any no FAILURE, INDEX No. 1-7 91-103 any no DENSITY, RELATIVE 179 any no POST CODE, No. 19 19 any no POST CODE, No. 38 38 any

no POST CODE, No. -11 -11 thru -16 any no POST CODE, No. -21 -21 thru -23 any no POST CODE, No. -31 -31 any no POST CODE, No. -41 -41 any no POST CODE, No. -51 -51 any no DDAM Output Requests The output requests form has been altered for the DDAM solution. Because the pro gram performs an NRL sum and has no explicit constraints, only a few result quantities are availa ble: Nodal Results: Displacement Velocity Accelerations Element Results: Stress Force The results reported in the .f06 file are printed sequentially, first x-shock re sults, then y, then z, but all are labeled as TIME = 0.000000E+00. To differentiate these in the file, there is a small header

printer prior to the results for each shock direction that looks something like this: ^^^ ^^^ *************************************** ^^^ ^^^ SUMMED MODAL RESPONSES IN X-DIRECTION ^^^ ^^^ *************************************** ^^^

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis Output Requests If you need to find the start of the X-shock results, search for X-DIRECTION to find this header and proceed from there. It is necessary to specify that Patran calculate the combined stresses on a mode -by-mode basis, and NRL sum the combined results. See Defining Translation Parameters for DDAM (SOL 187) (Ch. 4). Mode by Mode Output You can use the Direct Text Input section of Patran Analysis forms to obtain mor e data. Using the parameters XBYMODE, YBYMODE and ZBYMODE you can get mode by mode data for the se lected direction. To get this data, enter the following lines into the Bulk Data direct text area: PARAM,XBYMODE,YES PARAM,YBYMODE,YES PARAM,ZBYMODE,YES You can select one or more of these parameters. Keep in mind that this generates a lot of data for an analysis with a lot of modes, and that you must have an output request for the c orresponding data e.g., if you want mode-by-mode displacements, you must have a DISPLACEMENT request as chosen above. Each of these parameters outputs the data to the .f06 file if you have the (PRIN T) option on, or an .op2 file if the (PLOT) option is on. Both are on by default when you specify somethi ng like: DISPLACEMENT = ALL Alternately, DISPLACEMENT(PLOT) = ALL DISPLACEMENT(PRINT) = ALL plots or prints the results. If unassigned, the mode-by-mode results outputs to generic Fortran files (like fort.42), so it is necessary to add an ASSIGN statement to the file if you wish to have these files named appropriately. To do this, use the FMS section in the Direct Text Input form, an d add lines like: ASSIGN OUTPUT2= jobname_mbmx.op2 , UNIT=41, DELETE ASSIGN OUTPUT2= jobname_mbmy.op2 , UNIT=42, DELETE ASSIGN OUTPUT2= jobname_mbmz.op2 , UNIT=43, DELETE In the .f06 file, the mode-by-mode results are labeled with their own header pri or to the section: ^^^ ^^^ **************************************************

^^^ ^^^ INDIVIDUAL SCALED MODAL RESPONSES IN Y-DIRECTION ^^^ ^^^ ************************************************** ^^^

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Output Requests Since the mode-by-mode velocities and accelerations are calculated by multiplyin g the displacements by the frequency (omega and omega2), MD Nastran labels them as Eigenvectors. If you ask for displacement, velocity, and acceleration for three modes, you will find nine Eig envectors in the .f06 file with repeating frequencies the first three (1-3) are displacements, the next thr ee (4-6) velocities, and the last three (7-9) the accelerations. The .op2 files are similar, reporting th e three as Eigenvectors with repeating frequencies. The magnitude of the values should be a clue as to what y ou are looking at for all but the lowest frequencies. The Fortran Driver File (jobname.ddd) Some of the options you choose on the Subcase Parameters form are written to an external file that is read by the Fortran file when it calculates the spectrum. While you do not have the a bility to edit this file when using MSC.FEA, the file is a hardcopy ASCII record of what options were used whe n running the DDAM analysis. The file is small and has just a few lines that comprise the answ ers to questions that the ddam.exe program asks if it is run interactively. File Format (varies depending on chosen options on the first record) Record 1 (user spectrum file) (user coef file) (DDS-072 format) user spectrum file= T (use a user defined spectrum) = F (use coefficients) user coef file = T (use an external coefficient file) = F (use the coefficients compiled into the Fortran) DDS-072 format = T (use DDS-072 style equations) = F (use NRL 1396 style equations) Record 1a (if either file option on record 1 was true) cp10 filename = name of either the spectrum file or coefficient file Record 2 (if using coefficients) nsurf nstruc nplast ship type = 1 (surface ship equations) = 2 (submarine equations) mount location = 1 (file mounted equipment) = 2 (hull mounted equipment) elastic/plastic = 1 (use elastic factors) = 2 (use elastic/plastic factors) Record 3 pref pref = 0.0 (use default cutoff in program) = nnn.nn

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis Output Requests Record 4 Ming Ming = 0.0 (no minimum G) = n.n (use this minimum G value) Record 5 (F/A axis) (Vert axis) F/A axis = X (F/A is along the X axis) = Y (F/A is along the Y axis) = Z (F/A is along the Z axis) Vert axis = X (Vertical is along the X axis) = Y (Vertical is along the Y axis) = Z (Vertical is along the Z axis) Record 6 .f11 filename .f11 filename = name of the .f11 file Record 7 .f13 filename .f13 filename = name of the .f13 file Record 8 .ver filename .ver filename = name of the modal verification file Depending on the chosen options, the file will look like one of the following: No special user options F F T nsurf nstruc nplast pref ming f/a_axis vert_axis .f11 filename .f13 filename .ver filename coefficients from default source:

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Output Requests User coefficient option: F T T coef.dat filename nsurf nstruc nplast pref ming f/a_axis vert_axis .f11 filename .f13 filename .ver filename User spectrum Option: T F T spec.dat filename pref ming f/a_axis vert_axis .f11 filename .f13 filename .ver filename Note: Note that capitalization is required. The file is read free-format, so spacing i s not important. A sample file for a conventional analysis might look like: F F T 1 1 1 100. 1. X Z d1.f11 d2.f11 d1.ver

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis Select Explicit MPCs... 3.10 Select Explicit MPCs... The Explicit MPCs created in the Element menu can be selected for a given subcas e. The highlight of selected Explicit MPCs is supported when this form is displayed. The All MPCs to ggle indicates that all the Explicit MPCs already created or created later will be used for the subcase being created. The All MPCs toggle should be turned OFF in order to select MPCs. MPXADD SID is the ID use d for identifying the selected MPCs for the subcase.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Non-Structural Mass Properties 3.11 Non-Structural Mass Properties MSC Nastran non-structural mass (NSM and NSML) are now supported in Patran. Note: NSM and NSML are used to define masses that affect the behavior of specific elem ent types but are not directly part of the structure of the model. NSM and NSML supp ort: Line Element Types Surface Element Types Property Types CBAR, CBEAM, CBEND, CONROD, CROD, CTUBE CCONEAX, CQUAD4, CQUAD8, CQUADR, CRAC2D, CSHEAR, CTRIA3, CTRIA6, CTRIAR CONROD, PBAR, PBARL, PBCOMP, PBEAM, PBEAML, PBEND, PCOMP, PCONEAX. PRAC2D, PROD, PSHEAR, PSHELL, PTUBE NSM and NSML forms are available through the Tools menu. Selecting NSM Properties displays the NSM Properties form. NSM Properties forms are MSC Nastran preference specific. NSM mass can be applied as Lumped or Distributed.

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis Non-Structural Mass Properties For a distributed NSM, the mass is spread evenly over all of the elementsin the application region. For a lumped NSM, the applied mass is applied directly to each element in the application region.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Non-Structural Mass Properties Non-structural mass can be applied to elements or property sets.

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis Non-Structural Mass Properties A Select form has been added to allow for the selection of NSM properties. Multi ple sets of NSMs can be defined in the model. Only the selected sets will be used in the analysis. The following examples display results of applying lumped and distributed NSMs.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Non-Structural Mass Properties A lumped mass value of 20 is applied to 10A distributed mass value of 20 is appl ied to 10 elements elements.

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis Select NSM Properties... 3.12 Select NSM Properties... This Subcases dependant form allows you to select the defined Nonstructural Mass sets. The Defined NSM Sets box lists all defined Nonstructural Mass property sets. Since it is pos sible to have up to four property sets with the same set name, the Distributed vs Lumped and Element vs P roperty attributes of the sets are listed in columns to the left of the property set name. Individual groupings of Nonstructural Mass property sets can be selected in the form and then applied with the Apply button. By default, all of the listed Nonstructural Mass property sets are selected by the case control code even if they are not shown as selected in the Defined NSM Sets box. Groups of Nonstructual Mass properties can be excluded from an analysis by not i ncluding that specific subcase in the analysis job. Individual Nonstructural Mass properties can be exc luded from an analysis by setting the applied mass for that property set to zero (0).

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Select NSM Properties... This subform appears when the Select NSM Properties... button is selected from t he Subcases form.

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis Subcase Select 3.13 Subcase Select This form appears when the Subcase Select button is selected on the Analysis for m. This form is used to select a sequence of subcases associated with an analysis job. Displays all the available subcases for the current solution sequence. The current solution sequence is displayed at the top of the form. For example, SOL 101 subcases lc1, lc2, and lc3. Displays all subcases that have been associated with the current job name. For example, subcaseslc1 and lc3 have been selected; for SOL 101 the Bulk Data will contain two Case Control section SUBCASEs, SUBCASE 1 and SUBCASE 2. For SOL 600 a single run will be performed with it having two steps, lc1 and lc3. For optimization jobs, the solution type will be appended at the begining of the subcase name. For SOL 400 runs the Subcase Select form looks the same, except for the Select S teps for New Subcase button being un-greyed (it is pickable).

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Subcase Select Displays all the available subcases for SOL 400. For example, subcases lc1, lc2, lc3, lc4, and lc5. Displays all subcases that have been associated with the current job name. If the button Select Steps for New Subcase is not used, the job run will be the same as for SOL 600 , a single run will be performed with five steps, 1c1, ..., lc5, in the order shown in the GUI going from top to bottom. When the Select Steps for New Subcase button is used the following form appears.

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis Subcase Select Notice that the selected steps (lc1, lc2, lc3, lc4, andlc5) match the selected s ubcases of the parent form. This indicates that some or all of these steps can beused in defining the new su bcases. By selecting the steps lc1 and lc3, under Steps Selected, the names are entered under New Subcase Starting with Steps. This indicates that two subcases will be defined, subcase_lc1 and subcase_lc3 . Displays the steps names that are to be used at the begining of the (new) subcases to be created. The subcases that are defined are with steps lc1 and lc2, and steps lc3, lc4 and lc5: Subcase, subcase_lc1 Steps: lc1, lc2 Subcase, subcase_lc3 Steps: lc3, lc4, lc5 subcase_lc1 with

subcase_lc3

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Restart Parameters 3.14 Restart Parameters This format of the Analysis form appears when the Action is set to Analyze and t he Object is Restart. Currently, restarts are only supported for the Linear Static (101), Nonlinear St atic (106), and Normal Modes (103) Solution Sequences. Linear and Nonlinear Static jobs can be restarte d as Linear or Nonlinear Static. Normal Modes jobs can be restarted as Frequency Response, or T ransient Response. The DBALL and the MASTER files for the initial job must be present in the curren t directory when the restart job is submitted.The Restart Parameters button on the main analysis form allows the user to enter information about where to resume the analysis. The Patran Analysis Manager User s Manual contains

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis Restart Parameters more information on how to submit restart jobs with Analysis Manager. Restart fo r SOL 600 jobs are described on (p. 315) and (p. 458). Indicates the selected Analysis Code and Analysis Type, asdefined in the Prefere nces>Analysis (p. 431) in the Patran Reference Manual. List of names for existing analysis jobs. Select the jobname of the analysis to restart from. List of names for existing restart jobs. Select the name of an existing restart job or enter the name for a new restart job in the databox below. Name to use for the restart job. An existing restart job may be modified and/or resubmitted by making a selection from theAvailable Restart Jobs listbox.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Restart Parameters Linear Static/Normal Modes This subordinate form appears when the Restart Parameters button is selected on the Analysis form and the solution type of the initial job is Linear Static or Normal Modes. Defines the version number from which to restart. This is the VERSION field on the RESTART file management statement. Requests that the restart data for the specified version be saved. This results in a KEEP option on the RESTART File Management statement.

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis Restart Parameters Nonlinear Static This subordinate form appears when the Restart Parameters button is selected on the Analysis form and the solution type is Nonlinear Static. Requests that the restart data for the specified version be saved. This results in a Defines the version number to restart the analysis from. This is the VERSION field on the RESTART File Management statement. Defines the increment number to start the analysis from. This is the value of the PARAM,LOOPID Bulk Data entry. Defines the subcase number to start from in the list of subcases for this job. The value entered should be one greater than the SUBID from the initial job s print file (*.f06). This is the value of the PARAM,SUBID Bulk Data entry. KEEP option on the RESTART File Management statement.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Restart Parameters SOL 600 This subordinate form appears when the Restart Parameters button is selected on the Solution Parameters form. Set Restart Parameters NoneRestart Type: Last Converged Increment Restart from Increment = Increments between Writing Data = Restart Parameters: Select Restart File... OK Cancel Create Continuous Results File Reauto Parameter Description Restart Type You can Write restart data, Read restart data and Read and Write re start data. The default is None for no restart data. Create Continuous Results File If, when restarting a job, you wish the results f orm the previous run to be copied into the new .t16 file, then turn this ON. Otherwise MSC.Marc will not copy the resul ts to the new .t16 file. If you turn this ON, you must have a restarname.marc .t16 and/or restartname.marc.t19 file in your local directory or the MSC.Marc analysis will fail. Last Converged Increment Writes a RESTART LAST instead of a RESTART option. ON b y default. Reauto OFF by default. This places a REAUTO option in the MSC.Marc input file. A ny additional data needed for the REAUTO option are extracted from the first Subcas e information for the restart job. Only if the Restart Type is set to Read or Read and Write is the REAUTO written or the toggle visible to the user.

Parameter Restart from Increment Increments Between Writing Select Restart File... Chapter 3: Running an Analysis Restart Parameters Description Defines the increment to be read from the file specified in the Select Restart F ile form. It is only requested when Restart Type is set to Read or Read and Write. T he last increment on the restart file is used for the RESTART LAST option when Last Converged Increment is ON. Defines the number of increments between writing data to the restart file. It is only requested when Restart Type is set to Write or Read and Write. This brings up a file browser to select the restart file when the Restart Type i s set to Read or Read and Write.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Optimize 3.15 Optimize When preparing for an optimization analysis run, select Optimize as the Action o n the Analysis application form. This allows setup and submission of SOL 200 jobs. The functionality is similar and in many cases identical to running a normal ana lysis as described in Review of the Analysis Form, 260 and other sections in this chapter. Each button and its subordinate form that appears when the Action is set to Optimize is explained briefly below. Use the Optimize action for sizing optimization and combined sizing and topology optimization. For pure topology, topography and topometry optimization, use the Toptomize action explai ned in Toptomize, 462. Button/Subordinate Form: Description: Design Study Select... From this form, select the design study of interest. Design studies can contain multiple design objectives, responses, constraints, andvariables. An y particular job can only have one design objective. The specific objective and constraints to be used in an optimization job are selected in the Global Objective / Constraint Select form or they are associated to a solution specific subcase. Design Studiesare setup unde r the Design Study tool under the Tools pull down menu. A Default design study is present if none are previously created, however a design study without any design variable defined will not run through Nastran properly. Global Obj/Constr Select... Once a design study has been selected, you may select from thisform the specific global design objective and constraints to be active for this job. You can only have one objective in an optimization job. A global objective will override any other objective associated to a solution specific subcase that may be associated to this job, therefore it is not necessary to select a global objective orconstraints when de fined at the subcase level. Translation Parameters... These parameters are described in Translation Parameters, 265 and are not specific to optimization. Optimization Parameters... This form is used to define optimization parameter for the job. Parameters set in this form and its subordinate form define some of the values on the DOPTPRM entry. These are explained in the MSC Nastran Quick Reference Guide under this entry and the user ifreferred there for details. Results file formats can also be set in this form as described in Results Output Format, 348. Direct Text Input... Use of this form is described in Direct Text Input, 276.

Select Superelements... Use of this form is described in Select Superelements, 352. Subcases... Use of this form is described in Subcases, 354. There are two differences that are significant to this form, however. For optimization, subcases are created based on solution sequence, e.g. Statics 101, Normal Modes 103, etc. You must set the solutionsequence on th is form before creating the subcase, otherwise the default 101 will be used. Secondly, an additional subordinate form allows you to select existing constraint sets and an objective for theparticular subcase being created if necessary. Objectives and constraints are created using the Design Study tool under the Tools pull down menu. Note that not all subcase parameters are identicalbetween a norm al analysis and an optmization analysis. Also see the note on Contact below: page 461.

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis Optimize Button/Subordinate Form: Description: Subcase Select... Use of this form is described in Subcase Select, 451. One difference is that for optimization you must set the solution type to see thesubcases defin ed for a particular solution sequence. Otherwise by default only SOL 101 subcases are displayed. A selected subcasewill display the associated solution sequence number in front of its label. Analysis Manager... This gives access to the Analysis Manager for submitting, monitoring, aborting and generally managing a Nastran job. This button will not appear if the Analysis Manager is not installed or licensed. Note: Using Contact Bodies in Optmization Jobs: Linear contact is supported in optimiz ationjobs (SOL 200). If contact bodies are present in the model and included in the load cases associated to the the subcases created, then the contact bodies will be written to the deck. The most common scenario is using linear contact in optimization jobs to glue no ncongruent meshes together. When this feature is used, you must glue the bodies together, which requires that you set up the proper contact tables to define body pairs th at are properly glued. Usage of the contact table is described in Contact Table, 396.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Toptomize 3.16 Toptomize When preparing for a pure topology, topometry, or topography optimization analys is run, select Toptomize as the Action on the Analysis application form. This allows setup and submission of SOL 200 jobs. The functionality is similar and in many cases identical to running a normal ana lysis as described in Review of the Analysis Form, 260 and other sections in this chapter. Each button and its subordinate form that appears when the Action is set to Toptomize is explained briefly below . Use the Optimize action for sizing optimization and combined sizing and topology optimization as explained in Optimize, 460. Button/Subordinate Form: Description: Translation Parameters... These parameters are described in Translation Parameters, 265 and are not specific to optimization. Optimization Parameters... This form is used to define optimization parameter for the job. Parameters set in this form and its subordinate form define some of the values on the DOPTPRM entry. These are explained in the MSC Nastran Quick Reference Guide under this entry and the user ifreferred there for details. Note that no DOPTPRM entry is written if all values are default values. Results file formats can also be set in this form as described in Results Output Format, 348. Objectives & Constraints... This form allows you to define the objective and constraints for the topology, topometry or topography optimization run. Please see Objectives & Constraints, 463 below. Optimization Controls... This form allows you to define various controls and settings necessary for topology, topometry, or topography optimization jobs. Please see Optimization Control, 464 below. Design Domain... This form allows you to select the property sets that define the active design domain. Manufacturing constraints are defined via this form also. Please see Design Domain, 466 below. Direct Text Input... Use of this form is described in Direct Text Input, 276. Subcases... Use of this form is described in Subcases, 354. There are two differences that are significant to this form, however. For optimization, subcases are created based on solution sequence, e.g. Statics 101,

Normal Modes 103, etc. You must set the solution sequence before creating the subcase, otherwise the default 101 will be used. Secondly, an additional subordinate form allows you to select existing constraintsets and an objective for the particular subcase being created if necessary. Objectives and constraints are created using the Design Study tool under the Tools pull down menu. Note that not all subcase parameters are identical between a normal analysis and an optmizationanalysis. A lso see the note on Contact above: page 461. Subcase Select... Use of this form is described in Subcase Select, 451. One difference is that for optimization you must set the solution type to see the subcasesdefined for a particular solution sequence. Otherwise by default only SOL 101 subcases are displayed. A selected subcase will display the associated solution sequence number in front of its label. Analysis Manager... This gives access to the Analysis Manager for submitting, monitoring, aborting and generally managing a Nastran job. This button will not appear if the Analysis Manager is not installed or licensed.

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis Toptomize Objectives & Constraints This form is used to define the optimization type and select the objective and c onstraints of the optimization run. All widgets on this form are explained in the table below. Widget Parameter: Description: Type Select the optimization type for job to be set up, either Topology, Topometry, or Topography. Topology is the default. Objective Function(s): The objective of the optimization is set with the widgets in this frame. The default is to Minimize Compliance. Multiple static subcases are Minimize Compliance allowed. Optionally you can also maximize frequency (or eigenvalue). You Maximize Frequency specify the mode number in the provided databox. If the provided mode is not the first mode or you provide modes such as 1 5 and 6, you can Track Mode s turn on the Track Modes toggle. This is recommended as modes can change with each design cycle. The MODTRAK case and bulk data Mode Numbers entries are written in this case using the number of modes called out for extraction as set up in the modal subcase. Multiple modal subcases are allowed. A DESOBJ case control entry is written to the deck which calls out the appropriate DRESP1 and/or DRESP2 entries with the COMP, FREQ, or EIGN options. Multiple DRESP1 entries are written when the Constraint Target is Mass Fraction with multiple property sets selected and subsequently referenced or combined using an average function on the DRESP2 entry. Only one objective is allowed, however you can specify to Minimize Compliance and Maximize Frequency in which case you need to also specify a single Frequency Constraint Target. This target along with the compliance minimization objective is combined onto a DRESP2 entryusing a DEQATN entry to formulate the objective relationship. In this case a single modal subcase is required. Note that when multiple static subcases are selected, a DRSPAN entryis written t o each subcase as necessary to ensure the objective function properly spans all subcases.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Toptomize Widget Parameter: Description: Frequency ConstraintTargets Specify the mode number(s) and corresponding frequencies to beconstrained in the optimization run. At least one modal subcase is required. This is typically used when the Objective Function is set to Maximize Frequency. If the Objective Function is set to both Minimize Compliance and Maximize Frequency, then a singe mode frequency target is required and only one modal subcase is allowed. A DESSUB case control is written to the deck which calls out the appropriate DCONSTR and DRESP1 entries. This constraint because part of the objective if both Minimize Compliance and Maximize Frequency objective functions are specified and is incorporated via aDEQATN entr y referenced on a DRESP2 entry called out by a DESOBJ case control. Constraint Target Specify the constraint target. For Topology, only Mass Fractio n is allowed. For Topography, only Weigh or Volume is allowed. For Topometry, either of the three are allowed. You must specify the mass fraction, weight or volume target. By default, the mass fraction is 0.4 (40% of the original mass). However, volume and weight have no defaults. If the Objective Function is set to only Maximize Frequency, then a Constraint Target is not required (can be set to None) for Topometry and Topography only. A DESGLB case control is written, which calls out the appropriate DCONSTR and DRESP1 entries. For Weight and Volume, only a single DCONSTR/DRESP1 entry combination is written as the entire designdomain can only have one weight or volume constraint. For Mass Fraction, multiple combinations are written with the same DCONSTR ID. Optimization Control Use this form to set various controls used during the optimization run. They are briefly described here but the user is referred to the MSC Nastran Quick Reference Guide for further in formation. Leaving a field blank will trigger usage of the default in most cases. Some parameters mus t be provided or the analysis cannot proceed. Setting the Maximum Design Cycles is the most common us age of this form to limit the analysis to something reasonable. Each optimization type has different settings: Topology Parameters: Description: (all values written to the TOPVAR entry unless otherwise indicated) Initial Design (XINIT) Required. Initial value. It is recommended that this match the mass target constraint. This value defaults to the mass value target constraint set on the Objectives and Constraints form. Lower Bounds (XLB) Optional. Lower bound to prevent the singularity of the stiffness matrix. Leave blank to use Nastran default of 0.001. Real 0.0 < XLB <= 0.1

Maximum Design Cycles This is the maximum number of design cycles after which the (DESMAX) optimization run is forced to quit. This is written on the DOPTPRM entry. Default is 30. This option is not written if default is used. The entireDOPTPRM entry is not written if all options are defaulted. Penalty Factor (POWER) Optional. A penalty factor used in the relation between topology designvariables and element Young s modulus. Leave blank to use Nastran default of 3.0. Real 1.0 <= POWER <= 6.0

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis Toptomize Topology Parameters: Move Limit (DELXV) Tolerance of Convergence (CONV1) Minimum Member Size (TDMIN) Checkboard-Free Method (TCHECK) Results Output Format Topometry Parameters: Initial Design (XINIT) Lower Bounds (XLB) Upper Bounds (ULB) Maximum Design Cycles (DESMAX) Move Limit (DELXV) Tolerance of Convergence (CONV1) Property to Optimize (PNAME) Results Output Format Description: (all values written to the TOPVAR entry unless otherwise indicated) Optional. Fractional change allowed for the design variable duringapproximate op timization. Leave blank to use Nastran default of 0.2. Real > 0.0 Note that if this is left blank and DELX is specified on the DOPTPRM entry (Optimization Parameters form), Nastran will use that value in place of this one. Optional. Relative criterion to detect convergence. If the relative changein obj ective between two optimization cycles is less then CONV1, then optimization is terminated. Leave blank to use Nastran default of 0.0001. Real > 0.0. This is written to the DOPTPRM entry. Optional. Indicates the minimum member size. No default. No minimum is used if not specified. Recommendation is that it be set to three times a representative element dimension. Real > 0.0. This is written to the DOPTPRM entry and is for 2D and 3D elements only.

Optional. On by default. Turns on/off topology filtering (allows ofminimizes che cker boarding effects). This is written to the DOPTPRM. Results file formats can also be set in this form as described in Results Output Format, 348. Description: (all values written to the TOMVAR entry unless otherwise indicated) Required. Initial design value of property to optimize. Optimization job will not proceed without this value defined. Real > 0.0 Optional. Lower bound of the property to optimize. Leave blank to use Nastran default of XLB=0.5*XINIT. Real > 0.0. Optional. Upper bound of the property to optimize. Leave blank to use Nastran default of XUB=1.5*XINIT. Real > 0.0. This is the maximum number of design cycles after which the optimization run is forced to quit. This is written on the DOPTPRM entry. Default is 30. This option is not written if default is used. The entire DOPTPRM entry is not written if all options are defaulted. Optional. Fractional change allowed for the design variable duringapproximate op timization. Leave blank to use Nastran default of 0.2. Real > 0.0 Note that if this is left blank and DELX is specified on the DOPTPRM entry (Optimization Parameters form), Nastran will use that value in place of this one. Optional. Relative criterion to detect convergence. If the relative changein obj ective between two optimization cycles is less then CONV1, then optimization is terminated. Leave blank to use Nastran default of 0.0001. Real > 0.0. This is written to the DOPTPRM entry. Required. The property to optimize. No Nastran default. This isdependent on the model dimensionality is some cases. Default is set to Thickness for 2d problems but is not appropriate for 1D models where cross sectional Area would be the most common choice. Results file formats can also be set in this form as described in Results Output Format, 348.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Toptomize Topography Parameters: Lower Bounds (XLB) Upper Bounds (XUB) Maximum Design Cycles(DESMAX) Move Limit (DELXV) Tolerance of Convergence (CONV1) Minimum Bead Width (MW) Maximum Bead Height (MH) Draw Angle (ANG) Buffer Zone (BF) Exclude from Design (SKIP) Results Output Format Design Domain Description: (all values written to the BEADVAR entry unless otherwise indicated) Optional. Lower bound on the bead height. Leave blank to use Nastran default of 0.0. See the Upper Bounds (XUB) description. Optional. Upper bound on the bead height. Leave blank to use Nastran default of 1.0. To force grids to move only the positive bead vector direction (one side of the surface), use XLB = 0.0. To force grids to moveonly i n the negative bead vector direction (the other side of the surface), use XUB = 0.0. To allow grids to move in both positive and negative bead vector directions, use XLB < 0.0 and XUB > 0.0. This is the maximum number of design cycles after which theoptimization run is f orced to quit. This is written on the DOPTPRM entry. Default is 30. This option is not written if default is used. The entireDOPTPRM entry is not written if all options are defaulted. Optional. Fractional change allowed for the design variable during approximate optimization. Leave blank to use Nastran default of 0.2. Real > 0.0 Note that if this is left blank and DELX is specified on the

DOPTPRM entry (Optimization Parameters form), Nastran will use that value in place of this one. Optional. Relative criterion to detect convergence. If the relative change in objective between two optimization cycles is less then CONV1, then optimization is terminated. Leave blank to use Nastran default of 0.0001. Real > 0.0. This is written to the DOPTPRM entry. Required. Minimum bead width. There is no default. This controls the width of beads and the recommended value is 1.5 to 2.5 times the average element width. Real > 0.0 Required. Maximum bead height. There is no default. This controls the maximum height of beads when XUB = 1.0 (or left blank). Real > 0.0 Required. Draw angle in degrees. This controls the angel of the sides of the beads and the recommended values is between 60 and 75 degrees. Optional. Buffer zone. This parameter creates a buffer zone betweenelements in t he topography design region and elements outside thedesign region when turned on , which is the default. Optional. Boundary skip. This indicates which element nodes are excluded from the design region. Constraints indicates all constrained nodes and Loads indicates all nodes referenced by forces, moments and enforced displacements. Both are on by default. Results file formats can also be set in this form as described in Results Output Format, 348. The property sets that define the intended design domain are set on this form as well as manufacturing constraints. The form works by clicking on a valid property set (row) in the top spread sheet. This action adds the selected row to the bottom spread sheet, which are the active domains d uring the optimization run. To remove domains, click on the rows of interest in the bottom spread sheet and press the Remove Selected Rows button.

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis Toptomize From this form you can also define manufacturing constraints to impose on the to pology optimization. Each property set is written to a TOPVAR, TOMVAR, or BEADVAR entry in the input file depending on the optimization Type set in the Objectives & Constraints form. The values of va rious parameters on these entries can be different for each property set. It is recommended that you review the settings for each property set defined in the design domain before submitting the job. When a property set is added to the selected design domain properties spreadsheet, some of the values are set in the various columns from the settings on the Optimization Control form. To change these settings for an individual property set, simply click on the cell to be changed. A widget will appear above the spre adsheet allowing you to change the value. Use the Enter key to accept the new value into the spreadsheet . The same can be done when opening the Manufacturing Constraints form. The values set in the Manufactu ring Constraint forms will correspond only to the property sets that are selected from the Design Doma in spreadsheet. If you do not select any rows in the Design Domain spreadsheet, then any change made on the Manufacturing Constraints form will be applied to all property sets in this spreadsheet. For t his reason, care should be taken to verify all changes are what is intended. The tables below indicate the parameters that can be set for each property set o f the design domain. Any parameter set on this form overrides any global setting of that parameter that m ay be defined under the Objective & Constraints form or the Optimization Control form. For more informat ion on each parameter, the user is directed to the MSC Nastran Quick Reference Guide. Topology Parameters: Description: (all values written to the TOPVAR entry unless otherwise indicated) Frac Mass Target (FRMASS) The fraction mass target for the specified property set. The initial value is picked up from the setting on the Objectives & Constraints form. If one of these cells is set, all rows must be set. You can remove the values from all rows and the value from the Objectives & Constraints form will be used. Otherwise these values override the value from the Objectives and Constraints form. Values in these cells are also written the corresponding DCONSTR/DRESP1 entries with FRMASS option as well as the TOPVAR entry.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Toptomize Topology Parameters: Lower Bounds (XLB) Manufacturing Constraints: Ref. Coordinate System Minimum Member Size Symmetric Constraints Extrusion Constraints Casting Constraints Topometry Parameters: Property to Optimize (PNAME) Initial Design (XINIT) Lower Bounds (XLB) Upper Bounds (ULB) Manufacturing Constraints: Description: (all values written to the TOPVAR entry unless otherwise indicated) Lower Bounds. The original value is picked up from the setting onthe Optimizatio n Control form. Typically these cells are blank by default. If one of these cells is set, all rows must be set. You can remove the values from all rows and the value from the Optimization Control form will be used. Otherwise these values override the value from the Optimization Control form. These are accessed from the Manufacturing Constraints form. Any direction, plane, or axis specified for the constraints will be inthe Refere nce Coordinate Frame specified. By default all constraints are off. You may turn any on that are applicable. Some combinations are not possible in Nastran and the interface should indicate if an incompatible combination is selected. Note that all of these values can differ for each selected design domain from the Design Domain form (bottom spreadsheet). By selecting a row from the spreadsheet, you can see the settings change on the Manufacturing Constraints form if there are differences. If multiple rows are selected, only the settings for thetop row are displayed on the Manufacturing Constraints from. If a change is made to a value with multiple rows selected, the new value is associated to all the selected property sets. If no property

sets are selected, it is the same as if all are selected. So care should be taken when changing values on this form to ensure only the property sets of interest are being affected. Description: (all values written to the TOMVAR entry unless otherwise indicated) The property to optimize. The original value is picked up from the setting on the Optimization Control form. If one of these cells is set, all rows must be set. You can clear the values from all rows and the value from the Optimization Control form will be used. Otherwisethese values ove rride the value from the Optimization Control form. Initial Value on the property value to optimize. Operates similar to Property to Optimize above. Lower Bounds on the property value to optimize. Operates similar to Initial Value above Upper Bound on the property value to optimize. Operates similar toLower Bound ab ove. Not supported for Topometry.

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis Toptomize Topography Parameters: Description: (all values written to the BEADVAR entry unless otherwise indicated) Minimum Bead Width (MW) Minimum bead width. The original value is picked up from the setting on the Optimization Control form. If one of these cells is set, all rows must be set. You can clear the values from all rows and the value from the Optimization Control form will be used. Otherwise these values override the value from the Optimization Control form. Maximum Bead Height (MH) Maximum bead height. Operates similar to Minimum Bead Width. Draw Angle (ANG) Draw angle in degrees. Operates similar to the above parameters. Lower Bounds (XLB) Lower bound on the bead height. Operates similar to the above parameters. Upper Bounds (XUB) Upper bound on the bead height. Operates similar to the above parameters. Buffer Zone (BF) Buffer zone. Operates similar to the above parameters. Exclude from Design (SKIP) Boundary skip. Operates similar to the above parameters. Manufacturing Constraints: These are accessed from the Manufacturing Constraints form. Any vector specified for the draws direction of the beads will be in Ref. Coordinate Frame the Reference Coordinate Frame specified. Extrusion Direction By default the Extrusion Direction is Normal to the surface. If Vectoris specifi ed, a user defined vector can be specified in any Nodes to Exclude/Include accep table manner with the select mechanism. Optionally the user may select a group of nodes to include or exclude from the design domain. Note that all of these values can differ for each selected design domain from the Design Domain form (bottom spreadsheet). By

selecting a row from the spreadsheet, you can see the settings change on the Manufacturing Constraints form if there aredifferences. If multipl e rows are selected, only the settings for the top row are displayed on the Manufacturing Constraints from. If achange is made to a value with multiple rows selected, the new value is associated to all the selected property sets. If no property sets are selected, it is the same as if all are selected. So care should be taken when changing values on this form to ensure only the property sets of interest are being affected. Postprocessing Postprocessing topology optimization results requires that you read element dens ity values (the new mesh from optimization) using the Nastran results .xdb file (e.g. jobname.xdb) o r .des file (e.g. jobname.des) through the Tools Design Study Postprocessing menu and use that application to view the results rather than through the Patran Results application. See Tools>D esign Studies>PostProcess (p. 546) in the Patran Reference Manual.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Interactive Analysis 3.17 Interactive Analysis The Patran Preference for MD Nastran has a new capability that enables the user to perform visual interactive modal frequency response analysis. The process begins by creating a good modal analysis solution with MD Nastran. The interactive modal frequency response solution is t hen directed from a special set of Patran menus (wizard). The wizard assists the user in applying th e desired loads, specifying damping, selecting result entities, and defining solution criteria for an automa ted fast restart in Nastran effected from the modal database selected. Patran running as the client spawns a fast restart job to Nastran functioning as a server. Solution results are automatically returned to the clie nt for visualization. This procedure suggests that there might be several benefits to using this product. T he wizard provides a guide for problem definition, minimizing confusion associated with general-purpose men u structures. The fast restart, as the name suggests, is fast, and is executed automatically, as are th e client-server connections and the data transmission. The reduced solution space of the fast restart minimi zes the amount of result data that is calculated, stored, transmitted, and displayed. The net result is t he ability to quickly apply discrete loads to the structure and immediately visualize the response at select grids or elements of the model. The real time solution paradigm of the interactive scheme does not provid e fringe or contour plots of the global structural response. Assumptions Interactive modal frequency response requires that a normal modes analysis of th e structure has been completed using Nastran, and that a .DBALL/MASTER database exists containing the model data and the normal modes solution. Currently, the interactive paradigm presumes the Nast ran executable, the modal database, and the Patran executable are all located in the same directory. To maintain optimal performance, licensing and security should be local also. Given these initial co nditions, the following scenarios exist for performing interactive frequency response. Scenario 1 If the initial normal modes analysis was modeled in Patran, then that Patran dat abase should be selected under File/Open when starting Patran. This provides the user with the model from which to exercise the interactive frequency response wizard, provided the correct flag was set to prec ondition the Nastran normal modes database for this purpose. This is done in Patran by going to Analy sis/Solution

Type/Interactive Modal Analysis, and activating the check box. Scenario 2 The normal modes model may have been built and run without using Patran. If the user intends to use the MSC integrated product to proceed with interactive frequency response, then spec ial care must be taken when preparing the NASTRAN input file for the normal modes analysis. Specificall y, the Nastran normal modes input file must contain the following statement just before the CEND delim iter: include `SSSALTERDIR:run0.V2001` Note that both ticks are right handed and that SSSALTERDIR must be capitalized. Na stran then creates an environment variable called SSSALTERDIR which points to where the sssalters a re located when performing a standard installation.

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis Interactive Analysis If the user does not have a standard Nastran installation, then he will be requi red to specify the full directory path. For example, if the file run0.V2001 is located in the directory /scr2/mike/tmp, then he must include the following statement just prior to the CEND delimiter: include `/scr2/mike/tmp/run0.V2001` This include statement provides the DMAP alter required to precondition the larg e modal database. This conditioning enables efficient data manipulation during the interactive frequenc y response solution phase. Under this scenario, the model data will need to be imported by starting Patran and requesting Read Input File from the Analysis Menu. This procedure is described in greater detail in Chapter 5 of this user s guide, and constitutes reading a NASTRAN Input File for the model data. Onc e the model data is placed in the Patran database, interactive frequency response can proceed. The Process Scenario 1 or 2 above can be followed to provide a Patran database with a data m odel suitable for performing interactive frequency response. The Analysis menu shown below control s the interactive analysis process. Submenus for Select NASTRAN .DBALL, Create Loading, Output Req uests, Create a Field, and Define Frequencies are discussed. Solution Type--Is currently fixed to Frequency Response (Modal Frequency Respons e) as the only solution available in interactive analysis format. Subsequent versions of Nastra n and Patran may expand this capability to other solution types. Loading Menu--The loading menu provides a spreadsheet to guide the user through load and boundary condition application. Miscellaneous The Interactive Modal Frequency response solution process is staged, in the sens e that a normal mode solution is performed first to create what we refer to as the large database (so named for obvious reasons), and then a fast restart procedure is used to develop the frequency response. The normal modes solution is where the user specifies any weight to mass conversion quantities (see PARAM, WTMASS) as well as a specification of the mass matrix formulation desired (see PARAM, COUPMASS). The mass units and desired mass matrix formulation then, are automatically accounted for in the

subsequent determination of the frequency response quantities calculated.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Interactive Analysis Analysis Form Every interactive solution will have a user assigned job name associated with it. This provides a record of applied loads, enforcedmotion boun dary conditions, solution frequencies requested, structural damping definition, and output request entities. In a Nastran sense, each job represents a loading condition whichreflects application o f a number of loads and load types distributed on the structure. Maintaining a record of the interactive run provides a starting point for subsequent analyses whether they are done in the current session, or a subsequent session. Specifically, if a user wanted to change only a frequency dependent load function or damping function, the interactive job storage capacity makes this a simple procedure. Each Interactive Analysis will have its solution specifications storedwith a job name (Interactive Name). This allows recovery of all specifications required for performing that particular analysis : loading, damping, solution frequencies, and output entities. If an existing Interactive Job is selected, those input requirements automatically populate the interactive menus. If we want to rerun that analysis, all that is required is to hit APPLY on the Analysis Menu. When the calculations are finished in Nastran, the interactive systemautomatical ly positions the user in the Interactive Results section where XY plot requests can be made. Plot requests are not saved in the jobs data. Load types include: Acoustic (Pressure), Force, Displacement, Velocity, or Acceleration.

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis Interactive Analysis Select Modal Results .DBALL The following form appears when you select Select Nastran .DBALL from the Analys is form. This form provides the pointer to the Nastran database which contains the preconditioned n ormal modes solution. Some additional data is retrieved from this database for use in Patran. Specific ally, the Nastran modal constraint data is provided to Patran to guarantee that the allowable degrees of freedom available for enforced motion are exposed in the Loading Menu. (Application of enforced motion in modal frequency response requires that the effected degrees of freedom were constrained in the n ormal modes analysis.)

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Interactive Analysis Loading Form This form allows you to create loading sets. The following is the default form. Load types include: Acoustic (Pressure), Force, Displacement, Velocity, or Acceleration. The following shows the Loading Form filled out with a few different load condit ions. If Load Type = Acoustic, Load Entity can only reference elements and the default direction for the load application is relative to the element normal regardless of the Coord Frame sele ction. The Basic coordinate system is the default reference (COORD 0), unless, the element was de fined in a local coordinate system, in which case that Coord ID will appear in the Coord Frame co lumn. If the user changes the Direction from NORMAL to a specific direction vector, then the appli ed pressure direction is relative to the Coord Frame referenced. If Load Type = Force, Load Entity can only reference nodes (grid points), and a direction vector is input to define application direction relative to the coordinate frame reference. If n o coordinate reference frame is specified, the default becomes the Basic Coordinate system (Coord 0). If Load Type = Displacement, Velocity, or Acceleration, Load Entity can only be selected from nodes that will appear in the Load Entities list box. These nodes represent the set of all possible nodes to which enforced motion can be applied, and is limited to nodes that were constrained du ring the normal modes analysis. The Basic coordinate system is the default reference (COORD 0), unless , the node was defined in a local coordinate frame, in which case that Coord ID will appear in the Coor d Frame column. When Load Type = Displacement, Velocity, or Acceleration, and a specific node ha s been selected in Load Entities, the Direction specification will indicate which directions are av ailable X, Y, and / or Z in

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis Interactive Analysis the reference coordinate frame. When an enforced motion is defined for a selecte d degree of freedom, it is eliminated from the available enforced motion set. Only one enforced motion b oundary condition per degree of freedom can be applied to a given node. (Enforced motion cannot be app lied to rotational degrees of freedom for interactive analysis).

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Interactive Analysis Create a Field Form This form appears when you select the Create New Field/Table... button from the Loading Form.

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis Interactive Analysis Output Selection Form This form will allow the user to select nodes and elements for output, and allow him to select the frequencies which interest him in the analysis. The frequency selection form is the same form that is used in standard analysis for sol 111 subcase parameters. Define Frequencies prompts a spreadsheet for defining the desired solution frequencies for which output will be available. Output Selection also provides for selecting Nodes / Grids and Elements for which output response is desired. Selection can bemade to create output response for complex quantities in either Real / Imaginary or Magnitude / Phaseformats. For Interactive Analysis, the output quantities are preset. Close theOutput Selection menu. Define Frequencies Form This form allows the user to define the frequencies of interest in the most comp lete way. This form allows the users access to FREQ, FREQ1, FREQ2, FREQ3, FREQ4, FREQ5.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Interactive Analysis

Read Results 4 Accessing Results 492 Supported OUTPUT2 Result and Model Quantities 502 Supported T16/T19 Results Quantities 511 Supported MSC.Access Result Quantities 516 Supported 3dplot Results Quantities 543

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Accessing Results 4.1 Accessing Results This form appears when the Analysis toggle is selected on the main menu and the Action is set to Access Results. The Object you select defines the type of results file to be read or ac cessed from the analysis. The following file types are available: XDB, Output2, MASTER, T16/T19 and 3dplot (for SOL 700). The Method choices are: Result Entities, Model Data, or Both. When the Object selected is Result Entities, the model data must already exist in the database. No results can beread into Patran if th e associated node or element does not already exist. Model Data only reads the model data that exists in the results file. Both will first read the model data, then the result entities. If Model Data or Both are selected, it is up to the user to ensure that there will not be any ID conflicts with existing model entities. Defines the job name to be used for this job. Thesame job name used for the Anal ysis menu should beused for the Read Results menu. This will allow Patran to load the results directly into the load cases that were used for the analysis. Defines the results file to be read. The form that is called up lists all files recognized as being analysis code results files. By default this is all files with an op2 extension on them. This can be changed with the filter. If you are attaching a T16/T19 file that has the same jobname as your current database, you do not have to select the file. Patran automatically attaches the T16/T19 file that matches the database jobname. Defines any parameters used to control the results or model translation from the analysis code results file.

Chapter 4: Read Results Accessing Results Results File Formats Output2 Formats The Patran MD Nastran interface supports several different OUTPUT2 file formats. The interface, running on any platform can read a binary format OUTPUT2 file produced by MSC.Na stran running on any of these same platforms. For example, a binary OUTPUT2 file produced by MD N astran running on an IBM RS/6000 can be read by Patran running on DEC Alpha. Patran may be able to read binary format OUTPUT2 files from other platforms if they contain 32 bit, IEEE format entities (either Big or Little Indian). For platforms that do not produce OUTPUT2 files in these formats, Patran MD Nast ran can read OUTPUT2 files created with the FORM=FORMATTED option in MD Nastran. This option can be selected from the Analysis/Translation Parameters form in Patran and directs MD Nastran to produce an ASCII format OUTPUT2 file that can be moved between any platforms. The Patran MD Nastran interface detects this format when the OUTPUT2 file is opened, automatically con verts it to the binary format, and then reads the model and/or results into the Patran database. An OUTPUT2 file is created by MD Nastran by placing a PARAM,POST,-1 in the bulk data portion of the input file. The formatted or unformatted OUTPUT2 file is specified in the FM S section using an ASSIGN OUTPUT2 = filename, UNIT=#, FORM=FORMATTED (or UNFORMATTED). See Translation Parameters, 265. XDB Formats The same basic issues exist for MSC.Access databases as for OUTPUT2 files. For e xample, the MSC.Access database (xdb file) may be exchanged between computer Systems that ha ve binary compatibility. That is, an XDB file generated on a SUN Machine may be used on an IBM/AIX, HPUX or SGI computers. However, in order to exchange the XDB file on binary incompatible machines, one needs to use the TRANS and RECEIVE utilities delivered with every installation of MD Nastran. TRANS converts an XDB file generated by MD Nastran to an equivalent character, i.e . ASCII, file which can be transported to another computer across the network via ftp or rcp. RECEIVE converts the character file back into the XDB format for postprocessing.

For more information on TRANS and RECEIVE utilities, please consult the tion and Operations Guide for V70 of MSC.Nastran.

Configura

A MSC.Access XDB database is created by MD Nastran by placing a PARAM,POST,0 in the bulk data portion of the input file. See Translation Parameters, 265. In this release of the product, it is assumed that the Geometry, loads and resul ts output all reside in the same physical XDB file. That is, "split" XDB databases are not supported.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Accessing Results MASTER Formats Using the MASTER format, you can attach to the MD Nastran database directly savi ng the extra step of creating alternate form of MD Nastran model and results data, i.e. OP2 and/or XD B. Because the model and results data in the MD Nastran database tends be sequential in nature, an in dex provides fast direct access to the data. The indexing is accomplished by two indexing modules in MD N astran named: ifpindx and ofpindx. The DRA/DBALL capability uses the MD Nastran toolkit, i.e. MNT, capability. The MNT interfaces with the MD Nastran executable in a client-server. This means that in order to u se the DRA/DBALL feature one needs to have access to MD Nastran installation. If you do not have access to a MD Nastran installation you will need to use the MD Nastran mini server that is delivered w ith Patran to import DRA/DBALL files. To point to a MD Nastran installation, the location of the MD Nastran executable is set in the following files: p3_trans.ini(NT), .site_setup(UNIX,LINUX). On Windows NT, the ACommand20xx must be set to the MD Nastran executable. On UNIX, on the other hand, MSP_NASTRAN_CMD20xx needs to be set to the MD Nastran executable. To point to a MD Nastran mini server, the location of the MD Nastran mini server executable must be set on Windows with the AcommandNasServer environment variable. On UNIX, you must set the environment variable MSCP_NASTRAN_SERVER . By default the MD Nastran mini server i s located in $P3_Home/mscnastran_files/servermode/nastran.exe. Note that you are required to point to a V2004 or later version of MD Nastran. I f you specify an MSC.Nastran executable earlier than V2004 you will be presented with a modal for m preventing you from using this capability. However, you may bypass this restriction by setting the DRA_NAST_NOVEDRCHK environment variable. The DRA/MASTER functionality only supports static analysis (SOL101). This inclu des the support of Superelements, grid point forces and other result types available in the OP2 or XDB translators. This capability supports importing the model data into Patran database. Moreover , since this capability reuses the import/bdf functionality all of the model information available in th e database shall be

imported including Nodes, Elements, Coordinate systems, material properties, phy sical properties, loads and boundary conditions, load cases, parameters and etc... The indexing modules are tied to a system cell. That is, an MD Nastran database is indexed and saved by MD Nastran by setting system cell 316 to a value 7 . This system cell tells MD Nas tran executable to create index files for IFP and OFP datablocks and move the indexed datablocks to the MASTER file. This means that one can even delete the DBALL file after the MD Nastran run completes. For example, if you would like to get an Indexed MASTER data file for the job some_j ob.bdf, the following must be executed: < ...>/nastran some_job.bdf sys316=7 scr=no sdir=/tmp This example generates a some_job.MASTER and some_job.DBALL database files. You c an delete the *.DBALL file because it does not contain any results or model data of importance . However, if you would like to perform a restart from the run then the DBALL file must be kept fo r future use but the Master file may be moved to other directories at will.

Chapter 4: Read Results Accessing Results The MD Nastran toolkit environment is derived from the MD Nastran installation v ia the use of the rc files which is documented in the MSC.Nastran (p. 1) in the MSC.Nastran 2004 Inst allation and Operations Guide. For example, you can set the amount of memory used by the MD N astran to 20 megawords by setting the memory=20MW in one of the rc files, i.e. nastran.rcf file in the curr ent working directory on the NT platform. This setting can be double checked using the MD Na stran whence command as follows: < ...>/nastran some_job.bdf whence=mem The same basic issues exist for attaching to an Indexed MD Nastran database as a ttaching an XDB database. That is, the MD Nastran database (MASTER file) may be exchanged among computer Systems that have binary compatibility. That is, a MASTER file generated on a SU N Machine can not be used on an IBM/AIX, HPUX or SGI computers. However, at this time it is not possible to exchange the MASTER file on binary i ncompatible machines. T16/T19 Formats The T16 file is the MSC.Marc binary results file and the T19 file is the MSC.Mar c ASCII results (POST) file that are created by a SOL 600 analysis, the contents of which can be import ed or attached for postprocessing. When domain decomposition is used, multiple files are produced w here # is the domain number. This file format is recommended for post-processing SOL 600 runs since i t has more information, such as contact info and additional nonlinear analysis information, then the xdbor OP2 formats. These results file types are used for accessing SOL 600 results. 3dplot Formats The 3dplot ptf file is the LS-Dyna binary results file that are created by a SOL 700 analysis, the contents of which can be attached for postprocessing. This option is available only for Explicit Nonlinear.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Accessing Results Translation Parameters OUTPUT2 This subordinate form appears when the Translation Parameters button is selected and Read Output2 is the selected Object. When reading results there are three Method options that may be selected: Result Entities, Model Data or Both. This form affects import of all these objects as n oted below Tolerances Division Defines the tolerances used during translation. The division tolerance is used to prevent division by zero errors. The numerical tolerance is used Numerical when comparing real values for equality. When the Object is set to Model Data, only these tolerances are available.

Chapter 4: Read Results Accessing Results MSC.Nastran Version Specifies the version of MSC.Nastran that created the OUTPUT2 file to be read. Solid Element orientation differs between versions less than 67 and version 67 and above. Elementally oriented Solid element results may be translated incorrectly if the wrong version is specified. Additional Results to be Imported Rotational Nodal Results Indicates which results categories are to be filtered o ut during translation. Rotational Nodal Results, Stress and Strain Invariants, and Stress and Strain Stress/Strain Invariants Principal Direction Results can be skipped during translation. Items Principal Directions selected will be translated. Items not selected will be skipped. By default, Rotational Nodal Results, Stress and Strain Invariants, and Stress and Strain Tensor Principal Directions are ignored during translation. P-element P-order Field Creates a field that describes the polynomial orders in all p-elements in the model at the end of an adaptive cycle. Element Results Positions If an element has results at both the centroid and at the nodes, this filter wil l indicate which results are to be included in the translation. Defining Translation Parameters for DDAM (SOL 187) Patran calculates combined stresses (like bar stresses, principal stresses and v on Mises stresses by default, rather than reading these values from the OP2 files. If Patran does thi s, the combined stresses will be incorrectly calculated from summed results. It is necessary to calculate the combined stresses on a mode-by-mode basis, and NRL sum the combined results. To obtain correct results, it is necessary to explicitly tell Patran to read the combined values. Select the Translation Parameters button on the Analysis form when reading results in. On t he form, you can select the box labeled Stress/Strain Invariants. This produces a number of additional r esults for each result case. These additional results are the correct von Mises and Principal stresses. The o nes that Patran displays when you choose Stress Tensor are the incorrect values.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Accessing Results XDB This subordinate form appears when the Translation Parameters button is selected and Result Entities is the selected Object. Tolerances Division Defines the tolerances used during translation. The division tolerance is used to prevent division by zero errors. The numerical tolerance is used when Numerical comparing real values for equality. When the Object is set to Model Data, only these tolerances are available. MSC.Nastran Version Specifies the version of MSC.Nastran that created the OUTPUT2 file to be read. Solid Element orientation differs between versions less than 67 and version 67 and above. Elementally oriented Solid element results may be translated incorrectly if the wrong version is specified.

Chapter 4: Read Results Accessing Results Additional Results to be Imported Rotational Nodal Results Indicates which results categories are to be filtered o ut during translation. Rotational Nodal Results, Stress and Strain Invariants, and Stress and Strain Stress/Strain Invariants Principal Direction Results can be skipped during translation. Items selected Principal Directions will be translated. Items not selected will be skipped. By default, Rotational Nodal Results, Stress and Strain Invariants, and Stress and Strain Tensor Principal Directions are ignored during translation. Element Results Positions If an element has results at both the centroid and at the nodes, this filter wil l indicate which results are to be included in the translation. MASTER This subordinate form appears when the Translation Parameters... button is selec ted and MASTER is the selected Object.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Accessing Results Tolerances Division Defines the tolerances used during translation. The division tolerance is used to prevent division by zero errors. The numerical tolerance is Numerical used when comparing real values for equality. When the Object is set to Model Data, only these tolerances are available. MSC.Nastran Version Specifies the version of MSC.Nastran that created the OUTPUT2 file to be read. Solid Element orientation differs between versions less than 67 and version 67 and above. Elementally oriented Solid element results may be translated incorrectly if the wrong version is specified. Additional Results to be Imported Rotational Nodal Results Indicates which results categories are to be filtered o ut during translation. Rotational Nodal Results, Stress and Strain Invariants, Stress/Strain Invariants and Stress and Strain Principal Direction Results can be skipped Principal Directions during translation. Items selected will be translated. Items not selected will be skipped. By default, Rotational Nodal Results, Stress and Strain Invariants, and Stress and Strain Tensor Principal Directions are ignored during translation. P-element P-order Field Creates a field that describes the polynomial orders in all p-elements in the model at the end of an adaptive cycle. Element Results Positions If an element has results at both the centroid and at the nodes, this filter will indicate which results are to be included in the translation.

Chapter 4: Read Results Accessing Results T16/T19 This subordinate form appears when the Translation Parameters... button is selec ted and T16/T19 is the selected Object. Model Import Options Create Groups by PIDs Creates groups for each element type encountered in the mo del. Geometry Import Imports any NURB based rigid geometry found in the POST file int o the database. Select Mesh Pertains to importing results and model data from adaptive meshing a nalyses. In order for this toggle to be active, a results file must have been selected first in wh ich case it is scanned to show the available meshes and to which load increments they are associated. You can select which meshes/increments are imported in the provided list box. Adaptive meshing is not supported in MSC.Nastran 2004. Available Increments Defines the increments available for import from the result s file.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Supported OUTPUT2 Result and Model Quantities 4.2 Supported OUTPUT2 Result and Model Quantities The following table indicates all the possible results quantities that can be lo aded into the Patran database during results translation from MD Nastran. The Primary and Secondary Labels are items selected from the postprocessing menus. The Type indicates whether the results are Scalar, Vec tor, or Tensor, and determines which postprocessing techniques are available to view the results qua ntity. Data Block indicates which MD Nastran OUTPUT2 data block the data comes from. The Descripti on gives a brief discussion about the results quantity, such as if it is only for certain element types, and what Output Request selection will generate this data block. For design optimization, all of the listed results can be loaded as a function of design cycle. Results Primary Label Secondary Label Type DataBlocks Description Acoustic Intensity Scalar OAIG1 Acoustic intensity on surface in contact with fluid. Acoustic Radiated Power Scalar OARPWR1 Acoustic power radiated from surface in contact with fluid. Acoustic Field Point Mesh Vector OUGFP1 Acoustic results for Field Point Mesh. Acoustic Velocity @ FPM Grids Vector OVGFP1 Acoustic velocities at the node points of Field Point Mesh. Bar Forces Rotational Vector OEF1 Bar moments Translational Vector OEF1 Bar forces Warping Torque Scalar OEF1 Warping torque Bar Strains Axial Safety Margin Scalar OSTR1 Axial safety margin Compression Safety Margin Scalar OSTR1 Safety margin in compression Maximum Axial Scalar OSTR1 Maximum axial strain Minimum Axial Scalar OSTR1 Minimum axial strain Tension Safety Margin Scalar OSTR1 Safety margin in tension Torsional Safety Margin Scalar OSTR1 Safety margin in torsion Bar Stresses Axial Safety Margin Scalar OES1 Axial safety margin Compression Safety Margin Scalar OES1 Safety margin in compression Maximum Axial Scalar OES1 Maximum axial stress Minimum Axial Scalar OES1 Minimum axial stress Tension Safety Margin Scalar OES1 Safety margin in tension Torsional Safety Margin Scalar OES1 Safety margin in torsion

Chapter 4: Read Results Supported OUTPUT2 Result and Model Quantities Primary Label Secondary Label Type DataBlocks Description Grid Point Stresses Gap Results Nonlinear Strains Nonlinear Stresses Principal Strain Direction Stress Tensor Tensor OGS1 Stress tensor Zero Shear Angle Scalar OGS1 Zero shear angle Major Principal Scalar OGS1 Major principal Minor Principal Scalar OGS1 Minor principal Maximum Shear Scalar OGS1 Maximum shear von Mises Displacement Scalar Vector OGS1 OEF1 or OES1 von mises Gap element displacement Force Vector OEF1 or OES1 Gap element force Slip Creep Strain Vector Scalar OEF1 or OES1 OESNL1 Gap element slip Creep strain Plastic Strain Scalar OESNL1 Plastic strain Strain Tensor Equivalent Stress Tensor Scalar OESNL1 OESNL1 Strain tensor Equivalent stress Stress Tensor 1st Principal x cosine Tensor Scalar OESNL1 OSTR1 Stress tensor 1st Principal x cosine 1st Principal y cosine Scalar OSTR1 1st Principal y cosine 1st Principal z cosine Scalar OSTR1 1st Principal z cosine 2nd Principal x cosine Scalar OSTR1 2nd Principal x cosine 2nd Principal y cosine Scalar OSTR1 2nd Principal y cosine 2nd Principal z cosine Scalar OSTR1 2nd Principal z cosine 3rd Principal x cosine Scalar OSTR1 3rd Principal x cosine

3rd Principal y cosine Scalar OSTR1 3rd Principal y cosine 3rd Principal z cosine Scalar OSTR1 3rd Principal z cosine Zero Shear Angle Scalar OSTR1 Zero shear angle

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Supported OUTPUT2 Result and Model Quantities Primary Label Secondary Label Type DataBlocks Description Principal Stress Direction 1st Principal x cosine Scalar OES1 1st Principal x cosine 1st Principal y cosine Scalar OES1 1st Principal y cosine 1st Principal z cosine Scalar OES1 1st Principal z cosine 2nd Principal x cosine Scalar OES1 2nd Principal x cosine 2nd Principal y cosine Scalar OES1 2nd Principal y cosine 2nd Principal z cosine Scalar OES1 2nd Principal z cosine 3rd Principal x cosine Scalar OES1 3rd Principal x cosine 3rd Principal y cosine Scalar OES1 3rd Principal y cosine 3rd Principal z cosine Scalar OES1 3rd Principal z cosine Zero Shear Angle Scalar OES1 Zero shear angle Shear Panel Forces Shear Panel Strains Shear Panel Stresses Shell Forces Force12 Scalar OEF1 Shear force from nodes 1 to 2 Force14 Scalar OEF1 Shear force from nodes 1 to 4 Force21 Scalar OEF1 Shear force from nodes 2 to 1 Force23 Scalar OEF1 Shear force from nodes 2 to 3 Force32 Scalar OEF1 Shear force from nodes 3 to 2 Force34 Scalar OEF1 Shear force from nodes 3 to 4 Force41 Scalar OEF1 Shear force from nodes 4 to 1 Force43 Scalar OEF1 Shear force from nodes 4 to 3 Kick Scalar OEF1 Kick forces Rotational Vector OEF1 Moments at nodes Shear Scalar OEF1 Shear force in panel Translational Average Shear Vector Scalar OEF1 OSTR1 Forces at nodes Average shear strain in panel Maximum Shear Scalar OSTR1 Maximum shear strain in panel Safety Margin Average Shear Scalar Scalar OSTR1 OES1 Shear safety margin of panel Average shear stress in panel Maximum Shear Scalar OES1 Maximum shear stress in panel Safety Margin Force Resultant Scalar Tensor OES1 OEF1

Shear safety margin of panel Force resultants and moment resultants Moment Resultant Tensor OEF1 Moment stress resultants

Chapter 4: Read Results Supported OUTPUT2 Result and Model Quantities Primary Label Secondary Label Type DataBlocks Description Strain Curvatures Strain Energy Strain Tensor Tensor OSTR1 Strain curvatures of a plate 1st Principal Scalar OSTR1 Curvature of strain 1st principal 2nd Principal Scalar OSTR1 Curvature of strain 2nd principal Maximum Shear Scalar OSTR1 Curvature of maximum shear strain von Mises Scalar OSTR1 Curvature of von Mises strain Zero Shear Angle Energy Scalar Scalar OSTR1 ONRGY1 Curvature of zero shear angle Element s total strain energy Energy Density Scalar ONRGY1 Element s strain energy density Percent of Total Scalar ONRGY1 Element s percentage of total strain density Strain Invariants Strain Tensor Stress Invariants Stress Tensor Accelerations Applied Loads 1st Principal Scalar OSTR1 Strain 1st principal 2nd Principal Scalar OSTR1 Strain 2nd principal 3rd Principal Scalar OSTR1 Strain 3rd principal Maximum Shear Scalar OSTR1 Maximum shear strain Mean Pressure Scalar OSTR1 Mean strain pressure Octahedral Shear Scalar OSTR1 Octahedral shear strain von Mises NONE 1st Principal Scalar Tensor Scalar OSTR1 OSTR1 OES1 von Mises equivalent strain Strain tensor Stress 1st Principal 2nd Principal Scalar OES1 Stress 2nd Principal 3rd Principal Scalar OES1 Strain 3rd Principal Maximum Shear Scalar OES1 Maximum shear stress Mean Pressure Scalar OES1 Mean stress principal Octahedral Shear Scalar OES1 Octahedral shear stress von Mises NONE Rotational Scalar Tensor

Vector OES1 OES1 OUGV1 von Mises equivalent stress Stress tensor Nodal angular accelerations Translational Rotational Vector Vector OUGV1 OPG1 Nodal translational accelerations Nodal equivalent applied moments Translational Vector OPG1 Nodal equivalent applied forces

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Supported OUTPUT2 Result and Model Quantities Primary Label Secondary Label Type DataBlocks Description Constraint Forces Rotational Vector OQG1 Nodal moments of single-point constraints Displacements Translational Rotational Vector Vector OQG1 OUGV1 Nodal forces of single-point constraint Nodal rotational displacements Eigenvectors Translational Rotational Vector Vector OUGV1 OPHIG Nodal translational displacements Nodal rotational eigenvectors Nonlinear Applied Loads Translational Rotational Vector Vector OPHIG OPNL1 Nodal translational eigenvectors Nodal nonlinear applied moments

Chapter 4: Read Results Supported OUTPUT2 Result and Model Quantities Primary Label Secondary Label Type DataBlocks Description Velocities Translational Rotational Vector Vector OPNL1 OUGV1 Nodal nonlinear applied forces Nodal angular velocity Error Grid Point Forces Translational Estimate Elements Vector Scalar Vector OUGV1 ERROR OGPFB1* Nodal translational velocity Elemental error in adaptive analysis Internal nodal force contribution by element Applied Loads Vector OGPFB1* Nodal equivalent applied forces Constraint Forces Vector OGPFB1* Nodal equivalent constraint forces Grid Point Moments Total Elements Vector Vector OGPFB1* OGPFB1* Total nodal equivalent forces due to internal loads, applied loads and constraint forces. Internal nodal moment contribution by element Applied Loads Vector OGPFB1* Nodal equivalent applied moments Constraint Forces Vector OGPFB1* Nodal equivalent constraint moments Shape Change Total None Vector Vector OGPFB1* GEOMIN Total nodal equivalent moments

due to internal loads, applied loads and constraint forces. In a shape optimization run, this is the new shape displayed as a deformation of the original shape.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Supported OUTPUT2 Result and Model Quantities Primary Label Secondary Label Type DataBlocks Description Active Constraints Element Stress Scalar R1TABRG Element stress Element Strain Scalar R1TABRG Element strain Element Force Scalar R1TABRG Element force Element Ply Failure Scalar R1TABRG Element ply failure Translational Displacement Vector R1TABRG Nodal translational displacement Rotational Displacement Vector R1TABRG Nodal rotational displacement Translational Velocity Vector R1TABRG Nodal translational velocity Rotational Velocity Vector R1TABRG Nodal rotational velocity Translational Acceleration Vector R1TABRG Nodal translational acceleration Rotational Acceleration Vector R1TABRG Nodal rotational acceleration Translational SPC Vector R1TABRG Nodal translational SPC force Rotational SPC Vector R1TABRG Nodal rotational SPC force Global Variables In addition to standard results quantities, a number of Global Variables can be created. This table outlines Global Variables that may be created. Global Variables are results quantities wh ere one value is representative of the entire model. Labels Type DataBlocks Description Critical Load Factor S Oxxx Value of buckling load for the given buckling mode. Time S Oxxx Time value of the time step. Frequency S Oxxx Frequency value of the frequency step or for the normal mode. Damping Ratio S Oxxx Damping ratio value of a complex eigenvalue analysis. Eigenvalue S Oxxx Eigenvalue for normal modes or complex eigenvalue analysis. Percent of Load S Oxxx Percent of load value for a nonlinear static analysis. Adaptive Cycle S Oxxx Cycle number in p-adaptive analysis. Design Cycle S Oxxx Cycle number in an optimization run (SOL 200). Design Variable S DESTAB HISADD Design Variable for optimization (Label from DESTAB, value from HISADD). Maximum Constraint Value S HISADD Maximum constraint value for optimization. Objective Function S HISADD Objective function for optimization.

CTRIA3 CQUAD4 CHEXA, CPENTA, CTETRA CQUAD8, CTRI6 Chapter 4: Read Results Supported OUTPUT2 Result and Model Quantities Coordinate Systems In some cases, the elemental stresses and strains are transformed from one coord inate frame to another when imported into the Patran database. The following describes the coordinate s ystems for these element results after they are imported into the Patran database. The coordinate system names referred to are described in the Patran or the MD Nastran documentation. Table 4-1 Results are in the MD Nastran system which coincides with the Patran I JK system. At the user s request during postprocessing, these results can be transfor med by Patran to alternate coordinate systems. If the user selects a component of a str ess or strain tensor to be displayed, by default, the Results application transforms the tenso r to aprojected global system (Projected Global System). Table 4-2 Results are in the MD Nastran bisector coordinate system but may be transformed by Patran to alternate coordinate systems (e.g., global) during post processing. If the user selects a component of a stress or strain tensor to be displayed, by default, the Results application transforms the tensor to a projected global system (Projecte d Global System). Import of results when this element is used in a hyperelastic analysis is not currently supported. Table 4-3 The user can request that MD Nastran compute element results in either a local element or alternate coordinate system via the PSOLID entry. If the element resu lts are in the local element system, these are converted to the Patran IJK system on import . If the results are in a system other than local element, they are imported in this syst em. These results may be transformed to alternate systems during postprocessing. Table 4-4 The elemental coordinate system, used by MD Nastran for results, is de scribed in the MD Nastran documentation. These results are imported into the Patran data base asis .

These results can be postprocessed in Patran using the not be transformed to alternate coordinate systems. Projected Global System

As Is

options, but they can

The projected system is defined as follows. First, the normal to the shell surfa ce is calculated. This varies for curved elements and is constant for flat elements. If the angle between the normal and the global xaxis is greater than .01 radians, the global x-axis is projected onto the shell surfa ce as the local x-axis. If the angle is less than .01 radians, either the global y-axis or the z-axis (whic hever makes the largest angle with the normal) is defined to be the local x-axis. The local y-axis is perpendi cular to the plane defined by the normal and the local x-axis. XY Plots For results from MD Nastran design optimization solution 200 runs, three XY Plot s are generated, but not posted, when the Read OUTPUT2 option is selected: 1. Objective Function vs. Design Cycle. 1. Maximum Constraint Value vs. Design Cycle. 1. Design Variable vs. Design Cycle.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Supported OUTPUT2 Result and Model Quantities These plots can be viewed under the XY Plot option in (p. 1) in the MSC.Patran U ser s Guide. When they are initially posted, you will have to expand their windows to view them properl y. Model Data The following table outlines all the data that will be created in the Patran dat abase when reading model data from an MD Nastran OUTPUT2 file and the location in the OUTPUT2 file from w here it is derived. This is the only data extracted from the OUTPUT2 file. This data should be suffi cient for evaluating results values. Item Block Description Nodes GEOM1 Node ID Nodal Coordinates Reference Coordinate Frame Analysis Coordinate Frame Coordinate Frames GEOM1 Coordinate Frame ID Transformation Matrix Origin Can be Rectangular, Cylindrical, or Spherical Elements GEOM2 Element ID Topology (e.g., Quad/4 or Hex20) Nodal Connectivity

Chapter 4: Read Results Supported T16/T19 Results Quantities 4.3 Supported T16/T19 Results Quantities The following table indicates all the possible result quantities which can be lo aded into the Patran database from the t16 file. The Primary and Secondary Labels are items selected from the postprocessing menus. The Type indicates whether the results are Scalar, Vector, or Tensor. The se types will determine which postprocessing techniques will be available in order to view the results q uantity. Postcodes indicates which MSC.Marc element postcodes (selected automatically or by MD Nast ran Bulk Data entry MARCOUT) the data comes from. The Description gives a brief discussion about the results quantity. The Output Request forms use the actual primary and secondary labels which will appear in the results. For example, if Strain, Elastic is selected on the Element Output Requests form, t he Strain, Elastic is created for postprocessing. Primary Label Secondary Label Type Postcodes Description Displacement Translation Vector 1 (nodal) Translational displacements at nodes f rom a structural analysis. Displacement Rotation Vector 2 (nodal) Rotational displacements at nodes from a structural analysis. Velocity Translation Vector 28 (nodal) Translational velocities at nodes from a dynamic analysis. Velocity Rotation Vector 29 (nodal) Rotational velocities at nodes. Acceleration Translation Vector 30 (nodal) Translational accelerations at nodes from a dynamic analysis. Acceleration Rotation Vector 31 (nodal) Rotational accelerations at nodes from a dynamic analysis. Force Nodal External Applied Vector 3 (nodal) Forces applied to the model in a structural analysis. Force Nodal Reaction Vector 5 (nodal) Reaction forces at boundary conditions fro m a structural analysis. Moment Nodal External Applied Vector 4 (nodal) Moments applied to the model in a structural analysis. Moment Nodal Reaction Vector 6 (nodal) Reaction moments at boundary conditions from a structural analysis. Modal Mass Translation Vector 32 (nodal) Translational modal masses from modal extractions. Modal Mass Rotation Vector 33 (nodal) Rotational modal masses from modal extractions. Temperature Nodal Scalar 14 (nodal) Temperature at nodes from a thermal analysis. Velocity Fluid Vector 7 (nodal) Fluid Velocity

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Supported T16/T19 Results Quantities Primary Label Secondary Label Type Postcodes Description Flux Nodal Scalar 15 (nodal) Heat Flux applied to the model in a thermal analysis. Pressure Fluid Scalar 8 (nodal) Fluid Pressure Force External Fluid Vector 9 (nodal) External Fluid Force Force Reaction Fluid Vector 10 (nodal) Reaction Fluid Force Pressure Sound Scalar 11 (nodal) Sound Pressure Source External Sound Scalar 12 (nodal) External Sound Source Source Reaction Sound Scalar 13 (nodal) Reaction Sound Source Flux Nodal Reaction Scalar 16 (nodal) Nodal Reaction Flux Potential Electric Scalar 17 (nodal) Electric Potential Charge External Electric Scalar 18 (nodal) External Electric Charge Charge Reaction Electric Scalar 19 (nodal) Reaction Electric Charge Potential Magnetic Scalar 20 (nodal) Magnetic Potential Current External Electric Scalar 21 (nodal) External Electric Current Current Reaction Electric Scalar 22 (nodal) Reaction Electric Current Pressure Pore Scalar 23 (nodal) Pore Pressure Flux External Mass Scalar 24 (nodal) External Mass Flux Flux Reaction Mass Scalar 25 (nodal) Reaction Mass Flux Pressure Bearing Scalar 26 (nodal) Bearing Pressure Force Bearing Scalar 27 (nodal) Bearing Force Stress Contact Normal Vector 34 (nodal) Contact Normal Stress Force Contact Normal Vector 35 (nodal) Contact Normal Force Stress Friction Vector 36 (nodal) Friction Stress Force Friction Vector 37 (nodal) Friction Force Contact Status Scalar 38 (nodal) Contact Status Contact Touched Body Scalar 39 (nodal) Touched Body Contact Variable Herrmann Scalar 40 (nodal) Herrmann Variable Post Code No. -11 through -16 Tensor -11 thru -16, (nodal) User defined nodal quantities via user subroutine UPSTNO. Post Code No. -21 through -23 Vector -21 thru -23, (nodal) User defined nodal quantities via user subroutine UPSTNO. Post Code No. -31 Scalar -31, (nodal) User defined nodal quantities via user subroutine UPSTNO.

Chapter 4: Read Results Supported T16/T19 Results Quantities Primary Label Secondary Label Type Postcodes Description Post Code No. -41 Scalar -41, (nodal) User defined nodal quantities via user subroutine UPSTNO. Post Code No. -51 Scalar -51, (nodal) User defined nodal quantities via user subroutine UPSTNO. Strain Cracking Tensor 81-86 or 381 Cracking strain from a nonlinear structural analysis. Strain Creep Tensor 31-36 or 331 Creep strain from a nonlinear structural analysis. Strain Creep Equivalent Scalar 37 Equivalent creep strain from a nonlinear structural analysis. Strain Creep Equivalent (from rate) Scalar 8 Equivalent creep strain determined from rate from a nonlinear structural analysis. Strain Elastic Tensor 121-126 or 401 Elastic strain from a structural analysis. Strain Elastic Equivalent Scalar 127 Equivalent elastic strain from a structural analysis. Strain Plastic Tensor 21-26 or 321 Plastic strain from a nonlinear structural analysis. Strain Plastic Equivalent Scalar 27 Equivalent plastic strain from a nonlinear structural analysis. Strain Plastic Equivalent (from rate) Scalar 7 Equivalent plastic strain determined from rate from a nonlinear structural analysis. Strain Plastic Equivalent Rate Scalar 28 Equivalent plastic strain rate from a nonlinear structural analysis. Strain Thermal Tensor 71-76 or 371 Thermal strain from a structural analysis. Strain Thickness Scalar 49 Thickness strain from a structural analysis. Strain Total Tensor 1-6 or 301 Total strain from a structural analysis. Temperature Element Scalar 9 Element temperature from a thermal or structural analysis. Temperature Element Gradient Vector 181-183 Element temperature gradient from a thermal analysis. Temperature Element Incremental Scalar 10 Incremental element temperature from a thermal or structural analysis. Stress Tensor 11-16 or 311 Stress from a structural analysis. Stress Cauchy Tensor 41-46 or 341 Cauchy stress from a nonlinear structural analysis.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Supported T16/T19 Results Quantities Primary Label Secondary Label Type Postcodes Description Stress Cauchy Equivalent Mises Scalar 47 Equivalent Cauchy stress from a nonlinear structural analysis. Stress Equivalent Mises Scalar 17 Equivalent (von mises) stress from a structural analysis. Stress Hydrostatic Scalar 18 Hydrostatic stress from a structural analysis. Stress Interlaminar Shear No. 1 Scalar 108 Interlaminar shear in one direction from a structural analysis. Stress Interlaminar Shear No. 2 Scalar 109 Interlaminar shear in two direction from a structural analysis. Energy Density Elastic Scalar 48 Elastic strain energy density from a structural analysis. Energy Density Plastic Scalar 58 Plastic strain energy density from a nonlinear structural analysis. Energy Density Total Scalar 68 Total strain energy density from a structural analysis. Flux Element Vector 184-186 Element heat flux from a thermal analysis. State Variable Second Scalar 29 Second state variable from a nonlinear thermal or structural analysis. State Variable Third Scalar 39 Third state variable from a nonlinear thermal or structural analysis. Failure Index No. 1 Scalar 91 Failure index one from a structural analysis. Failure Index No. 2 Scalar 92 Failure index two from a structural analysis. Failure Index No. 3 Scalar 93 Failure index three from a structural analysis. Failure Index No. 4 Scalar 94 Failure index four from a structural analysis. Failure Index No. 5 Scalar 95 Failure index five from a structural analysis. Failure Index No. 6 Scalar 96 Failure index six from a structural analysis. Failure Index No. 7 Scalar 97 Failure index seven from a structural analysis. Thickness Scalar 20 Element thickness from a thermal or structural analysis. Volume Scalar 78 Element Volume from a thermal or structural analysis.

Chapter 4: Read Results Supported T16/T19 Results Quantities In addition to these standard results quantities, several Global Variable result s can be created. Global Variables are results quantities where one value is representative of the entire model. The following table defines the Global Variables which may be created. Global Variable Label Type Description Increment Scalar Increment of the analysis. Time Scalar Time of the analysis. Buckling Mode Scalar Buckling mode number. Critical Load Factor Scalar Critical load factor for buckling analysis. Dynamic Mode Scalar Dynamic mode number from modal extraction. Frequency (radians/time) Scalar Frequency in radians per unit time for modal ext raction.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Supported MSC.Access Result Quantities 4.4 Supported MSC.Access Result Quantities The following tables list the currently supported quantities from the MSC.Access database (xdb file).To get further information on the MSC.Access, i.e. XDB, objects supported in Patran , please use the ddlprt and ddlqry utilities delivered with every installation of MD Nastran. ddlprt is MSC.Access' on-line documentation. ddlqry is MSC.Access Data Definition Language (DDL) browser. See Configuration and Operations Guide for MSC.Nastran V70. Nodal Results Primary Label Secondary Label Type Objects Displacements Translational VECTOR DISPR Rotational VECTOR DISPR Translational VECTOR DISPRI Rotational VECTOR DISPRI Translational VECTOR DISPMP Rotational VECTOR DISPMP Eigenvectors Translational VECTOR DISPR Rotational VECTOR DISPR Translational VECTOR DISPRI Rotational VECTOR DISPRI Translational VECTOR DISPMP Rotational VECTOR DISPMP Velocities Translational VECTOR VELOR Rotational VECTOR VELOR Translational VECTOR VELORI Rotational VECTOR VELORI Translational VECTOR VELOMP Rotational VECTOR VELOMP

Chapter 4: Read Results Supported MSC.Access Result Quantities Primary Label Secondary Label Type Objects Accelerations Translational VECTOR ACCER Rotational VECTOR ACCER Translational VECTOR ACCERI Rotational VECTOR ACCERI Translational VECTOR ACCEMP Rotational VECTOR ACCEMP Constraint Forces Translational VECTOR SPCFR Rotational VECTOR SPCFR Translational VECTOR SPCFRI Rotational VECTOR SPCFRI Translational VECTOR SPCFMP Rotational VECTOR SPCFMP Applied Loads Translational VECTOR LOADR Rotational VECTOR LOADR Translational VECTOR LOADRI Rotational VECTOR LOADRI Translational VECTOR LOADMP Rotational VECTOR LOADMP Grid Point Stresses Stress Tensor TENSOR SGSVR Zero Shear Angle SCALAR SGSVR Major Principal SCALAR SGSVR Minor Principal SCALAR SGSVR Maximum Shear SCALAR SGSVR Von Mises SCALAR SGSVR

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Supported MSC.Access Result Quantities Primary Label Secondary Label Type Objects Grid Point Stresses Stress Tensor TENSOR SGVVR Mean Pressure SCALAR SGVVR Octahedral Shear SCALAR SGVVR Major Principal SCALAR SGVVR Intermediate Principal SCALAR SGVVR Minor Principal SCALAR SGSVR Major Prin x cosine SCALAR SGSVR Intermed Prin x cosine SCALAR SGSVR Minor Prin x cosine SCALAR SGSVR Major Prin y cosine SCALAR SGSVR Intermed Prin y cosine SCALAR SGSVR Minor Prin y cosine SCALAR SGSVR Major Prin z cosine SCALAR SGSVR Intermed Prin z cosine SCALAR SGSVR Minor Prin z cosine SCALAR SGSVR Grid Point Strains Strain Tensor TENSOR EGSVR Zero Shear Angle SCALAR EGSVR Major Principal SCALAR EGSVR Minor Principal SCALAR EGSVR Maximum Shear SCALAR EGSVR Von Mises SCALAR EGSVR

Chapter 4: Read Results Supported MSC.Access Result Quantities Primary Label Secondary Label Type Objects Grid Point Strains Strain Tensor TENSOR EGVVR Mean Pressure SCALAR EGVVR Octahedral Shear SCALAR EGVVR Major Principal SCALAR EGVVR Intermediate Principal SCALAR EGVVR Minor Principal SCALAR EGSVR Major Prin x cosine SCALAR EGSVR Intermed Prin x cosine SCALAR EGSVR Minor Prin x cosine SCALAR EGSVR Major Prin y cosine SCALAR EGSVR Intermed Prin y cosine SCALAR EGSVR Minor Prin y cosine SCALAR EGSVR Major Prin z cosine SCALAR EGSVR Intermed Prin z cosine SCALAR EGSVR Minor Prin z cosine SCALAR EGSVR GPS discontinunities Stress Tensor TENSOR SGSDTR Major Principal SCALAR SGSDTR Minor Principal SCALAR SGSDTR Maximum Shear SCALAR SGSDTR Von Mises SCALAR SGSDTR Error Estimate SCALAR SGSDTR Stress Tensor TENSOR SGVDTR Mean Pressure SCALAR SGVDTR Octahedral Shear SCALAR SGVDTR Major Principal SCALAR SGVDTR Intermediate Principal SCALAR SGVDTR Minor Principal SCALAR SGVDTR Error Estimate Direct SCALAR SGVDTR Error Estimate Principal SCALAR SGVDTR

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Supported MSC.Access Result Quantities Primary Label Secondary Label Type Objects Elem Stress discontinunities Stress Tensor TENSOR DQD4VR, DQD8VR, DQDRVR, DTR6VR, DTRRVR Major Principal SCALAR DQD4VR, DQD8VR, DQDRVR, DTR6VR, DTRRVR Minor Principal SCALAR DQD4VR, DQD8VR, DQDRVR, DTR6VR, DTRRVR Maximum Shear SCALAR DQD4VR, DQD8VR, DQDRVR, DTR6VR, DTRRVR Von Mises SCALAR DQD4VR, DQD8VR, DQDRVR, DTR6VR, DTRRVR Error Estimate SCALAR DQD4VR, DQD8VR, DQDRVR, DTR6VR, DTRRVR Stresss Tensor TENSOR DHEXVR, DPENVR, DTETVR Mean Pressure SCALAR DHEXVR, DPENVR, DTETVR Octahedral Shear SCALAR DHEXVR, DPENVR, DTETVR Major Principal SCALAR DHEXVR, DPENVR, DTETVR Intermediate Principal SCALAR DHEXVR, DPENVR, DTETVR Minor Principal SCALAR DHEXVR, DPENVR, DTETVR Error Estimate Direct SCALAR DHEXVR, DPENVR, DTETVR Error Estimate Principal SCALAR DHEXVR, DPENVR, DTETVR MPC Constraint Forces Translational VECTOR MPCFR, MPCFRI, MPCFMP Rotational VECTOR MPCFR, MPCFRI, MPCFMP

Chapter 4: Read Results Supported MSC.Access Result Quantities Primary Label Secondary Label Type Objects Grid Point Forces Applied Loads VECTOR GPFV Constraint Forces VECTOR GPFV MPC Forces VECTOR GPFV Elements VECTOR GPFV Total VECTOR GPFV Grid Point Moments Applied Loads VECTOR GPFV Constraint Forces VECTOR GPFV MPC Forces VECTOR GPFV Elements VECTOR GPFV Total VECTOR GPFV Bushing Forces Translational, Rotational VECTOR FBSHR, FBSHRI, FBSHMP Bushing Stresses Translational, Rotational VECTOR SBSHR, SBSHRI, SBSHMP Bushing Strains Translational, Rotational VECTOR EBSHR, EBSHRI, EBSHMP Bushing 1-D Results Axial Stress, Axial Strain, Axial Force, Axial Displacement SCALAR SBS1R, SBS1RI, SBS1MP Nonlinear Bushing Force Axial Stress, Axial Strain, Axial Force, Axial Displacement SCALAR NBS1R, NBS1RI, NBS1MP Temperature SCALAR THERR Enthalpies SCALAR ENTHR Rates of Enthalpy Change SCALAR ENRCR Constraint Heats SCALAR HTFFR Applied Loads SCALAR HTFLR Boundary Heat Flux Applied Loads SCALAR QHBDY Free Convection SCALAR QHBDY Forced Convection SCALAR QHBDY Radiation SCALAR QHBDY Total SCALAR QHBDY

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Supported MSC.Access Result Quantities Primary Label Secondary Label Type Objects Heat Fluxes VECTOR QBARR, QBEMR,QCONR, QHEXR,QPENR, QQD4R, QQD8R, QRODR, QTETR, QTUBR, QTX6R Temperature Gradients VECTOR QBARR, QBEMR, QCONR, QHEXR,QPENR, QQD4R, QQD8R, QRODR, QTETR, QTUBR, QTX6R

Chapter 4: Read Results Supported MSC.Access Result Quantities Elemental Results Primary Label Secondary Label Type Objects Bar Forces Translational VECTOR FBEMR Rotational VECTOR FBEMR Warping Torque SCALAR FBEMR Translational VECTOR FBEMRI Rotational VECTOR FBEMRI Warping Torque SCALAR FBEMRI Translational VECTOR FBEMMP Rotational VECTOR FBEMMP Warping Torque SCALAR FBEMMP Translational VECTOR FTUBR Rotational VECTOR FTUBR Translational VECTOR FTUBRI Rotational VECTOR FTUBRI Translational VECTOR FTUBMP Rotational VECTOR FTUBMP Translational VECTOR FCONR Rotational VECTOR FCONR Translational VECTOR FCONRI Rotational VECTOR FCONRI Translational VECTOR FCONMP Rotational VECTOR FCONMP Translational VECTORs FELSR FELSRI FELSMP FDMPR FDMPRI FDMPMP Rotational VECTOR FBARR Translational VECTOR FBARR Rotational VECTOR FBARRI Translational VECTOR FBARRI

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Supported MSC.Access Result Quantities Primary Label Secondary Label Type Objects Bar Forces (continued Rotational VECTOR FBARMP Translational VECTOR FBARMP Translational VECTOR FBRXR Rotational VECTOR FBRXR Shear Panel Forces Force41 SCALAR FSHRR Force21 SCALAR FSHRR Force12 SCALAR FSHRR Force32 SCALAR FSHRR Force23 SCALAR FSHRR Force43 SCALAR FSHRR Force34 SCALAR FSHRR Force14 SCALAR FSHRR Kick SCALAR FSHRR Shear SCALAR FSHRR Force41 SCALAR FSHRRI Force21 SCALAR FSHRRI Force12 SCALAR FSHRRI Force32 SCALAR FSHRRI Force23 SCALAR FSHRRI Force43 SCALAR FSHRRI Force34 SCALAR FSHRRI Force14 SCALAR FSHRRI Kick SCALAR FSHRRI Shear SCALAR FSHRRI Force41 SCALAR FSHRMP Force21 SCALAR FSHRMP Force12 SCALAR FSHRMP Force32 SCALAR FSHRMP Force23 SCALAR FSHRMP Force43 SCALAR FSHRMP Force34 SCALAR FSHRMP Force14 SCALAR FSHRMP

Chapter 4: Read Results Supported MSC.Access Result Quantities Primary Label Secondary Label Type Objects Shear Panel Forces (continued) Kick SCALAR FSHRMP Shear SCALAR FSHRMP Shell Forces Force Resultant TENSOR FQD4R Moment Resultant TENSOR FQD4R Force Resultant TENSOR FQD4RI Moment Resultant TENSOR FQD4RI Force Resultant TENSOR FQD4MP Moment Resultant TENSOR FQD4MP Force Resultant TENSOR FQD8R Moment Resultant TENSOR FQD8R Force Resultant TENSOR FQD8RI Moment Resultant TENSOR FQD8RI Force Resultant TENSOR FQD8MP Moment Resultant TENSOR FQD8MP Force Resultant TENSOR FTRRR Moment Resultant TENSOR FTRRR Force Resultant TENSOR FTRRRI Moment Resultant TENSOR FTRRRI Force Resultant TENSOR FTRRMP Moment Resultant TENSOR FTRRMP Force Resultant TENSOR FTR3R Moment Resultant TENSOR FTR3R Force Resultant TENSOR FTR3RI Moment Resultant TENSOR FTR3RI Force Resultant TENSOR FTR3MP Moment Resultant TENSOR FTR3MP Force Resultant TENSOR FTR6R Moment Resultant TENSOR FTR6R Force Resultant TENSOR FTR6RI Moment Resultant TENSOR FTR6RI Force Resultant TENSOR FTR6MP Moment Resultant TENSOR FTR6MP

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Supported MSC.Access Result Quantities Primary Label Secondary Label Type Objects Shell Forces (continued) Force Resultant TENSOR FQDRR Moment Resultant TENSOR FQDRR Force Resultant TENSOR FQDRRI Moment Resultant TENSOR FQDRRI Force Resultant TENSOR FQDRMP Moment Resultant TENSOR FQDRMP Force Resultant TENSOR FQD4XR Moment Resultant TENSOR FQD4XR Force Resultant TENSOR FQD4XRI Moment Resultant TENSOR FQD4XRI Force Resultant TENSOR FQD4XMP Moment Resultant TENSOR FQD4XMP Gap Results Force VECTOR FGAPR Displacement VECTOR FGAPR Slip VECTOR FGAPR Force VECTOR NGAPR Displacement VECTOR NGAPR Slip VECTOR NGAPR Stress Tensor NONE TENSOR SRODR TENSOR SRODRI TENSOR SRODMP TENSOR SBEMR NONE TENSOR SBEMRI TENSOR SBEMMP NONE TENSOR STUBR TENSOR STUBRI TENSOR STUBMP NONE TENSOR SCONR TENSOR SCONRI TENSOR SCONMP

Chapter 4: Read Results Supported MSC.Access Result Quantities Primary Label Secondary Label Type Objects Stress Tensor (continued) NONE TENSOR SELSR TENSOR SELSRI TENSOR SELSMP NONE TENSOR SQD4R TENSOR SQD4RI TENSOR SQD4MP NONE TENSOR SBARR TENSOR SBARRI TENSOR SBARMP NONE TENSOR STETR TENSOR STETRI TENSOR STETMP NONE TENSOR STX6R NONE TENSOR SQD8R TENSOR SQD8RI TENSOR SQD8MP NONE TENSOR SHEXR TENSOR SHEXRI TENSOR SHEXMP NONE TENSOR SPENR TENSOR SPENRI TENSOR SPENMP NONE TENSOR STRRR TENSOR STRRRI TENSOR STRRMP NONE TENSOR STR6R TENSOR STR6RI TENSOR STR6MP NONE TENSOR STR3R TENSOR STR3RI TENSOR STR3MP

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Supported MSC.Access Result Quantities Primary Label Secondary Label Type Objects Stress Tensor (continued) NONE TENSOR SQDRR TENSOR SQDRRI TENSOR SQDRMP NONE TENSOR TQD4R NONE TENSOR TQD8R NONE TENSOR TTR3R NONE TENSOR TTR6R NONE TENSOR SBRXR NONE TENSOR SQD4XR TENSOR SQD4XRI TENSOR SQD4XMP NONE TENSOR SBRXR Bar Stresses Maximum Axial SCALAR SBEMR Minimum Axial SCALAR SBEMR Maximum Axial SCALAR SBARR Minimum Axial SCALAR SBARR Tension Safety Margin SCALAR SBARR Maximum Axial SCALAR SBRXR Minimum Axial SCALAR SBRXR Maximum Axial SCALAR SBRXR Minimum Axial SCALAR SBRXR Bar Strains Maximum Axial SCALAR EBEMR Minimum Axial SCALAR EBEMR Maximum Axial SCALAR EBARR Minimum Axial SCALAR EBARR Tension Safety Margin SCALAR EBARR Compressive Safety Margin SCALAR EBARR Maximum Axial SCALAR EBRXR Minimum Axial SCALAR EBRXR Maximum Axial SCALAR EBRXR Minimum Axial SCALAR EBRXR

Chapter 4: Read Results Supported MSC.Access Result Quantities Primary Label Secondary Label Type Objects Strain Tensor NONE ENG_TENSOR ENG_TENSOR ENG_TENSOR ENG_TENSOR ENG_TENSOR ENG_TENSOR ERODR ERODRI ERODMP EBEMR EBEMRI EBEMMP NONE ENG_TENSOR ENG_TENSOR ENG_TENSOR ETUBR ETUBRI ETUBMP NONE ENG_TENSOR ENG_TENSOR ENG_TENSOR ECONR ECONRI ECONMP NONE ENG_TENSOR ENG_TENSOR ENG_TENSOR EELSR EELSRI EELSMP NONE ENG_TENSOR ENG_TENSOR ENG_TENSOR EQD4R EQD4RI EQD4MP NONE ENG_TENSOR ENG_TENSOR ENG_TENSOR EBARRI EBARR EBARMP NONE ENG_TENSOR ENG_TENSOR ENG_TENSOR ETETR ETETRI ETETMP NONE ENG_TENSOR ENG_TENSOR ENG_TENSOR EQD8R EQD8RI EQD8MP

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Supported MSC.Access Result Quantities Primary Label Secondary Label Type Objects Strain Tensor (continued) NONE ENG_TENSOR ENG_TENSOR ENG_TENSOR EQDRR EQDRRI EQDRMP NONE ENG_TENSOR GQD4R NONE ENG_TENSOR GQD8R NONE ENG_TENSOR GTR3R NONE ENG_TENSOR GTR6R NONE ENG_TENSOR EBRXR NONE ENG_TENSOR ENG_TENSOR ENG_TENSOR EQD4XR EQD4XRI EQD4XMP NONE ENG_TENSOR EBRXR Shear Panel Stresses Maximum Shear SCALAR SSHRR Average Shear SCALAR SSHRR Maximum Shear SCALAR SSHRRI Average Shear SCALAR SSHRRI Maximum Shear SCALAR SSHRMP Average Shear SCALAR SSHRMP Maximum Shear SCALAR SSHRR Average Shear SCALAR SSHRR Maximum Shear SCALAR SSHRRI Average Shear SCALAR SSHRRI Maximum Shear SCALAR SSHRMP Average Shear SCALAR SSHRMP Shear Panel Strains Maximum Shear SCALAR ESHRR Average Shear SCALAR ESHRR Maximum Shear SCALAR ESHRRI Average Shear SCALAR ESHRRI Maximum Shear SCALAR ESHRMP Average Shear SCALAR ESHRMP

Chapter 4: Read Results Supported MSC.Access Result Quantities Primary Label Secondary Label Type Objects Principal Stress Direction Zero Shear Angle SCALAR SQD4R Major Prin x cosine SCALAR STETR Minor Prin x cosine SCALAR STETR Intermed Prin x cosine SCALAR STETR Major Prin y cosine SCALAR STETR Minor Prin y cosine SCALAR STETR Intermed Prin y cosine SCALAR STETR Major Prin z cosine SCALAR STETR Minor Prin z cosine SCALAR STETR Intermed Prin z cosine SCALAR STETR Zero Shear Angle SCALAR SQD8R Major Prin x cosine SCALAR SHEXR Minor Prin x cosine SCALAR SHEXR Intermed Prin x cosine SCALAR SHEXR Major Prin y cosine SCALAR SHEXR Minor Prin y cosine SCALAR SHEXR Intermed Prin y cosine SCALAR SHEXR Major Prin z cosine SCALAR SHEXR Minor Prin z cosine SCALAR SHEXR Intermed Prin z cosine SCALAR SHEXR Major Prin x cosine SCALAR SPENR Minor Prin x cosine SCALAR SPENR Intermed Prin x cosine SCALAR SPENR Major Prin y cosine SCALAR SPENR Minor Prin y cosine SCALAR SPENR Intermed Prin y cosine SCALAR SPENR Major Prin z cosine SCALAR SPENR Minor Prin z cosine SCALAR SPENR Intermed Prin z cosine SCALAR SPENR Zero Shear Angle SCALAR STRRR Zero Shear Angle SCALAR STR6R Zero Shear Angle SCALAR STR3R

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Supported MSC.Access Result Quantities Primary Label Secondary Label Type Objects Principal Stress Direction (continued) Zero Shear Angle SCALAR SQDRR Zero Shear Angle SCALAR TQD4R Zero Shear Angle SCALAR TQD8R Zero Shear Angle SCALAR TTR3R Zero Shear Angle SCALAR TTR6R Zero Shear Angle SCALAR SQD4XR Stress Invariants Major Principal SCALAR SQD4R Minor Principal SCALAR SQD4R Maximum Shear SCALAR SQD4R Major Principal SCALAR STETR Mean Pressure SCALAR STETR Minor Principal SCALAR STETR Intermediate Principal SCALAR STETR Octahedral Shear SCALAR STETR Von Mises SCALAR STETR Major Principal SCALAR STX6R Maximum Shear SCALAR STX6R Octahedral Shear SCALAR STX6R Von Mises SCALAR STX6R Major Principal SCALAR SQD8R Minor Principal SCALAR SQD8R Maximum Shear SCALAR SQD8R Von Mises SCALAR SQD8R Major Principal SCALAR SHEXR Mean Pressure SCALAR SHEXR Minor Principal SCALAR SHEXR Intermediate Principal SCALAR SHEXR Octahedral Shear SCALAR SHEXR Von Mises SCALAR SHEXR Major Principal SCALAR SPENR Mean Pressure SCALAR SPENR Minor Principal SCALAR SPENR

Chapter 4: Read Results Supported MSC.Access Result Quantities Primary Label Secondary Label Type Objects Stress Invariants (continued) Intermediate Principal SCALAR SPENR Octahedral Shear SCALAR SPENR Von Mises SCALAR SPENR Major Principal SCALAR STRRR Minor Principal SCALAR STRRR Maximum Shear SCALAR STRRR Von Mises SCALAR STRRR Major Principal SCALAR STR6R Minor Principal SCALAR STR6R Maximum Shear SCALAR STR6R Von Mises SCALAR STR6R Major Principal SCALAR STR3R Minor Principal SCALAR STR3R Maximum Shear SCALAR STR3R Von Mises SCALAR STR3R Major Principal SCALAR SQDRR Minor Principal SCALAR SQDRR Maximum Shear SCALAR SQDRR Von Mises SCALAR SQDRR Major Principal SCALAR TQD4R Minor Principal SCALAR TQD4R Maximum Shear SCALAR TQD4R Major Principal SCALAR TQD8R Minor Principal SCALAR TQD8R Maximum Shear SCALAR TQD8R Major Principal SCALAR TTR3R Minor Principal SCALAR TTR3R Maximum Shear SCALAR TTR3R Major Principal SCALAR TTR6R Minor Principal SCALAR TTR6R Maximum Shear SCALAR TTR6R Major Principal SCALAR SQD4XR

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Supported MSC.Access Result Quantities Primary Label Secondary Label Type Objects Stress Invariants (continued) Minor Principal SCALAR SQD4XR Maximum Shear SCALAR SQD4XR Von Mises SCALAR SQD4XR Principal Strain Direction Zero Shear Angle SCALAR EQD4R Major Prin x cosine SCALAR ETETR Minor Prin x cosine SCALAR ETETR Intermed Prin x cosine SCALAR ETETR Major Prin y cosine SCALAR ETETR Minor Prin y cosine SCALAR ETETR Intermed Prin y cosine SCALAR ETETR Major Prin z cosine SCALAR ETETR Minor Prin z cosine SCALAR ETETR Intermed Prin z cosine SCALAR ETETR Zero Shear Angle SCALAR EQD8R Major Prin x cosine SCALAR EHEXR Minor Prin x cosine SCALAR EHEXR Intermed Prin x cosine SCALAR EHEXR Major Prin y cosine SCALAR EHEXR Minor Prin y cosine SCALAR EHEXR Intermed Prin y cosine SCALAR EHEXR Major Prin z cosine SCALAR EHEXR Minor Prin z cosine SCALAR EHEXR Intermed Prin z cosine SCALAR EHEXR Major Prin x cosine SCALAR EPENR Minor Prin x cosine SCALAR EPENR Intermed Prin x cosine SCALAR EPENR Major Prin y cosine SCALAR EPENR Minor Prin y cosine SCALAR EPENR Intermed Prin y cosine SCALAR EPENR Major Prin z cosine SCALAR EPENR Minor Prin z cosine SCALAR EPENR Intermed Prin z cosine SCALAR EPENR

Chapter 4: Read Results Supported MSC.Access Result Quantities Primary Label Secondary Label Type Objects Principal Strain Direction (continued) Zero Shear Angle SCALAR ETRRR Zero Shear Angle SCALAR ETR6R Zero Shear Angle SCALAR ETR3R Zero Shear Angle SCALAR EQDRR Zero Shear Angle SCALAR GQD4R Zero Shear Angle SCALAR GQD8R Zero Shear Angle SCALAR GTR3R Zero Shear Angle SCALAR GTR6R Zero Shear Angle SCALAR EQD4XR Strain Invariants Major Principal SCALAR EQD4R Minor Principal SCALAR EQD4R Maximum Shear SCALAR EQD4R Major Principal SCALAR ETETR Mean Pressure SCALAR ETETR Minor Principal SCALAR ETETR Intermediate Principal SCALAR ETETR Octahedral Shear SCALAR ETETR Von Mises SCALAR ETETR Major Principal SCALAR EQD8R Minor Principal SCALAR EQD8R Maximum Shear SCALAR EQD8R Von Mises SCALAR EQD8R Major Principal SCALAR EHEXR Mean Pressure SCALAR EHEXR Minor Principal SCALAR EHEXR Intermediate Principal SCALAR EHEXR Octahedral Shear SCALAR EHEXR Von Mises SCALAR EHEXR Major Principal SCALAR EPENR Mean Pressure SCALAR EPENR Minor Principal SCALAR EPENR Intermediate Principal SCALAR EPENR

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Supported MSC.Access Result Quantities Primary Label Secondary Label Type Objects Strain Invariants (continued) Octahedral Shear SCALAR EPENR Von Mises SCALAR EPENR Major Principal SCALAR ETRRR Minor Principal SCALAR ETRRR Maximum Shear SCALAR ETRRR Von Mises SCALAR ETRRR Major Principal SCALAR ETR6R Minor Principal SCALAR ETR6R Maximum Shear SCALAR ETR6R Von Mises SCALAR ETR6R Major Principal SCALAR ETR3R Minor Principal SCALAR ETR3R Maximum Shear SCALAR ETR3R Von Mises SCALAR ETR3R Major Principal SCALAR EQDRR Minor Principal SCALAR EQDRR Maximum Shear SCALAR EQDRR Von Mises SCALAR EQDRR Major Principal SCALAR GQD4R Minor Principal SCALAR GQD4R Maximum Shear SCALAR GQD4R Major Principal SCALAR GQD8R Minor Principal SCALAR GQD8R Maximum Shear SCALAR GQD8R Major Principal SCALAR GTR3R Minor Principal SCALAR GTR3R Maximum Shear SCALAR GTR3R Major Principal SCALAR GTR6R Minor Principal SCALAR GTR6R Maximum Shear SCALAR GTR6R Major Principal SCALAR EQD4XR Minor Principal SCALAR EQD4XR

Chapter 4: Read Results Supported MSC.Access Result Quantities Primary Label Secondary Label Type Objects Strain Invariants (continued) Maximum Shear SCALAR EQD4XR Von Mises SCALAR EQD4XR Nonlinear Stresses Stress Tensor TENSOR NTETR Equivalent Stress SCALAR NTETR Stress Tensor TENSOR NTUBR Equivalent Stress SCALAR NTUBR Stress Tensor TENSOR NTR3R Equivalent Stress SCALAR NTR3R Stress Tensor TENSOR NRODR Equivalent Stress SCALAR NRODR Stress Tensor TENSOR NQD4R Equivalent Stress SCALAR NQD4R Stress Tensor TENSOR NPENR Equivalent Stress SCALAR NPENR Stress Tensor TENSOR NCONR Equivalent Stress SCALAR NCONR Stress Tensor TENSOR NHEXR Equivalent Stress SCALAR NHEXR Stress Tensor TENSOR NBEMR Equivalent Stress SCALAR NBEMR Stress Tensor TENSOR NBEMR Equivalent Stress SCALAR NBEMR Stress Tensor TENSOR NBEMR Equivalent Stress SCALAR NBEMR Stress Tensor TENSOR NBEMR Equivalent Stress SCALAR NBEMR Nonlinear Strains Strain Tensor ENG_TENSOR NTETR Plastic Strain SCALAR NTETR Creep Strain SCALAR NTETR Strain Tensor ENG_TENSOR NTUBR Plastic Strain SCALAR NTUBR Creep Strain SCALAR NTUBR

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Supported MSC.Access Result Quantities Primary Label Secondary Label Type Objects Nonlinear Strains (continued) Strain Tensor ENG_TENSOR NTR3R Plastic Strain SCALAR NTR3R Creep Strain SCALAR NTR3R Strain Tensor ENG_TENSOR NRODR Plastic Strain SCALAR NRODR Creep Strain SCALAR NRODR Strain Tensor ENG_TENSOR NQD4R Plastic Strain SCALAR NQD4R Creep Strain SCALAR NQD4R Strain Tensor ENG_TENSOR NPENR Plastic Strain SCALAR NPENR Creep Strain SCALAR NPENR Strain Tensor ENG_TENSOR NCONR Plastic Strain SCALAR NCONR Creep Strain SCALAR NCONR Strain Tensor ENG_TENSOR NHEXR Plastic Strain SCALAR NHEXR Creep Strain SCALAR NHEXR Strain Tensor ENG_TENSOR NBEMR Plastic Strain SCALAR NBEMR Creep Strain SCALAR NBEMR Strain Tensor ENG_TENSOR NBEMR Plastic Strain SCALAR NBEMR Creep Strain SCALAR NBEMR Strain Tensor ENG_TENSOR NBEMR Plastic Strain SCALAR NBEMR Creep Strain SCALAR NBEMR Strain Tensor ENG_TENSOR NBEMR Plastic Strain SCALAR NBEMR Creep Strain SCALAR NBEMR

Chapter 4: Read Results Supported MSC.Access Result Quantities Primary Label Secondary Label Type Objects Strain Energy Energy SCALAR URODR Percent of Total SCALAR URODR Energy Density SCALAR URODR Energy SCALAR UBEMR Percent of Total SCALAR UBEMR Energy Density SCALAR UBEMR Energy SCALAR UTUBR Percent of Total SCALAR UTUBR Energy Density SCALAR UTUBR Energy SCALAR USHRR Percent of Total SCALAR USHRR Energy Density SCALAR USHRR Energy SCALAR UCONR Percent of Total SCALAR UCONR Energy Density SCALAR UCONR Energy SCALAR UELSR Percent of Total SCALAR UELSR Energy Density SCALAR UELSR Energy SCALAR UDMPR Percent of Total SCALAR UDMPR Energy Density SCALAR UDMPR Energy SCALAR UQD4R Percent of Total SCALAR UQD4R Energy Density SCALAR UQD4R Energy SCALAR UBARR Percent of Total SCALAR UBARR Energy Density SCALAR UBARR Energy SCALAR UGAPR Percent of Total SCALAR UGAPR Energy Density SCALAR UGAPR Energy SCALAR UTETR Percent of Total SCALAR UTETR

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Supported MSC.Access Result Quantities Primary Label Secondary Label Type Objects Strain Energy (continued) Energy Density SCALAR UTETR Energy SCALAR UTX6R Percent of Total SCALAR UTX6R Energy Density SCALAR UTX6R Energy SCALAR UQD8R Percent of Total SCALAR UQD8R Energy Density SCALAR UQD8R Energy SCALAR UHEXR Percent of Total SCALAR UHEXR Energy Density SCALAR UHEXR Energy SCALAR UPENR Percent of Total SCALAR UPENR Energy Density SCALAR UPENR Energy SCALAR UTRRR Percent of Total SCALAR UTRRR Energy Density SCALAR UTRRR Energy SCALAR UTR3R Percent of Total SCALAR UTR3R Energy Density SCALAR UTR3R Energy SCALAR UTR6R Percent of Total SCALAR UTR6R Energy Density SCALAR UTR6R Energy SCALAR UQDRR Percent of Total SCALAR UQDRR Energy Density SCALAR UQDRR

Chapter 4: Read Results Supported MSC.Access Result Quantities Primary Label Secondary Label Type Objects Cauchy Stresses TENSOR HHEXR, HPENR, HQD4R, HQDXR. HQUDR, HTETR, HTR3R, HTR6R, HTRXR Logarithmic Strains TENSOR HHEXR, HPENR, HQD4R, HQDXR. HQUDR, HTETR, HTR3R, HTR6R, HTRXR

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Supported MSC.Access Result Quantities Primary Label Secondary Label Type Objects Pressure TENSOR HHEXR, HPENR, HQD4R, HQDXR. HQUDR, HTETR, HTR3R, HTR6R, HTRXR Volumetric Strains TENSOR HHEXR, HPENR, HQD4R, HQDXR. HQUDR, HTETR, HTR3R, HTR6R, HTRXR Topology Optimization Element Density SCALAR DVHIST

Chapter 4: Read Results Supported 3dplot Results Quantities 4.5 Supported The following aded into the database from 3dplot Results Quantities table indicates all the possible result quantities which can be lo Patran the LS-Dyna s ptf file.

Global Variable Label Type Description Displacement Nodal x, y, z displacements of nodes, in global coordinate frame. Velocity Nodal x, y, z velocity of nodes, in global coordinate frame. Acceleration Nodal x, y, z acceleration of nodes, in global coordinate frame. Temperature Nodal Nodal temperature. Forces Nodal Resultant beam forces and moments, in local beam coordinate. Stress Element 6 components of stress tensor, at element centre and gaussian poi nts - top, middle, and bottom for shells. Stress Resultants Element Stress Resultants at elements. Strain Element 6 components of strain tensor, at element centre and gaussian poi nts - top, middle, and bottom for shells. Eff. Plastic Strain Element Effective plastic strain, at element centre and gaus sian points - top, middle, and bottom for shells. Element Volume, Euler Partition/ Element Element of constant volume. Mass, Euler Partition/ Element Mass of fluid in a partition (element of constant volume). Density, Euler Partition/ Element Density of fluid in a partition (element of constant volume). Specific Internal Energy, Euler Partition/ Element Specific internal energy of fluid in a partition (element of constant volume). Total Energy, Euler Partition/ Element Total energy of fluid in a partition (element of constant volume). Material Fraction, Euler Partition/ Element Material fraction of fluid * the volume uncovered fraction in a partition (element of constant volume). Speed of Sound, Euler Partition/ Element Speed of sound of fluid in a partition (element of constant volume). Momentum, Euler Partition/ Element Momentum of fluid in a partition (element of constant volume). Volume Uncovered Fraction, Euler Partition/ Element Volume uncovered fraction of fluid in a partition (element of constant volume).

Mass Flow Rate, Euler Partition/ Element Mass flow rate of fluid in a partition (element of constant volume).

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Supported 3dplot Results Quantities Global Variable Label Type Description Total Mass Flow, Euler Partition/ Element Total mass flow over a given time of fluid in a partition (element of constant volume). Heat Transfer Rate, Euler Partition/ Element Heat transfer rate for fluid in a partition (element of constant volume). Total Heat Transfer, Euler Partition/ Element Total heat transfer over a given time of fluid in a partition (element of constant volume). Velocity, Euler Partition/ Element Velocity of fluid in a partition (element of constant volume).

Read Input File 5 Review of Read Input File Form 546 Data Translated from the NASTRAN Input File 554 Conflict Resolution 565

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Review of Read Input File Form 5.1 Review of Read Input File Form The Analysis form will appear when the Analysis toggle, located on the Patran ma in menu, is chosen. Read Input File as the selected Action on the Analysis form allows much of the m odel data from a MD Nastran input file to be translated into the Patran database. A subordinate File Selection form allows the user to specify the MD Nastran input file to translate. This form is described o n the following pages.

Chapter 5: Read Input File Review of Read Input File Form Read Input File Form This form appears when the Analysis toggle is selected on the main menu. Read In put File, as the selected Action, specifies that model data is to be translated from the specified MD Nast ran input file into the Patran database. Indicates the selected Analysis Code and Analysis Type, as defined in the Preferences>Analysis (p. 431) in the Patran Reference Manual. List of already existing jobs. Name assigned to current translation job. This job name will be used as the base file name for the message file. Activates a subordinate Entity Selection form which allows the user to specify the specific entry types to be read. Also defines ID offset values to be used during import. Activates a subordinate File Select form which allows the user to specify the NASTRAN input file to be translated.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Review of Read Input File Form Entity Selection Form This subordinate form appears when the Entity Selection button is selected on th e Analysis form and Read Input File is the selected Action. It allows the user to specify which MD N astran entity types to import. Highlighted entity types will be imported. Activates the form to define ID offsets. Select this button to create groups based on property sets and materials. Selecting this toggle will tell Patran to attempt to retrieve the names of properties and materials from the comments in the input file. This only applys to material and element properties names.

Chapter 5: Read Input File Review of Read Input File Form The following table shows the relation between the entity types listed above and the actual MD Nastran entry types effected. If an entity type is filtered out, it is treated as if tho se entries did not exist in the original input file. Entity Type MD Nastran Cards Nodes GRID, GRDSET, SPOINT Elements BAROR, BEAMOR, CBAR, CBEAM, CBEND, CDAMP1, CDAMP2, CDAMP3, CDAMP4, CELAS1, CELAS2, CELAS3, CELAS4, CGAP, CHEXA, CMASS1, CMASS2, CMASS3, CMASS4, CONM1, CONM2, CONROD, CPENTA, CQUAD4, CQUAD8, CQUADR, CROD, CSHEAR, CTETRA, CTRIA3, CTRIA6, CTRIAR, CTRIAX6, CTUBE, CVISC, PLOTEL Material Properties MAT1, MAT2, MAT3, MAT8, MAT9 Element Properties PBAR, PBCOMP, PBEAM, PBEND, PCOMP, PDAMP, PELAS, PGAP, PMASS, PROD, PSHEAR, PSHELL, PSOLID, PTUBE, PVISC Coordinate Frames CORD1C, CORD1R, CORD1S, CORD2C, CORD2R, CORD2S Load Sets FORCE, GRAV,MOMENT, PLOAD1, PLOAD2, PLOAD4, PLOADX1, RFORCE, TEMP, TEMPP1, TEMPRB, SPC, SPC1, SPCD Subcases LOAD, SPCADD, Case Control Section MPC Data MPC, RBAR, RBE1, RBE2, RBE3, RROD, RSPLINE, RTRPLT It should be noted that since the GRID entry is controlled with the Nodes filter , the grid.ps load set with the permanent single point constraint data will also be controlled by the Nodes filter.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Review of Read Input File Form Define Offsets Form This subordinate form appears when the Define Offsets button is selected on the Entity Selection form. It allows the user to specify the ID offsets used when reading a MD Nastran inpu t file. Minimum and Maximum IDs currently If selected, the value in the Maximum column will be used found in the Patran da tabase. as the offset for the selected rows. All offset data boxes can be selected at once by selecting this column header. ID offset value to be used during import. The new ID value will be the ID found in the NASTRAN input file plus this offset value. All references made in the input file will also be offset. If a node references a particular CID as its analysis frame, then the reference will be offset as well. If the coordinate fra me is defined in the same input file, the proper references should be maintained. The preference will be p roperly maintained. If the coordinate frame existed in the file prior to the import, then it needs to be th e offset CID. If a coordinate frame with that CID is not found in the database, an error message will be issue d.

Chapter 5: Read Input File Review of Read Input File Form To determine which offset effects a particular MD Nastran entry type, refer to t he table in the previous section. For Patran entities identified by integer IDs (nodes, elements, coordinate frame s, and MPCs), the offset value is simply added to the MD Nastran ID to generate the Patran ID. For Patran entities identified by text names (materials, element properties, loa d sets, and load cases), the offset value is first added to the MSC.Nastran ID. The new integer value is then used to generate the Patran name per the naming conventions described in later sections. Selection of Input File This subordinate form appears when the Select Input File button is selected on t he Analysis form and Read Input File is the selected Action. It allows the user to specify which MD N astran input file to translate. Summary Data Form This form appears after the import of the NASTRAN input file has completed. It d isplays the number of entities imported correctly, imported with warnings, or not imported due to erro rs. These figures reflect the number of Patran entities created. In some cases, there is not a one-to-one relation between the original MD Nastran entities and the generated Patran entities. For example, whe n material orientations on several CQUAD4s are defined using references to varying MCIDs while still ref erencing the same PID, Patran needs to create a unique property set for each different MCID refere nce.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Review of Read Input File Form When the OK button is selected, the newly imported data will be committed to the Patran database, and can not be undone. If there is any question as to whether or not this import was desired, review the graphics data prior to selecting OK on this form. If the import was not correct, select the undo button on the main menu bar before selecting OK on this form. NASTRAN Input File Import Summary Reject Cards... OK Imported Imported with Warning Not Imported Nodes Elements Coordinate Frames Materials Element Properties Load Sets Load Cases MPCs

Chapter 5: Read Input File Review of Read Input File Form Reject Card Form During import of the NASTRAN input file, some entries types might not be underst ood by Patran. Those entries are brought into Patran in the direct text input data boxes. Selecting t he Reject Cards button on the Summary Data form will bring up this Reject Card Form. You can review these entries here. Direct Text Import OK Executive Control Section Bulk Data Section 0. File Management Section Case Control Section 214 Bulk Data Section 215 101 $ 1.213$CBEAM MPCADD 100 102 0. u uu uu uu Only entry types not supported by Patran are sent to the reject entry blocks. (T his includes comments.) Cards which are otherwise recognized, but can not be imported due to syntax or i nvalid data errors are not sent to the reject blocks. The rejected entries will have no characters in f ront of the command name. Commands preceded by the character $> are used by the MSC/AMS product to allow p rocessing of comment lines. Note: As long as you don not delete the reject casrd file, Patran will re-insert the rejected entries back into the input file if you use the same jobname.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Data Translated from the NASTRAN Input File 5.2 Data Translated from the NASTRAN Input File The following sections describe which specific MD Nastran entry types can curren tly be read into Patran. The MD Nastran entries described in this document are the only entries read when importing a NASTRAN input file into Patran. All non-supported entries will be sent to the ap propriate Direct Text Input data box for this job. When errors occur during the import of a supported entry type, the entry being processed may or may not be imported, depending on the severity of the problem e ncountered. An error message will be presented regardless of whether or not the offending entry is ac tually imported. Any references from supported entries to entries that were not imported (either due to not being a supported entry type or due to serious import errors) will still be attempted. I f this reference is required in Patran for the entry currently being processed, it too will fail to import. F or example, if there is a serious error on a GRID entry which causes it to not imported, then all elements attached to that GRID will also fail to import. Partial Decks This Patran function can read incomplete MD Nastran files (except where explicit ly noted). However, if the BEGIN BULK command is missing, the program can get confused when trying to d etermine if a particular entry belongs to the case control or bulk data. If you experience any difficulties importing a file that does not have a BEGIN BULK command, add one to the top of the file. Th is should avoid any such confusion. Coordinate Systems The following coordinate system definitions can be read into Patran. Command Comments CORD1C CORD1R CORD1S References to the GRIDs on these entries are lost. The locations of the referenc ed GRIDs are extracted, and those locations are used to create the Patran definitio n. CORD2C CORD2R CORD2S References to RIDs are lost. The specified locations are converted to global cartesian for use in the Patran definitions. The original B and C points are not retained. Their values are recomputed when a

new NASTRAN input file is created. The definition will be equivalent, but not identical. Referential Integrity Coordinate systems and GRIDs which are referenced as part of a CORD definition m ust be in the same input file. If these are not found in the input file, the definition will be rej ected.

Chapter 5: Read Input File Data Translated from the NASTRAN Input File References to coordinate frames other than for new coordinate frame definitions can be resolved with coordinate frames previously found in the Patran database. Chaining Due to limitations in the Patran definitions of coordinate systems, chained defi nitions (definitions based on other coordinate systems or grids) are modified during import. The resulting definitions are equivalent in global space, but are based on global cartesian coordinates rather than GRID references or coordinate locations in other systems. This change is carried through when a new NASTRAN in put file is created. All coordinate systems will be created using CORD2 type definitions, and they wi ll all reference global cartesian coordinates. These definitions will be different from, but equivalent to, the original definitions. Grids and SPOINTs The MD Nastran GRID entry is read fully, except the SEID field. The CD and CP re ferences are both maintained. The PS data is used to create a constraint set. The details of the c reated load set are defined in the load set import section. GRDSET data is merged into the GRID data during import. The data will be retaine d, but will appear directly on the GRID entry when a new NASTRAN input file is generated. SPOINTs SPOINTs are treated as GRIDs at the global origin. They are assumed to have thei r GRID CD and CP fields set to the basic system, and their PS field is set to permanently constra in degrees-of-freedom 2 through 6. Referential Integrity Coordinate Coordinate referenced n database import. frames referenced in the CP field must exist in the same input file. frames on the CD field can exist in either the same input file, or the Patra prior to the

Elements and Element Properties The following MD Nastran elements and element properties can be read into Patran . Element Property Property Set Name Comments CBAR PBAR pbar.<pid> Orientation and offset vectors are re-defined in global car tesian

during import. (See BAROR comments below.) PBARL pbarl.<pid>

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Data Translated from the NASTRAN Input File Element Property Property Set Name Comments CBARAO New property sets are created for each occurrence of a CBAR entry referenced by a CBARAO entry CBEAM Orientation and offset vectors are re-defined in global cartesian during import. (See BEAMOR comments below.) PBEAM pbeam.<pid> PBEAML pbeaml.<pid> PBCOMP pbcomp.<pid> The MD Nastran documentation describes how the section data is used to create a complete set of lumped areas. The data imported into Patran is fully expanded, and therefore, is different from the data in the original input file. This definition is, however, fully equivalent to the original. The SO field is not currently supported. A YES is provided automatically when a new NASTRAN input file is created. Only the lumped areas definition is understood, If a uniform cross section is defined here, it will be converted to a lumped area definition, but no lumped areas will be defined. CBEND Patran only understands the GEOM = 1 orientation data. If other definitions are found, a vector will be computed to convert the definition to the GEOM = 1 format. If a GRID was referenced for GEOM other than 1, that reference will be lost. For the same reasons, the THETAB and RB data will also be lost since that data is not used for GEOM = 1 definitions. Orientation and offset vectors are re-defined in global cartesian during import. PBEND pbend_g.<pid> If standard cross section properties are found on the PBEND entry pbend_p.<pid> If the alternate format of the PBEND is used to define a pipe cross section. CBUSH PBUSH pbush.<pid> pbush_g.<pid> The grounded form of the PBUSH PBUSHT pbusht_1D.<pid> CDAMP1 PDAMP pdamp.<pid> For dampers connecting 2 GRIDs. pdamp_g.<pid> For grounded dampers attached to a single GRID. CDAMP2 cdamp2 For dampers connecting 2 GRIDs. cdamp2_g For grounded dampers attached to a single GRID.

Chapter 5: Read Input File Data Translated from the NASTRAN Input File Element Property Property Set Name Comments CDAMP3 PDAMP Treated identical to the CDAMP1 and CDAMP2 elements with the degree-of-freedom fields set to 1 (UX). CDAMP4 CELAS1 PELAS pelas.<pid> For springs connecting 2 GRIDs. pelas_g.<pid> For grounded springs attached to a single GRID. CELAS2 celas2 For springs connecting 2 GRIDs. celas2_g For grounded springs attached to a single GRID. CELAS3 PELAS Treated identical to the CELAS1 and CELAS2 elements with the degree-of-freedom fields set to 1 (UX). CELAS4 CGAP Orientation and offset vectors are re-defined in global cartesian during import. PGAP pgap.<pid> For non-adaptive definitions on the PGAP entry. pgap_a.<pid> For adaptive definitions on the PGAP entry. CHBDYG CHBDYP PHBDY Note: The BDYOR command that may contain default values for CHBDY elements is not currently supported. CHEXA PSOLID psolid.<pid> CMASS1 PMASS pmass.<pid> For masses connecting 2 GRIDs. pmass_g.<pid> For masses attached to a single GRID. CMASS2 cmass2 For masses connecting 2 GRIDs. cmass2_g For masses attached to a single GRID. CMASS3 PMASS Treated identical to the CMASS1 and CMASS2 elements with the degree-of-freedom fields set to 1 (UX). CMASS4 CONM1 conm1 CONM2 conm2 CONROD conrod CPENTA PSOLID psolid.<pid> CQUAD4 PSHELL pshell.<pid> (See PSHELL comments below.) PCOMP pcomp.<pid> A new material named pcomp.<pid> will be created and referenced. The SB and FT fields are currently not read. CQUAD8 PSHELL pshell.<pid> (See PSHELL comments below.) PCOMP pcomp.<pid> A new material named pcomp.<pid> will be created and referenced. The SB and FT fields are currently not read.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Data Translated from the NASTRAN Input File Element Property Property Set Name Comments CQUADR PSHELL pshellr.<pid> (See PSHELL comments below.) PCOMP pcompr.<pid> A new material named pcomp.<pid> will be created and referenced. The SB and FT fields are currently not read. CROD PROD prod.<pid> CSHEAR PSHEAR pshear.<pid> CTETRA PSOLID psolid.<pid> CTRIA3 PSHELL pshell.<pid> (See PSHELL comments below.) PCOMP pcomp.<pid> A new material named pcomp.<pid> will be created and referenced. The SB and FT fields are currently not read. CTRIA6 PSHELL pshell.<pid> (See PSHELL comments below.) PCOMP pcomp.<pid> A new material named pcomp.<pid> will be created and referenced. The SB and FT fields are currently not read. CTRIAR PSHELL pshellr.<pid> (See PSHELL comments below.) PCOMP pcompr.<pid> A new material named pcomp.<pid> will be created and referenced. The SB and FT fields are currently not read. CTRIAX6 ctriax6 CTUBE PTUBE ptube.<pid> Tapered tubes are converted to an equivalent constant se ction definition. CVISC PVISC pvisc.<pid> PLOTEL Creates the connectivity only. These elements are not assigned to any property set region. PLOTEL entries will not be written when a new input file is created. MBOLTU S Defines a bolt in the form of an Overclosure MPC. Higher order elements (CQUAD8, CTRIA6, CTRIAX6, CHEXA, CPENTA, CTETRA) will gene rate linear elements in Patran if none of the mid-edge nodes are specified.

Chapter 5: Read Input File Data Translated from the NASTRAN Input File PSHELL Properties PSHELL properties can be imported as any one of five Patran property types. The MID1, MID2, MID3, 12I/T3, and TS/T property fields are used to determine which one to choose. If M ID2 is -1 and MID3 is 0, then a Plane Strain property set is used. If MID2 and MID3 are both 0, then a Membrane property set is chosen. If MID1 and MID3 are 0, then a Bending property set is used. If MID1, MID2, and MID3 are all the same, and the MD Nastran defaults are used for 12I/T3 and TS/T, then a H omogeneous property set is used. If all else fails, then an Equivalent Section property set is chose n. BAROR and BEAMOR Definitions The BAROR and BEAMOR data is merged onto the CBAR and CBEAM entries using the pr oper MD Nastran conventions. The data is treated as if it had originally been defined on the CBAR and CBEAM entries. When a new NASTRAN input file is created, the data will remain with the CBAR and CBEAM entries. No BAROR or BEAMOR entries are generated. Fields If a field is required to store varying data, the field will have the same name as the property set, with the name of the specific property word appended to it. For example, if property set shell.101 has a varying thickness, the field will be named pshell.101.Thickness . Referential Integrity Nodes and coordinate frames referenced on elements or element properties must ex ist, but they do not need to be in the input file. They could also have been defined in the Patran da tabase prior to the import. If a material is referenced, but can not be found, a new material with no proper ties will be created. A message will be issued indicating the creation of this material. If an element property set is referenced, but can not be found, a new property s et with no properties will be created. A message will be issued indicating the creation of this property se t. Set Name Extensions In some cases, the data found on the element can not be defined in Patran in a s ingle property set. In those cases, multiple property sets will be created to define the distinct definitions . The table below defines

extensions to the Property Set Names shown in the previous table. If the values on the specified field changes, a new property set with the indicated extension will be created. If all elements which reference a single PID can be stored in a single property set, then no extension will be added to the Property Set Name. Element Field Extension Comments CBAR PA .pa<PA> PB .pb<PB>

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Data Translated from the NASTRAN Input File Element Field Extension Comments CBEAM SA SB PA PB .sa<SA> .sb<SB> .pa<PA> .pb<PB> CDAMP1, CDAMP2, CELAS1, CELAS2, CMASS1, CMASS2 C1 C2 .ca<C1> .cb<C2> CDAMP3, CDAMP4, CELAS3, CELAS4, CMASS3, CMASS4 C1 C2 .ca1 .cb1 These are automatically treated as component 1 (X translation). CGAP, CONM1, CONM2 CID .c<CID> CONROD, CTRIAX6 MID .m<MID> CQUAD4, CQUAD8, CQUADR, CTRIA3, CTRIA6, CTRIAR MCID .c<MCID> Materials The following MD Nastran material definitions can be read into Patran. Material Type Material Name Comments CREEP MAT1 mat1.<mid> The MCSID field is not currently supported. If the G field is blank in the input file, the MD Nastran default value will be filled in during import. MATT1 MAT2 mat2.<mid> The MCSID field is not currently supported. MATT2 MAT3 mat3.<mid> MATT3 MAT4

Chapter 5: Read Input File Data Translated from the NASTRAN Input File Material Type Material Name Comments MATT4 MAT5 MATT5 MAT8 mat8.<mid> MAT9 mat9.<mid> MATT9 MPCs The following MD Nastran MPC and rigid element definitions can be read into Patr an. Card Type MPC Type Comments MPC Explicit Unique MPC IDs will be assigned to these entities. Since Patran uses a slightly different basis MPC equation, the equation coefficients (Ai) will probably be scaled by a constant multiplier during import. The resulting equation will be equivalent, but not necessarily identical to the original definition in the NASTRAN input file. RBAR RBAR RBE1 RBE1 RBE2 RBE2 Fixed RBE3 RBE3 RROD RROD RSPLINE RSPLINE RSSCON RSSCON RTRPLT RTRPLT MPCs in Patran are treated as elements and are not associated to load cases. As a result, all SUBCASE related data is lost. The MPCs are simply imported into the model and are no lon ger associated to a specific load case. MPCs can reference SPOINTs instead of GRIDs. If this is detected, the correspond ing component field will be set to 1 (UX) to be consistent with the import of SPOINTs. The MPCADD command is not read since the MPCs are simply imported and no associa ted to a load case. The SID references on the MPC entry are also lost for the same reason. New MPC IDs are assigned to these elements during import.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Data Translated from the NASTRAN Input File Load Sets The following MD Nastran Loads and Boundary Condition definitions can be read in to Patran. Card Type LBC Set Name Comments FORCE force.<sid> GRAV grav.<sid> MOMENT moment.<sid> PLOAD1 pload1.<sid> Only PLOAD1s applied to the entire length of an element can be read. If a load is applied only to a portion of an element, the load will be ignored, and a message will be presented indicating the problem. PLOAD2 pload2.<sid> PLOAD4 pload4.<sid> Only pressure loads normal to the surface can be imported. I f a surface traction is detected, it will be ignored, and a message will be presented indicating the problem. PLOADX1 ploadx1.<sid> CONV conv.<pid> PCONV CONVM convm.<pid> PCONVM QBDYi qbdyi.<pid> QVECT qvect.<pid> QVOL qvol.<pid> RADBC radbc.<pid> RADCAV radcav.<pid> Note: ELEAMB field is not supported by Patran. The ambient element is added to the application region. RADM RADMT RFORCE rforce.<sid> If the G point is not at the origin of the referenced CID, a new CID will be created and referenced. The METHOD field is not read. It is automatically set to 1 when writing a new file. SLOAD sload.<pid> TEMP temp.<sid> TEMPP1 tempp1.<sid> Only the average temperature and effective linear gradient d ata fields are used. The specified temperatures at the Z1 and Z2 locations are ignored.

Chapter 5: Read Input File Data Translated from the NASTRAN Input File Card Type LBC Set Name Comments TEMPRB temprb.<sid> Only the average temperature and effective linear gradient d ata fields are used. The specified temperatures at the stress recovery locations are ignored. grid# grid.ps SPC spc.<sid> SPCADD SPC1 spc1.<sid> SPCD spcd.<sid> The required SPC or SPC1 entries for the same Degree-of-Freedom are removed from the load case when a SPCD is found. They will automatically be re-generated when a new input file is created. VIEW VIEW3D Fields If a field is required to as the load set, with the of the specific data word varying force magnitude, the field will store varying data, the field will have the same name name appended to it. For example, if load set force.101 has a be named force.101.Force .

Load cases are created in Patran from the SUBCASE definitions in the NASTRAN inp ut file. Load sets not referenced by a SUBCASE definition are created as load sets in Patran, but a re not associated to a load case. Load sets defined above the first SUBCASE command, plus any permanent single point constraint sets from the GRID entries, are associated to all load cases created during this import. If there is no case control data, then load sets will be created, but they will not be as signed to any load cases. The SPCADD and LOAD entries are used in creating load cases in Patran, but the S ID of these entries is lost. The SIDs on the individual SPCx, FORCE, MOMENT, GRAV, PLOADx, RFORCE, a nd TEMPx entries are used in creating the names of the load sets. The name for the created load cases is derived from the subtitle of the SUBCASE. This is done for consistency with the forward PAT3NAS translation. A job is created during the import. The name of the created job is the basename of the file being read. MD Nastran allows load sets to be referenced in multiple places with different s cale factors. This is not possible in Patran. Therefore, in some cases, multiple copies of the same load s et need to be created with the only difference being the scale factor. The name of these load sets are modi fied to include the subcase ID to create unique names.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Data Translated from the NASTRAN Input File TABLES The following table types are supported during import of a NASTRAN input file. N ote that some forms of the table commands are converted to an equivalent version supported by Patran . Card Type Field Name Comments TABLED1 Field.<tid> TABLED2 Field.<tid> Converted NIFIMP. TABLED3 Field.<tid> Converted NIFIMP. TABLEM1 Field.<tid> TABLEM2 Field.<tid> Converted NIFIMP. TABLEM3 Field.<tid> Converted NIFIMP. SOL 600 entries Note:A Additional entries specific to SOL 600 can be read into Patran. For more details see MD Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600), 14.

to an equivalent TABLED1 when read into Patran by to an equivalent TABLED1 when read into Patran by to an equivalent TABLEM1 when read into Patran by to an equivalent TABLEM1 when read into Patran by

Chapter 5: Read Input File Conflict Resolution 5.3 Conflict Resolution If an entity can not be imported into Patran because another entity already exis ts with that ID or name, then the conflict resolution logic is used. There are 2 different approaches tak en, depending on whether the entity is identified by an ID or by a name. Conflict Resolution for Entities Identified by IDs If a new definition conflicts with a definition already in the Patran database, you will be asked if you want the ID of the new definition offset. If you select YES, a new ID will be chosen. If you select YES FOR ALL, a new ID will be chosen for this definition, as well as for any others foun d to be in conflict. In this case, then all references to the ID in the original Patran database will still r eference the old ID, but references to the ID from within the input file will be altered to reference the new ID. If you do not want the CID to be offset, then you will be asked if you want the new definition to overwrite the existing definition. If this is done, then all references to this ID from bo th the original Patran database and the input file will be referencing the same ID. The definition for that ID w ill be either the old or the new definition, depending on how this second question is answered. Conflict Resolution for Entities Identified by Names The user is not asked what to do in cases where the conflicting entities are ide ntified by names. The name for the new entity will be modified by appending an extension to the name. The n ew name will be <old name>.r<n> . The value of n is chosen to make the new name unique. No merging of data or application regions is done. The old definition is left un changed.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Conflict Resolution

Delete 6 Review of Delete Form 568 Deleting an MD Nastran Job 569

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Review of Delete Form 6.1 Review of Delete Form The Analysis form will appear when the Analysis toggle, located on the Patran ma in form, is chosen and the selected Action is Delete. The Delete option under Action allows the user to delete jobs that have been cre ated for the MD Nastran preference.

Chapter 6: Delete Deleting an MD Nastran Job 6.2 Deleting an MD Nastran Job This format of the Analysis form appears when the Action is set to Delete. The u ser may delete job definitions that were created for the MD Nastran preference with this form. Indicates the selected Analysis Code and Analysis Type, as defined in the Preferences>Analysis (p. 431) in the Patran Reference Manual. List of already existing jobs. Select the jobs that are to be deleted. Deletes the jobs selected in the Existing Jobs listbox.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Deleting an MD Nastran Job

Files 7 Files 572

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Files 7.1 Files The Patran MD Nastran interface uses or creates several files.The following tabl e outlines each file and its uses. In the file name definition, jobname will be replaced with the jobname assigned by the user. File Name Description *.db This is the Patran database. During an analyze pass, model data is read fro m this database and, during a Read Results pass, model and/or results data is written into it. T his file typically resides in the current directory. jobname.jbr These are small files used to pass certain information between Patra n and the independent translation programs during translation. There should never be a need to directl y alter these files. These files typically reside in the current directory. jobname.bdf This is the NASTRAN input file created by the interface. This file t ypically resides in the current directory. msc_v#_sol#.alt These are a series of MD Nastran alters that are read during for ward translation. These alters instruct MD Nastran to write information to the OUTPUT2 file that the results tr anslation will be looking for. The forward translator searches the Patran file path for th ese files, but they typically reside in the <installation_directory>/alters directory. If these files do not meet specific needs, edit them accordingly. However, the naming conversion of ms c_v# <version #>_sol#<solution #>.alt must be preserved. Either place the edited file back into the <installation_directory>/alters directory or in any directory on the Patran file path, which takes precedence over the <installation_directory>/alters directory. If these fi les are not used, remove them from the Patran file path, rename them, or delete them altoget her. jobname.op2 This is the MD Nastran OUTPUT2 file, which is read by the Read Resul ts pass. This file typically resides in the current directory and contains both model and results d ata. It is created by placing a PARAM,POST,-1 in the input file. jobname.xdb This is the MD Nastran XDB file or MSC.Access database, which is att ached by the Read Results pass. This file typically resides in the current directory and contains results data. It is created by placing a PARAM, POST,0 in the input file. jobname.marc.t16 SOL 600 file recommended for use in postprocessing SOL 600 anal yses. jobname.flat This file may be generated during a Read Results pass. If the resul ts translation cannot write data directly into the specified Patran database it will create this jobname fla t file. This file typically resides in the current directory.

jobname.marc.xxx File generated by a SOL 600 analysis. See the t Nonlinear (SOL 600) User s Guide for a complete list.

MD Nastran Implici

Chapter 7: Files Files File Name Description jobname.msg.xx These message files contain any diagnostic output from the transl ation, either forward or reverse. This file typically resides in the current directory. MscNastranExecute This is a UNIX script file, which is called on to submit MD Na stran after translation is complete. This file might need customizing with site specific data, such as, hos t machine name and MD Nastran executable commands. This file contains many comments and sh ould be easy to edit. Patran searches its file path to find this file, but it typical ly resides in the <installation_directory> bin/exe directory. Either use the general copy in <installation_directory>/bin/exe, or place a local copy in a directory on the fi le path, which takes precedence over the <installation_directory>/bin/exe directory.

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Files

Errors/Warnings 8 Errors/Warnings 576

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Errors/Warnings 8.1 Errors/Warnings There are many error or warning messages that may be generated by the Patran MD. Nastran Interface. The following table outlines some of these. Message Description Unable to open a new message file " ". Translation messages will be written to standard output. If the translation tries to open a message file and cannot, it will write messages to Standard Output. On most systems, the translator automatically writes messages to standard output and never tries to create a separate message file. Unable to open the specified OUTPUT2 file " ". The OUTPUT2 file was not found. C heck the OUTPUT2 file specification in the translation control file. The specified OUTPUT2 file " " is not in standard binary format and cannot be translated. The OUTPUT2 file is not in standard binary format. Check the OUTPUT2 file specification in the translation control file. Group " " does not exist in the database. Model data will not be translated. The name of a nonexistent group was specified in the translator control file. No model data will be translated from the OUTPUT2 file. Needed file specification missing! The full name of the job file must be specified as the first commandline argument to this program. The translation control file must be specified as the first online argument to the translator. Unable to open the specified database " ". Writing the OUTPUT2 information to the PCL command file "". If the translator cannot communicate directly to the specified database. It will write the results and/or model data to a PCL session file. Unable to open either the specified database " ", or a PCL command file, " ". The naspat3 translator is unable to open any output file. Check file specification and directory protection. Unable to open the NASTRAN input file " ". The translator was unable to open a f ile to where the input file information will be written. Unable to open the specified database, " " . The forward Patran MD.Nastran trans lator was unable to open the specified Patran database. Alter file of the name " " could not be found. No OUPUT2 alter will be written to the NASTRAN input file. The OUTPUT2 DMAP alter file, for this type of analysis, could not be found. Correct the search path to include the necessary directory if you want the alter files to be written to the input file. No property regions are defined in the database. No elements or element properties can be translated.

Elements referenced by an element property region in the Patran database will not get translated by the forward Patran MD.Nastran translator. If no element regions are defined, no elements will be translated.

Preference Configuration andA Implementation Software Components in Patran MD Nastran 578 Patran MD Nastran Preference Components 579 Configuring the Patran MD Nastran Execute File 582

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Software Components in Patran MD Nastran 1.1 Software Components in Patran MD Nastran The Patran MD Nastran product includes the following items: A PCL function contained in p3patran.plb that will add MD Nastran specific defin itions to any Patran database (not already containing such definitions) at any time. A PCL library called mscnastran.plb and contained in the <installation_directory > directory. This library is used by the analysis forms to produce forms for analy sis code specific translation parameter, solution parameter, etc. A script file called MscNastranExecute,contained in the <installation_directory> /bin/exe directory. This script controls the operation of the interface and the submissio n of MD Nastran analyses. This script can be run independent of Patran but typically run from wi thin Patran, transparent to the user. Several MD Nastran alter files are included. These files are used when creating the NASTRAN input file. They ask MD Nastran to produce the results file required by the NASP AT3 results translator. These files can be found in the <installation_directory>/alter direc tory. They must follow the naming convention msc_v<version_number>_sol<solution_number>.alt. For example, msc_v67_sol3.alt. If these files do not meet the user s needs, they should be modi fied. Alter files specific to LMS CADA-X are also included. These files are identical to the standard alter files except for an additional .lms extension, e.g., msc_v67_sol3.alt.lms. T hese files are usually needed only when the user requires support for older solution sequences. This Patran MD Nastran Interface Manual is included as part of the product. An o n-line version is also provided to allow the direct access to this information from within Patr an.

Chapter A: Preference Configuration and Implementation Patran MD Nastran Preference Components 1.2 Patran MD Nastran Preference Components The diagrams shown below indicate how the functions, scripts, programs, and file s that constitute the Patran MD Nastran interface affect the Patran environment. Site customization, i n some cases, is indicated. Figure A-1 shows the process of running an analysis. The mscnastran.plb library defines the Translation Parameter, Solution Type, Solution Parameter, and Output Request for ms called by the Analysis form. When the Apply button is pushed on the Analyze form, the interfac e process is initiated. The interface reads data from the database and creates the NASTRAN input file. S tatus messages from the interface are recorded in the Patran session file. A series of MD Nastran al ter files is provided. They may be used during the creation of the input file depending upon the selected so lution type and solution parameters. These alter files are mostly used in support of older solution seque nces. If the interface successfully produces a NASTRAN input file, and the user requests it, the MscNas tranExecute script will then start MD Nastran. Patran Analyzemscnastran.plb MscNastranExecute Alter Library Patran Database jobname.bdf MD Nastran Analysis p3patran.plb Figure A-1 Forward Translation Figure A-2 shows the process of reading information from an MD Nastran OUTPUT2 f ile. When the Apply button is selected on the Read Output2 form, a <jobname>.jbr file is creat ed and the results translation is started. The results interface process reads the data from the MD Nastran OUTPUT2 file

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Patran MD Nastran Preference Components and stores the results in the Patran database. Status messages from the interfac e are recorded in the Patran session file. Patran Read Output2 mscnastran.plb p3patran.plb Analysis jobname.jbr Patran database MD Nastran jobname.OP2 Figure A-2 OUTPUT2 File Translation Figure A-3 shows the process of translating information from a NASTRAN input fil e into a Patran database. The behavior of the main Analysis/Read Input File form and the subordi nate file select form is

Chapter A: Preference Configuration and Implementation Patran MD Nastran Preference Components dictated by the mscnastran.plbPCL library. The Apply button on the main form act ivates the input file reader program, which reads the specified NASTRAN input file. NASTRAN Patran Read Input File Patran MD Nastran Input mscnastran.plb p3patran.plb Analysis Input File database input_file_name.error.* File Reader Figure A-3 NASTRAN Input File Translation

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Configuring the Patran MD Nastran Execute File 1.3 Configuring the Patran MD Nastran Execute File During the installation of the Patran MD Nastran analysis preference, the mscset up utility creates a default site_setup file in the installation directory. This file sets environmen t variables relating to Patran. To custom configure this site_setup file consult Environment Variables ( p. 48) in the Patran Installation and Operations Guide.

Index Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide Numerics 3rd Order Invariant, 76 A ACFPMRESULT, 419 ACPOWER, 419 Adaptive Meshing, 413 adaptive meshing, 501 alternate reduction, 278, 474 ALTERS, 578 Alters, 265 ALTRED, 278, 474 analysis coordinate frames, 23 analysis form, 261 analysis job definition, 263 analysis job submittal, 263 analysis preferences, 6 analyze, 260 Arruda-Boyce model, 78 B BCBODY, 14 BCBOX, 14 BCHANGE, 14 BCMATL, 14 BCMOVE, 14 BCPARA, 14 BCPROP, 14 BCTABLE, 14 BEGIN AFPM, 178, 419 BEGIN BULK SUPER, 267, 352 BSURF, 14 buckling, 287 bulk data, 9 bulk data file, 546 CACINF3, 195 CACINF4, 195 case control, 9 CBAR, 103 CBEAM, 107, 115, 120 CBEND, 110, 113 CDAMP1, 98, 140 CELAS1, 97, 138 CGAP, 142 CHEXA, 206 CMASS1, 93, 145 complex Eigenvalue, 291 CONM1, 91 CONM2, 94 contact

penetration, 308 contact bodies deformable surfaces defining in MSC.Patran, 241, 242 rigid surface defining in MSC.Patran, 243 slideline defining in MSC.Patran, 240 coordinate frames, 22, 510 analysis, 23 reference, 23 coordinates, 266 COUPMASS, 283 CPENTA, 206 CQUAD4, 155, 158, 161, 164, 167, 168, 171, 174, 177, 179, 183, 190, 191, 198, 200 CQUAD8, 155, 164, 168, 179, 190, 198 CQUADR, 181 CREEP, 84 CROD, 131, 134 CSHEAR, 204 CTETRA, 206 CTRIA3, 155, 161, 164, 168, 174, 177, 179, 183, 190, 198 CTRIA6, 155, 164, 168, 179, 190, 198 CTRIAR, 158, 167, 171, 181, 191, 200

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide CTRIAX, 187 CTRIAX6, 186 CTUBE, 136 CVISC, 142 CYAX, 48 cyclic symmetry, 30, 48, 278, 287, 296, 474 CYJOIN, 48 CYSYM, 48 D DCONSTR, 479 degrees-of-freedom, 31 DESGLB, 479 DISPLACEMENT, 419 displacements, 226, 231 distributed load, 226 DOPTPRM, 470, 479 DPHASE, 231, 232 DRESP1, 479 DRESP2, 479 dynamic reduction, 286 DYNRED, 286 E EIGB, 289 EIGC, 294 Eigenvalue extraction, 282, 287 buckling, 289 complex, 294 real, 284 EIGR, 284 EIGRL, 289 element properties, 87 elements, 510 2d solid, 190, 191 acoustic field point mesh, 177 axisymmetric solid, 186, 187 coupled point mass, 91 curved general section, 110 curved pipe, 113 gap, 142 general beam, 124 general section beam, 102 general section rod, 131, 134 grounded scalar damper, 98 grounded scalar mass, 93 grounded scalar spring, 97 infinite exterior acoustic, 195

lumped area beam, 115 lumped point mass, 94 p-formulation, 18, 209 P-Formulation bending panel, 183 P-Formulation Equivalent Section plate, 174 P-Formulation general section beam, 107 P-Formulation homogeneous plate, 161 P-Formulation Membrane, 201 P-Formulation Plane Strain Solid, 193 pipe section, 136 plotel, 146 revised bending panel, 181 revised equivalent section plate, 171 revised homogeneous plate, 158 revised laminate plate, 166 revised membrane, 199 revised plane strain solid, 191 scalar damping, 139 scalar mass, 144 scalar spring, 137 shear panel, 204 solid, 206 standard bending panel, 179 standard equivalent section plate, 168 standard homogeneous plate, 155 standard laminate plate, 163 standard membrane, 197 standard plane strain solid, 190 tapered beam, 119 viscous damper, 141 ELSDCON, 420

Environment Variables ACommand20xx, 494 ACommandNasServer, 494 DRA_NAST_NOVEDRCHK, 494 MSCP_NASTRAN_SERVER, 494 MSP_NASTRAN_CMD20xx, 494 errors, 576 ESE, 419 executive control, 9 F failure criteria, 81, 82 FEEDGE, 18 FEFACE, 20 files, 572 finite elements, 23, 24 FMS, 9 Foam model, 76 follower forces, 280 FORCE, 232, 233, 419 force, 226, 232 frequency response, 296 G Gent model, 78 GEOM1, 510 GEOM2, 510 GMBC, 20 GMNURB, 14 GPFORCE, 420 GRAV, 236 GRDPNT, 283 inertia relief, 278, 474 inertial load, 236 initial conditions, 226, 237 initial load, 226 initial velocity, 226 input file, 546 INREL, 278, 474 INTENSITY, 419 IPSTRAIN, 14 INDEX ISTRESS, 14 iteration parameters, 391 iterations static nonlinear, 359 J Jamus-Green-Simpson model, 75, 76

K keywords POST, 315 REAUTO, 315, 461 L large displacements, 280 LGDISP, 281 linear static, 277 linear surf-vol, 28 linear transient, 299 load cases, 246 loads and boundary conditions, 224 M MARCIN, 14 MARCOUT, 14 Mass properties, non-structural (MSC.Nastran), 445 MAT1, 73, 81, 82 MAT2, 81, 82 MAT3, 73 MAT8, 73, 81, 82 MATEP, 14, 15, 78 materials, 59 2D anisotropic, 68, 73, 74 2D orthotropic, 65, 72 3D anisotropic, 68, 73, 74 3D orthotropic, 67, 72 composite, 68, 85 Fluid, 68 isotropic, 62, 69, 73, 74 MATF, 14, 15, 82 MATG, 14 MATHE, 14, 15, 75 MATORT, 14, 15, 73

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide MATS1, 74, 75, 78 MATTEP, 14, 15 MATTF, 82 MATTG, 14 MATTHE, 14, 15 MATTi, 73 MATTORT, 14 MATTVE, 14, 85 MATVE, 15, 85 MATVP, 15, 84 model data, 496 MOMENT, 232 Mooney-Rivlin model, 75, 76 MPC, 28, 31, 48 MSC.Nastran enhancements Non-structural mass properties, 445 MSC.Nastran version, 266, 267, 497, 498, 500 multi-point constraints, 27 N Neo-Hookean, 76 NLAUTO, 15 NLDAMP, 15 NLLOAD, 419 NLPARM, 359 NLSTRAT, 15 nodes, 23, 266, 510 nonlinear elastic, 74 nonlinear statics, 279 nonlinear transient, 302

Non-Structural mass properties (MSC.Nastran), 445 normal nodes, 282 NSM and NSML forms (MSC.Nastran), 445 NTHICK, 15 numbering options, 268 O OEF1, 502, 503 OESNL1, 503 Ogden model, 76 OLOAD, 419 ONRGY1, 505 OPG1, 505 OPHIG, 506 OPNL1, 506 optimize, 463 optimization parameters, 467 subcase create, 471 subcase parameters, 474 subcase select optimize, 475 topology optimization, 476 OSTR1, 502, 503 OUGV1, 505 output requests, 415 OUTPUT2, 265 OUTRCV, 20 P PACINF, 195 PARAM, SNORM, 278, 283, 292, 297, 300, 324 PARAMARC, 15 PBAR, 103 PBCOMP, 115 PBEAM, 107, 120 PBEND, 110, 113 PCOMP, 82, 85, 164, 167

PDAMP, 98, 140 PELAS, 97, 138 penetration, 308 PGAP, 142 PLOAD4, 233 PLOADX1, 233 PMASS, 93, 145 POINT, 18 Postprocessing, 413 preferences, 6 pressure, 226, 233 PROD, 131 properties, 87 PSHEAR, 204 PSHELL, 155, 158, 168, 171, 179, 181, 190, 191, 198, 200 PSOLID, 206 PTUBE, 136 PVISC, 142 R RBAR, 28, 34 rbar1, 50

INDEX RBE1, 28, 36 RBE2, 29, 33, 38 RBE3, 29, 40 read input file, 546 reference coordinate frames, 23 RESTART, 15 restart file, 316, 462 results, 492 element, 436 nodal, 434 supported entities, 502, 516 types, 511 results output format, 348 RFORCE, 236 rjoint, 53 RLOAD1, 231 RROD, 29, 42 RSPLINE, 29, 44 RSSCON, 28 RTRPLT, 30, 46 rtrplt1, 51 S SESET, 352 SETREE, 352 sliding surface, 30, 48 solution parameters, 277 SOL 109, 299 SOL 112, 299 SOL 27, 299 SOL 31, 299 solution sequences SOL 1, 272, 278 SOL 101, 272, 278 SOL 103, 273 SOL 105, 273, 287 SOL 106, 273, 279 SOL 107, 291 SOL 108, 273, 296 SOL 109, 273 SOL 110, 273, 291 SOL 111, 273, 296 SOL 112, 273 SOL 114, 272, 278 SOL 115, 273 SOL 118, 273, 296, 297 SOL 129, 273, 302 SOL 147, 273 SOL 26, 273, 296 SOL 27, 273 SOL 28, 273, 291 SOL 29, 273, 291 SOL 3, 273 SOL 30, 273, 296

SOL 37, 273 SOL 47, 272, 278 SOL 48, 273 SOL 5, 273, 287 SOL 600, 273, 304, 324, 326 SOL 66, 273, 279 SOL 77, 273, 287 SOL 99, 273, 302 solution types, 271 SPC1, 231 SPCD, 231 SPCFORCES, 419 SPCR, 232 static data, 226 STRAIN, 419, 420 STRESS, 419, 420 structural damping, 293, 301, 303 superelements, 267, 352 supported entities, 8 T t16 file, 511, 543

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide 588 TABLEDi, 231, 232 TABLEMi, 73 TABLES1, 75 TEMP, 235 temperature, 226, 235 TEMPP1, 235 TEMPRB, 235 TIC, 237 time dependent, 229 tolerances, 265, 496, 498, 500 TOPVAR, 479 translation parameters, 265, 496, 498 TSTEPNL, 362, 409 V VECTOR, 419 VU mesh, 20 W warnings, 576 WTMASS, 283